Anthesis Global https://www.anthesisgroup.com Sustainability Consultancy Thu, 27 Nov 2025 17:34:14 +0000 en-GB hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.3 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/02/cropped-Waypoint-32x32.png Anthesis Global https://www.anthesisgroup.com 32 32 What’s Next for Regenerative Apparel? https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/whats-next-for-regenerative-apparel/ Tue, 25 Nov 2025 13:43:36 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=69500

What’s Next for Regenerative Apparel?

Maintaining momentum and moving from pilots to programmes

25 November 2025

Sheep Wool

Senior Consultant

North America

Director

North America

The current state of regenerative agriculture in apparel

Regenerative agriculture in apparel raw material sourcing and supply chains is shifting from pilots to scale. In fact, there are strong examples of progress in cotton production, where multiyear programs are maturing, buyer commitments are steadier, and positive outcomes for nature, climate, and people are emerging.

Better Cotton, a leading cotton sustainability programme, is even evolving its own standard to explicitly target regenerative outcomes (soil health, biodiversity, water). This is not the same as Regenerative Organic Certified (ROC); instead, it’s an update to Better Cotton’s Principles & Criteria and claims guidance. The revised standard is expected in 2026 with phased implementation thereafter. Learn more about the Better Cotton Independent Assessment Process here.

Beyond cotton, interest is also expanding to wool, linen, and hemp. However, practice changes can involve risks to yield, especially in the short-term. Moreover, processing capabilities to efficiently segregate product or run small batches remain limited, slowing progress.

To maintain momentum, these challenges must be converted into opportunities:

  • Farmers need upfront transition finance
  • Brands need measurement that covers soil, carbon, water, livelihoods, and biodiversity
  • Marketing needs claim language that can be substantiated
  • Traceability must connect field outcomes to finished goods

Additionally, trust and cash flow determine the speed of continued advancement. The focus should be on pairing procurement teams with finance and sustainability, establishing auditable Measurement, Reporting, and Verification (MRV) systems, and scaling portfolios rather than relying on one-off pilots.

Measurement, Reporting, and Verification (MRV) — the systems that turn field‑level data into credible, auditable product claims.

In this article, we outline the key issues preventing the scaling of regenerative agriculture in apparel and identify six key steps that brands can follow to move from pilots to programmes.

What’s blocking scale?

Financing the transition

Practice changes cost money, yet early-year expenses (e.g., seed for cover crops, equipment, agronomy support, tech support) can depress yields. Most brands want outcomes, but capital rarely reaches farms and suppliers at the right moment. A potential solution is a blended approach: supplier funds, multiyear offtakes with floor pricing or premiums, and pay-for-outcomes models that return savings to replenish the pool.

Verification & data quality

Credible MRV must track soil health, biodiversity signals, and water impacts. Metrics should connect those field outcomes to real batches through chain-of-custody tracking methods. Data should be interoperable, auditable, and simple enough for growers to use. Overclaiming regenerative benefits typically starts where measurement stops. One way to address this is to specify the evidence before crafting the message.

Claims & consumer trust

“Regenerative” is a farming system, not a product adjective. Harmonize language across channels, align with green claims rules, and set substantiation thresholds that marketing, legal, and procurement all approve. Communicate progress, limitations, and uncertainty plainly.

Supply alignment

Crop calendars, fiber mix, and regional variability don’t always match buying cycles. Spinner/mill readiness and ginning/processing capacity are real constraints, but they also present some of the biggest opportunities. De-risk with portfolio sourcing, staged scale-up, and multiyear commitments that reward performance, not just enrollment.

How to avoid common pitfalls

  • Start with a portfolio (regions & fibers) instead of single-project bets
  • Avoid carbon tunnel vision by assessing potential impact across a suite of environmental and social indicators
  • Match multiyear buying commitments with financing mechanisms that pay for farm practice changes early and over time, recouping via premiums or verified outcomes
  • Design claims governance before marketing
  • Build MRV that’s auditable, not just inspirational

Pushing the Industry

To move from pilots to a repeatable, defensible program, we recommend brands implement these pragmatic actions within a 6–12-month period:

Step 1: Understand your sourcing

Know the sourcing regions, producers, and farming systems supplying your ingredients and materials. These systems often produce more than one crop or material and should be valued holistically for regenerative agriculture to work.

Step 2: Set a regenerative thesis by region and fibre

Define what “good” means for your priority regions and fibres across outcomes (soil health, water, biodiversity, farmer livelihoods, etc.). Specify acceptable assurance and verification pathways, and the evidence required to make claims.

Step 3: Secure the financing pathway

Commit capital and mechanisms that reach farms when needed and recycle value as outcomes are achieved.

Step 4: Build credible MRV & data flow

Define the metrics and methods you’ll use and decide who holds which data from farm to finished goods. Ensure a third party can verify the data, and that your systems can share them.

Step 5: Claims governance

Make credibility a process, not a slogan. Build a structured process for managing and validating marketing and product claims, ensuring they are accurate, compliant, and consistent across all channels. Strong governance is vital to protecting brand credibility, reducing legal risk, and building consumer trust.

Step 6: Phase adoption

Start small, track credible positive outcomes, then pursue expansion. Consider predefined go/no-go criteria and regular reviews to course-correct along the way.

How Anthesis can help

At Anthesis, we recognise the pivotal role of regenerative agriculture in shaping the future of our planet. Our global team of experts collaborates with clients throughout the value chain to co-create regenerative solutions that not only uphold sustainability principles but also drive positive business outcomes.

We support clients in creating clear roadmaps to engage suppliers and farmers, to develop practical regenerative strategies, and to effectively communicate their progress.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
From COP30 Pledges to Practice: Leveraging Power Purchase Agreements for Climate and Nature Commitments https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/leveraging-ppas/ Wed, 19 Nov 2025 20:09:12 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=69732

From COP30 Pledges to Practice

Leveraging Power Purchase Agreements for Climate and Nature Commitments

19 November 2025

PPA windmills
lebona vernon

Lebona Vernon

Renewable Energy Lead

Patrick Sword

Patrick Swords

Principal Carbon and Renewable Energy Advisor

COP30 has underscored a clear message: the era of half-measures is over. With global leaders pledging accelerated action on renewables, nature-based solutions, and just transitions, businesses have a unique opportunity to align with this momentum. Power Purchase Agreements (PPAs) are not just a tool for decarbonisation – they are a strategic lever for delivering on the integrated climate and nature commitments spotlighted in Belém. 

Why PPAs matter in the COP30 context 

COP30’s announcements emphasised scaling clean energy, protecting ecosystems, and embedding nature into climate strategies. Initiatives like the Tropical Forest Forever Facility and the Belém 4x pledge to quadruple sustainable fuels by 2035 signal a decisive shift toward integrated solutions.

For businesses, PPAs offer a practical way to contribute to these global goals – by securing renewable electricity, reducing emissions, and supporting the systemic transition away from fossil fuels. Anthesis helps organisations embed PPAs within broader Net Zero and nature-positive strategies, ensuring that energy procurement aligns with biodiversity protection and resilience objectives. 

1. Accelerate carbon reduction and nature goals 

When physically delivered, PPAs significantly lower Scope 2 emissions, advancing corporate net-zero targets. In the spirit of COP30’s call for synergy between climate and nature, PPAs can be paired with nature-based solutions – such as forest conservation or biodiversity credits – to deliver holistic impact. 

2. Enhance cost predictability and stability 

Energy price volatility continues to pose a significant risk. COP30 underscored the importance of building resilient economies, and PPAs offer that resilience by securing predictable rates. This allows businesses to manage costs effectively while supporting the clean energy growth that COP30 leaders pledged $1 trillion toward achieving by 2030. 

3. Strengthening ESG performance and market leadership 

COP30 reinforced that climate action is now an economic imperative. Demonstrating renewable energy procurement through PPAs positions your organisation as a leader in the nature-positive economy emerging from Belém, attracting sustainable investment, and meeting rising stakeholder expectations. 

4. Support global energy transition and nature finance 

By entering into PPAs, businesses help scale renewable infrastructure – a priority echoed in COP30’s Global Renewables Alliance and the push to triple renewable capacity by 2030. This action complements nature finance mechanisms launched at COP30, such as the TFFF, which aims to protect one billion hectares of tropical forest. 

Integrating PPAs into your COP30-aligned strategy 

PPAs are more than an energy contract – they are a cornerstone of a climate and nature strategy that reflects the integrated approach championed at COP30. As governments and businesses move from pledges to practice, now is the time to embed PPAs into your roadmap for Net Zero and nature-positive outcomes. 

Ready to explore how PPAs can transform your sustainability roadmap? 

The commitments made at COP30 signal a decisive shift toward integrated climate and nature action. Now is the time for businesses to move from pledges to practice. By embedding Power Purchase Agreements into your decarbonisation strategy, you can accelerate progress toward net-zero, strengthen resilience, and contribute to global biodiversity goals. 

Connect with our experts at Anthesis and start building a future powered by renewable energy and nature-positive solutions.

]]>
Anthesis Ireland Connect: Bridging Purpose and Practice https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/anthesis-ireland-connect-nov-25/ Mon, 17 Nov 2025 22:49:24 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=69680

Bridging Purpose and Practice

Key Insights from the Anthesis Ireland Connect November Event

body of water with rocks

Managing Director – Anthesis Ireland

Belfast-Ireland

Following the inaugural Anthesis Ireland Connect event held in June 2025, Anthesis brought together another group of sustainability professionals from across a variety of organisations and industries in November 2025 to explore two highly relevant themes in today’s business landscape: organisational purpose, and the business case for sustainability.

Picking up on challenges and topics that were raised back in June, the group reflected on insights from Anthesis’ latest Purpose Gap report, which looks at the difference between what organisations say and do around purpose. The group discussed how purpose can move beyond words to become a tangible and meaningful part of how businesses operate and, ultimately, succeed.

Anthesis Ireland Connect aims to be a forum in which sustainability professionals can discuss shared challenges and opportunities in an inclusive, pre-competitive space whilst also strengthening connections and relationships with peers. From the latest research, inspiring case studies and open discussions at our November event, three key insights stood out…

Key takeaways

Insight #1: The Purpose Gap is real and it’s costing businesses

  • Anthesis shared new research showing that while 89% of Irish employees believe purpose is important in their workplace, 18% are thinking about leaving their job because they don’t see that purpose in action within their companies. This disconnect can have real consequences, impacting negatively on both company revenue and reputation.
  • The Purpose Gap is the difference between what companies say in terms of their purpose statements, compared with what the company does in practice. This year’s report showed that the gap is widening for the first time in four years. Attendees were eager to explore what’s behind the trends that are causing this widening gap, from challenging global conditions to leadership perceptions.
  • Among the problems identified were a so-called “glass floor” on corporate communications; and too much focus on external-facing initiatives rather than internal ones that truly engage the workforce.

The big takeaway: Leaders and employees often see purpose very differently. Until organisations close that gap, they risk losing both productivity and talent.

Insight #2: Purpose in practice: the FoodCloud story

  • The story of FoodCloud’s evolution brought purpose to life in a powerful way. The organisation exists to connect surplus food with those who need it most. In a world where one billion people go hungry and 40% of food is wasted, FoodCloud has created a smart, scalable solution leveraging logistics, technology, and strong partnerships.FoodCloud’s success is further derived through the alignment of its own purpose with that of its partners, enabling them to achieve their own social and environmental goals. Beyond food redistribution, the team also educates charities on how to make the best use of food donations and supports the Irish Government in reaching national food waste targets.
  • Even with its strong social impact, FoodCloud recognises there’s more to do, particularly around understanding and reducing the environmental impact of its own operations.

The big takeaway: A reminder that purpose-driven organisations are also on a journey of continuous improvement, leading towards true Sustainable Performance.

Insight #3: Turning purpose into value

  • The event wrapped up with a practical session to help organisations understand where and how sustainability creates business value. Participants wanted to establish a credible business case linking sustainability initiatives to revenue and tangible business growth.
  • Attendees worked together to apply an Anthesis value creation framework to real-life examples.
  • Individuals emphasised the critical nature of the sustainability function acting – and being treated like – any other business function.  It was stressed that sustainability teams, when interacting with those functions, must speak the business language in terms of performance metrics, expected growth, opex, capex etc.

The big takeaway: Sustainability isn’t an add-on; it’s a core driver of business growth and long-term success. When organisational purpose and sustainability meet business performance, it can create real value for people, the planet, and the company.

The Journey to Sustainable Performance

Sustainable Performance is the strategic journey that starts with purpose and ends with measurable business value.

A copy of the The Purpose Gap report which informed part of the agenda can be found here. Now in its fourth year, the 2025 report shows where purpose is thriving, where it’s faltering, and how teams can learn from purpose leaders to turn it into a strategic advantage.

The October episode of Anthesis’ Purposing podcast, featuring Sarah Gillard, CEO of A Blueprint for Better Business, discusses the 2025 Purpose Gap report in more depth, specifically around what the ‘purpose gap’ reveals about leadership and trust.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
EU Batteries Regulation Due Diligence Requirements https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/eu-batteries-regulation-due-diligence-requirements/ Mon, 17 Nov 2025 15:31:40 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=69485

EU Batteries Regulation Due Diligence Requirements

Why early preparation matters despite the two-year delay

17 November 2025

portable batteries

The EU Batteries Regulation (Regulation (EU) 2023/1542, EUBR) came into force in August 2023 as part of the European Green Deal and Circular Economy Action Plan. It applies to economic operators (manufacturers, importers, distributors) placing portable, automotive, EV, and industrial batteries on the EU market with turnover above €40 million, unless part of a group that exceeds that threshold.

The due diligence guidelines are a cornerstone of this framework, addressing human rights, environmental, and social risks in the batteries supply chain. The aim is to prevent human rights abuses, environmental degradation, and conflict financing in the sourcing of critical raw materials such as lithium, cobalt, nickel, and natural graphite.

While enforcement of the due diligence obligations has been delayed to August 2027, companies should not wait to act. Preparing well in advance can help companies avoid added complexity and challenges when obligations do come into effect, and can lead to added business value in the lead up to enforcement.  

Compliance requirements

Chapter 7 of the EUBR (‘Obligations of economic operators as regards battery due diligence policies’) comprises seven articles and sets out five key requirement areas:

EUBR Due Diligence Requirements
  1. Due Diligence Policy (Article 48): Create and maintain a documented policy for battery supply chain due diligence, verified by an independent auditor.
  2. Management System & Traceability (Article 49): Implement internal systems and traceability mechanisms to monitor supply chains and address grievances.
  3. Risk Assessment & Mitigation (Article 50): Identify human rights and environmental risks in battery material supply chains and develop strategies to mitigate them.
  4. Independent Verification (Article 51): Have all due diligence processes independently reviewed and validated by a notified third party.
  5. Annual Reporting & Disclosure (Article 52): Publish an annual report detailing due diligence actions, findings, and corrective measures.

Beyond the due diligence rules, the EUBR imposes a phased package of other sustainability measures:

  • Carbon footprint declarations (phased from 2025-2030)
  • Minimum recycled content for cobalt, lithium, nickel, and lead (mandatory from August 2031)
  • Battery passport (mandatory from 2027)
  • Collection and recycling targets (63% by 2027, 73% by 2030)
  • Removability and replaceability (portable batteries by 2027)

Steps companies can take to prepare

To prepare for compliance with EUBR due diligence requirements, companies should consider the following key steps:

  1. Clarify governance and compliance responsibilities: Gain a solid understanding of the EUBR legal requirements and establish an internal governance structure to ensure compliance obligations can be effectively managed.
  2. Map the supply chain: Build visibility into the battery supply chain, with a focus on identifying upstream suppliers and high-risk areas that require closer scrutiny.
  3. Communicate and engage with suppliers: Begin collecting traceability information by working closely with suppliers. Consider systems to support this outreach, data collection, and reporting such as Anthesis Compliance Suite (ACS). Strengthen engagement by presenting a clear business case for why providing traceability data benefits both sides.
  4. Conduct a rigorous risk and impact assessment: Conduct a thorough risk assessment to identify the most significant human rights and environmental risks and associated impacts, as well as priority areas for action across the battery supply chain.
  5. Implement risk mitigation strategies: Begin acting on risk assessment findings by deploying appropriate mitigation measures. These may include supplier audits, self-assessment questionnaires for Tier 1 suppliers, in-depth human rights impact assessments (HRIAs), and partnerships with civil society organisations.
  6. Develop a due diligence policy: Formalise your approach in a due diligence policy, which will not only meet EUBR requirements but can also serve as a foundation for compliance with broader regulatory frameworks such as the CSDDD.

Why start preparing now?

Long lead times

Establishing due diligence systems is a complex process that requires significant time and resources. By August 2027, these systems must be independently verified, which means companies should begin preparing now to avoid a last-minute scramble.

Clear expectations despite limited guidance

While the European Commission has not yet published detailed guidelines, foundational frameworks – such as the OECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises and the UN Guiding Principles on Business and Human Rights (UNGPs) – have long defined what constitutes best practice in due diligence. The regulatory text may leave some room for interpretation, but the core expectations are unlikely to change.

Business value beyond compliance

The risk assessment required under the EUBR is not just a regulatory burden. It can serve as a valuable management tool to uncover risks that could affect business operations, as well as impacts on people and the environment. Starting early helps companies realise these benefits, regardless of any regulatory delays or uncertainties.

A step toward broader compliance

For many companies, batteries represent only one of many categories of procured goods. Strengthening due diligence processes in this area now can create a solid foundation for complying with upcoming regulations such as the CSDDD, which will require a more comprehensive supply chain due diligence approach.

Integration with other EUBR sustainability requirements

The EUBR due diligence obligations link closely with other compliance requirements – such as carbon-footprint declarations, recycled-content reporting and the digital battery passport. These rely on consistent product and supplier data structures. Starting now allows firms to design data systems that serve multiple compliance purposes instead of patchwork fixes later.

Complexities companies may encounter

  • Transparency varies widely across minerals: Cobalt supply chains are better understood than lithium, nickel, or graphite, while mining operations remain particularly opaque.
  • Fragmented data ownership: Relevant data may sit with different teams across the organisation, slowing analysis. Clear data governance and collaboration are essential.
  • Complex value chain mapping: Traceability requires significant effort, supplier trust, and data cleaning as upstream information is often incomplete or inconsistent.
  • Extensive scope of risk issues: The EUBR covers a wide range of human rights and environmental risk issues. Assessing impacts associated with these risk issues across minerals and value chain stages is resource-intensive and ideally requires stakeholder consultations. Desk-based research and third-party datasets can help, but they often only indicate the likelihood of adverse impacts – not their severity.
  • Supplier engagement to address impacts: Identifying risks isn’t enough — companies must work with suppliers on corrective actions, training, and monitoring.
  • Partnerships beyond Tier 1: Real visibility into smelters, refiners, and mines usually requires partnerships with NGOs and local stakeholders, especially to address sensitive issues like child labour in ASM.

How Anthesis can help

While the EUBR introduces new regulatory requirements, the principles of human rights and environmental due diligence are long established. For over a decade, we have supported leading companies on their due diligence journeys, applying a proven suite of tools and methodologies:

  • Digital tools: Our suite of digital tools, such as Compliance Suite, is uniquely positioned to help companies trace their battery supply chains and collect supplier data to support compliance needs.
  • Proven methodology for value chain mapping and risk / impact assessment: Our tried-and-tested methodology draws on extensive experience conducting Double Materiality Assessments (DMAs), in-depth, on-the-ground Human Rights Impact Assessments (HRIAs) and Supply Chain Risk Assessments.
  • Actionable risk management frameworks: We design and implement comprehensive Risk Management Frameworks to provide clear, actionable steps for addressing identified risks. Our approach ensures that due diligence processes are aligned with regulatory due diligence requirements, proportionate to the severity of impacts, and embedded into day-to-day operations.
  • Policy development with practical implementation: While many organisations offer support in developing policies and supplier codes of conduct, ensuring that a policy is practical and implementable requires deep knowledge of organisational processes and hands-on implementation experience. We bring this expertise to all our projects.
  • Supplier engagement: Collecting supplier data to support compliance requires close collaboration. Sending data requests without clearly communicating the benefits of accurate reporting and effective risk management often results in low response rates. We have extensive experience in supplier engagementbuilding capacity, setting goals, developing action plans and conducting ongoing monitoring to evaluate and track progress.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
The Advantages of Strengthening Human Rights Due Diligence https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/the-advantages-of-strengthening-human-rights-due-diligence/ Fri, 14 Nov 2025 17:31:02 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=69469

The Advantages of Strengthening Human Rights Due Diligence

Lessons learned on-site in Brazil

14 November 2025

Rio de Janeiro, Brazil

With operations and value chains for many businesses spanning the globe, due diligence for addressing human rights and mitigating associated risks is becoming both more critical and more challenging. With regulatory mandates becoming more common and consumer expectations rising, strengthening human rights due diligence processes is now a key business imperative.

The Human Rights team at Anthesis recently conducted a two-day supplier site visit in Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, as part of a Human Rights Risk Assessment for a global energy client. Below we explore their key takeaways, and what actions businesses can start taking to meet today’s human rights requirements and expectations.

On-site assessment and key takeaways

While conducting their assessment, our expert human rights consultants engaged directly with workers and managers on the ground, getting to know the ins and outs of daily operations. They also reviewed internal policies and processes already in place and conducted analyses to identify potential gaps.

Key takeaways from Brazil

The assessment highlighted three valuable lessons for any business:

  1. Worker voices are essential: Speaking directly with employees reveals the realities of day-to-day operations—insights that are often missed in corporate reporting. These conversations can uncover both positive practices, like respectful treatment, fair scheduling, and safety protocols, as well as areas for improvement, including excessive overtime, lack of grievance mechanisms, or unclear communication channels. Participatory approaches in Human Rights Risk & Impact Assessments (HRRIAs) ensure that worker perspectives are not only heard but actively shape the outcomes. This aligns with international standards like the UNGPs, which stress the importance of stakeholder engagement in due diligence processes.
  2. Management buy-in is key: Human rights cannot be effectively embedded without the support and understanding of management. Managers are the bridge between policy and practice. When they are trained and engaged, they become advocates for responsible business conduct, helping to identify risks early and implementing solutions that are both practical and sustainable. Building buy-in and internal capacity through tailored training programs and leadership engagement strategies can be vital, ensuring that human rights are not siloed within sustainability teams but are integrated across departments.
  3. Everyday practices matter: Human rights risks often manifest in the small, routine aspects of work: how shifts are scheduled, how feedback is given, or how safety gear is distributed. These micro-interactions can either reinforce dignity and respect rights, or contribute to systemic issues. They also reveal where workers feel most valued, such as being consulted on changes or recognized for their contributions. On-the-ground assessments like the one we completed in Brazil go beyond checklists to observe and understand these daily dynamics. By focusing on operational realities, businesses can uncover hidden risks and identify opportunities to improve worker well-being and organizational culture.

These insights reflect a broader truth: human rights risks are often subtle, systemic, and deeply embedded in business operations. Addressing them requires more than compliance. Instead, it demands a strategic, proactive approach.

The business case for human rights

Respecting human rights, and addressing related gaps and risks, is both a moral and a business imperative. Companies that fail to identify and mitigate human rights risks face reputational damage, regulatory penalties, and operational disruptions. Conversely, those that lead in this space build trust, strengthen stakeholder relationships, and enhance long-term resilience.

A recent study by the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP), “Human Rights vs. Competitiveness: A False Dilemma”, found that companies strengthening their human rights performance experience tangible financial benefits, demonstrated through clear links to operational profitability and investor valuation.

Additionally, the global landscape is shifting toward mandatory due diligence and reporting. Modern slavery legislation and the EU’s Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence Directive (CSDDD) require businesses to “know and show” how they manage human rights impacts. Likewise, civil society and consumers are also scrutinizing companies’ social impact claims more closely than ever.

What businesses can do

To meet these expectations, businesses should:

  • Develop and embed human rights policies aligned with international frameworks such as the UN Guiding Principles on Business & Human Rights (UNGPs), ILO Conventions, and OECD Guidelines.
  • Conduct Human Rights Risk & Impact Assessments (HRRIAs) to identify, prioritize, and mitigate risks across operations and supply chains.
  • Engage stakeholders meaningfully, including workers, communities, and suppliers, to understand lived experiences and build trust.
  • Train leadership and teams to recognize and respond to human rights issues.
  • Monitor and report progress transparently, using frameworks like GRI and IFC Performance Standards.
  • Integrate social impact measurement to assess and improve performance across products, services, and programs.
  • Implement responsible sourcing and supply chain due diligence, especially beyond first-tier suppliers.

These actions not only help businesses comply with evolving regulations – they also contribute to a more equitable and resilient future.

How Anthesis can help

Anthesis offers a comprehensive suite of Human Rights & Social Impact services designed to help organizations navigate this complex landscape. From strategy development and stakeholder engagement to field research, training, and impact measurement, our team brings deep expertise and practical tools to support businesses at every stage of their journey.

Whether you’re conducting a human rights assessment, designing a social impact program, or preparing for regulatory compliance, Anthesis can help you embed ethical values into your operations and thrive in a world where social responsibility is central to business success.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Net Zero in Emerging Markets https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/net-zero-in-emerging-markets/ Mon, 10 Nov 2025 19:13:55 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=69382

Net Zero in Emerging Markets

Why one size doesn’t fit all

10 November 2025

Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia

Director

North America

When it comes to implementing net zero targets, Emerging Markets and Developing Economies (EMDEs) face a unique challenge: how do we define a Paris-aligned target that reflects both ambition and fairness? The principle of ‘Common But Differentiated Responsibilities’ in the Paris Agreement recognises that developed economies should decarbonise faster, while EMDEs balance emissions reduction with economic growth. Yet, most current frameworks ignore this nuance.

Today, general partners (GPs) often default to the Science Based Targets initiative (SBTi) for defining Paris-aligned targets. However, SBTi does not incorporate the concept of “fair share” contributions – targets that account for historical emissions and capacity to act. This omission risks creating unrealistic and unfair expectations for EMDE-based companies and could even trigger capital outflows from these regions as investors chase easier wins elsewhere.

Why does fair share matter? Historically, developed economies have contributed the bulk of greenhouse gas emissions. Expecting EMDEs to decarbonise at the same pace ignores this reality and undermines equity. For portfolio companies, this means that applying the same reduction targets globally is neither practical nor justifiable.

Scaling targets with country pathways

To address this, we propose a methodology that scales SBTi-level reductions using well-accepted, country-level emissions pathways. We have based this proposal on data from the Network for Greening the Financial System, or NGFS. NGFS provides granular data on national emissions trajectories under a Net Zero 2050 scenario. By comparing these pathways for developed economies and EMDEs, we can calculate a ratio that adjusts SBTi targets to reflect fair share contributions.

For example, an NGFS net zero pathway shows Cameroon’s emissions increasing by 6.3% between 2025 and 2030. A company operating there should therefore aim to limit its emissions increase to this level, rather than pursue reductions that ignore local realities. This approach aligns with the Net Zero Investment Framework (NZIF) guidance and ensures targets are both credible and achievable.

In practical terms, nothing really changes at the GP level – general partners are still expected to ensure that portfolio companies are “managed in alignment with net zero.” The difference is that the bar for meeting this standard has been adjusted: the criteria are now more flexible for individual portfolio companies, taking into account the specific contexts and regions in which they operate.

Scope 3 & beyond: a nuanced approach

Scope 3 emissions remain a sticking point, especially in EMDEs where data availability is limited. Our recommendation is pragmatic: exempt small and medium-sized businesses from Scope 3 reduction targets for now, focusing instead on measurement as a first step. For large companies, targets should apply but be adjusted using the same fair share principles applied to Scope 1 and 2 emissions.

High-impact sectors, however, are a different story. Under NZIF, sectors such as transport, power generation, cement, steel, and agriculture, forestry and fisheries (AFF) are classified as “high impact” due to their significant greenhouse gas emissions and systemic influence on the transition (see NZIF high impact material and material sector mapping). For these industries, more ambitious Scope 1,2 and 3 targets may be necessary, and SBTi’s standard guidance, including sector-specific guidance, should serve as the baseline.

The bigger picture: opportunity for investors

Two-thirds of global energy-related emissions, and 95% of emissions growth, come from EMDEs. This is not just a challenge; it’s an opportunity. By tailoring targets to local realities, GPs can identify high-potential investment opportunities in areas such as renewable infrastructure, distributed energy, and efficiency improvements – areas where practical deployment and scale-up can deliver both climate impact and commercial returns. This approach can also help GPs deepen partnerships with portfolio companies. Crucially, adopting credible, context-sensitive approaches can also attract increased funding from LPs, who are seeking robust, Paris-aligned strategies that demonstrate both ambition and fairness.

Ultimately, investors who understand the importance of differentiated pathways can play a pivotal role in real-world decarbonisation. By educating clients and advocating for fair share-based targets, fund managers can justify larger mandates and tell a compelling impact story.

How Anthesis can help

Achieving net zero is a global effort, but it cannot be achieved with a one-size-fits-all approach. Incorporating fair share principles into target-setting is not only equitable and fair, but also essential for real-world impact.

Anthesis is proud to have supported the Science Based Target Initiative (SBTi) to develop dedicated guidance for the private equity industry. Written in partnership with an expert advisory group of over 30 private equity firms, the guidance helps private equity firms set and reach science-based targets across their operations and investments to work towards sustainable private equity.

We work with firms around the world, providing end-to-end SBT and net zero consulting support to fit unique contexts. At Anthesis, we view the process of setting Science Based Targets not merely as a checkbox, but as a transformative business journey.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
The ROI of ESG for Businesses https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/roi-of-esg-for-businesses/ Thu, 06 Nov 2025 18:31:32 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=69294

The ROI of ESG for Businesses

ESG as a value creation driver for enhancing mainstream strategic growth

office building

Principal Consultant

Principal Consultant

In today’s market, value creation extends beyond mainstream financial metrics.

Investors demand credible ESG performance, regulators mandate sustainability disclosures, and public stakeholders demand transparency. As a result, ESG is no longer a siloed, perception-driven exercise but is now strategically embedded in business planning, delivering measurable value under financial, regulatory, and competitive pressures.

Following ‘The Cost of Silence’, we now turn to its counterpart: what do companies gain when actively integrating ESG principles into value creation strategies?

ESG action does not replace traditional strategic growth and value creation strategies —it enhances them.

It’s not about sacrificing profits for purpose or inventing new sources of value; ESG principles help reveal value that has always existed. They force firms to rethink value creation as a dynamic, systemic process linked to broader ESG topics, rather than a series of isolated levers. Environmental considerations uncover operational inefficiencies, social factors align with talent and culture strategies, and governance underpins execution across all areas.

This article explores how recognising and measuring these connections can translate into practical value creation and solidify the synergy between sustainability and financial performance.

Traditional vs ESG-aligned value creation approaches

Business leverApproachValue advantages
Operationsal efficiencyTraditional: Focus on short-term cost reduction through expense cuts, supplier renegotiation, process automation, and consolidation.
ESG-aligned: Examines resource use across the value chain to uncover hidden costs.
Cost savings, supply chain resilience, reduced climate/resource risk, long-term operational stability.
Talent, culture & engagementTraditional: Relies on extrinsic motivators such as KPIs, performance reviews, and financial incentives.
ESG-aligned: Builds intrinsic motivation through purpose, meaningful work, and DEI.
Higher engagement, retention, innovation capacity, and organisational adaptability.
Technology & data enablementTraditional: Tech used mainly for efficiency and digital services; ESG data seen as reporting overhead.
ESG-aligned: ESG data becomes actionable and monetisable, not just for compliance.
Streamlined reporting, accelerated decision-making, lower risk, and new revenue opportunities from sustainability innovation.
Market growth & strategyTraditional: Growth pursued by expanding products, geographies, or acquiring market share.
ESG-aligned: ESG strengthens brand, licence to operate, investor confidence, and segment access.
Premium pricing, improved market access, stronger reputation, higher exit multiples.

Unlocking long-term value by tackling hidden operational inefficiencies

Traditional operational value creation seeks maximum efficiency from existing assets and processes, often by cutting discretionary expenses, renegotiating supplier contracts, consolidating facilities or automating manual processes. While effective for short-term margin improvement, they risk creating a “race to the bottom,” undermining long-term value.  

 An ESG-aligned approach broadens the lens by examining how resources like energy, water, and labour are sourced, consumed, and wasted across the value chain. This exposes hidden costs — from energy loss and emissions hotspots to supply chain vulnerabilities — that may be absent from financial statements but have a material impact on future performance.

By addressing systemic inefficiencies through energy audits, waste assessments, and supply chain analysis, companies can reduce costs while also building resilience to climate and resource risks. A recent study by the UNDP, for example, found that organisations that actively mitigate climate-related supply chain risks realise measurable improvements in economic performance alongside reduced emissions. This shift reframes efficiency as both a financial and sustainability imperative.

Anthesis helps companies design, implement, and scale operational ESG initiatives. Examples of our support include unlocking £1.8m in energy-related savings for JLL; reducing 17,550 kg of food waste per year for Righteous Gelato without major capital investment; and helping over 3,500 suppliers cut production costs and reduce waste through a circular supply chain platform with Tesco Exchange.

From efficiency to engagement – how purpose transforms performance

There are multiple value-creation levers that align with social priorities such as health and safety (H&S) and diversity, equity and inclusion (DEI). Traditional talent & culture value creation relies on extrinsic motivators – KPIs, performance reviews, and financial incentives – to drive employee productivity. While these mechanisms can improve efficiency, they often reduce employees to resources, overlooking how culture and purpose drive long-term engagement and innovation.

An ESG-aligned approach builds on these levers by also activating intrinsic motivation. A purpose-driven culture creates performance advantages that profit-only structures cannot match. When employees see their work tied to meaningful goals, such as reducing environmental impact or creating positive social outcomes, they bring deeper commitment, creativity, and collaboration. Research from Great Place to Work shows that organisations with clear purpose and values achieve stronger outcomes in revenue growth, innovation, and employee engagement.

Rather than asking only what people deliver, companies should also focus on why they choose to contribute, unlocking lasting organisational value. This requires a clear organisational purpose and create engagement programs that connect daily work to meaningful impact.

Anthesis supports organisations by designing tailored sustainability strategies that embed behavioural and cultural change from the outset. Our work with the Billington Group purpose platform engaged 2,000+ employees, with over 90% purpose-driven within six months, and Yorkshire Valley Farms’ purpose-driven strategy achieved 3.4x higher social media engagement.

Technological enablement

Among the many governance value creation levers, technology enablement stands out as it rarely operates in isolation. Traditionally, the focus is either operational efficiency, through automation, or commercial growth, through new digital services and markets.

An ESG-aligned approach applies these same capabilities into sustainability. Internally, digital ESG tools help companies systematically capture complex non-financial data and simplify reporting Externally, ESG systems originally developed for internal compliance, are increasingly becoming marketable assets, transforming ESG technology from a cost of doing business into new sources of revenue and competitive advantage.

Technology has evolved from an external disruptor to a core value creation lever and ESG is following a similar trajectory. Companies that embed ESG into digital strategy from the outset position themselves to monetise sustainability data and capabilities as market demand accelerates.

Anthesis helps organisations achieve this by designing and implementing digital solutions,  including  ESG data collection with Anthesis Mero across 300+ Grupo Éxito stores, implementing Anthesis RouteZero to track and document emissions, supporting Belu Water in demonstrating carbon neutrality in line with PAS060, and developing Reckitt’s Sustainable Innovation Calculator, completing life cycle assessments in under 30 minutes and 700 product analyses.

Redefining market growth

Traditional growth strategies target market expansion through new geographies, products or acquisitions to capture market share and increase revenue. Yet this assumes a narrow definition of markets, where value is determined only by buyers, sellers, regulators, and intermediaries.

An ESG-aligned approach reframes markets as living ecosystems, shaped by a broader set of stakeholders. Regulators impose evolving compliance requirements; communities influence brand reputation; employees drive innovation; and institutional investors reward sustainable performance with higher exit multiples. Strong ESG performance not only reduces risk but also enables access to new customer segments, premium pricing, and entry into markets with stricter sustainability standards, with recent research showing, for example that consumers are willing to pay more for products and services that demonstrate clear sustainability credentials.

In today’s environment, markets reward authenticity, sustainability, and responsibility, not just scale. Companies that analyse their strategic landscape through this enhanced ESG lens uncover growth opportunities that traditional approaches miss.

Anthesis has supported clients in this shift, such as supporting Energy Capital Partners (ECP) by delivering UK Plastic Waste Market Assessments, evaluating UK ESG regulations, infrastructure capacity, market pricing and key players to pinpoint growth opportunities and regulatory risks. This informed a market expansion strategy aligned with sustainability trends and long-term value creation.

Realising the ROI of ESG

It is clear that companies that identify where ESG can amplify existing levers, set targets, and design initiatives are best positioned to deliver both financial and meaningful impact.

An ESG strategy translates principles into measurable initiatives, aligns them with business priorities, and embeds sustainability into decision-making rather than treating it as a silo. We partner with organisations to model the financial ROI of ESG initiatives, build business cases, and implement programs that deliver measurable performance outcomes.

For organisations unsure where to start, Anthesis provides the expertise and tools to develop and implement ESG strategies that are actionable, scalable, and measurable, ensuring sustainability drives real value creation.

Speak with our team to identify where sustainability can drive efficiency, growth, and competitive advantage in your organisation.

]]>
Building Strong ESG Narratives for Exit https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/building-strong-esg-narratives-for-exit/ Wed, 05 Nov 2025 13:43:17 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=69281

Building Strong ESG Narratives for Exit

Strategies for exiting portfolio companies that are ESG-ready, ESG-enabled, and ESG-driven

5 November 2025

River running through grassland

Director

North America

Exiting a portfolio company today requires more precision and preparation than ever. With valuation pressure high and buyers increasingly focused on resilience and long-term performance, differentiation has become essential. For general partners, exit is the opportunity to demonstrate both a company’s current value – its ability to manage risk and compete effectively today – and its future potential to unlock additional value under new ownership.

Environmental, Social, and Governance (ESG) narratives can be an effective tool in conveying this full value story of a company’s current position and how it can continue to grow responsibly.

A strong ESG narrative can:

  • Broaden your buyer universe
  • Differentiate a portfolio company in a competitive process
  • Strengthen valuation positioning

Without integrating ESG at exit, much of a company’s hard-earned progress and potential may go unrecognised, and value could be left behind. Below, we outline key strategies for building ESG narratives to exit portfolio companies that are ESG-ready, ESG-enabled, and ESG-driven.

Tailoring ESG to the exit context

The way ESG features in an exit depends on its commercial relevance, the company’s maturity, and the sponsor’s goals. While there’s no one-size-fits-all approach, we tend to see exit strategies fall into three general categories, depending on whether the portfolio company is:

  1. ESG-Ready: Focusing on demonstrating strong ESG risk management and readiness
  2. ESG-Enabled: Utilising ESG themes to strengthen the broader investment story
  3. ESG-Driven: Leveraging ESG as a differentiator that is central to the value story, unlocking new categories of buyers

These are not rigid stages, but flexible approaches that can be right-sized to the deal context, company profile, and buyer expectations.

ESG-ready: foundational preparedness

Demonstrating that ESG risk management and governance systems are in place and functioning effectively today.

When ESG is not a defining feature of the company’s investment thesis, the focus should be on demonstrating competence. This means ensuring the company can respond credibly to ESG-related questions, that key documentation is organised, and that ESG does not become a source of delay or surprise during diligence.

This often involves identifying the ESG topics most likely to arise in buyer conversations, compiling relevant data and materials (such as policies, compliance records, or emissions data), and preparing management to speak confidently to these areas. The emphasis is on transparency, organisation, and credibility, providing buyers confidence in the company’s risk management and governance practices.

The value of this approach lies in demonstrating that the company manages its risks systematically and proactively – giving buyers confidence in the stability, credibility, and quality of governance across the organisation. Even for companies still developing their ESG programs, strong organisation, transparency, and credible governance can go a long way in building buyer confidence.

ESG-enabled: integrating supporting themes

Integrating ESG as part of the broader business story, balancing today’s strengths with tomorrow’s opportunities.

For companies that have made measurable ESG progress, there’s an opportunity to position those improvements as contributors to commercial success and resilience. Rather than creating a standalone ESG section, this approach weaves ESG throughout the business narrative, using sustainability to strengthen priority exit themes such as operational efficiency, risk reduction, or customer and workforce engagement.

This could include highlighting strong safety culture as a sign of operational discipline, responsible sourcing as a lever for customer retention, or leading energy efficiency practices as a driver of cost control. These elements show not only how the company is performing today, but also how it is thinking ahead, proactively addressing ESG issues that buyers, regulators, and customers will increasingly expect.

Crucially, this approach should balance what has been achieved to date with what remains on the table. For example, if a company has improved data collection or energy management systems, it can highlight how the next owner could further capitalise on that by differentiating products based on unique sustainability attributes or certifications.

We’ve seen this approach work especially well when there is a credible voice within management, someone who can connect ESG performance to the company’s financial and operational story and articulate what continued progress could look like.

ESG-driven: key elements of differentiation

Positioning ESG as a strategic differentiator and value driver for targeted buyers.

For some companies, ESG is not peripheral – it’s core to their market positioning or buyer appeal. These are often businesses where sustainability is built into the product, supply chain, or brand, or where the buyer pool includes impact funds, strategic investors, or Article 9 funds.

Here, exit preparation is more intensive. It involves aligning management and sponsor perspectives, quantifying impact (such as carbon reductions, product efficiency, or workforce outcomes), and producing investor-grade materials that establish a central theme or focus for the Commercial Information Memorandum (CIM).

For instance, Anthesis supported a company producing insulating materials for apparel. Sustainability was central to its value proposition, so the challenge was to present that value credibly. By quantifying the downstream benefits of its products and developing a CIM-ready ESG deck, the sponsor successfully crafted a growth narrative built around sustainability differentiation – positioning the business as both resilient and scalable in a decarbonising market.

The strongest ESG stories at exit are data-backed, forward-looking, and aligned to business fundamentals, showing how the company can continue to unlock ESG-linked value under new ownership.

The bottom line

Exits are harder than ever, and differentiation is everything. ESG, when approached strategically, can help demonstrate that a company is managing its risks effectively, is differentiating itself among peers, and is positioned for future growth.

The art lies in striking the right balance between what’s been achieved and what’s still possible – highlighting current resilience and governance while framing credible opportunities for future value creation.

Whether that means demonstrating readiness, integrating ESG as a supporting theme, or positioning it as a central differentiator, a well-structured ESG narrative helps sponsors tell the full story of value creation.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Beyond Emissions: The Impact Of Our Carbon Projects https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/carbon-offsetting-impact-report/ Tue, 28 Oct 2025 19:35:51 +0000 https://anthesis1.wpenginepowered.com/?p=53602
Whitepapers

Beyond Emissions: The Impact Of Our Carbon Projects

Download our latest report and discover how Anthesis is driving high-integrity climate action worldwide.

At Anthesis, we are proud to be at the forefront of carbon innovation. We continue to make major strides in project development – including becoming only the second project developer in the world to register under Verra’s latest framework. This global milestone reflects not only our technical expertise but also our unwavering commitment to delivering credible, high-impact climate solutions in an evolving sustainability landscape.

Despite increasing complexity across the Voluntary Carbon Market (VCM), with more rigorous standards and verification processes, we continue to push boundaries. From independent third-party verification to the successful issuance of high-quality carbon credits, our progress demonstrates both agility and integrity in meeting the growing demands of the global market.

Looking ahead, we are expanding our portfolio with bold, future-focused initiatives that combine environmental integrity with measurable, real-world impact. Both new and long-standing clients can now access an enhanced range of in-house projects aligned with the Oxford Principles and a growing focus on carbon removal. Our impact continues to scale across continents  – strengthened through collaboration with private equity partners and underpinned by a commitment to transparency and quality.

Beyond carbon, Anthesis has reinforced its position as a trusted global partner in the VCM, broadening its offering to include Renewable Energy Attribute Certificates (EACs/RECs) and Sustainable Aviation Fuel (SAF) certificates. Together, these solutions empower organisations to accelerate their decarbonisation journeys with confidence.

Loading…

Trusted by

]]>
EUDR Compliance Update: Is Your Business Ready? https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/eudr-compliance-update-is-your-business-ready/ Fri, 24 Oct 2025 08:40:54 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=68115

EUDR Compliance: Is Your Business Ready?

The EU has confirmed it will not delay its landmark anti-deforestation law, instead introducing a short six-month grace period before enforcement – reaffirming that EUDR compliance is rapidly approaching.

Manager

Spain

Global Lead for Nature

North America

Tim Mollenhauer

Tim Mollenhauer

Senior Consultant

Germany

The European Union’s Deforestation Regulation (EUDR) is more than another compliance requirement. It’s a defining test of how effectively companies can connect sustainability ambition with operational and legal readiness.

Recent EUDR updates from the European Commission – including revised implementation timelines and transitional reliefs – may appear to ease immediate pressures, but they don’t change the strategic reality.  

For senior sustainability leaders, this moment demands more than technical awareness. It requires mobilising the C-suite and board to understand the profound implications of EUDR on legal exposure, market access, and nature-related risk across global value chains. 

The direction of travel is clear: every business that places forest-linked commodities or their derivatives on the EU market will soon need verifiable proof that their products are deforestation-free and legally produced. And the window for preparation is narrowing. Building the systems, supplier relationships, and governance frameworks required for traceable, compliant supply chains takes time, and leadership.  

Leadership that translates between regulatory change and enterprise strategy: grasping both compliance risk and the opportunity to lead in resilient, deforestation-free sourcing. Below is a clear breakdown of who must act, what must be done, and when it must happen – shaping a framework for no-regrets actions to shape your EUDR Compliance Roadmap

The EUDR is not simply about compliance – it’s about transforming how we understand and value nature within global supply chains. Companies that act now are not just meeting regulation; they’re redefining what responsible growth looks like in a nature-positive economy.

Betsy Hickman, Global Lead for Nature, Anthesis Group

Why this matters – and why now 

The EUDR represents a major regulatory shift: it mandates that a broad suite of commodities and derived products placed on the EU market – including those your business might source, sell or manufacture – must be proven deforestation-free (i.e., not produced on land deforested after 31 December 2020) and legally produced in origin countries.  

Why this matters

  • Legal/compliance risk – failure to comply can lead to blocked access to the EU market, penalties, and reputational damage. 
  • Supply-chain risk – many agricultural and forest-linked commodities are embedded in global value chains; if you source cattle, cocoa, coffee, soy, palm oil, rubber, timber, or derivatives you must ask: “Could my product be traced to deforested land or illegal production?”  
  • Strategic opportunity – companies that get ahead of this can build differentiated credentials on sustainable sourcing, strong traceability, and resilience. Waiting is not an option. 

EUDR compliance will test the maturity of corporate traceability systems. The winners will be those who see this as an opportunity to create end-to-end visibility, not as a box-ticking exercise. The data you collect today will define your resilience tomorrow.

Tim Mollenhauer, Senior Consultant and Northern Europe EUDR Expert, Anthesis Group

Recent changes

The European Commission has recently put forward a proposal to amend the EU Deforestation Regulation (EUDR), intended to smooth implementation and ease administrative burdens – but not to postpone the overall direction of travel. 

Crucially, the proposed delay applies only to small and micro operators, not to larger companies. Under the updated timeline: 

Primary operators (medium and large companies) 

  • They will maintain the obligation to submit due diligence declarations when placing products on the EU market. 
  • The regulation will enter into force on 30 December 2025, with a six-month grace period without checks or penalties, allowing for a gradual transition. 

Primary operators that are micro or small enterprises from low-risk countries 

  • They will only need to submit a single, simplified declaration in the EUDR IT system. 
  • Implementation is postponed until 30 December 2026 (compared with the originally planned 30 June 2026). 

Traders or downstream operators (of any size) 

  • They will no longer be required to submit due diligence declarations. 
  • They will only need to collect the declaration code provided by their supplier and transmit it to their client. 

These changes aim to make the process more agile and efficient, while ensuring the traceability and transparency needed to achieve the EUDR’s core objective: eliminating deforestation associated with products placed on the EU market. 

The proposal still needs to be approved by the European Parliament and the Council before entering into force, and debate and adoption are expected before the end of the year. 

The transition period offers breathing space, but not a pause. Now is the time to strengthen partnerships with suppliers, align internal teams, and pilot systems – so that when enforcement begins, your business is ready to lead, not react.

Victor Fabrega, Manager and Southern Europe EUDR Expert, Anthesis Group

Shape your EUDR compliance roadmap 

Many companies may be tempted to wait for all the pieces (country risk classification, industry guidance, the IT registry) to fall into place.  Avoid that trap: 

  • Core obligations are already in effect (the law is in force). Delay is only in application date. Supplier engagement, audits, and tracing must commence now. 
  • Supply-chain complexity is real: gathering geo-coordinates, verifying land-use histories, aligning downstream products will take months (or years). The closer you are to the deadline, the higher the cost and disruption. 
  • Early movers will benefit: companies that shape their sourcing now will build resilience, avoid being squeezed by last-minute compliance, and set the standard for future-fit procurement. 

Eight no-regrets actions to prepare 

This regulation will reshape how global supply chains operate. As a leader, you can either respond reactively and scramble for compliance – or lead proactively, reshape your supply chain for resilience and sustainability, and gain a competitive edge. 

  1. Mobilise now and act at speed. The deadlines (30 December 2025 for large/medium companies; 30 June 2026 for micro/small enterprises) are fast approaching. Build internal alignment and resource plans immediately. 
  2. Own it from the top. Treat deforestation-free compliance as a strategic business imperative – not a niche sustainability task. Assign executive sponsorship and embed accountability across procurement, legal, and ESG teams. 
  3. Consolidate traceability data. Map and maintain an up-to-date database of the geographic origin of all relevant raw materials and products, capturing geolocation and supplier information to meet EUDR due diligence requirements. 
  4. Assess and prioritise deforestation risk. Conduct spatial and supply-chain risk assessments to identify high-risk sourcing areas, using verified data sources and geospatial tools to guide supplier engagement and monitoring. 
  5. Strengthen supplier collaboration. Work directly with suppliers – especially smallholders and high-risk producers – to improve the quality, accuracy, and accessibility of traceability and legality data. 
  6. Review and adapt due diligence systems. Ensure systems can flex with evolving EUDR requirements, differentiate by country risk classification, and integrate seamlessly with IT reporting and audit mechanisms. 
  7. Integrate into core strategy. Embed traceability, deforestation risk management, and supplier engagement into corporate sustainability, ESG, and responsible sourcing strategies – linking progress to executive KPIs. 
  8. Use the transition wisely. The EU’s proposed relief periods and phased implementation offer time to prepare – use this runway to pilot systems, close data gaps, and strengthen supplier readiness rather than delay action. 

In navigating the complexities of EUDR and translating this roadmap into tangible EUDR compliance actions, you don’t have to go it alone. Anthesis experts stand ready to guide you – from mapping exposures and building traceability systems to strengthening supplier engagement and embedding deforestation-risk management into your business strategy.  
 
Whether your company is just beginning to assess exposure or advancing toward full traceability, Anthesis can help you navigate the next steps with clarity and confidence. As recognized delivery partners of the Accountability Framework initiative, Anthesis brings global best practice, technical expertise, and industry-specific support tailored to your business challenges and priorities.

Contact us

Our Nature experts work with global leaders to translate regulation into action and ambition into advantage. Start the conversation with us to shape your deforestation-free roadmap and turn compliance into a catalyst for lasting sustainability leadership. 

Loading…
]]>
Integrating Climate and Nature Risks https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/integrating-climate-and-nature-risks/ Fri, 17 Oct 2025 18:45:46 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=68047

Integrating Climate and Nature Risks

Why a unified approach drives better decisions, client value, and long-term resilience beyond compliance

17 October 2025

tree roots and branches

Associate Director

North America

Climate and nature are inseparable, with intertwined impacts on business, society, and daily life. However, most companies still analyse and report on climate and nature separately, creating blind spots in corporate strategy and resulting in sourcing, investment, and land use decisions that are based on an incomplete picture of the risks involved. By integrating climate and nature risks, companies can instead leverage a more comprehensive foundation for resilience and can gain a competitive edge in an uncertain future.

From frameworks to foresight: Using TCFD and TNFD together

The consequences of a fragmented approach to climate and nature risks can be significant. Climate risks like extreme weather events and the transition to a low-carbon economy can accelerate biodiversity loss and ecosystem degradation. In turn, degraded ecosystems weaken natural defenses against physical risks like flooding or drought, amplifying sourcing and supply chain disruptions for businesses dependent on critical commodities. When climate and nature risks compound each other, assessing them separately creates gaps and dangerously underestimates true exposure.

Integrated assessments of both climate and nature can work to close these gaps. The Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) and the Taskforce on Nature-related Financial Disclosures (TNFD) are complementary frameworks for assessing and disclosing the financial impacts of climate-related and nature-related risks and opportunities, respectively.

TCFD helps organisations disclose the financial impacts of physical risks (extreme climate events) and transition risks (policy, technology, market, and reputation) from climate change, while TNFD addresses nature-related risks, including ecological dependencies and impacts, through tools like the LEAP (locate, evaluate, assess, prepare) approach. Importantly, TNFD highlights the ecosystem services that businesses and their supply chains rely on to grow commodities or maintain continuity in their operations, like pollination, water regulation, soil fertility, and disease control, which are often missing in traditional climate risk models.

By integrating TCFD and TNFD, companies can move beyond compliance to strategic foresight, recognising how climate and nature changes interact and compound financial impacts across operations, supply chains, and markets.

Compounding climate and nature risks in action: commodities

Climate risk assessments have become more common as financial reporting becomes mandatory, yet many companies still overlook the equally critical, and interlinked, nature-related risks. Deforestation, biodiversity loss, and water stress are not only nature issues – they amplify climate-related disruptions – and assessing climate and nature risks separately can create specific blind spots in sourcing, land use, and resource planning. Integrated assessments are therefore no longer a niche consideration, but a strategic imperative.  

At Anthesis, we support clients in developing integrated assessments that holistically combine climate and nature risk analysis for reporting and planning, uncovering critical, interacting blind spots. Beyond operations, we also assess how climate change may affect commodity yield, pricing, and productivity across plausible futures.

For example, consider a multinational food and beverage company sourcing soy:

  • A standalone climate assessment might show that the region faces future water stress from drought, flagging a moderate risk to supply.
  • A regulatory review may flag new deforestation-free sourcing laws or disclosure requirements.
  • A separate nature assessment might flag that same region for high rates of deforestation.

An integrated analysis reveals the critical insight these silos miss: deforestation (a nature risk) is eroding the ecosystem’s ability to retain water and regulate local climate. This amplifies the financial and operational impact of the projected climate-driven droughts (physical risk) and exposes the company to compliance and market-access risks from emerging deforestation-free laws (transition risk).

This compounding effect reveals a far greater threat of supply chain disruption and price volatility than either analysis would suggest alone. With integrated foresight, the company can shift from reactive risk management to proactive strategy, enabling smarter, more resilient sourcing and capital investment decisions.

The limits of current frameworks and the power of integration

Increasing water stress on soy crops is a physical climate risk, but its residual effects create nature risks: reducing water availability, crop yields, and biodiversity. These impacts disrupt supply chains, increase production costs, and threaten long-term resource security. Soy expansion is a major driver of deforestation, which destroys habitats, reduces pollinators, and weakens natural buffers against floods, landslides, and water stress. New regulations like the EU Deforestation Regulation add transition risks by limiting market access for soy linked to deforestation.

Viewed separately, these risks understate true exposure. And while TCFD and TNFD provide structured outlines to identify, assess, and disclose these risks, their true power lies in integration. Integrated risk assessments reveal how climate, nature, and policy pressures interact, enabling companies to anticipate systemic disruptions and make better sourcing, investment, and resilience decisions.

TNFD extends TCFD by focusing on the ecosystems and ecosystem services that businesses rely on to function: pollination, water regulation, soil fertility, and more. As an added benefit, aligning with both frameworks not only  meets regulatory and investor expectations under CSRD, SB 261, and ISSB, but also helps companies build adaptive strategies in a world shaped by dual environmental crises and expanding disclosure mandates.

For example, in the food sector, soy expansion upstream drives deforestation and water stress, creating exposure for processors and traders. Downstream, consumer goods companies and retailers face reputational damage and market-access risks if deforestation-linked soy is embedded in their supply chains. Similarly, in the apparel sector, cotton production depends on water-intensive upstream processes, while brands downstream are vulnerable to both physical supply shocks and rising scrutiny over nature impacts.

TCFD and TNFD comparison diagram

Bringing the value chain into focus

While the TCFD and TNFD share structural similarities (governance, strategy, risk management, and metrics), there are important differences. Climate risk analysis  benefits from decades of scientific modeling and standardised data, while nature risk evaluation in the corporate context is newer and less harmonised. TCFD, though foundational, is not sufficient on its own: it does not explicitly consider nature-related dependencies and impacts that may pose material financial risks across supply chains, operations, and valuation. For investors and businesses seeking resilience, long-term value creation,  and regulatory alignment, especially under frameworks like the CSRD and the emerging ISSB–TNFD convergence, integrating climate and nature risk is not optional, but essential.

Importantly, value chain analysis is now a regulatory mandate, not just good practice, CSRD and ISSB both require companies to examine upstream and downstream dependencies and impacts. For sectors heavily reliant on commodities like soy, cocoa, or cotton, integrating ingredient risk screening is critical. Dual analysis is also required: understanding risks to the business (like drought affecting soil fertility and crop yields) and risks from the business (like deforestation and biodiversity loss driven by sourcing practices). Tools such as TNFD’s LEAP approach help structure this assessment, capturing both dependencies on nature and impacts to nature, and translating them into financial and strategic terms.

This raises important questions for companies: How does your business connect the dots between climate and nature? Full integration requires a deliberate effort to link nature dependencies (like healthy soil, pollinators, or water availability) with climate hazards (like drought or floods), and then to quantify how those compounded effects translate into operational and financial risk. This is the work that moves companies from compliance to resilience.

Businesses that proactively integrate climate (TCFD) and nature (TNFD) can:

  • Address systemic risks: Recognising climate change and nature loss as systemic threats to the global financial system.
  • Improve transparency: Enhancing disclosure of interconnected environmental risks and opportunities.
  • Enable better decision-making: Providing investors and executives with data that drives smarter capital allocation.
  • Drive sustainable outcomes: Catalysing the shift to a more sustainable, resilient economy.
  • Anticipate disruptions: Identifying compounding risks and value chain vulnerabilities before they materialise.
  • Build resilient strategies: Creating forward-looking plans grounded in a complete risk picture.
  • Meet regulatory and investor expectations: Aligning with CSRD, ISSB, and other regimes increasingly requiring integrated climate-nature risk.

Both frameworks are critical to ensuring that financial markets properly value environmental risks and incentivise responsible corporate action. Businesses that proactively incorporate climate and nature into their risk management practices can better anticipate market shifts, address investor concerns, and unlock opportunities for sustainable innovation and natural resource preservation. By understanding the full spectrum of environmental risks and opportunities, companies can not only enhance resilience but also secure long-term competitive advantage.

From insight to action

As climate-related risks become more widely assessed, it’s increasingly clear that nature risks are deeply connected yet often overlooked. Companies that treat them in isolation risk missing blind spots in strategies, especially as environmental disruptions compound across supply chains, assets, and markets. A unified approach that integrates climate and nature risks goes beyond compliance, offering a competitive edge through forward-looking value creation and resilience. Businesses that proactively align with TCFD and TNFD can anticipate market shifts, meet investor expectations, and capitalise on opportunities for sustainable innovation – all while protecting the natural systems their operations depend on.  

At Anthesis, we help companies move from insight to action through integrated climate and nature risk assessments tailored to their value chains. Our approach combines geospatial and financial analysis to identify location-specific exposure, quantify impacts under different scenarios, and prioritise strategic responses. Whether the goal is to meet regulatory requirements, safeguard continuity, or evaluate investment trade-offs, we provide the data, tools, and guidance to turn risks into resilience. By aligning with both TCFD and TNFD, we enable clients to future-proof operations and build competitive advantage in an increasingly risk-aware marketplace.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
The Purpose Gap https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/the-purpose-gap-2025/ Wed, 15 Oct 2025 13:38:03 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=67906

The Purpose Gap Report

The Purpose Gap is back – and this time it’s polarising

15 October 2025

the purpose gap

Download the Purpose Gap Report

After years of progress, the Purpose Gap is back.

Our research reveals 61% of people now say their company’s actions don’t match its purpose statements – up from 52% in 2024. For the first time since we began reporting in 2022, the Purpose Gap is widening.

As external pressures mount, many organisations are pulling back from purpose-led initiatives.

But not all. A growing minority are doubling down, embedding purpose into culture and operations. The share of employees who see full alignment around purpose has jumped from 22% to 35%. These organisations aren’t just surviving – they’re outperforming. And we have the figures to prove it.

This report shows where purpose is thriving, where it’s faltering, and how teams can learn from purpose leaders to turn it into a strategic advantage.

Consider this: 91% of employees say purpose is important. Yet only 7% of organisations are delivering purpose well.

Is yours one of them? Or is it time to close the Gap?

]]>
Emissions Targets in Transition: From Voluntary to Mandatory https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/emissions-targets-in-transition/ Mon, 29 Sep 2025 16:11:48 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=67724

Emissions Targets in Transition: From Voluntary to Mandatory

Why emission reduction targets are becoming a new norm – and how companies can turn compliance into opportunity

29 September 2025

industrial chimneys for emissions

Climate change is now recognised as a systemic financial risk, causing regulators and standard setters alike to accelerate the development of disclosure and accountability frameworks. This expanding global assortment of climate regulations – CSRD, CSDDD, RD 214/15, PPN 06/21, LCI, SB 261, AASB S2, and more – reflects a global push to ensure corporate transparency, protect economic stability, and align private capital with decarbonisation goals.

The question now becomes: how do these regulations impact corporate emission reduction targets and associated strategies?

In this article, we provide context for navigating this evolving regulatory environment and unpack how emerging rules are shaping corporate approaches to voluntary target setting. We explore what’s required, what’s optional, and, most importantly, how companies can strategically align compliance obligations with credible, forward-looking emission reduction goals.

The current state of target setting within regulatory frameworks

Until recently, most climate regulations focused on disclosure—requiring companies to measure, report, and govern climate-related risks and opportunities. In that context, emission reduction targets typically appeared in two ways:

  1. Reporting requirement: Companies disclose their targets if they exist, and
  2. Strategic context: Companies explain how they intend to meet those targets or how they will transition to a low-carbon economy.

However, several regulations, notably those in Europe, now explicitly require companies to set emission reduction targets. For example, firms in scope of CSDDD must set science-based, time-bound absolute reduction targets for Scopes 1-3, with a 2030 milestone and five-year reviews to 2050. The UK’s Procurement Policy Note (PPN 06/21) obliges suppliers on large government contracts to publish a Carbon Reduction Plan with clear targets. Spain’s Royal Decree 214/2025 mandates targets for large companies.  Further, for sectors facing material climate risks—such as banks, insurers, and asset managers—target setting is fast becoming a de facto regulatory baseline rather than an voluntary practice.

Target setting within key regulations

Below, we break down key pieces of legislation by region and their connection with emission reduction target setting. Note that regulations are frequently updated or changed. This information is current as of September 2025. Further, the EU Omnibus Proposal may change the information below.

For a quick snapshot, the table below summarizes the key regulations, their regional scope, and the extent to which they require emission-reduction targets.

RegulationRegionEmissions Target Requirements
CSRDEuropean UnionReport-only (Paris-aligned, all scopes)
CSDDDEuropean UnionYes (Paris-aligned, all scopes)
RD 214/25SpainYes (Paris-Aligned, scope 1 and 2)
Switzerland Ordinance on Climate DisclosuresSwitzerlandYes (country-aligned, all scopes)
PPN 06/21UKYes (Net-zero, all scopes)
SB 261CaliforniaIndirect (risk mitigation, that may include targets)
Greenhouse Gas Emissions Disclosure StandardCanadaYes (Paris-Aligned, all scopes)
AASB S2AustraliaIndirect (risk mitigation, that may include targets)

EUROPE

1. Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD)

Context

CSRD makes sustainability information a mandatory, audit-ready part of corporate reporting in the EU, backed by the European Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS). Climate change has a special consideration across sustainability topics and companies shall disclose a detailed explanation if this topic is deemed not material. CSRD does not mandate behavior, only how and what to report.

Target requirements

Companies must disclose whether they have set GHG reduction targets across Scopes 1-3, the base year and trajectory (including 2030 and 5-year milestones until 2050), and whether those targets are science-based and compatible with 1.5°C-aligned pathways. Furthermore, companies must report on whether they have a transition plan for climate change mitigation covering targets, actions, financing, relation to overall business planning, and annual progress.

Scope

Phased application covers large EU companies and certain non-EU firms with significant EU activity, with mandatory assurance and digital tagging; Member States will enforce penalties.

Explore our CSRD Resources

2. Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence Directive (CSDDD)

Context

CSDDD ties corporate due diligence to human rights and environmental impacts in operations and supply chains. It also contains obligations around climate action.

Targets requirements

Firms in scope must set science-based, time-bound absolute reduction targets for Scopes 1-3, with a 2030 milestone and five-year reviews to 2050, aligned to the Paris Agreement and EU climate neutrality goals. However, the EU Omnibus process may remove the need to develop and implement a transition plan. Both the European Commission and the EU Council suggested removing the requirement to implement a transition plan, while proposing to keep the requirement to develop one. However, according to the European Parliament’s draft position, the climate transition planning requirements should be removed from the CSDDD scope altogether.

Scope

Current thresholds target very large companies (e.g., >1,000 employees with turnover >€450M, and franchisors with >€22.5M in turnover); breaches can trigger significant penalties and civil liabilities, up to 5% of turnover. Note that these thresholds could increase further as a result of the EU Omnibus process. For example, the European Parliament is proposing to raise them to more than 3,000 employees and a global net turnover of over €450 million, while the EU Council is proposing thresholds of more than 5,000 employees and a global net turnover of over €1.5 billion.

Explore our CSDDD Resources

3. RD 214/2025 Spain’s GHG Reduction Plan regulation

Context

Royal Decree 214/2025 strengthens Spain’s carbon-reporting framework, elevating national obligations on carbon footprint calculation and mitigation planning. It requires GHG calculation and reduction plans for companies and public sector organisations.

Targets Requirements

Requires large companies to calculate and establish GHG reduction targets for scope 1 and 2 from 2026, and scope 1, 2 and 3 for public sector organisation from 2028. Companies must set targets in 5 years periods and be in line with the Paris Agreement and EU Regulation. Companies must also disclose and make public the measures implemented and plans to achieve the targets.

Scope

Applies to large companies (for GHG calculation and targets for scope 1 and 2 only) and State departments (for GHG calculation and scope 1 and 2 targets starting in 2025 and scope 3 in 2028).

Access our FAQ on RD 214/2025 (in Spanish)

4. UK’s Procurement Policy Note (PPN 06/21) 

Context

PPN 06/21 requires suppliers bidding for major UK central government contracts to demonstrate climate action, embedding net zero alignment into public procurement.

Targets requirements

Suppliers must commit to achieving net zero by 2050 and publish annual GHG emissions data (Scopes 1 and 2, and a subset of Scope 3). Bidders must provide a Carbon Reduction Plan that sets out measures and milestones toward achieving their net zero target, updated regularly and aligned with procurement requirements.

Scope

Applies to contracts awarded by central government departments, executive agencies, and non-departmental bodies valued at £5 million or more per year.

5. Switzerland Ordinance on Climate Disclosures

Context

The ordinance requires large companies to be transparent on the climate impact of their activities on the climate and the impact of climate change in its activities, including developing a climate transition plan with GHG reduction targets aligned with Swiss climate goals.

Targets requirements

Companies will be required to report on climate-related disclosures aligning with the Task on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD). In particular, companies will be required to develop a transition plan in line with Swiss climate goals with quantitative targets and disclosures of methods and standards used.

Scope

Applies to public companies, banks and insurance companies with >500 employees and >CHF 20 million in assets or >CHF 40 million in turnover. Note that the thresholds and/or the requirements of the regulation may change as the Federal Council is revising the ordinance because of the EU Omnibus proposals and the requirements are paused for all companies.

North America

6. SB 261 (Climate-Related Financial Risk Disclosures)

Context

CA SB 261 is part of California’s package to force corporate climate transparency at the state level, focused on climate-related financial risk reporting. It mandates a biennial disclosure of climate-related financial risks.

Targets requirements

SB 261 itself does not prescribe specific emission reduction targets, but it requires disclosure of climate-related financial risks and adopted measures to reduce and adapt to those risks. One of the important reporting recommendations in the two standards accepted (TCFD and IFRS S2) is the GHG reduction targets disclosure. No third-party assurance is required.

Scope

Applies to companies with >$500M in revenue that “do business” in California.

Explore our SB 261 Resources

7. Canada’s Standard on the Disclosure of Greenhouse Gas Emissions and the Setting of Reduction Targets

Context

The standard requires large government contractors to join the Net Zero Challenge (NZC) or an equivalent initiative or standard, including the establishment of targets and identification of mitigation strategies.

Targets requirements

To comply with the NZC minimum requirements, government suppliers are expected to set a long-term net zero target by 2050 and at least 2 interim targets. Furthermore, the regulation requires these companies to also identify mitigation strategies to achieve the targets, as well as reporting their GHG inventories and climate-related disclosures based on TCFD.

Scope

Applies to government suppliers of individual contracts of more than $25 million, that are not government agencies, military or emergency contracts.

Australia

8. Australian Sustainability Reporting Standard: Climate-related Disclosures (AASB S2)

Context

AASB S2 is Australia’s first mandatory climate-related financial disclosure standard, effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2025. It aligns with the ISSB’s IFRS S2 but is designed to work as a standalone climate-only standard. AASB S1, covering broader sustainability topics, remains voluntary.

Targets requirements

While AASB S2 does not mandate specific GHG reduction targets, it requires entities to disclose any climate-related targets they have set, along with the metrics used to track progress toward those targets—whether voluntary or regulatory. This forms part of its “Metrics and Targets” pillar.

Under the “Strategy” pillar, entities must describe how they plan to manage climate-related risks and opportunities, including the existence and details of any transition plan, such as assumptions, dependencies, actions, and resource allocations. Entities are also required to conduct climate-related scenario analysis, including at least one 1.5°C-aligned scenario and one “higher-warming” scenario to assess resilience.

Scope

AASB S2 applies to entities subject to the Corporations Act’s sustainability reporting regime. Reporting is phased: Group 1 entities (largest listed companies and large financial institutions) begin from 1 January 2025, with others phased in through mid-2026 and mid-2027. The standard covers climate-related governance, strategy, risk management, and metrics & targets across Scopes 1, 2, and 3.

Explore our AASB S2 Resources

Contact us

Whether you’re just starting your sustainability journey or advancing toward science-aligned targets, Anthesis is here to help you navigate emerging climate rules and build resilient, credible action plans.

Loading…
]]>
Extended Producer Responsibility for Packaging Around the World https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/extended-producer-responsibility-around-the-world/ Fri, 12 Sep 2025 20:44:06 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=67342

Extended Producer Responsibility for Packaging

How requirements in North America, Europe, and the rest of the world are evolving

plastic food packaging

How to prepare for EPR

Learn more about the steps you can take to prepare for EPR regulations.

Extended producer responsibility (EPR) is an actively evolving regulatory tool that requires producers, importers, and distributors to be responsible for the end-of-life management of their products. One prevalent focus for EPR regulations around the world is on packaging. EPR programmes for packaging are currently being rolled out across the United States, and laws are also evolving in Canada and Europe.

If you sell a product that is in a package – as most are – then you may be affected by EPR legislation, which often defines producers broadly as the entity that places the packaging in the market, including both brands and importers.

EPR regulations are often implemented into national or sub-national legislation, and requirements often vary greatly between countries, jurisdictions, and schemes. Find out more about the current state of packaging EPR across North America and Europe, and what you need to know about upcoming changes.

How to prepare for EPR

Packaging EPR is designed to hold producers accountable for the end-of-life management of the packaging they introduce to the market, while promoting eco-design practices. Under this framework, fees are typically calculated based on the weight and, in some cases, the format of the packaging materials. Knowing the origin of materials is also key, as it can qualify producers for eco-modulated fee reductions.

Preparing for EPR requires extensive data collection and analysis. High-quality data not only helps reduce current fees but also informs strategies to minimise costs in future reporting periods.

Learn more about the steps you can take to prepare for EPR regulations here.

]]>
ESG Value Creation in Private Equity https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/esg-value-creation-private-equity/ Fri, 05 Sep 2025 16:11:24 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=67190

ESG Value Creation in Private Equity

Enhancing Mainstream Strategic Growth Levers and Value Drivers

aerial shot of office buildings

The new PRI Sustainability Value Creation framework is designed to support investors in embedding and leveraging sustainability to drive financial outcomes.

Building on this, investment teams shouldn’t treat sustainability value creation levers differently from levers that focus on proven strategies like:

  • Operational efficiencies
  • Performance reporting
  • Capital structure optimisation
  • Talent management
  • Digital transformation.

ESG should be thought of as an integrated strategy that enhances the core business plan and supports long-term, strategic growth.

Here’s why the integrated ESG approach matters

Not all management teams respond to initiatives labelled as ‘sustainability’ – even when growth drivers are clearly demonstrable. Unfortunately, it can be the case that key stakeholders disengage at the mention of ESG.

This article explores how sustainability directly enhances value generation strategies, creating a powerful synergy between sustainability and financial performance. Instead of treating ESG factors as separate considerations, successful investors use them to serve as operational enablers that amplify conventional PE value creation levers.

Transparent performance reporting for exit readiness

The strategic imperative

Communicating strong performance and business value to the market and potential investors is high on the agenda of all management and sell-side teams.

ESG reporting frameworks are increasingly being used to:

  • Showcase sustainability performance
  • Demonstrate compliance with ESG investing criteria
  • Quantify value creation during exit readiness
  • According to the PRI, portfolio companies that embed sustainability can achieve a 6–7% multiple uplift at exit.

This uplift is only realised if ESG progress is clearly communicated to investors. For example, through investment memorandums and reports. Done well, this reporting provides tangible proof of value creation that complements traditional financial metrics.

Exit readiness support

Anthesis can support your portfolio companies with exit readiness and strengthen their position through vendor due diligence services. Read our recommendations: Positioning Private Equity assets to maximise exit value through ESG.

Our teams support private equity firms in reporting on ESG and sustainability, both at the firm and fund levels, highlighting responsible investment practices, case studies, and reporting on portfolio data.

Learn more in our guide: Best practices for Private Equity ESG reporting.

Operational strategies for margin expansion

Direct cost savings through ESG

Sustainability initiatives can deliver direct cost savings that enhance traditional margin expansion efforts. 

The PRI has estimated that sustainability-linked value creationcan lead to a 6% cost optimisation and accelerate margin expansion and reduce volatility in returns, through:

Key sustainability-linked operational levers should be integrated into margin expansion thinking and result in reduced energy costs of production, reduced transportation costs, and reduced waste disposal costs. These environmental improvements create immediate bottom-line impact without requiring trade-offs with financial performance.

The bottom line

Our global team is continuously supporting companies to identify operational cost-saving opportunities. We apply robust engineering solutions to drive cost optimisation and solve climate problems within the industrial/manufacturing and built environments.

Explore our Decarbonisation & Energy Transition and Environmental Management Services.

Revenue growth amplification

Value-based pricing & market expansion

Credible and well-substantiated sustainability claims boost traditional revenue growth strategies, such as value-based pricing and market expansion. Product certification or product development creates substantial competitive advantages, with sustainable consumer goods commanding a 28% price premium and achieving 55% higher market share growth compared to conventional alternatives.

This directly supports PE firms’ organic growth objectives while expanding addressable markets.

Building loyalty and trust

In both B2C and B2B contexts, robust ESG practices:

  • Show how ESG credentials become essential for winning new business and retaining existing clients.
  • Enhance customer trust and reduce reputational risk while building long-term customer loyalty
  • Enable companies to increasingly prioritise sustainability criteria in product and supplier selection

Making a green claim?

Our LCA specialists and Green Claims experts support clients across global markets to achieve price premiums for sustainable products and services while navigating any reputational and legal risks by demonstrating accurate claims.

Explore our Sustainable Products & Circularity services and read our Green Claims Whitepaper.

Supply chain optimisation

Addressing cost pressures

Cost pressures remain a top concern for many organisations, with recent research showing that 83% of procurement professionals identify inflationary pressures and rising commodity prices as their primary external challenge.

Integrating traditional supply chain management

Typical supply chain management programmes aim to reduce sourcing costs and volatility while mitigating operational risks that could impact cash flows. Sustainable supply chain interventions are no different and should be considered an integral part of supply chain optimisation for any business. Initiatives such as improved transparency, knowing your baseline, risk management, and supplier engagement are all sustainability value levers that create more predictable cost structures and reduce volatility in financial performance.

Capital structure optimisation

Unlocking lower cost capital

Reducing the cost of debt and improving access to funding are core components of capital structure optimisation. Sustainability-linked finance (such as Sustainability Linked Loans, or debt financing with sustainability ratchets baked in) is becoming a critical tool for investors to funnel capital towards the transition to net zero by influencing more sustainable practices, such as emissions reduction or target setting.

PE firms should consider and support portfolio companies to unlock access to capital while lowering debt costs through sustainability-linked financing mechanisms.

How Anthesis can help

We assist lenders and borrowers seeking to offer or raise funds through ESG or sustainability-linked loans and bonds, including baselining the borrowers current ESG performance, KPI (Sustainable Performance Targets) selection, and annual performance verification in line with LMA, LSTA, APLMA ,and related guidance.

Explore our ESG Credit & Debt Services and case study on developing the UK retail sector’s first sustainability-linked supply chain finance product with Tesco.

Beyond the investment team

Investor relations teams should also be aware of the integration of ESG with mainstream private equity value levers and how these vary significantly by geography, reflecting different market conditions and stakeholder expectations. According to PRI’s research, the regional variations are defined as follows:

  • Europe: European investors emphasise customer-focused ESG initiatives that drive revenue growth, particularly sustainable product offerings responding to strong consumer demand for environmental responsibility.
  • North America: North American investors prioritise risk management and cost-linked ESG drivers, focusing on operational efficiency and trust-building initiatives while facing challenges in demonstrating clear financial linkages.
  • Asia-Pacific: APAC investors concentrate on social initiatives, particularly employee engagement and health and safety programs that drive both revenue and cost benefits.
  • Africa: African investors emphasise community engagement and environmental cost-efficiency measures that support local economic development while reducing operational costs.

This integrated thinking helps frame ESG considerations as enhancing rather than existing alongside, or as a competing priority, to mainstream strategic growth drivers and value creation activities. ESG creates compound value through operational excellence, strategic positioning, and financial optimisation, working in concert with ambitious leadership teams.

The strategic framework

This integrated thinking helps frame ESG considerations as enhancing rather than existing alongside, or as a competing priority, to mainstream strategic growth drivers and value creation activities.

ESG creates compound value through operational excellence, strategic positioning, and financial optimisation, working in concert with ambitious leadership teams.

Anthesis has the global expertise and capability to support your portfolio across a wide range of strategic growth levers through embedding ESG. Our team of experienced ESG strategists has worked with companies of all sizes and sectors to develop ESG strategies that are designed to be embedded into the overall business operations and seamlessly embraced by their key stakeholders.

Whether you’re looking to embed ESG strategy across your entire portfolio or optimise specific value creation levers, we can support your team in turning sustainability into measurable financial outcomes.

Contact Us

Speak with our experts and discover how we can support you in creating impactful, purpose-driven communications for your brand.

Loading…
]]>
New Science Based Targets Guidance for Financial Institutions https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/new-science-based-targets-guidance-for-financial-institutions/ Wed, 03 Sep 2025 20:21:37 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=67123

New Science Based Targets Guidance for Financial Institutions

What you need to know about SBTi’s updated Financial Institutions Net Zero (FINZ) guidance

3 September 2025

Flower field landscape

In July 2025, the Science Based Targets initiative (SBTi) released its updated Financial Institutions Net Zero (FINZ) guidance, marking a significant step forward for the sector and arriving just as early adopters of the previous guidance reach their 5-year target review horizon. The guidance also presents greater alignment with other frameworks, such as the Net Zero Investment Framework (NZIF).

In this article, we outline how and when companies should leverage this updated guidance for target setting, summarise the key points about the new standard’s requirements for climate ambition and reporting, and outline what this all means for financial institutions.

How and when to leverage the new guidance

Companies are encouraged to start applying the new guidance as soon as practicable, but a phase-in period has been proposed. Either the FI Near Term (FINT) or the new FINZ guidance may be used for companies looking to set targets until December 2026. SBTi suggests:

How to Set TargetsTiming
Financial InstitutionsSet near-term targets using FINT; or set long-term targets using FINZ.Both versions can be used until at least December 2026.
Financial Institutions with Net-Zero CommitmentsSet near and long-term targets using FINZ.Within 24 months of FINZ publication.
Financial Institutions with Existing Near-Term TargetsExisting near-term targets remain valid. Revalidate near-term targets using FINT; or set near and long-term targets using FINZ.Both versions can be used until at least December 2026.

Redefining climate ambition

SBTi has redefined climate ambition in its FINZ guidance, with more stringent requirements on certain sectors, namely the fossil fuel, transport, industry, energy, and real-estate sectors. The latest guidance introduces the concept of portfolio segmentation – four segments are used to define target-setting requirements and climate ambition:

  • Segment A: Fossil fuels (coal, oil, gas).
  • Segment B: Transport (air, maritime, land); Industrial (steel, cement); Energy (power generation); Real estate (residential and commercial buildings); Forest, land and agriculture (FLAG).
  • Segment C: Other sectors (not listed in segments A or B).
  • Segment D: Subset of activities in emissions-intensive sectors and other sectors. This includes private equity, venture capital and private debt in non-fossil fuel sectors with <25% ownership or no board seat, as well as funds of funds.

SBTi’s updated guidance introduces clearer criteria for how financial institutions should treat different types of assets on their journey to net zero. Assets are now categorised as either “in transition” (shifting toward lower-carbon operations), “climate solutions” (assets that directly support decarbonisation, such as renewable energy), or already in a “net zero state”.

Different asset types

For “in transition” assets, the guidance includes an Implementation List of approved benchmarks and third-party methodologies that institutions can use. This expands options for demonstrating portfolio alignment, which previously were limited to either using the ITR methodology or having SBTi-validated targets.

Unlike earlier drafts of the guidance, the final version does not require financial institutions to demonstrate that their portfolio is making progress towards the targets they have set. Institutions must still report their own progress annually and renew targets at the end of each near-term cycle (set at five years). However, there is no requirement to show that portfolio companies are delivering on the targets they have set, as is required in NZIF. In practice, this means financial institutions can meet the standard by ensuring companies set targets, without being responsible for how quickly those companies achieve them.

Climate ambition requirements also depend on the location of assets – financial institutions with assets in developing economies have longer timelines to bring those holdings into alignment, recognising regional differences in transition pace.

As with previous guidance, SBTi mandates that companies make certain over-arching strategic commitments to align with climate goals. These have been expanded with the addition of a commitment to monitor and phase out deforestation and land conversion from the portfolio, as well as to conduct and publish a deforestation assessment by 2030. Requirements for ending new finance to fossil fuel assets and divesting from fossil-fuel related assets remain similar to those outlined in the near-term guidance and are in alignment with coal phase-out by 2030 for OECD countries and 2040 for the rest of the world. The guidance also makes clear that offsets or carbon credits cannot be used to meet near- or long-term decarbonisation targets. Only residual emissions at the point of net zero can be neutralised.

Increased climate reporting expectations

Alongside these ambition requirements, SBTi FINZ also raises expectations for climate reporting and transparency. This includes requirements to report:

  • Scope 1 & 2 financed emissions for segments A, B, and C. This was previously only required where companies were setting portfolio coverage targets on an emissions coverage basis. Reporting requirements are stricter if targets are set based on the share of emissions covered rather than the share of assets. If setting portfolio coverage based on emissions coverage, investors must also include segment D activities in their financed emissions statement.
  • Scope 3 financed emissions for automotive, coal, oil & gas, and real-estate assets, as these are deemed to be “high impact” sectors. From 2030, Scope 3 financed emissions must be included for all assets.
  • Exposure to fossil fuel-related activities and related GHG impacts. This includes a new requirement to report a ratio of fossil fuel financing relative to renewable energy financing.

Addressing private equity concerns

During the consultation period, key concerns raised by private equity firms included the need to maintain the 24-month post-investment grace period for portfolio companies to be integrated into targets, as well as the looser requirements around minority investments (<25% ownership or no board seat). SBTi has honoured these concerns by classifying private equity, venture capital, and private debt of private corporates and SMEs in non-fossil fuel sectors with <25% ownership or no board seat as segment D, on which the least stringent requirements are placed. Segment D assets are only required to be included in near-term targets if the target coverage of segment A-C assets is <67%, but it must be phased in to targets from 2040.

What this means for financial institutions

The new FINZ guidance is currently in a period of transition and will take a while to be adopted more widely in the sector given a phase-in timeline of December 2026. The target-setting tools and associated documentation are not yet published, and there is a generous transition period to prepare key elements of new target-setting requirements, notably portfolio GHG accounting.

The guidance provides increased flexibility in defining climate alignment targets, which is intended to make internal implementation more straightforward. However, this flexibility may also lead to slight discrepancies in target ambition, as it is not always obvious from the standard SBTi target language how ambitious a target really is.

While it will be a few months before the first FINZ-aligned targets start to be validated and published, Anthesis is already supporting clients in navigating the new guidance and the implications for their businesses. The practice of setting SBTs enables companies get on track and future-proof growth, and is one of the best practices for publicly communicating a company’s commitment to limit the effects of climate change. At Anthesis, we view the process of setting Science Based Targets not merely as a checkbox but as a transformative business journey.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Sustainability Reporting Singapore: How to Prepare for Mandatory Climate Reporting to the ISSB Standards https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/sustainability-reporting-singapore-how-to-prepare-for-mandatory-climate-reporting-to-the-issb-standards/ Wed, 03 Sep 2025 08:12:34 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/sustainability-reporting-singapore-how-to-prepare-for-mandatory-climate-reporting-to-the-issb-standards/

Sustainability Reporting Singapore: How to Prepare for Mandatory Climate Reporting to the ISSB Standards

An overview on what you need to know about Singapore's sustainability and climate-related disclosures

3 September 2025

office buildings

Singapore has joined other major global markets in pushing for clearer disclosure of climate risks and opportunities to implement mandatory climate reporting aligned with the International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB). These disclosures will improve consistency and align corporate practices with global standards, as investors, regulators, and stakeholders demand greater transparency. Climate reporting requirements will be phased in between FY2025 and FY3032 to eventually cover both Singapore Exchange (SGX) listed companies and large non-listed companies.

Whether your organisation falls under Group 1 (reporting from January 1, 2025) or is voluntarily aligning with stakeholder and supply chain expectations, these new standards are likely to affect you. This article answers the most common questions on how to prepare for mandatory climate reporting to the ISSB standards in Singapore, helping you understand the requirements and take your next steps on climate-related financial disclosures.

What are the ISSB standards for climate and sustainability reporting in Singapore?

In 2023, the ISSB, established by the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) Foundation, published a set of standards for sustainability disclosures. These standards were informed by and consolidated several other sustainability disclosure and reporting frameworks, establishing a global baseline for consistent and transparent sustainability reporting aimed to enable investors to make decisions informed by financially material sustainability-related risks and opportunities.

In line with the recommendations of the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD), the previous best practice framework for climate-related financial disclosures, the ISSB standards are structured through four key disclosure areas:

  1. Governance: Processes for monitoring and managing climate- and sustainability-related risks and opportunities.
  2. Strategy: Identification of risks and opportunities affecting long-term business strategies.
  3. Risk Management: Methods for identifying, assessing, and mitigating climate and sustainability-related risks.
  4. Metrics and Targets: Disclosure of GHG emissions and climate and sustainability-related performance targets.

IFRS S1 – sustainability-related – sets out how companies should disclose governance, strategy, risk management, and metrics related to sustainability risks and opportunities beyond just climate, building on the TCFD framework. In Singapore, IFRS S1 is not mandatory, except for climate-related aspects. For example, companies must disclose climate risks and opportunities that could affect cash flow, financing, or capital costs.

IFRS S2climate-related – is mandatory in Singapore and sets out how companies must disclose climate-related risks and opportunities that could affect cash flow, financing, or capital costs in the short, medium, or long term. IFRS S2 subsumes and builds upon the recommendations of the TCFD.

Learn more about the ISSB International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB) from the IFRS.

Singapore’s adoption and mainstreaming of the ISSB standards is a clear signal that it is fully committed to the green transition and demonstrating credibility in its climate initiatives. This helps to position Singapore as a leader in advancing sustainability reporting in Asia, and enable Singaporean companies to become more resilient and adaptable in a low-carbon economy. The August 2025 adjustment in reporting timelines reflect the need for companies to continually invest in internal capabilities in robust and transparent reporting

Peggy Oh, Director, Anthesis Singapore

Who is required to report?

All listed companies on the Singapore Exchange must report, with Straits Times Index constituents leading the way, followed by other listed issuers in phases. Large non-listed companies with at least S$1 billion in revenue and S$500 million in assets are also required to report.

Singapore ISSB implementation timeline

The latest update by the Accounting and Corporate Regulatory Authority (ACRA) and Singapore Exchange Regulation (SGX RegCo) in August 2025 introduces an extended timeline for most reporting requirements. This phased approach is aimed at giving companies adequate time to build internal reporting capacity and adapt to ISSB standards.

Despite the extended timeline, it is notable that the regulators have maintained the requirements for all listed entities to report Scope 1 and 2 emissions, and for the larger issuers to report Scope 3 emissions for larger issuers by FY2026, This signals a clear focus on driving accountability and transparency on decarbonisation, even as companies are given more time to prepare for other aspects of sustainability reporting.

Due to the latest announcement, the climate reporting timeline is:

climate reporting timeline for singapores issb disclosure
  • FY2025: All listed issuers must begin disclosing Scope 1 and Scope 2 GHG emissions. This requirement remains in place for all companies, regardless of market size or STI status.
  • FY2026: Mandatory Scope 3 emissions reporting begins for larger listed issuers, with smaller issuers following based on readiness assessments. No changes announced to this timeline.
  • FY2029: External limited assurance will be required for Scope 1 and Scope 2 emissions disclosures by all STI and non-STI constituent listed companies. 
  • ISSB-aligned disclosures:
    • STI constituents: FY2025
    • Non-STI listed issuers with market cap ≥ S$1 billion: FY2028
    • Non-STI listed issuers with market cap < S$1 billion: FY2030
  • Large non-listed companies (≥ S$1B revenue and ≥ S$500M assets): FY2030

This phased approach maintains Singapore’s direction of travel toward consistent and decision-useful ESG disclosures, while acknowledging operational readiness differences across the market. 

Summary of updated climate reporting requirements for listed companies
Table 1: Summary of updated climate reporting requirements for listed companies (updates highlighted in yellow). Image: SGX Group
Summary of updated climate reporting requirements for large NLCos
Table 2: Summary of updated climate reporting requirements for large NLCos (updates highlighted in yellow). Image: SGX Group

Are there penalties for non-compliance?

Yes, there are penalties for non-compliance with mandatory climate-related reporting requirements.

For listed companies, failure to meet disclosure obligations under the SGX rules can lead to regulatory actions by SGX RegCo, such as:

  • Warnings or reprimands
  • Requirements to make additional disclosures
  • Fines or sanctions in severe cases

For large non-listed companies, specific penalty frameworks under the upcoming mandatory climate-related disclosure rules are still being clarified, but non-compliance may result in regulatory scrutiny or reputational risk.

Even where not fined, failure to comply can damage investor confidence, affect access to finance and/or new markets, and harm market reputation.

What are the assurance requirements?

  • Listed companies will need to obtain limited assurance over their Scope 1 and Scope 2 greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions from FY2029 onwards.
  • Large non-listed companies will follow similar assurance requirements when their mandatory reporting begins in FY2032.

This limited assurance means an independent third party reviews the reported emissions data to provide moderate assurance on its reliability, helping strengthen trust and credibility with investors and stakeholders.

Why is Singapore implementing sustainability reporting?

The cornerstone of Singapore’s sustainability agenda is the Singapore Green Plan 2030, launched in 2021. This plan sets ambitious goals such as achieving net-zero emissions by 2050 and is deeply aligned with the United Nations’ 2030 Sustainable Development Agenda and the Paris Agreement. ESG reporting is a practical tool to measure progress toward these national and international goals, ensuring both public and private sectors contribute meaningfully.  

Sustainability reporting is also being implemented to increase transparency, align with global standards, and help companies manage climate-related and broader ESG risks and opportunities.

While financial reports reflect past and present performance, sustainability reports provide insight into future risks and opportunities, giving investors and stakeholders a fuller picture of a company’s financial prospects and the quality of its management. Companies that are able to demonstrate they are ahead in their decarbonisation journeys and understand the impact on their business of climate-related risks and opportunities stand to benefit from increased innovation, access to new markets, customers, and financing.

By following these steps, companies can meet regulatory expectations while strengthening resilience, managing climate risks, and enhancing their appeal to investors in a low-carbon economy.

What to detail in the Sustainability Report  

Companies must prepare and publish an annual sustainability report that includes mandatory climate-related disclosures, structured around four pillars:

  1. Governance – Board and management roles in overseeing and managing climate-related risks and opportunities.
  2. Strategy – How climate risks and opportunities affect the business model, strategy, and financial planning over the short, medium, and long term.
  3. Risk Management – Processes for identifying, assessing, and managing climate-related risks, and integration into overall risk management.
  4. Metrics and Targets
    • Scope 1 and Scope 2 GHG emissions (mandatory)
    • Scope 3 GHG emissions (mandatory, phased in with reliefs)
    • Industry-specific metrics (based on SASB standards)
    • Climate-related targets, transition plans, and progress

How to submit the report

  • In Singapore, IFRS S2 climate disclosures must be included within the company’s annual sustainability report, filed through SGXNet, alongside the annual report.
  • Reports must follow IFRS S1 principles: materiality, consistency, and connectivity to financial statements.
  • The reporting period must match the financial year of the annual report, and both must be published at the same time.
  • Scope 1 and 2 GHG emissions require external assurance (Scope 3 phased in).

When to submit the report

Listed companies will submit their sustainability report alongside their financial statements, in line with existing reporting timelines. Where external assurance has been conducted, the sustainability report may be issued separately, but no later than five months after the financial year-end.

Note the SGX has an expectation that large issuers will be required to report on Scope 3 GHG emissions and thus the content in their climate reporting will be aligned with the climate-related requirements in the IFRS Sustainability Disclosure Standards for CY26.

Preparing for compliance to mandatory climate reporting

Singapore ISSB mandatory climate reporting graph
  1. Conduct a gap analysis of current ESG and climate reporting practices against SGX and ISSB (IFRS S2) requirements.
  2. Develop an actionable roadmap to address gaps, set priorities, and prepare for upcoming disclosure deadlines.
  3. Enhance data collection and governance systems to accurately track GHG emissions, including Scope 1 and 2, and prepare for future Scope 3 reporting.
  4. Build capacity and awareness across the board, executive, and management levels to strengthen governance and accountability.
  5. Conduct scenario analysis to identify key climate-related risks and opportunities, covering both short- and long-term impacts.
  6. Engage stakeholders across departments to ensure disclosures are complete and aligned.
  7. Seek expert support and external assurance to navigate complexity and obtain limited assurance over GHG data where required.

Sustainability Reporting Grant

The Sustainability Reporting Grant (SRG) is a Singapore government initiative that supports large companies (with revenues above S$100 million) in preparing their first sustainability reports aligned with ISSB standards. It co-funds up to 30% of eligible costs, capped at S$150,000, covering consultancy, assurance, tools, and training. The grant, administered by Enterprise Singapore and the EDB, aims to help businesses meet upcoming mandatory disclosure requirements.

What are the benefits of sustainability reporting?

Key benefits of sustainability and climate-related reporting aligned with ISSB standards (IFRS S1 and S2).

  • Global alignment: Positions Singapore companies alongside global peers, meeting international benchmarks for sustainability reporting.
  • Consistency and clarity: Provides a standardised framework, helping companies understand strengths, gaps, and areas for improvement.
  • Investor transparency: Gives investors clear insights into climate risks, opportunities, and sustainability performance.
  • Stronger governance: Improves board and management oversight of climate risks and opportunities.
  • Sustainable performance: Enhances risk management, fosters innovation, builds resilience, and embeds sustainability into business strategy.
  • Stakeholder trust: Strengthens credibility with regulators, investors, and customers by demonstrating meaningful climate action.
  • Better data and insights: Using digital tools to manage disclosures improves data quality, reporting efficiency, and informed decision-making.
  • Strengthen cross-team collaboration: Reporting takes input from teams across the business, creating stronger alignment across functions and building a more integrated, resilient business.

Need support with climate or sustainability reporting in Singapore? Anthesis can help

As established climate experts globally and in APAC, we offer advice based on years of experience on reporting to regulatory standards and frameworks such as ISSB, ESRS, ASRS, CSRD, and many more, to manage your climate risks, seize opportunities, and drive compliance and sustainable performance across your business now and into the future. We’ll help discover efficiencies, create stakeholder value and increase your positive impact.

Officially licensed by:

ISSB Standards Insight

Anthesis Consulting Group Ltd. licenses and applies the IFRS® Sustainability Disclosure Standards and the SASB® Standards in our work.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Breaking the Chain: How to Prepare for the EU’s Forced Labour Regulation https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/how-to-prepare-eu-forced-labour-regulation/ Tue, 02 Sep 2025 14:27:02 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=67084

Breaking the Chain

How to Prepare for the EU's Forced Labour Regulation

supplier crates at a dock
Rabiya Jaffery

Rabiya Jaffery

Associate, Human Rights

The European Union’s Forced Labour Regulation (FLR), adopted on 19 November 2024, bans the sale, import, and export of goods produced through forced labour across all 27 EU Member States.  Goods found to have forced labour in their supply chains may be withdrawn, destroyed, or barred from the EU market.

The regulation applies to all companies, regardless of size, industry, or location, and covers both physical and online sales targeting EU consumers.

Regulators will expect that companies have strong due diligence processes as part of their overall management systems to identify, mitigate, and remediate forced labour risks. Before launching a full investigation, regulators will request information on the business’s due diligence processes. Demonstrating effective due diligence can lead regulators to decide not to initiate a full investigation into potential violations of the forced labour prohibition.

The EU’s Forced Labour regulation -what do businesses need to know?

The FLR officially applies from 14 December 2027. From this date, any product linked to forced labour at any stage of production – from raw material extraction to final manufacturing – will be barred from the EU market.

To understand the impact of the FLR, it is important to place it in the wider context of what forced labour entails. The International Labour Organisation (ILO) defines forced labour as “all work or service which is exacted from any person under the threat of a penalty and for which the person has not offered himself or herself voluntarily.”

Forced labour is a form of modern slavery which, while not having a universally agreed-upon definition, includes conditions of exploitation that a person cannot leave. In the context of labour, these terms are often used interchangeably. The scale of forced labour and modern slavery is significant. The Walk Free Foundation’s Global Slavery Index estimates that 50 million people were living in modern slavery in 2021, with 28 million in forced labour. Women, children, migrant workers, and minority groups are disproportionately affected.

The Walk Free Foundation’s Global Slavery Index estimates that 50 million people were living in modern slavery in 2021, with 28 million in forced labour. Women, children, migrant workers, and minority groups are disproportionately affected.

Despite its prevalence, forced labour is not always easy to detect. Coercion can be subtle, and workers may fear reprisals or may not recognise that their conditions are unlawful. At the business level, opaque supply chains and cost-cutting efforts can obscure risks, particularly in sectors where informality is common or there is weak oversight. These risks can be further exacerbated by states’ inadequate enforcement of laws.

The ILO lists 11 indicators of forced labour – such as restriction of movement, isolation, and withholding of wages – which can help identify victims and instances of forced labour. These indicators may manifest in ways not immediately obvious to businesses. For example:

  • Subcontractors – supplier subcontracting chains can be complex and opaque, making it difficult for businesses to know the true conditions under which workers are employed, with cost-cutting pressures sometimes increasing the risk of forced labour.
  • Hidden roles – workers in informal or unregulated positions, such as waste pickers or seasonal labourers, are often overlooked by oversight mechanisms and therefore highly vulnerable.
  • Undervalued roles – women in informal or gendered roles face disproportionate risks of exploitation that conventional monitoring systems frequently miss.

Forced labour can also be systematically enabled or imposed by state authorities, under the guise of poverty alleviation, security measures, or labour transfer programmes.

The compliance issue – why businesses must act now on forced labour

Under the EU FLR, each EU Member State must designate competent authorities – i.e. a state regulator – to oversee compliance. If forced labour is confirmed, authorities may order products to be withdrawn, destroyed, or recycled. Goods may only be reintroduced once the forced labour link has been fully eliminated.

It is important to note that the EU FLR does not impose new due diligence obligations beyond existing EU and national laws. However, before launching an investigation into a potential incidence of forced labour, authorities will request information on the economic operator’s due diligence efforts, which is in line with the UN Guiding Principles on Business & Human Rights (UNGPs). ​

If a company can show at an early stage that it has strong due diligence processes in place, regulators may decide there is no need to open a full investigation at that point – though authorities can return to the case later if additional concerns arise, highlighting the importance of ongoing risk management. Evidence of proactive mitigation may protect companies from investigation. This means companies should embed forced labour risk management into ESG and human rights frameworks, building strong and effective systems that:

  • Identify and assess forced labour risks across supply chains.
  • Implement policies and procedures to prevent risk of forced labour.
  • Establish grievance and remediation mechanisms aligned with UNGPs.
  • Continuously monitor and improve practices to ensure compliance and protect workers.

The FLR sets a clear expectation that goods entering or sold within the EU should be free from the risk of forced labour. To meet this standard, companies of all sizes must implement robust due diligence across supply chains to identify, mitigate, and remediate risks of forced labour. Evidence of proactive risk management can prevent full regulatory investigations. Companies that start preparing now will be in the strongest position by 2027.

Mariana Abreu, Global Lead for Human Rights, Anthesis

With this step, the EU joins other major economies that have also taken measures to address forced labour in supply chains. The United States implemented the Uyghur Forced Labor Prevention Act in 2022, Mexico’s ban on imports produced wholly or partly through forced labour came into effect in 2023, and Canada’s Forced and Child Labour in Supply Chains Act followed in 2024.

Taken together, these developments highlight a clear global trend: companies must ensure their supply chains are free from forced labour or risk losing access to key markets.

Need help understanding your risk?

We have a team of human rights leaders passionate about supporting organisations on addressing forced labour risks in their supply chains.

Loading…
]]>
EcoVadis as a Lever for Sustainable Transformation in the Agri-Food Chain https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/ecovadis-for-sustainable-agrifood-transformation/ Tue, 02 Sep 2025 07:20:44 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/ecovadis-como-palanca-de-transformacion-sostenible-en-la-cadena-agroalimentaria/

EcoVadis as a Lever for Sustainable Transformation in the Agri-Food Chain

2 September 2025

farm fields

Amid accelerating climate, biodiversity, and resource challenges—coupled with intensifying regulatory and stakeholder pressures—the agri-food sector holds a pivotal role in driving sustainable transformation.

Across the entire value chain—from primary production through packaging, transportation, and distribution—each stage presents opportunities to optimise performance while delivering transparent, accountable sustainability outcomes.

The global agri-food sector faces a dual challenge: ensuring quality, traceability, and regulatory compliance, while responding to consumers increasingly demanding transparency regarding product origin and sustainability credentials. The perishable nature of many raw materials—requiring cold chains and tight operational deadlines—transforms each stage into a potential critical control point without adequate visibility and management systems.

While many agri-food companies worldwide are integrating sustainability considerations into their business models, significant opportunities remain to develop more structured and systematic ESG approaches that drive measurable performance across environmental, social, and governance dimensions.

ESG evaluation as a strategic driver in the agri-food chain

ESG criteria have evolved from reputational add-ons to core business strategy components, particularly in sectors where environmental and social impacts are most significant. Today, the agri-food sector faces multifaceted challenges: greenhouse gas emissions, intensive water use, soil degradation, animal welfare concerns, precarious working conditions during cultivation and harvesting, and dependence on chemical inputs. Combined with growing consumer pressure, this demands traceability, ethics, transparency, and genuine commitment from brands.

To address this complexity, companies increasingly turn to platforms like EcoVadis, which enables standardised evaluation of suppliers’ environmental, social, and ethical performance. These tools provide visibility into practices and risks associated with third-party partners. It’s no longer sufficient to apply good practices within organisational boundaries—companies must take decisive action to prevent, mitigate, and remedy social and environmental risks linked to their operations, products, and services.

EcoVadis in agri-food: a new approach to supplier management

EcoVadis is a global ESG evaluation platform covering more than 21 criteria across environment, labour practices, ethics, and sustainable procurement, based on recognised standards including ISO 26000, UN Global Compact, GRI, and OECD guidelines.

Beyond being a control mechanism, EcoVadis offers sector comparability, monitoring dashboards, benchmarking capabilities, and action plans that help suppliers improve their sustainability performance. Leading companies increasingly require suppliers to undergo evaluation through this platform, sometimes establishing it as a prerequisite for maintaining business relationships or accessing specific product categories.

This approach delivers multiple strategic objectives:

  • Supply chain visibility: enables understanding of suppliers’ ESG performance and risk detection before impacts or conflicts arise.
  • Stakeholder transparency: EcoVadis results are shareable, allowing tangible demonstration of sustainability commitment to consumers and investors.
  • Regulatory compliance: tools like EcoVadis help meet current and future regulations, including the European Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence Directive (CSDDD), French Duty of Vigilance Law, and Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) requirements.
  • Long-term partnership building: the evaluation focuses on improvement rather than punishment, fostering more structured and collaborative buyer-supplier dialogue.

EcoVadis’ key strength lies in its adaptability. Evaluations adjust to each company’s sector, size, and location—particularly relevant in agri-food, where small rural cooperatives coexist with large industrial groups with global reach. A traditional olive oil producer faces different requirements than a multinational food logistics company.

This flexibility enables broader participation while offering realistic, progressive sustainability roadmaps. Rather than imposing rigid standards, EcoVadis supports companies within their specific contexts, helping elevate practices and consolidate more responsible and resilient value chains.

Advantages for suppliers

For agri-food suppliers—producers, input manufacturers, transporters, cooperatives—EcoVadis evaluation may initially generate concerns. The process requires information gathering, questionnaire completion, and documentation to support practices.

However, the benefits far outweigh the efforts:

  • Clear performance diagnosis: evaluation reveals company sustainability maturity levels and identifies critical improvement areas.
  • Continuous improvement framework: reports with recommendations help prioritize actions, implement improvements, and demonstrate progress in successive evaluations.
  • Market access enhancement: strong EcoVadis scores open opportunities, as many large companies only engage or renew suppliers meeting minimum ratings.
  • Enhanced reputation and trust: independent evaluation provides credibility with clients, partners, financial institutions, and public administration.
  • Future regulatory preparation: documented and evaluated processes increasingly support European legislation compliance.

Additionally, evaluated suppliers can share scores with multiple clients from the same platform, optimising effort investment

Keys to successful EcoVadis implementation

For both evaluation requesters and recipients, these recommendations can make the difference:

  • Progress Communication: Sharing results and implemented actions reinforces reputation and demonstrates leadership.EcoVadis as a Lever for Transformation
  • Cross-functional Engagement: Sustainability, quality, procurement, and human resources must work in coordination.
  • Strategic Preparation: Prepare documentation, review existing policies, and adapt procedures as necessary rather than improvising.
  • Commitment to Continuous Improvement: Achieving an acceptable score once isn’t sufficient—demonstrating ongoing progress matters most.
  • Supplier Support: Leading companies generate positive impacts by helping suppliers improve rather than demanding performance without offering support.

EcoVadis as a transformation catalyst

Beyond simple rating assignment, EcoVadis drives structured ESG risk and opportunity management, enabling companies to identify improvement areas and prioritise them based on value chain impact. In a sector as fragmented and diverse as agri-food—where small producers coexist with large distributors—the standardisation and transparency this tool provides are essential for aligning objectives and building stakeholder trust.

Examples of sector improvements include:

  • Implementation of efficient water use policies and pesticide reduction in agricultural operations
  • Development of health and safety protocols in processing plants
  • Introduction of social and environmental clauses in subcontractor and local cooperative contracts
  • Enhanced traceability and documentation of ethical and environmental practices

The ability to compare sector performance not only fosters competitiveness but also drives the adoption of more sustainable and innovative models, including circular economy approaches and regenerative agriculture.

How Anthesis drives impact

Anthesis Spain is a strategic training partner of EcoVadis, the world’s leading business sustainability ratings provider. Strategic training partners are formally accredited to help companies complete sustainability assessments, review results, and improve practices across Environment, Labor and Human Rights, Ethics, and Sustainable Procurement.

Strategic training partners are carefully selected based on experience and expertise, completing rigorous training on EcoVadis methodology and evaluation processes. To obtain this accreditation, partners must demonstrate deep knowledge of local environmental, ethical, and human rights regulations and challenges, while having completed the EcoVadis assessment for their own organisation.

As a strategic training partner, Anthesis is trained and authorised to:

  • Provide consulting services helping suppliers interpret scorecards and Corrective Action Plans, supporting implementation of improvements and sustainability practices throughout supply chains
  • Train and support suppliers in understanding EcoVadis methodology and completing assessments
  • Help buyers understand how EcoVadis assessment can benefit their business and supply networks

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Can Corporate Purpose Survive this New Era? https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/can-corporate-purpose-survive-this-new-era/ Wed, 27 Aug 2025 20:32:51 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=66878

Can Corporate Purpose Survive this New Era?

Pushback on Purpose: a sign of a fading phase or a maturing movement?
sky view

Public announcements of pullbacks in corporate sustainability, Diversity, Equity & Inclusion (DEI) initiatives and purpose-led commitments have prompted speculation about whether the era of purpose-driven business is over.

Has purpose lost its purpose?

At first glance, it’s easy to attribute this pushback to political populism, or a waning interest in purpose-driven business after reaching a peak.

But our experience across multiple sectors and speaking to many business leaders reveals a more nuanced story.

We have identified two key themes that help explain this change in approach towards organisational purpose:

  1. The success and more mainstream adoption of purpose has brought inevitable scrutiny 
  2. ‘Purpose’ has been applied inconsistently and superficially by some organisations, sparking a wave of cynicism that previously did not exist

Although it may seem like businesses are watering down their focus on purpose, we are having conversations with businesses every day that suggest purpose is not disappearing. Instead, it is entering a more mature phase – one that demands deeper integration, greater accountability, and a clearer connection to value creation.

This is not the end of purpose. This is the start of a new phase.

Read on to explore the evolution of purpose and how to stay ahead as we enter this new era.

The roots of purpose

At Anthesis, we define purpose as a management approach for profitably solving the problems of people and the planet. It is the organisational “why” that informs strategy, decision-making and culture.

A business that makes nothing but money is a poor business

Henry Ford, Founder of Ford Motor Company

Purpose has been around for generations. The Cadbury family’s development of the Bournville village for the health and wellbeing of workers and Henry Ford’s efforts around worker welfare in the 1910s are two notable examples.

Supercharged by the likes of Paul Polman at Unilever and John Elkington’s Triple Bottom Line theory, purpose became known as a differentiator in the late 20th century: a way to engage employees, to build brand loyalty, and to create a meaningful impact in the world.

Purpose evolved into a mainstream business concept as companies began to recognise that a strong corporate purpose could attract talent, inspire innovation, and strengthen relationships with customers, suppliers and wider stakeholders. 

Accompanying this wider adoption came mounting evidence to back a purpose-led approach. In research analysing 1.3 million employees, the Great Place to Work Institute found that of 59 factors, ‘purpose’ is the most influential in employee retention – increasing likelihood to stay by 2.7 times.

However, over recent months we have seen the emergence of a critical pushback – from both external observers and internal actors.

Enter the backlash

The backlash against purpose-led initiatives is sharpest around DEI and ESG (Environmental, Social & Governance).

In the US, major corporations including McDonald’s, Walmart, and Disney have downsized or eliminated DEI programmes in the last year.

In the UK, DEI budgets are being slashed and diversity-related roles quietly eliminated – including with regulators. Earlier this year saw the Bank of England scrap plans to introduce new diversity rules for financial institutions.

Go woke, go broke

John Ringo, Author

Sustainability is also under pressure on both sides of the Atlantic.

Our Cost of Silence report shows 79% of businesses are not communicating authentically on their environmental initiatives, either greenwashing or – more commonly – greenhushing.

Data from global advisory firm, Teneo, supports this phenomenon, reporting that last year less than half (49%) of S&P 500 companies issued press releases relating to their sustainability reports – down from 75% in 2021.

And this trend is not limited to communications.

Investor interest is cooling: only 48% of private investors considered ESG in 2024, down for the third year in a row, according to the Association of Investment Companies’ ESG Attitudes Tracker.

Prominent companies such as BP and HSBC have revised or delayed their climate targets, with some executives citing practicality and economic conditions as their rationale.

While many companies may rightly still consider themselves purpose-led without DEI and ESG, these initiatives are frequently the external manifestations of purpose itself.

Is purpose a victim of its own success?

Interestingly, this pushback can partially be explained by the success of purpose.

As purpose-driven principles have gained traction and become more visible, more companies have sought to align themselves with this way of differentiating their brand from competitors.

But some adopted lofty or ambiguous purpose statements without clear alignment to operations or performance – resulting in perceptions of inauthenticity and opportunism, rather than genuine commitment.

Primark’s 2018 Pride merchandise campaign, for example, faced criticism when it was revealed the products were manufactured in countries where LGBTQ+ rights are restricted and Pride itself is illegal.

This superficial or exaggerated application has contributed to a broader sense of cynicism around the idea of purpose.

This sentiment has been amplified by political and cultural divisions. Critics argue that the purpose agenda has overreached, with companies making outlandish or risky decisions to align with and leverage trending social movements that are in no way material to their business.

Even leading purpose organisations have felt the sting of this criticism. One of Unilever’s major investors publicly blamed the company’s “obsession” with purpose for its financial underperformance, fuelling the narrative that purpose distracts from core business priorities.

Is purpose a distraction?

But while a subset of companies are retreating from purpose initiatives, many others are doubling down. Behind the headlines, purpose is not vanishing but maturing – moving from aspiration to integration.

Companies are being asked to do too much on too many fronts, with too little expertise… we cannot solve every social issue through business

Jamie Dimon, CEO of JPMorgan Chase

We are witnessing a transition. Companies that once used purpose as a slogan are now being called to embed it in strategy.

Superficial commitments are being replaced by a more deliberate and accountable approach. Tapestry – parent company of Coach, Kate Spade and Stuart Weitzman – offers a clear example. After criticism over gaps between its public DEI statements and internal practice, the company appointed its first Chief Inclusion and Social Impact Officer in 2022, elevating DEI from an HR initiative to a business-wide priority. Goals like pay equity, representation, and retention are now embedded in every function and tied to executive pay.

Purpose today demands more than storytelling. It requires action, measurement, and relevance. This is not about discarding purpose – this is a move from adolescent exuberance to adult responsibility.

Reframing the critique

The recent criticism is less a rejection of purpose itself and more about how it’s been applied. We are seeing a natural rebalancing.

  • Purpose isn’t a panacea – It can’t single-handedly drive success. It cannot replace strong leadership, sound governance, or commercial acumen. At times, it’s been overused and/or shoe-horned belatedly into decisions.
  • Decision-making complexity – Purpose can be difficult to apply for leaders trained to focus solely on financial metrics. Recognising this complexity is crucial – not as a reason to back away, but as a call to upskill and build new decision-making muscles.
  • Higher expectations – Purpose-led organisations are held to a higher standard. Any misstep – real or perceived – invites accusations of hypocrisy, and the margin for error is seemingly slimmer when purpose is involved.
  • Lack of focus – Some companies have tried to tackle too many societal issues simultaneously, diluting their impact. Purpose should guide focus on what’s truly material to the business and its stakeholders – not an open invitation to fix the world.

In the rush to embrace purpose and its principles many businesses have stumbled and learned valuable lessons along the way. In some cases, purpose has become a distraction, or even a barrier to progress. This often stems from leadership teams moving too quickly without equipping employees with the skills or support needed to operationalise purpose into their everyday role.

Purpose is now a business expectation

There is some evidence to suggest purpose has now evolved to become a baseline expectation.

According to the Enacting Purpose Initiative at Oxford Saïd Business School, board directors and investors now expect organisations to have a clearly defined corporate purpose that “drives not only its strategic investments and choices, but also its responsibilities to the societies from which they derive their licence to operate”.

Similarly, employees have come to expect purpose as an integral part of their work life. In our recent Leading Through Uncertainty research, we found that ‘having a purpose beyond simply maximising profit’ was the second most important trait employees looked for in leaders, after ‘clear communication’.

The purpose of business is to meet unmet needs in society. When we do that well, financial performance follows

Satya Nadella, CEO of Microsoft

And the commercial results of purpose speak for themselves. A new report by CEO-led coalition Chief Executives of Corporate Purpose found that companies with a defined purpose deliver 58% higher revenue growth, and a 63% increase on returns on capital, compared to non-purpose-led peers.

Looking ahead: purpose 2.0

The most forward–looking companies are shifting from purpose as promise to purpose as practice, delivering it with consistency, authenticity, and measurable impact. This requires:

Relentlessly aligning purpose with performance

Success is all about sustainable performance – simultaneously delivering organisational performance and positive impact, not one at the expense of the other. Purpose-driven initiatives should contribute to commercial, operational or reputational uplift. And where there is no immediate commercial impact, think deeply and communicate clearly why this initiative will lead to a better-performing business in the long term.

Grounded in customer needs

Instead of working backwards from the societal challenges we face generally to find your purpose, start with your customers. What hopes, dreams and challenges do they have? What are the underlying societal issues causing these and how can you make a positive difference to these barriers?

Once you have identified these, re-evaluate how your organisation can change the wider system within its sphere of influence to address these challenges. Not only will this help your customers fulfil their needs, but it will also create opportunities for others to benefit from the system you have changed, and therefore ultimately create more impact for your business.

Moving from storytelling to storydoing

Actions speak louder than words. Companies which demonstrate purpose through innovation, transparency, and systemic advocacy build trust and impact more than any campaign.

Use purpose with precision

Not every decision requires a purpose lens. But for core questions around growth, innovation and resilience, purpose can be a powerful filter. Which decisions, forums and processes will purpose make a material difference in, and which decisions should be left to other criteria? Be honest, upfront and confident about these, and facilitate training for colleagues to become confident on how to deploy purpose in these situations.

Prepare for scrutiny

Purpose-led businesses must engage with critics, not ignore them. Invite in differences of opinion. Engage with the resistant forces to shape alternative (more robust) future plans, rather than shutting them out completely. Opposition can sharpen focus, improve design, and reveal blind spots. Embracing this friction is part of mature leadership.

Purpose: a more intentional chapter

The backlash against purpose is not a sign of its demise, but evidence of its maturity. Where once purpose was an emerging differentiator, it is now part of the mainstream – and even a baseline expectation. It now comes under more scrutiny and greater pressure to deliver.

Purpose can survive – and flourish – in this new era when businesses apply purpose with precision, accountability, and strategic clarity. The performative era is over – what comes next is more rigorous, intentional, and impactful.

Anthesis partners with ambitious organisations to define and embed purpose and create the change needed to unlock true sustainable performance. We bring together a unique set of capabilities including business strategy, transformation, innovation and education to equip businesses and leaders with the tools they need to navigate today’s business landscape.

]]>
Strategic Life Cycle Assessment Programmes https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/strategic-life-cycle-assessment-programmes/ Tue, 26 Aug 2025 15:44:03 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=66910
Guidance

Strategic LCA Programmes: A Blueprint for Targeted, Scalable Impact

26th August 2025

Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) offers a comprehensive, science-based methodology for evaluating environmental performance across the entire life cycle of a product, from raw material extraction to end-of-life disposal. But it’s possible to go one step further.

By embedding LCA into wider business strategy and processes through a strategic LCA programme, companies can move beyond sustainability claims on individual products, expanding focus to their entire portfolio and unlocking strategic innovation and opportunity.


This guide is designed to:

  • Outline the benefits of implementing a strategic LCA programme
  • Explore how to leverage the expertise of LCA specialists through a managed service.
  • Reveal how to scale initiatives and strengthen organisational LCA literacy
  • Offer key insights to those looking to enhance their existing LCA programmes

Download our guide for a deeper dive into how we have worked with clients around the world and across sectors to implement comprehensive and effective LCA programmes.

Loading…
]]>
Emerging Markets and the Opportunity for ESG to Drive Business Growth https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/emerging-markets-and-the-opportunity-for-esg-to-drive-business-growth/ Tue, 19 Aug 2025 14:41:52 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=66554

Emerging Markets and the Opportunity for ESG

Driving global business growth with credible ESG strategies

19 August 2025

Rice fields

Emerging markets – nations that are progressing through rapid growth and industrialisation – represent increasingly attractive opportunities for corporate global expansion. At the same time, governments, financial institutions, and consumers across such markets in Latin America, Africa, and Asia are driving a shift toward more sustainable economic models to accelerate growth, respond to growing investor interest, and align with global regulatory developments. Credible environmental, social, and governance (ESG) strategies can therefore be powerful enablers for companies looking to enter these new markets and to grow their business.

This article will explore three ESG-related opportunities in emerging markets:

  1. Access to ESG-linked financial instruments
  2. Unmet demand for sustainable products and services
  3. Regulatory harmonisation

We’ll also examine how companies with robust ESG strategies may be better positioned to successfully enter these markets.

Greater access to sustainable finance incentives

Governments and financial institutions in emerging markets have recently introduced a range of sustainability-linked financial instruments to attract investment and incentivise companies to pursue ambitious sustainability objectives. Among these is the fast-growing sector of sustainability-linked loans (SLLs), offering preferential terms such as potential interest rate reductions or increases, depending on the borrowers’ performance against predefined ESG performance targets (e.g., emissions reduction or gender equity).

The market for SLLs in emerging markets has expanded significantly, growing by nearly 60% between 2017 and 2021, and the adoption of SLLs is expected to continue accelerating, with the Asia-Pacific market leading at a projected compound annual growth rate (CAGR) of 27.8% through 2033. This growth is fueled by heightened awareness of climate risks, expanding public regulations on sustainable finance, and increasing technical assistance and investment from Development Finance Institutions (DFIs).

Notable SLL examples include the International Finance Corporation (IFC)’s $85 million loan to Precious Shipping Limited (PSL) in Thailand, tied to freshwater-use reduction targets for its vessels, and a $30 million loan to the Izmir Water and Sewerage Administration (IZSU) in Turkey, linked to a gender equity target of hiring at least 300 women in industries in which they are underrepresented. Similar financing arrangements have also been rolled out by multi-lateral development banks such as the African Development Bank and the Asian Development Bank.

Companies with robust ESG strategies supported by clear KPIs and measurable sustainability performance targets are best positioned to secure SLLs, as they effectively fulfill the eligibility requirements set by issuers. These strategies not only demonstrate alignment between business and sustainability objectives but also reflect strong internal performance management and mature performance relative to peers. This strategic positioning also supports market entry in regions where sustainable development is a national priority.

Unmet demand for sustainable products

Consumer preferences have long played a pivotal role in emphasising the business value of ESG, particularly in regions like the EU and North America. Recent research indicates that the demand for sustainable products is similarly rising in other parts of the world, especially in emerging markets across Asia, Latin America, and Africa. Consumer segments such as “zero-wasters” are now actively seeking sustainable product alternatives in these regions, signaling a shift toward more conscious consumption.

Additionally, another report found that over 80% of survey respondents in emerging markets indicated they care about the sustainability of products such as leisure travel, laptop computers, and apparel. Companies such as Kärcher are recognising this trend and strategically aligning their business expansion to respond, investing in the growth of sustainable and efficient cleaning technologies and addressing the growing demand for “green cleaning” in countries such as India.

Presently, this growing consumer demand in emerging markets remains unmet, as barriers such as unclear sustainability labelling still deter purchasing behavior. Companies that can identify and address these challenges are well-positioned for growth. For companies who do not yet have clearly articulated products or services related to sustainability, the development of an ESG strategy can help focus effort and investment into product innovation related to ESG that aligns with a company’s values, core competencies, and responds to evolving consumer expectations.

Regulatory harmonisation

Driven by rising investor and trading partner expectations for transparency, country-level ESG regulations in emerging markets have expanded and aligned with leading global frameworks and standards. For example, Brazil’s adoption of the ISSB standards integrates key elements from both the TCFD and SASB, signaling a shift toward internationally harmonised reporting. Similarly, Rwanda’s green taxonomy is deliberately structured to align with the TCFD and GRI frameworks, ensuring consistency in climate-related and broader sustainability disclosures. Aligning with global ESG frameworks is also expected to accelerate in emerging markets as global investors and companies continue to advocate for streamlined standards to reduce reporting and compliance complexity.

Companies with robust ESG strategies are well-positioned to recognise and respond to these shifts. By proactively aligning with foundational frameworks such as ISSB, TCFD, SASB, and GRI, they can embed regulatory readiness into their operations, reducing the cost of compliance that is often tied with expanding into new markets. This forward-thinking approach not only facilitates smoother market entry but also enables companies to meet growing expectations for transparency and performance measurement from regulators, investors, and other key stakeholders. Ultimately, a strong ESG strategy equips businesses to navigate multiple stakeholder demands simultaneously, enhancing trust, reducing regulatory risk, and creating competitive advantage in both domestic and international markets.


While increasing political and economic shocks have caused markets in North America and Europe to retreat and slow down on their sustainability agendas, some other regions such as Asia and Latin America are viewing these shocks as opportunities to accelerate their sustainability efforts. A recent survey revealed regional differences in attitudes toward sustainability, as 91% and 71% of respondents in North America and Europe, respectively, reported backlash against the sustainability agenda in their countries, while only 38% in Asia reported similar sentiments. Coupled with the continued development of mature financing instruments, unmet consumer demand, and increasing regulatory harmonisation, ESG has evolved beyond a resilience strategy and into an opportunity for business growth and value.

How Anthesis can help

At Anthesis, we specialise in guiding organisations to develop and implement robust ESG strategies or refresh existing strategies to keep pace with change. Our team of global experts can support your company to develop ESG programs and strategies that support entry into emerging markets through regulatory horizon scans, mandatory reporting readiness, materiality assessments, and stakeholder engagement. We are experts at identifying and mitigating ESG-related risks, uncovering opportunities for innovation through ESG, and making the business case for sustainability.

For more information about how our ESG advisory services can support expansion into emerging markets, please get in touch using the form below.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Going Beyond Carbon Footprints with Avoided Emissions https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/going-beyond-carbon-footprints-with-avoided-emissions/ Mon, 18 Aug 2025 12:39:36 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=66550

Going Beyond Carbon Footprints with Avoided Emissions

How Avoided Emissions Help Businesses Lead the Net Zero Transition

18 August 2025

Solar panels

In the race to limit global warming to 1.5°C, businesses are under increasing pressure to reduce their greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions. But what if companies could go beyond just shrinking their carbon footprints and actually become part of the climate solution?

Traditional GHG inventories focus solely on the emissions a company causes through its operations and value chain, but they may overlook the positive climate impact of the solutions a company provides. Reporting avoided emissions fills this gap by capturing how a company’s products or services help reduce emissions in society compared to a reference scenario. This enables organisations to demonstrate their contribution to global decarbonisation, prioritise high-impact innovations, and provide a forward-looking metric that reflects their role in enabling a low-carbon future – something GHG inventories alone cannot reveal.

What are avoided emissions?

There are different definitions for avoided emissions but one of the most used is from the World Business Council for Sustainable Development (WBCSD): “The estimated difference in full life cycle GHG emissions that result from a scenario with a solution in place, compared to a reference scenario without the solution when reference scenario emissions are higher” and where the reduction needs to occur in another actors’ direct emissions.

Note that, in contrast, the GHG Protocol currently does not require that emissions reductions are in another party’s direct emissions. Solutions that can generate avoided emissions can be classified in intermediary solutions (or enabling solutions) and end-use solutions.

Avoided emissions solutions
WBCSD, 2025: Guidance on Avoided Emissions – Helping business drive innovations and scale solutions towards Net Zero.

Accounting approaches for GHG inventories and avoided emissions are fundamentally different. A corporate GHG inventory contains data on the historical GHG emissions of a company’s value chain (Scope 1, Scope 2 and Scope 3 emissions using inventory accounting). Avoided emissions, on the other hand, are calculated as the difference between two scenarios.

In some cases, avoided emissions will overlap with a company’s scope 3 emissions. For instance, a company that introduces a product that is more efficient in the use phase will see a reduction in its scope 3 – category 10 (use of sold products) emissions, but could also claim the difference between the life cycle emissions of the two generations of products as avoided emissions.

Frameworks for credible reporting

To ensure integrity and avoid greenwashing, there are three main guidance documents for accounting and reporting avoided emissions:

To measure avoided emissions, the GHG Protocol offers a flexible, product-level comparative framework that is based on life cycle assessment (LCA). In contrast, WBCSD proposes a more comprehensive step-by-step calculation framework.  A company should report avoided emissions only under a certain set of criteria defined by the GHG Protocol and WBCSD:

  1. Climate Action Credibility: The company must have a comprehensive GHG inventory and a science-based climate strategy.
  2. Climate Science Alignment: The solution must align with 1.5°C pathways.
  3. Contribution Legitimacy: The solution must have a direct and significant decarbonising impact.

In all cases, avoided emissions must be reported separately from a company’s carbon footprint and cannot be used to claim carbon neutrality. Transparency is key: companies must disclose methodology, third-party verification, overlaps with and any potential rebound, and side effects.

Who benefits from reporting on avoided emissions?

Reporting avoided emissions is most useful to capture positive GHG impacts that are not already captured in a company’s GHG inventory, especially when a company will report higher emissions in their Scope 1 emissions to provide solutions that reduce another party’s direct emissions.

Many companies that report their corporate GHG inventories do so because their operations inherently produce emissions – often as a result of manufacturing, transporting, or selling goods that fulfill a specific function in the global economy. However, there is another category of companies whose primary role is to enable the functioning and transformation of that economy. These are the recyclers, waste management firms, next-generation materials startups, clean tech innovators, digital optimization platforms, and infrastructure providers for renewable energy and electrification. While their own emissions may appear modest or even misleadingly high under traditional Scope 1, 2, and 3 accounting, their true climate value lies in the emissions they help others avoid. These enablers are the backbone of decarbonisation, yet their contributions are often invisible in standard GHG inventories.

Another case where reporting avoided emissions becomes interesting is in cases where a company would see an increase in its reported GHG emissions, despite the net effect of a given change being to reduce total GHG emissions. This can occur, for example, by increasing product longevity. This is where avoided emissions become essential—not just as a metric, but as a recognition of their catalytic role in accelerating the net zero transition.

How Anthesis can help

Anthesis can support organisations in reporting and leveraging avoided emissions by integrating this forward-looking metric into broader decarbonisation and net zero strategies. Recognising that traditional GHG inventories do not capture the positive climate impact of low-carbon solutions, Anthesis can help clients quantify and communicate how their products, services, or projects reduce emissions in society compared to conventional alternatives.

Through tailored consulting, life cycle assessments, and scenario modeling, Anthesis can enable companies to identify high-impact opportunities, validate claims with scientific rigor, and align with frameworks such as the WBCSD guidance. This empowers businesses not only to demonstrate their contribution to global decarbonisation but also to drive innovation, attract investment, and differentiate themselves in a climate-conscious market.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Positioning Private Equity Assets to Maximise Exit Value Through ESG  https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/positioning-private-equity-assets-to-maximise-exit-value-through-esg/ Fri, 15 Aug 2025 12:09:43 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=66525

Positioning Private Equity Assets to Maximise Exit Value Through ESG

15 August 2025

Trees through clouds

In today’s private equity landscape, ESG is a strategic lever for value creation, risk management, and differentiation at exit. Investors and stakeholders are increasingly scrutinising a company’s ESG credentials, seeking evidence of responsible business practices and long-term resilience. For portfolio companies, this means that effective ESG positioning can directly influence valuation and buyer interest. But building a credible ESG story isn’t something that comes together in the final year of ownership; it requires consistent tracking, action and engagement throughout the investment lifecycle.

The growing role of ESG in exit valuations

As ESG expectations mature across the market, performance and transparency are increasingly influencing how investors assess value. A strong ESG track record can enhance investor confidence, differentiate the business and in some cases, command a premium at valuation, or at least mitigate discount risk.

ESG-related risks and opportunities are now core components of acquisition due diligence, often becoming focal points in transaction discussions. A company that can demonstrate progress, maturity and intent stands to benefit from smoother deal execution and fewer red flags during the diligence process.

According to the PRI’s Sustainability Value Creation report, firms that effectively embed ESG into their investment strategies can achieve up to 6-7% uplift in exit multiples, alongside a 6% increase in revenue, underlining the direct financial upside of integrating sustainability.

This shift is being driven by a combination of factors, including increasing regulatory scrutiny, reputational concerns and mounting pressure on institutional investors to demonstrate responsible investment practice. As a result, ESG is no longer just a risk filter, but a signal of quality and future readiness in the eyes of many buyers.

Build ESG into the value creation plan from day 1

The foundation of a strong ESG exit narrative is laid early in the investment lifecycle. At Anthesis, we engage with portfolio companies from the outset to drive meaningful progress, typically through ESG Onboarding as part of the 100-day plan, followed by regular ESG reviews throughout the hold period. Tracking the right metrics from day one allows companies to build a credible, data-backed narrative of progress and value creation throughout ownership, something that cannot be done in the final months before a transaction.

Key metrics will vary by sector and business model, but certain indicators tend to carry weight across most exit processes. These metrics include:

  • Decarbonisation and energy efficiency gains
  • DEI data reflecting workforce stability and inclusive culture
  • Supply chain transparency, which speaks to risk mitigation and ethical practices
  • Regulatory compliance improvements
  • Employee engagement scores
  • Evidence of governance maturity demonstrating clear ESG oversight and accountability

By embedding these metrics into regular reporting and board discussions, companies not only improve internal decision-making but also ensure they are well-positioned to meet buyer expectations with confidence and clarity.

Strengthening ESG positioning through vendor due diligence

For companies approaching exit, a dedicated vendor ESG due diligence (VDD) can be a powerful way to validate and communicate progress, identify gaps, and proactively address buyer expectations. Just as financial, legal, and commercial advisors are engaged to guide the deal process and navigate complex diligence requirements, Anthesis helps companies prepare for increasingly detailed ESG data requests and communicate their sustainable performance with clarity and credibility. By assessing the company’s current ESG profile, identifying material risks and opportunities and helping to prepare investor-grade documentation, the process strengthens internal alignment and ensures leadership is well-prepared for ESG-related discussions in buyer meetings.

Anthesis’ ESG vendor due diligence approach:

1. Discover

We start with a comprehensive desktop review of ESG documentation, including policies, reports, surveys, certifications, and performance data. This establishes a foundational understanding of ESG maturity and disclosure.

2. Engage

We benchmark ESG practices against selected peers using publicly available data. We also conduct management interviews to validate findings, fill data gaps, and explore material ESG risks and opportunities.

3. Focus

Where applicable, we assess alignment with SFDR Principal Adverse Impact (PAI) indicators and identify areas of strength or concern. Site visits can provide on-the-ground ESG insight.

4. Prepare

We deliver a tailored report summarising key ESG findings, clearly aligned to your needs and transaction timeline. Additional corrective action planning supports pre-deal improvements on priority ESG issues.

How Anthesis can support

An ESG-ready exit offers a strategic advantage, not only helping differentiate the company in a crowded market, but also expanding the pool of potential acquirers, particularly among ESG-conscious corporate and institutional investors who are actively seeking resilient, future-fit businesses.

Compelling ESG stories aren’t built in the final years of ownership. They are the result of early intention, consistent tracking and strategic preparation. For portfolio management teams, the message is clear: start early, measure what matters and prepare thoughtfully in the lead-up to a transaction.

If your business is planning an exit in the near future, Anthesis can help you identify gaps, sharpen your ESG positioning, and showcase your achievements to investors. We also work with companies across the entire investment lifecycle, from ESG onboarding and annual reviews during the hold period to tailored exit preparation. Our support includes guiding management teams through increasingly detailed ESG data requests, presenting sustainable performance credibly, and producing investor-grade materials.

Contact us to learn how we can help you navigate this critical phase with confidence.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Revised European Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS): What You Need to Know About the 2025 Draft Revision https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/revised-european-sustainability-reporting-standards-esrs/ Thu, 07 Aug 2025 08:19:46 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=66302

Revised European Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS)

What you need to know about the 2025 draft revision and how to respond

7 August 2025

Mountain

What’s happened?

On the 31st of July 2025, the European Financial Reporting Advisory Group (EFRAG), the body appointed by the European Commission to prepare technical standards for reporting against the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD), published a much anticipated draft of the revised European Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS). This follows the release of its Progress Report in June 2025. The consultation on the draft standards will be open until the 29th of September 2025.

The overarching aim is to simplify the standards, reduce complexity, and improve usability. In Anthesis’ view, the draft has made meaningful progress toward these goals.

What’s next?

The draft standards are now open for consultation, and EFRAG will organise outreach events throughout September and October to gather feedback from stakeholders.

Once the consultation closes on the 29th of September 2025, EFRAG will use the input to inform its technical advice to the European Commission, due by the 30th of November 2025. While the guidance may still evolve, the current draft offers a clear indication of EFRAG’s direction of travel.

How does this fit within the broader CSRD changes?

The ESRS revisions form part of the broader EU Omnibus Simplification Package, introduced in February 2025, which included a commitment to revise the standards.

While the ‘stop the clock’ amendment has delayed reporting deadlines for many companies, other regulatory components, including scope and disclosure requirements, remain under proposal. The EU Council’s latest proposal (21st of June 2025) supports EFRAG’s efforts to streamline the ESRS.

Key features of the ESRS

The ESRS are a set of reporting standards used to meet the requirements of the CSRD. While the CSRD sets out reporting requirements and obligations, the ESRS provide the framework and methodology for reporting.

The ESRS are made up of two cross-cutting standards (ESRS 1 and ESRS 2) and 10 topic standards. The topical standards are divided into Environmental (ESRS E1-E5), Social (ESRS S1-S4), and Governance (G1) categories, and are only mandatory where they are material to the organisation. Materiality is determined through a Double Materiality Assessment, which supports stakeholders to understand both the organisation’s impacts on people and the environment, as well as the material financial impacts of sustainability matters on the organisation.

Key proposed changes

Based on stakeholder engagement, including over 800 survey responses, EFRAG has:

  • Reduced mandatory datapoints (to be reported if material) by 57%
  • Reduced the full set of mandatory and voluntary datapoints by 68%, from 1,100 to 350
  • Shortened the overall length of the standards by over 55%

The simplification of the ESRS and reduction in the number of datapoints does not eliminate the need for robust data management and governance, which will still be required to accurately manage and track ESG data over time.

  • Organisations will be able to include an executive summary
  • Detailed disclosures can be moved to appendices to enhance readability
  • Policies, actions and targets will be consolidated into one central section, removing repetitive information
  • Mandatory disclosures will be limited to material matters, with flexibility around non-material topics and clearer distinctions between mandatory and non-mandatory requirements
  • Greater alignment with other standards, with priority given to alignment with the International Financial Reporting Standards’ (IFRS) International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB) S1 and S2 standards

Key updates to double materiality include:

  • The double materiality assessment remains pivotal to the ESRS and should start with an analysis of the business model to identify material topics
  • Companies can apply a top-down (starting with obviously material and not-material topics based on existing knowledge) or bottom-up (assessing all topics for relevance) approach for materiality, or a combination of the two
  • IROs (Impacts, Risks, and Opportunities) should be scored pre-mitigation, with residual risks noted
  • Additional practical considerations companies can take to reduce the complexity of the process added, for example, companies may not need to analyse each characteristic of severity
  • Materiality prioritisation guidance added for social topics with a new emphasis on focusing on key geographies, business units, or sub-topics when assessing social impacts
  • New flexibility to cross-reference to financial statements when reporting on monetary amounts or other quantitative information
  • New detail provided on how to disclose anticipated financial effects (though still required)

Key updates to the cross-cutting standards, include:

  • Streamlining of governance disclosures
  • Separation of SBM-3 (how sustainability matters, including how IROs influence the company’s strategy and business model) from IRO-2 (the processes for identifying and assessing these material IROs)
  • Clearer guidance on aggregating IROs at a higher level where appropriate and how to handle for location-specific environmental impacts
  • Descriptions of IROs may be presented alongside disclosures on related policies, targets, and actions
  • Clarification of the role of General Disclosure Requirements (formerly Minimum Disclosure Requirements), particularly in relation to policies, actions, targets, and metrics
Significant simplifications have been proposed across the topical standards, with a focus on removing duplication, reducing datapoints, and aggregating at the cross-cutting standards (ESRS 1, ESRS 2) level where possible.
Key changes include:
  • Datapoints relating to policies, actions and targets removed
  • Site-level reporting is no longer required for Environmental or Social KPIs
  • New reliefs introduced for:
    • Commercially sensitive data
    • Consolidation of reporting boundaries (e.g. for GHG inventory)
    • Allowance for the use of estimates or proxy data
    • Allowance to omit data from metrics if collecting such data would entail “undue cost or effort”
Environmental (E1-E5)
  • 60-80% reduction in datapoints
  • Datapoints and guidance on the identification of local impacts related to pollution, water resources and biodiversity, and ecosystems removed. These impacts are typically linked to specific sites
  • ESRS E1 – climate change:
    • Increased focus on absolute GHG reduction targets, consistency with inventory boundaries, and how targets align with limiting global warming to 1.5°C
    • Transition plan disclosures are now more focused, with clearer guidance and a consolidated format highlighting only the key features of the plan
    • Disclosures must still indicate when no plan exists, and a new datapoint on dependencies (including locked-in emissions) has been added to align with IFRS S2
    • Scenario analysis is not mandatory for all undertakings but, if used, must follow clarified methodological expectations
    • Key elements of climate risk identification and assessment are now consolidated into a single datapoint for greater clarity
  • ESRS E2 – pollution: More focus and guidance on microplastics disclosure requirements
  • ESRS E3 – water and marine resources: Disclosures on marine resources removed
  • ESRS E4 – biodiversity and ecosystems:
    • 78% shorter with a focus on one transition plan disclosure
    • Biodiversity offsets must be disclosed but only at a high-level
  • ESRS E5 – resource use and circular economy:
    • Narrowed disclosure to key products regarding durability, reparability, and rate of recycled content
    • A metric on the “percentage of critical/strategic raw materials” added
    • Only material hazardous waste flows need to be fully disclosed
    • A new mandatory metric (subject to materiality) added on the percentage or weight of waste generated for which the final treatment or destination is unknown
Social (S1-S4)
  • A 53-64% reduction in datapoints
  • 8 datapoints from the 4 standards have been merged into a single “human rights policy” disclosure under ESRS 2 General Disclosures, aligning with IFRS S1/S2
  • Most optional (may disclose) options have been removed; only core narrative or quantitative disclosures remain where they are strictly required
  • ESRS S1 – own workforce: Metrics tables for diversity, health & safety, grievance, labour engagement, and community indicators condensed or merged for clarity
  • ESRS S4 – consumers and end users:
    • Focus narrowed to essential consumer/safety topics
    • Marketing and product-related datapoints are now largely optional or removed
    • Sensitive data can be summarised
Governance (G1)
  • A 50% reduction in datapoints
  • The alignment of the structures of the Policies, Actions and Targets section in G1 with the rest of the ESRS

EFRAG has published several helpful documents alongside the public consultation survey, including detailed logs of amendments for each standard. These are useful for understanding the proposed changes quickly.

What should you do now? 

While this draft is subject to change, the direction of travel is set, and ESRS simplification will happen.

For organisations entering Year 2 of CSRD reporting
While there may be limited opportunity to respond to the proposed simplification in your next report, you can align with its intent. Focus on developing strategies to manage your IROs and that you are reporting on how they align with the actions you’re taking, the metrics and KPIs you’re using, and your performance.

For companies with a two-year delay
There is time to prepare, but plenty to do ahead of the deadline. If you haven’t already, start your double materiality assessment now, using the draft revised ESRS as a guide. Doing so gives you time to collect data, close gaps, and shape an integrated sustainability strategy ahead of the FY2027 deadline.

Organisations that have already finalised their Double Materiality Assessment 
Begin preparing for a gap analysis focused on at least three core ESRS: E1 (Climate), S1 (Own Workforce), and G1 (Business Conduct). Analysis of existing reports from Wave 1 companies shows that all reported on these three standards, making them a logical and low-risk starting point. By concentrating on the mandatory quantitative disclosures within these ESRS, companies can gain time, maintain momentum, and avoid over-engineering early-stage reporting efforts. You may also choose to extend this approach to other clearly material topics, applying the same focused methodology.

Although the reporting deadline has been pushed back, using this time to make continuous improvements will enable more mature and robust disclosures by 2028. With a realistic roadmap and clear alignment from top management, you’ll be in a stronger position to secure the necessary budget and cross-functional time commitments, especially as ESG managers cannot deliver this alone.

How Anthesis can help

At Anthesis, we help clients go beyond compliance to unlock the full value of sustainability reporting.

Our approach ensures your CSRD disclosures:

  • Reflect your unique risks and opportunities
  • Are decisions useful for internal and external stakeholders
  • Support governance, performance, and long-term impact

With 1,400+ sustainability experts across climate, human rights, supply chain, finance, and beyond, we bring deep technical know how, regulatory insight, and a proven ability to implement change.

Whether you’re starting your CSRD journey or preparing your second report, we can help you bridge the gap between materiality and action.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Forever Chemicals, New Rules: PFAS Compliance Under the EU’s PPWR https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/forever-chemicals-new-rules-pfas-compliance-under-the-eus-ppwr/ Wed, 06 Aug 2025 14:46:17 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=66303

Forever Chemicals, New Rules: PFAS Compliance Under the EU’s PPWR

What an EU-wide restriction on PFAS may mean for your business

6 August 2025

PFAS chemicals

The EU’s Packaging and Packaging Waste Regulation (PPWR), published in February 2025, introduced an EU-wide restriction on Per- and polyfluoroalkyl substances (PFAS) in food-contact packaging, set to apply from 12 August 2026. The PPWR also addresses substances of concern (SoCs) and recycled content, both of which may have implications for PFAS content in other types of packaging. In this article, we explore the PFAS requirements introduced by the PPWR, and what they mean for your business.

What are PFAS?

PFAS are a large group of chemicals that have been widely used in various industry and consumer applications since the 1950s.  PFAS are particularly valued for their water and grease resistance and thermal stability, making them useful in many packaging applications such as fast-food wrappers, pizza boxes, microwave popcorn bags, and takeaway containers. PFAS can also contribute to chemical resistance and, in some cases, enhanced oxygen barrier performance, such as in pharmaceutical blister packs. As a result, PFAS are present in a wider range of packaging materials and functional layers than might be immediately apparent.

Often referred to as “forever chemicals”, PFAS are persistent in the environment and can move throughout ecosystems, resulting in numerous pathways of exposure. Exposure to certain PFAS has been linked to a number of health risks, and some PFAS are associated with high global warming potentials. Governments have been taking steps to regulate PFAS use, with the goal of reducing human exposure and release into the environment.

PFAS under the PPWR

Different organisations use different definitions for PFAS. In the context of the PPWR a wide definition is used:

PFAS Definition under PPWR
The definition of PFAS under the PPWR.

What PFAS requirements does the PPWR introduce?

Article 5 of the PPWR introduces a restriction on PFAS in food-contact packaging, effective 12 August 2026. In the context of the PPWR, food-contact packaging is packaging that is intended for food contact or that is already in contact with food. This includes disposable packaging for filling at point of sale, such as single-use cups used to serve takeaway beverages.

The PPWR sets three PFAS limits in food-contact packaging:

  • Individual non-polymeric PFAS detected by targeted analysis: 25 ppb
  • Total non-polymeric PFAS detected by targeted analysis: 250 ppb
  • All PFAS, including polymeric PFAS: 50 ppm

Packaging manufacturers must provide technical documentation showing compliance with this restriction. If total fluorine exceeds 50 ppm, suppliers must, upon request, provide evidence indicating how much of that fluorine is from PFAS and how much from non-PFAS.

What future implications might PPWR developments have for PFAS in packaging?

In the coming years, some additional provisions under the PPWR may become relevant for the PFAS content of food-contact packaging, and/or other packaging.

Substances of concern

Article 5 of the PPWR stipulates that the Commission should consider measures to address substances of concern (SoCs), such as restrictions on their use. Producers and users of non-food packaging should be aware that some PFAS will be considered SoCs under the PPWR, and the use of these PFAS in non-food packaging may be restricted in the future.

The PPWR uses the definition of SoCs from Article 2(27) of the Ecodesign for Sustainable Products Regulation (ESPR). Based on this definition the following PFAS are SoCs under the PPWR:

Substances of concern under the PPWR

Recycled content

Article 7 of the PPWR sets targets for recycled content in plastic packaging. Recycled material can contain PFAS. As they work to increase recycled content, producers of food-contact packaging must remain compliant with the PPWR’s PFAS threshold, and producers of non-food packaging should be aware of any new SoC thresholds.

Digital marking

Article 12 of the PPWR provides for the use of digital marking technology to convey certain types of information. By 1 January 2030, this technology will be required to identify SoC content in packaging. Where the packaged product requires a digital product passport (DPP), for instance under the ESPR, this packaging data should be contained in the DPP.

What should you do now?

There are several steps companies can take to prepare for the PFAS requirements under the PPWR:

1. Identify PFAS hotspots

Companies should begin by reviewing their portfolio to identify likely PFAS hotspots. This can be done by scanning for characteristics and functions commonly associated with intentional PFAS use, such as grease- and moisture-resistance. The PPWR does not differentiate between intentionally added and non-intentionally added PFAS in determining compliance, so companies should also identify common sources of non-intentionally added PFAS, such as recycled paper and cardboard. Given the short timeline, hotspots can be prioritised in the next steps.

2. Collect PFAS data

Suppliers of packaging materials should check whether PFAS in their portfolio fall within the PPWR’s definition.

  • If the total fluorine in their product is expected to exceed 50 ppm, they should perform total fluorine analysis. If total fluorine does exceed 50 ppm, they should determine the amount of total fluorine from PFAS and be prepared to provide this information to downstream users upon request.
  • If non-intentional PFAS is likely, such as in recycled cardboard, suppliers should consider performing targeted analysis to verify if their products are compliant with the 25 and 250 ppb thresholds.

Users of packaging materials should reach out to their suppliers to ask if they know of any PFAS in their materials and if they perform targeted PFAS tests and/or total fluorine analyses.

3. Develop a Mitigation Strategy

Finally, companies should develop a strategy for mitigating their risk of PFAS exposure and for complying with the PPWR, including:

  • Performing an alternatives assessment, with particular attention to ensuring that the alternatives do not hinder recyclability.
  • Developing best practice guidance for transitioning to sustainable packaging.

How Anthesis can help

Anthesis can assist both suppliers and packaging manufacturers in reviewing their portfolios and advising on compliance with the PFAS requirements in the PPWR. Our digital solutions enable the collection and management of all relevant supply chain and portfolio data. We have extensive expertise in food contact materials, packaging, and chemicals regulations, including supporting our clients with:

  • Tracking relevant PFAS regulations in sectors and geographies specific to their products and evaluating their likely impact on business.
  • High-level PFAS hot-spotting of product portfolios to better target supplier engagement strategies.
  • Detailed supplier engagement using our Anthesis Compliance Suite platform to assess product & packaging portfolio’s for the presence of PFAS.
  • Assessing PFAS from a Life Cycle Assessment perspective.
  • Identification and assessment of alternatives to PFAS.
  • Summarising and responding to tactical questions on reporting.

We can also provide support with recent national measures, such as PFAS restrictions in France and Denmark and North American PFAS reporting obligations, as well as horizon scanning and preparedness for upcoming measures, such as the expected EU-level universal PFAS restriction.

Whether you’re seeking regulatory clarity, safer alternatives, or strategic planning, Anthesis is here to help you stay ahead of the evolving PFAS landscape.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
To SBTi, or Not to SBTi? https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/to-sbti-or-not-to-sbti/ Fri, 01 Aug 2025 18:00:48 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=66245

To SBTi, or Not to SBTi?

A practitioner’s guide to navigating the trade-offs of SBTi target validation

1 August 2025

Plant on black rocks

The Science Based Targets initiative’s (SBTi) recent release of the version 2.0 draft of the Corporate Net-Zero Standard adds another layer to the ever-growing stack of sustainability standards, frameworks, and climate nuances that practitioners must navigate.

The rapid and extensive changes transforming the sustainability landscape—including evolving regulations and increasingly complex reporting standards—pose significant challenges, even for the most experienced sustainability professionals striving to uphold their sustainability commitments while maintaining strategic clarity.

Still, SBTi remains a top-tier standard that drives innovation and climate impact reduction within a business while bolstering brand image.

In this article, we explore both the benefits and hurdles of setting SBTi-validated targets to help you decide if they are a strategic fit for your business.

Reasons for SBTi-validated targets

Let’s start with the good. SBTi is still one of the best, if not the best, and most robust emission reduction target-setting standards available for the business sector. Other frameworks, such as Business Ambition for 1.5°C and the Race to Zero campaign, or ISO Net Zero and the Oxford Principles, are either signatory-based or represent a collection of best practices, respectively. They do not serve the function of setting discrete, measurable, time-bound corporate emission reduction targets. SBTi’s standards are one of the only frameworks that serve this niche.  

Key benefits of setting SBTi-validated targets include:

  1. Recognised, standardised, comparable targets supported by external validation
  2. Reduced target-setting loopholes
  3. Holding the line internally
  4. Supported by science and industry-specific research
  5. Validity across raters and rankers
  6. Specific benefits for small and medium-sized enterprises
  7. Keeping companies accountable

1. Recognised, standardised, comparable targets supported by external validation

When you set an SBTi-validated target, your customers, peers, investors, and other stakeholders have instant assurance that your target is robust and aligned with the latest climate science and your company has gone the extra step of obtaining SBTi’s seal of approval. Further, by joining the group of 8,500+ companies that have already set SBTi-validated targets, you have the ability to quickly assess how your progress stacks up against your competitors and peers in a standardised and comparable way.

2. Reduced target-setting loopholes

The SBTi framework helps prevent companies from obfuscating emissions growth or focusing on less materially significant emissions sources when setting targets. Specifically, the forthcoming version 2.0 draft standard, although more complex, is purposefully designed to promote a “right action” approach, ensuring that target-setting drives meaningful and high-impact climate outcomes.

3. Holding the line

Choosing to set SBTi-validated targets means that your target ambition (i.e., how much you must reduce and by when) is firmly grounded in the latest scientific consensus.  A common challenge for sustainability practitioners is the progressive dilution of climate commitments during internal negotiations with operational and executive teams. Often, without a starting point or line in the sand, targets are framed solely around what is achievable, rather than what is also aligned with science. Pursuing an SBTi-validated target helps sustainability leaders set this boundary internally and reduce complexity during target implementation.

4. Supported by science and industry-specific research

On a global scale, the science is clear: we must reduce emissions 50% by 2030 and achieve net-zero by 2050 to preserve a habitable planet. Embedded within those overarching targets, however, lie numerous important nuances that shape how we approach climate action on the ground. SBTi has undertaken the laborious work of translating complex climate science into clearly defined standards that account for nuances such as variations in sector-specific approaches, the calibrated role of carbon offsets, and acceptable base years for target setting.  Below, we’ve explored how some of these nuances play out within SBTi’s standards.

  • Unique Sectoral Approaches: As an example, the energy sector plays an outsized role in driving the climate transition. Achieving net-zero globally necessitates that the energy sector decarbonise more rapidly than other sectors, thereby serving as a springboard for other sectors to decarbonise.  Likewise, the forestry, land, and agriculture (FLAG) sector holds a distinct responsibility in carbon sequestration and atmospheric regulation. Consequently, target-setting methodologies for the energy sector differ significantly from those applied to the FLAG sector, reflecting their respective climate impacts. Choosing to set a SBTi-validated target ensures that your emission reduction goals are tailored specifically to your business context and industry.
  • Carbon Offsets: Similarly, carbon offsets carry specific nuances in how they can be applied within an emission reduction target. Internally, organisations often face significant challenges in achieving consensus on the appropriate role of carbon offsets within their sustainability programs. By choosing to set SBTi-validated targets, companies align their positions with the most recent scientific guidance and best practices regarding the role of carbon offsets.

In sum, SBTi has translated complex climate science into a tangible, explicit standard that incorporates critical nuances, effectively distilling scientific insights into practical frameworks for guiding credible climate action. This means organisations don’t need expert-level climate knowledge to set credible, science-aligned emissions reduction targets.

5. Validity across raters and rankers

An SBTi-validated target often enhances an organisation’s performance across leading disclosure and rating platforms, including CDP, DJSI, and Ecovadis. These programs generally award higher scores to companies that adopt emission reduction targets validated by an independent third party and standardised to a recognised science-based framework, compared to those with unvalidated or internally defined targets. Consequently, setting SBTi-validated targets strengthens credibility and comparability in sustainability reporting and benchmarking.

6. Specific benefits for small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs)

If you qualify as an SME, there is a reduced fee and reduced complexity in target-setting with SBTi. We strongly recommend SMEs obtain SBTi validation as there is a low barrier to entry to securing the highest seal of approval.

7. Keeping companies accountable to their commitments

With voluntary requirements to disclose emissions progress annually and a database that tracks and denotes current target validation status (as well as companies that have withdrawn their commitments), SBTi validation can help companies stay on track.

Reasons against SBTi validation

Taking all the benefits into account, there may still be some challenges your business may wish to consider before pursuing SBTi-validated targets.

Common hurdles to setting SBTi-validated targets include:

  1. Cost to commit
  2. Cost to maintain
  3. Updates and stricter requirements
  4. Regulatory uncertainty

1. Cost to commit 

Securing official SBTi validation typically involves a fee ranging from approximately $10,000 to $25,000 (USD), depending on whether you are submitting near-term targets alone or alongside net-zero targets. Additional expenses frequently arise from engaging external consultants to interpret SBTi standards, ensure full compliance with rigorous criteria, and navigate the diverse methodologies, timelines, and sector-specific requirements integral to an SBTi-aligned target. Depending on the level of internal capacity versus consultant involvement—which can range from light advisory support to comprehensive end-to-end guidance—total costs often range from $15,000 up to $250,000, and are dependent on various factors include company size and unique needs.

2. Cost to maintain

After SBTi validation, ongoing annual maintenance is required. Beyond regularly updating your greenhouse gas inventory and disclosing your progress, which is standard practice for most established sustainability programs, you must also manage base year adjustments. This includes accounting for changes in methodology, mergers, acquisitions, or divestitures that may affect your emissions baseline. For companies with two or more years of GHG Protocol-aligned inventories, this process is typically familiar. However, organisations undergoing frequent structural changes or anticipating significant methodological shifts should be prepared for additional base year maintenance efforts. Furthermore, companies wishing to maintain an active SBT must also conduct a mandatory five-year review to revalidate their target. While reviewing targets regularly is surely good practice, the burden and cost of additional validation could be another potential obstacle.

3. Upping the ante

SBTi regularly updates its standards, requirements, and validation process to enhance rigor and reflect the latest global emissions reduction progress, as well as insights gained from corporate climate action. For example, in July 2022, SBTi discontinued acceptance of Scope 1 and 2 targets aligned with well-below 2°C pathways in order to accelerate decarbonisation efforts and address the stagnation in global emissions reductions. The draft version 2.0 net-zero standard further rules out some target-setting practices that were previously allowed. These changes and shifts can make staying up-to-date and maintaining the business case for SBTi challenging.

4. Regulatory uncertainty

Regulatory uncertainty around disclosing emission reduction targets has become a heightened concern of many organisations in recent years. While most current regulations focus on emissions and climate risk disclosure, some emerging laws – such as New York’s Fashion Sustainability and Social Accountability Act and earlier drafts of the SEC’s climate disclosure rule – also involve the disclosure of emission reduction targets.

Meanwhile, greenwashing lawsuits are increasing, especially in the realm of consumer protection. High-profile lawsuits against companies like H&M, JBS, and Volkswagen underscore legal risks tied to false or misleading environmental claims that misrepresent a company’s or product’s sustainability impact. It’s important to note, however, that there is little evidence to suggest that companies face legal risks solely for voluntarily committing to reduce their emissions –the vast majority of lawsuits in this space pertain to consumer protection and green claims.

Regulatory developments remain in flux, exemplified by the SEC’s March 2025 decision to end its defense of climate disclosure rules, which has left federal climate disclosure regulation in legal limbo, increasing uncertainty for organisations navigating this space.

Other considerations

When designing and implementing sustainability programs, it is essential to consider both the broader environmental context and the evolving expectations for corporate ambition. The following points highlight key factors that can influence the effectiveness and integrity of target setting beyond SBTi-validated targets.  

  • Planetary Boundaries: The SBTi focuses on greenhouse gas emissions and atmospheric impacts, not on other critical planetary boundaries like freshwater use, land-system change, or biodiversity loss. Several of these boundaries have already been surpassed or are approaching critical tipping points. When setting emission targets, it’s critical to avoid shifting environmental burdens from one area to another within their decarbonisation roadmaps.
  • Ambition Beyond Minimums: The SBTi sets a 42% reduction target for Scope 1 and 2 emissions by 2030, but the Paris Agreement calls for a more aggressive 50% reduction. Many countries have missed their Nationally Determined Contributions, highlighting the urgency for faster cuts. Companies should strive to exceed SBTi targets—especially for emissions directly under their control—to meaningfully contribute to achieving global net-zero goals.

The bottom line

Deciding to pursue SBTi-validated targets is a key step in a company’s sustainability strategy. It’s important to assess how the standard aligns with your business goals and where it may pose limitations. Grounded in science, the SBTi offers a credible, consistent framework aligned with global climate goals. However, the financial costs, ongoing effort, and need to keep up with evolving criteria require careful evaluation of your organisation’s capacity and readiness.

Ultimately, companies must balance the value of external recognition against their internal priorities and capacity. If your company is equipped with the resources and ambition to lead on climate action, SBTi validation can help demonstrate credibility and drive meaningful progress. Alternatively, beginning with science-aligned internal goals and preparing for future validation may be more practical. Target-setting is a driving force for progress rather than a task to complete—start where you can, stay informed, and continuously evaluate the tools and frameworks that best support your sustainability journey.

Focus on building a foundation with complete, accurate GHG emissions data, realistic reduction plans, team collaboration, and systems designed to evolve with future demands. In essence, choose the path that moves your organisation forward—always remembering that starting early amplifies your impact on global climate efforts and fortifies your company’s long-term resilience.

How Anthesis can help

Anthesis supports companies pursuing or renewing SBTi-validated targets, ensuring these targets remain credible, ambitious, and aligned with the latest climate science. Through this process, we help mitigate climate risks and prepare your business for future relevance and resilience in a net-zero economy.

We also assist organisations throughout their decarbonisation journeys, offering comprehensive support across inventory development, target-setting, revalidation, and implementation. Additionally, we guide companies in investing in high-quality carbon removal projects.

For companies not currently pursuing SBTi-validated targets, we provide support to achieve internal and strategic alignment on alternative climate goals, ensuring you have the data, roadmaps, and resources needed to take actionable next steps.

There are numerous complementary strategies that effectively address a company’s climate impact and help mitigate climate and nature risk, both alongside and beyond science-based targets.  These include renewable energy strategies, product life cycle assessment and the implementation of circular business models, supplier engagement and supply chain due diligence, and enhanced nature, biodiversity, and water stewardship.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Voluntary Carbon Market (VCM) Update Q1 Q2 – 2025 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/voluntary-carbon-market-vcm-update-q1-q2-2025/ Wed, 23 Jul 2025 12:38:24 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=65821
Whitepapers

Voluntary Carbon Market (VCM) Update Q1 Q2 – 2025

Since early 2025, the voluntary carbon market has evolved with strong credit retirements and a growing focus on quality. While issuances remain stable, retirements may soon outpace them, driven by demand for high-integrity credits. Transparency, accountability, and standardisation are now key market drivers.

New guidance from the SBTi and governance frameworks from ICVCM and VCMI are driving a more trustworthy and interoperable carbon market. These efforts strengthen environmental integrity and support long-term market resilience aligned with global climate goals.

In this update, we cover the following developments:

  • Status of the ICVCM and VCMI processes
  • Carbon removals in the EU: a new era of certification, infrastructure, and market design
  • Article 6 of the Paris Agreement: developments relevant to private markets
  • Our own carbon project development: key milestones reached in two regenerative projects and a landfill gas project
  • Scope 3 decarbonisation: overcoming barriers with ambition and action
  • A short market overview

Contact our experts or use our contact form:

Associate Director, Carbon Markets UK & EMEA

Loading…
]]>
Private Equity & ESG: 2025 Mid-Year Outlook https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/private-equity-esg-2025-mid-year-outlook/ Mon, 21 Jul 2025 14:39:31 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=65785

Private Equity & ESG: 2025 Mid-Year Outlook

A review of the key ESG developments shaping private equity

21 July 2025

aerial view of an ocean

As we cross the midpoint of 2025, it is clear to all that some of the ground upon which ESG and sustainability have been built in recent years has shifted as businesses, investors and advisers seek to navigate political and regulatory uncertainty in Europe and North America.  

It feels as though sustainability is at a crossroads. The momentum of recent years, when sustainability appeared to have gone mainstream, has given way to regulatory dilution and rollbacks, growing political uncertainty in Europe and North America, cautious use of language, and shifting economic outlooks. Together, these factors are leaving businesses increasingly hesitant and paralysed in their investment decisions.

However, it is not all doom and gloom, and on closer analysis, the apparent crises are perhaps more nuanced, with geographical differences, a focus on action rather than disclosure and talk, more relatable language, and increased emphasis and maturity around the value derived from sustainability. ESG is adapting and evolving to respond tactically to current challenges, but it is not going away, and strategically, the direction of travel appears to remain unchanged. 

As we look ahead to the second half of 2025, Matt Smith, Anthesis Technical Director for Transactions & Sustainable Finance, explores several key trends from the first half of 2025 that are informing and shaping how private equity is approaching ESG and sustainability. 

Regulatory uncertainty

At the beginning of the year, the general consensus was that the momentum around ESG disclosures continued to build and heighten. In Europe, this momentum has been tempered by the impact of February’s Omnibus Simplification Package, which affected sustainable reporting and due diligence requirements. Meanwhile, EU discussions are ongoing for a second Omnibus package, referred to as the Content Directive. Partly a response to recent political shifts that have deepened the divide between ESG sceptics and supporters across the United States and Europe, the initiative aims to streamline EU regulations, reduce administrative burdens, and strengthen the global competitiveness of EU companies.

For some companies, this has clearly brought relief and breathing space, while for others, including many GPs, it has been a disappointing roll-back, undermining effort and momentum, particularly around improving the quality of ESG data and basis for action and value creation. In other jurisdictions, however, momentum remains with Australia launching its sustainable finance taxonomy in June, and there continues to be increasing focus on transition finance globally, particularly within Asia. Perhaps reflecting this complex situation, the UK continues to develop its Sustainability Reporting Standards (SRS), launching its consultation in June, while announcing in July that it has dropped plans to implement a UK Green Taxonomy.

Taken as a whole, the trend over the past six months reflects a sustained focus on sustainable finance, but increasingly within the framework of efforts to simplify and streamline financial regulation, while also prioritising growth and competitiveness. Certainly, companies will need to closely monitor the evolving situation, not only in relation to future regulations such as CSRD or CSDDD, but also proposed future changes to existing sustainable finance regulations, such as SFDR.   

Greenhushing 

Communication has always been a key component of sustainability, being necessary to create change and engage with the myriad of stakeholders to raise awareness, as well as being a key lever for driving financial outcomes and brand differentiation. However, with increasing scrutiny of statements and actions from all sides, particularly in relation to ESG, the trend of ‘greenhushing’, holding back on credible sustainability claims for fear of backlash, appears to have gained further momentum so far this year, despite most companies still pursuing important initiatives. While this is, on the one hand, an understandable risk mitigation strategy, it also poses a risk in itself, as silence can come at a cost, especially for companies whose value creation is closely tied to ESG and sustainability action.

To investigate this, in our latest report, The Cost of Silence, Anthesis explores whether communicating ESG efforts delivers real financial and reputational return. After analysing 500+ companies across 16 industries, the answer is overwhelming clear: 

  • Strong environmental performance links to stronger financial performance. 
  • 15 out of 16 industries saw reputation boosted by sustainability perception. 

Access the Cost of Silence report to find out more.

Using these findings, companies can prove the value of their sustainability strategies, build a competitive edge, and make a stronger internal case for investment. However, it is acknowledged that companies will need to manage any perceived pressure to change in a nuanced way and develop a tailored strategy for their specific circumstances. 

Language 

Closely linked to communication is language and during the first half of the year, the use of language around ESG has come under increasing focus. The term ‘ESG’ has been an obvious source of contention, with some companies and investors rebranding their ESG efforts under less emotive terms such as ‘sustainability’ or ‘responsibility’ or ‘resilience’.  

We have also observed attempts to make language more relatable. As a sector and profession steeped in jargon and an ever-growing list of acronyms, we must recognise that our message, and the rationale for action, can sometimes be lost on the audience. Adapting to make the risks and opportunities relatable is therefore crucial, as is the need to be led by action rather than language – disclosure is not decision-making; communication is not commitment.  

Consistent with changes in communication and language, we have also observed tactical changes in the framing of actions, with a focus on resilience and a link to long-term operational durability and risk management. Less on pledges and labels and more on pragmatic fundamentals to address operational instability, risks and value creation. Again, language can be considered tactical, and adjusted to reflect the current landscape, while still helping to ensure leadership and progress toward necessary strategic goals continue.  

ESG in transactions

Despite some of the challenges we have observed, the focus on ESG as a driver of value creation when considering acquisitions and exits remains strong. An increasing number of PE clients are requesting vendor due diligence (VDD) as a means of demonstrating strong ESG performance. ESG VDD is also helping to communicate the link between sustainable practices and resilience to enhance financial returns, increase valuations, and enhance access to capital from ESG-focused investors, while reassuring buyers with a low-risk, future-proof investment. 

As part of this healthy activity, we have also seen an increasing number of PE firms considering IPO as a potential exit route. This is bringing a focus on baselining current performance and positioning and the development of strategies and roadmaps to help investments prepare themselves for pre- and post-IPO.   

A final observation regarding transactions is the growing perception of an increasing number of exit failures over the past six months, often influenced by economic and geopolitical uncertainty and ongoing disparities in market outlook. In this environment, Anthesis notes that conducting robust ESG due diligence, alongside other critical workstreams, has become more essential than ever. Our guidance would be to act on expert advice and insights, ensure you take appropriate time on due diligence, and allow yourself enough time for exit preparation to address areas of weakness.   

Anthesis news: Anthesis and Wallbrook maintain top rankings in the 2025 Chambers and Partners Guide

We are proud to announce that Anthesis and Wallbrook, part of Anthesis, have once again been recognised as leading firms in the 2025 Chambers and Partners Guides, achieving top-tier rankings across multiple practice areas. The rankings are based on independent research, and most importantly, direct feedback from clients. This year, Anthesis has been named one of only three ESG providers globally to achieve a Band 1 ranking in the Environmental, Social and Governance (ESG) Risk category

anthesis and wallbrook maintain top rankings in the 2025 chambers and partners guide

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Life Cycle Assessment Education & Engagement https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/life-cycle-assessment-education-engagement/ Fri, 18 Jul 2025 19:08:16 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=65770
Guidance

Mastering Life Cycle Assessment with Tailored Education & Engagement

18th July 2025

Tailored training in Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) can help your organisation understand and apply LCA to measure and reduce your environmental impacts. This guide provides an overview of our approach to LCA education and engagement, the training development and delivery process, and real world examples of LCA training in action.


This guide explores how to:

  • Arm your business with the skills and knowledge to leverage LCA and drive sustainable performance
  • Enable your business to conduct LCAs inline with international standards
  • Engage broader stakeholders in the LCA process
Loading…

]]>
The Cost of Silence 2025 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/the-cost-of-silence/ Wed, 16 Jul 2025 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=64338

The Cost of Silence 2025

16 July 2025

cost of silence

Download the Cost of Silence report

We hear it often from across the sustainability community: teams are increasingly having to work harder to demonstrate the value and impact of their efforts. Meanwhile,  we are hearing less from the businesses themselves around their sustainability agendas.

With ESG initiatives facing increased scrutiny, it’s now more important than ever to understand where sustainability can deliver measurable value. It’s a moment of challenge, but also one of huge opportunity.

Now, with our new report The Cost of Silence, we have new and compelling research to respond decisively. Based on three years of data across 500 companies and 16 sectors, this analysis shows that environmental action isn’t a nice-to-have – it goes hand in hand with commercial performance.

The report shows a clear correlation between environmental action and business performance:

  • Companies with strong environmental performance see a 6% higher EBITDA than their peers
  • Up to 31% of the reputational advantage held by market leaders comes down to how they are perceived on environmental issues
  • And yet, 79% of companies are still risking that advantage – either by overstating their efforts or staying far too quiet about them

A 6% performance advantage is not a matter of ideology, it’s a strategic priority. As such, the choice to remain silent can no longer be considered a neutral decision. When done right, sustainability is a lever for financial growth and a cornerstone of reputation. This report gives business leaders the evidence they need to act boldly and speak with confidence.

More than a collection of metrics, this report outlines a clear approach for establishing focus, crafting effective messaging, and mitigating the risks of greenwashing or greenhushing. For anyone responsible for sustainability, reputation, growth – or all three – this is essential reading.

Take the next step

We work with teams to translate insight into strategy:

1. Cost of Silence executive briefings

We guide you through the report findings and their relevance to your sector, helping advance the conversation on where sustainability delivers business and reputational return.

2. Bespoke sustainability benchmarking

Our analysts produce tailored reports comparing your sustainability actions and reputational positioning to those of key competitors – highlighting where and how to improve.

3. Strategic communications development

With clear opportunities identified, we help you shape a communications strategy that builds trust and ensures your sustainability efforts are both credible and compelling.

Contact us

Speak with our experts and discover how we can support you in creating impactful, purpose-driven communications for your brand.

]]>
CSRD: What Next If You Are Out of Scope? https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/csrd-what-next-if-you-are-out-of-scope/ Wed, 16 Jul 2025 09:25:22 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=65445

CSRD: What Next If You Are Out of Scope?

Learn how out-of-scope companies under the CSRD have the opportunity to regain control of their reporting strategy

16 July 2025

Iceland

Many businesses in the EU are grappling with what the CSRD Omnibus changes mean for them. Some are trying to work out how to make the most of the two-year extension and are eagerly awaiting the changes to the ESRS standards due in November 2025.

However, many more – approximately 35,000-44,000 (75-94%) – are set to fall out of scope depending on where the thresholds land. This article is for those newly out-of-scope companies that are now facing a critical question: What should we do next?

A new opportunity for voluntary reporting

Until very recently, best practice sustainability reporting has been largely driven by voluntary disclosures. The CSRD and ESRS raised the bar on disclosure and consistency, but arguably not on narrative or communications. In contrast, voluntary reporting offers more flexibility and innovation in sustainability storytelling. But companies are left with an array of frameworks, rankers and raters to consider, not least the ESRS’s own voluntary standard.

As a result, companies that fall out of scope have a huge opportunity to take back control of their reporting strategy, maintaining momentum while reporting more creatively and meeting the needs of their specific stakeholders.

Continue: Don’t lose the progress you’ve made

Even if the regulatory pressure has eased, the investments made to prepare for CSRD reporting shouldn’t go to waste. Many businesses have already strengthened their data management systems, internal controls, and sustainability governance.

While regulatory pressure may be reduced, this strong data management supports high-quality reporting, better decision making through improved insights, and confidence in data that can lead to the increased transparency many stakeholders are looking for. A solid data and reporting framework remains a competitive advantage and can support access to capital, market positioning, and supply chain partnerships.

The double materiality process has also become the new normal. Done well, it can provide deeper insights into materiality, which supports improved decision making and action plans, while integrating sustainability management more deeply into the organisation, ultimately creating business value.

CSRD has also elevated sustainability and sustainability reporting to more senior levels in the business, supporting improved governance as well as increased resource and budget allocation. This means there is a significant opportunity to use this momentum and make the case for improved sustainability activity and reporting, even without the regulatory driver.

Plan: Build a fit-for-purpose reporting strategy

Without a regulatory mandate and amid the flexibility to report to various standards, rankers and raters, or none at all, a systematic reporting strategy is a valuable tool for prioritising disclosures, managing data, and strengthening governance.

A reporting strategy should be led by four key questions:

  1. What other regulation is coming your way?
    With over 40 countries in the process of making the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) sustainability standards a requirement for some companies, and other sustainability regulations abounding, there may still be regulatory ESG requirements affecting your reporting. Understand what’s ahead and whether your business may fall into scope down the line.
  2. What are stakeholders looking for?
    What information are customers, employees and investors looking for from you? Consider the questions you get in supplier questionnaires, RFPs, investor calls, or employee engagement surveys. Which ratings and benchmarks do your stakeholders value? 
  3. How ambitious are you?
    Are you aiming to lead the pack or simply keep pace with your peers? Be realistic about where the business wants to be; otherwise, you will be pushing against a locked door.
  4. How much time do you have?
    Let’s be honest, creating an annual report and responding to a number of raters can be a full-time job. Which is fine, if there is a dedicated sustainability reporting role or consultancy budget. But if reporting is part of a role, be realistic about what can be achieved alongside other priorities.

Choose your frameworks wisely

Once you’ve answered the above, you need to consider which reporting frameworks to align to, comply with or complete. Some key options to consider are:

  • ESRS VSME Standard: Even if exempt from CSRD, companies may still be asked for sustainability data by larger business partners that remain in scope. The EU has developed a voluntary reporting standard for SMEs, which may serve as a practical template for responding to such requests without being overburdened.
  • IFRS Sustainability: While the International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB) has so far released only two IFRS standards, the growing number of countries considering mandating their use signals their rising importance in corporate reporting strategies. Built on frameworks such as SASB, TCFD, and CDSB, these standards offer a strong foundation for investor-focused sustainability disclosure.
  • GRI: GRI is far from obsolete, especially as it complements the IFRS Sustainability Standards by offering an impact perspective alongside IFRS’s financial focus. In fact, some jurisdictions are rumoured to be looking at mandating this pairing. As a comprehensive and long-standing framework, GRI has recommended that the ESRS better align with its established standards under the EU Omnibus. In summary, GRI remains a strong starting point for sustainability reporting.
  • CDP: Trusted by both customers and investors, CDP remains the leading platform for comparable sustainability disclosure and benchmarking. With its strong alignment with other frameworks, particularly the ISSB, CDP can help companies maximise the value of their reported data and serve as a stepping stone toward broader reporting readiness.
  • EcoVadis: Businesses often rely on EcoVadis to evaluate their supply chain partners, asking selected suppliers to complete an online questionnaire within a defined timeframe. If your customers use EcoVadis as part of their assessments, aligning with this framework can be a strategic way to meet expectations and strengthen commercial relationships.

Act: Make reporting a catalyst for action

Finally, and possibly most importantly, is deciding what level of reporting will support the greatest action. The right level of reporting can create a powerful balance of evidence, accountability, and resources to support efficient reporting and strong, meaningful change. Too much can distract from delivering on the valuable initiatives that will lead to improved sustainability performance. Finding this balance is critical. Depending on your material impacts, you may consider setting climate targets to build long-term resilience, addressing food waste, enhancing circularity, or developing a strategy to combat modern slavery.

River

In summary, falling out of scope of the CSRD isn’t the end of the road; it’s a chance to redefine your sustainability reporting on your own terms. Continue building on the foundations you’ve laid, plan with intention, and act in ways that support real, lasting change.

At Anthesis, we help companies navigate this turning point, building smart, focused reporting strategies that drive both credibility and action. Get in touch to find out more about how we can help.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Sourcing with Integrity – Best Practices for Carbon Credit RFPs https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/whitepaper-best-practices-for-carbon-credit-rfps/ Fri, 11 Jul 2025 13:18:20 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=64938
Whitepapers

Sourcing with Integrity: Best Practices for Carbon Credit RFPs

Carbon credits can play a vital role in achieving net zero—but only when used strategically. As part of a broader decarbonisation plan, they help address residual emissions from hard-to-abate sectors like aviation, industry, and agriculture.

At Anthesis, we advocate for a dual approach: cut emissions first, then use high-quality carbon credits to address what remains. Crafting a robust and effective Request for Proposal (RFP) is essential to ensure you’re sourcing with integrity and impact.

Download our practical guide to learn:

  • How to structure an effective carbon credit RFP
  • What to include (and avoid) in supplier criteria
  • How to align credit purchases with your net zero strategy

Authored By:

Miquel Rubio

Miquel A. Rubio

Director

North America

Christopher Hakes

Christopher Hakes

Associate Director, Carbon Markets EMEA

United Kingdom

Loading…
]]>
Packaging Circularity Targets: Closing the Loop on Circularity https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/packaging-targets-closing-the-loop-on-circularity/ Thu, 10 Jul 2025 12:43:17 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=65076

Packaging Circularity Targets: Closing the Loop on Circularity

Progress made, targets missed, and the challenges and opportunities ahead

10 July 2025

Plastic packaging

In recent months, major global corporations have been quietly backtracking on their public commitments towards addressing the waste and pollution crisis and delivering a circular economy for plastics. Petrochemical companies have abandoned plans to develop advanced recycling capabilities, beverage brands have stepped away from reusable & circular packaging objectives, and many others are withdrawing from voluntary initiatives in jurisdictions around the world.

Criticism has unsurprisingly followed on multiple fronts: activists are accusing brands of greenwashing, media outlets are holding brands to account for failure to deliver, and environmental advocacy organisations are lamenting the impact on developing much-needed collaborative solutions. Amid the inevitable crescendo of outrage that accompanies such actions in the digital age, it is worth taking a moment to reflect on progress in the seven years since the ‘Blue Planet effect’ started to shift global opinion about the impact of plastic waste and pollution on our world.  

The Circular Transition: How We Got Here

Within the past couple decades, the confluence of climate change and environmental awareness with our increasingly connected and digital world gave communities and consumers increased opportunity to speak out against the environmental impacts of companies and businesses. As the volume of plastic waste piled up and the flow of plastic into our oceans grew exponentially, consumers were increasingly voicing their disgust to a global audience. With the contemporary amplification of social media and digital communication, the message carried far and wide, and the reputational damage to those brands most commonly identified in global pollution studies was keenly felt.

Highly exposed brands responded by going into damage control. They were forced to acknowledge and confront their contribution to the problem – the evidence was impossible to deny. But in reality, few had considered packaging within the remit of their broader sustainability initiatives – packaging was a ‘must have’, and plastic was cheap, efficient and, in the larger scheme of things, was thought to be relatively inconsequential.  

That lack of understanding underpinned the establishment of voluntary initiatives in jurisdictions around the world to tackle the packaging and plastics circularity questions. Ahead of the curve, the Ellen MacArthur Foundation led the way in 2016, releasing the New Plastics Economy study and then, in 2018, signing up major global brand HQs to the Global Commitment. Signatories committed to a set of targets calibrated to deliver a circular economy for plastics. Localised initiatives soon emerged to support the delivery of aligned objectives at a jurisdictional level and voluntary initiatives like the Plastics Pact began to proliferate. In addition to focused reduction and elimination of problematic plastics, targets circulated around the key pillars of design, recycling, and end-markets, set to be delivered on by 2025.

It is variations on these targets from which many companies are now pulling away, but the reasons are many and varied and exist all along the circular plastics value chain.

Upstream | Reduction and Elimination

Without question, some progress has been made, particularly in jurisdictions where regulatory frameworks have supported the achievement of objectives. For example, the targeted elimination of problematic single use plastics has led to bans of plastic items such as drinking straws, cotton buds, lightweight shopping bags, and disposable food service packaging in multiple jurisdictions. Similarly, the use of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), which has recognised environmental impacts during production, but often also in disposal, has been virtually eliminated in many jurisdictions, with only a few medical applications remaining. Expanded Polystyrene (EPS), with its high propensity to become fugitive in the environment, is likewise targeted for phase out in many jurisdictions.

Upstream | Design

The transition to recyclable, reusable, or compostable packaging has also been reasonably successful, but in some areas more than others. For example, significant material innovation has occurred in a relatively short space of time. Recyclability has been improved by design through the shift towards more recyclable polymers such as Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET) and other polyolefins, the reduction in the use of problematic dyes and pigments, and the shift towards soluble inks. Design has also been simplified to eliminate complex material constructions that present barriers to recycling, and to produce higher purity recycling outputs. Tethered bottle caps, for example, are now reducing the volume of closures that end up as litter.

While all this is positive, it assumes access to a recycling pathway for the material to enter in the first place. The truth is, in many places, this remains aspirational.

So, while recyclability by design has made significant gains at the upstream end of the circular plastics economy, it remains a somewhat one-sided achievement, particularly where the absence of collection, sortation, and recycling end markets for recovered material means that material is still likely to end up in non-circular disposal pathways – incineration, waste-to-energy, and landfill.

‘Theoretical’ recyclability is still no guarantee that the material will even be recovered, let alone recycled. And that’s not a scenario limited to emerging economies – mature economies also have gaps in downstream recovery and reprocessing capabilities with many legacy systems inadequately equipped to achieve the increasingly sophisticated levels of sortation and reprocessing required.

Another outcome of the design targets was to drive a shift towards reusable packaging, as opposed to recyclable. While much attention has been given to investigation into new business models, minimal change has been achieved on a global level. Despite wide acknowledgement that reusable systems must be consumer-centric and require standardisation, scale, and shared infrastructure to achieve genuine impact, many businesses continue to invest in small, time-bound, isolated trials and pilot programmes. Spawning the quote ‘more pilots than Heathrow’, these solo initiatives have often produced less-than-convincing outcomes, negatively impacting business confidence to make the switch.

Additionally, reuse models are often regarded as disruptors to the normal (i.e., highly optimised one-way patterns of retail business), so they are often placed outside the normal traffic flow in-store. This means that customers have to engage in new behaviours in order to create success. As a result, many trials do not attract consumers and are so time-limited that they can’t embed the necessary behaviour change required from consumers to embrace and continue purchasing in reusable packaging. While some markets have had a measure of success, reuse still only represents a small fraction of the packaging mix globally, despite the enormous impact it can deliver for material efficiency and circularity.

The world is looking to markets such as Germany – with its long-standing reusable beverage container systems – and France – with cross-category reusable packaging systems like Loop gaining traction – where reusable packaging is mandated by regulation, to see how it can be done.

And then there was compostable packaging – the silver bullet that was going to solve all our packaging waste problems. It looked great on paper, and all of a sudden, everything was being converted to compostable materials: shopping bags, mail satchels, food packaging, and more. It quickly became apparent, however, that we didn’t have access to the downstream composting systems we needed to process this material. Even if the capacity existed to process all of our organic waste in composting facilities, adding the immense volume of packaging materials circulating in the global economy into that mix would have eclipsed that balance very rapidly, leaving those materials with no better outcome than the materials they were replacing. While compostable packaging has found a niche in supporting the recovery of organic and food waste, it’s not quite been the saving solution that everyone was hoping for.

Downstream | Raising Recycling Rates

The target of achieving a 70% recycling rate for plastics by 2025 was a challenge from the outset, and the emergence of co-mingled recycling didn’t help. Even in the most well-equipped markets, overall recycling rates for packaging have been low and typically driven by the value in recovered fibre, metal, and glass. Plastic recycling rates languished around the now infamous 9% figure, primarily due to the poor quality and often highly contaminated nature of materials coming through the system, and a lack of sophisticated sortation capabilities to segregate the materials as required.

This was further exacerbated by a rapid shift to lightweight, flexible packaging, which was leveraged to capitalise on gains in relation to resource utilisation and supply chain emissions. Less material meant less weight and less space, resulting in lower emissions moving product to customer. Despite these benefits, the transition posed a significant obstacle for achieving the 70% recycling target, as an increasing volume of plastics entering the market were now constructed of complex and mixed materials, and were less recyclable than the materials they replaced.

Even if they were recovered, these materials offered little value for recyclers and struggled to find end markets. This became apparent with the collapse of Australia’s twelve-year-old Redcycle scheme in 2022. It was revealed that the front-of-store soft plastics recovery program had been stockpiling recovered materials, in the absence of a suitable end-market destination. Safety breaches resulting from this stockpiling led to the closure of the program and intervention from the Australian government to address the soft plastics challenge directly.

While designers have worked to eliminate complexity from the packaging landscape, gaps in downstream capacity have continued to pose problems in achieving circularity.

Still, a number of potential downstream solutions have emerged in recent years, and capacity building has been identified as key. Recovering more material volume and improving the sortation of plastic fractions can increase the quality and value of recycling feedstocks and drive efficiencies vital to ensuring system viability.

High specification material recovery facilities (MRFs) are a significant unlocker to improving material segregation. New technologies such as digital barcoding and robotic sortation have shown promise to dramatically enhance the identification and separation of plastic fractions and reduce contamination.

Unfortunately, new technology is expensive. In many jurisdictions, governments are focused on other priorities that take precedence over incentivising investment in waste management infrastructure. Meanwhile, public companies are typically focused on increasing shareholder wealth, making expensive voluntary investments in sustainable practices somewhat unpalatable.  

Limitations in recycling systems globally have also posed a barrier to meeting the 70% recycled target. From an overall environmental perspective, mechanical recycling has been demonstrated through Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) to be a more favourable pathway for plastics, when compared with alternatives including incineration, waste-to-energy, or advanced recycling options. Many plastics in the market, however, require additional treatment prior to mechanical recycling to eliminate pigments and other materials that are added during plastic production. Furthermore, the highly bespoke and commercially sensitive nature of plastic production, and the myriad chemical compounds that may be used to meet a customer’s packaging requirements, make it challenging to demonstrate the removal of such additives when many recipes are regarded as corporate secrets by packaging converters.

This is likely to change in coming years, as increased scrutiny is placed on green chemistry and transparency within the plastics supply chain, but this opaqueness has resulted in much of the recovered plastic being downgraded into lower value applications or converted into entirely different products – for example, PET bottles being recycled into synthetic fabrics. Ironically, PET is the only mechanically recycled polymer that has been granted both EFSA and US FDA approval for use in high-value food grade applications, yet a significant portion of the recovered material is diverted to non-packaging uses.

Downstream | Building End Markets for Recycled Plastics

This leads conveniently to the final target of 30% recycled content in all plastic packaging. A significant quantity of the packaging placed on the market is to protect and deliver food and drink products safely to the consumer. We have seen that PET is currently the only mechanically recycled polymer that is approved for use in food-grade packaging but there is still a lot of food packaged in other polymers, most particularly rigid Polypropylene (PP) and High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE), and flexible Low-Density Polyethylene (LDPE). While these polymers can be mechanically recycled into packaging for non-food applications, such as personal or household care products and new pallet wrap, they are effectively excluded from use in high-grade food or near-food applications. This means that brand owners often have no option but to include 100% virgin material in food packaging, if they choose – often for very good reasons – to use a polymer other than PET.

Advanced recycling technologies offer an option, but these too face a range of challenges. Many of these technologies are capable of deconstructing plastics to their base polymers or even further into the precursor monomers. By eliminating all other compositional elements, the recovered materials are effectively ‘virgin-adjacent’ and suitable for reconstruction into new plastics for high-quality uses. Theoretically, this offers manufacturers the opportunity to incorporate this material into new packaging as a recycled content component, but hurdles exist. The cost of content produced through advanced recycling technologies is typically significantly higher than that of mechanically recycled content. This raises the cost of packaging significantly and, in a market where virgin material prices are significantly lower, there is little incentive for businesses to invest in this content, compromising the viability of the technology.

Additionally, it has been widely acknowledged that advance recycling technologies are energy intensive and can produce difficult-to-handle byproducts, dependent on the feedstocks used in the process. While these technologies have been promoted as a solution for hard-to-recycle materials (e.g., flexibles, mixed polymers, etc.), operators articulate a preference for clean, segregated materials targeting sources emerging from commercial and industrial sources, rather than post-consumer sources. In reality, most advanced recycling technologies have a significantly lower tolerance for the type of material emerging from the consumer goods sector, due both to contamination rates and complex construction, as with subsequently preference materials emerging from B2B sources, leaving post-consumer materials to downgraded applications.

The prohibitive cost has also been exacerbated by competition from the aviation industry, seeking to purchase the outputs from some advanced recycling processes to produce Sustainable Aviation Fuel (SAF). Diverting advanced recycling outputs to fuel severely restricts the forward circularity of those materials suitable for processing through these technologies. At the same time, this maintains a high price for the small volumes of material being produced, moving it out of reach for many packaging customers.

Adding another layer of confusion and uncertainty is the inconsistent approach to accounting processes for recycled content emerging from advanced technologies, and whether these materials are accepted by regulators in recycled content declarations. The variable acceptance of Mass Balance in reporting frameworks globally, combined with the higher cost of advanced recycling outputs, has resulted in many businesses deferring decisions – both around investment in recycling capacity and sourcing advanced recycled content – while awaiting clarity.  While there are few limitations to utilising polymers from advanced recycling sources in virgin reduction initiatives, questions remain in some jurisdictions around its acceptance in recycled content declarations. The result being that while some capacity has emerged in recent years, with a number of developments springing up in Europe in particular, the lack of access, feedstock inconsistency, uncertainty around utility in recycled content declarations, and uncompetitive pricing have severely limited the uptake of advanced recycled content.

Signals from the fossil fuel industry in the past year, have further cast doubt on the viability of advanced recycling technologies as a solution to the plastics crisis. The quiet withdrawal of commitments to develop advanced recycling infrastructure from a number of major global petrochemical companies is perhaps a product of the lack of uptake on recycled materials emerging from these processes, particularly when the primary market for the virgin materials produced by many of these companies remains incredibly cheap and available to packaging users. It could also be argued that the unabated global appetite for fossil fuels and petrochemicals reduces the motivation for these companies to address improved recycling technologies. As long as that situation remains, a rapid transition to new technologies is unlikely to materialise any time soon.

Circularity: Where To From Here?

Many participants around the circular plastics value chain have done a lot since committing to targets, but all can and must do more. While few of these hurdles are insurmountable in achieving circularity, we are still stuck in a recycling mentality, because we feel that we understand what that looks like and we can probably envisage how to make it happen.  But circularity remains something of an esoteric concept for many.

Three things have become very clear in the years since plastics targets were first proposed:

  1. The global landscape for plastics and plastic packaging is incredibly complex and there are myriad players contributing to that complexity in virtually every marketplace worldwide.
  2. Voluntary targets laid the foundations for circularity and are now giving way to mandatory measures, in response to the growing urgency of the issue. Without these voluntary commitments and close monitoring of progress towards those objectives, the evolution of the circularity dialogue would be have been significantly slower. While some targets may have not been delivered within the nominated timeframe, they have focused industry attention, helped to unpack the challenges to a profound level of understanding, and built a rich knowledge base that has benefited the entire global plastics value chain
  3. Removing the obstacles preventing the shift to plastics circularity is not the sole responsibility of one participant in the value chain. Collaboration is key, because all participants in the value chain have some role to fulfil in enabling the transition. Without action from all the players, the circle will never be closed.

Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR) and other incoming regulatory frameworks around the world will drive brands to fund this shift by ensuring that they are reducing and optimising packaging material use, exploring new and more economical delivery models, and covering the costs of recovery and recycling for the packaging materials they do place on the market.

Governments, however, must ensure that revenues from these regulatory models are appropriately ring-fenced and directed to support the capacity building needed to meet the demands of the market. This includes incentivising the development of advanced technologies to ensure high-grade plastics circularity is possible. While elimination by design will improve resource efficiency, plastics use is still predicted to grow, particularly in rapidly developing markets, as populations become more affluent and consumption increases.

Plastics producers and convertors must seek to incorporate more recycled or alternative materials in packaging, to build non-fossil-based end-market demand for sustainable content – including recycled plastics – and provide a degree of certainty to investors seeking to build capacity. Ensuring transparency on the content and construction of plastics, including those ingredients that are currently shielded by corporate secrets provisions, can also enable recyclers to understand exactly what they have in their hands and ensure that the materials are safe and suitable for new applications.

Exciting potential exists in the downstream side of the circle. Well-incentivised investment in new technologies, right along the downstream value chain, could ensure higher quality sortation, separation, and consolidation of purer material fractions, producing higher quality mechanically recycled plastics. Improvements in the deconstruction of materials, both through mechanical (delamination, deinking, etc.) and advanced reprocessing (pyrolysis, gasification, solvation, etc.), coupled with a clearer understanding of plastics compositions can facilitate more material being treated for high-quality mechanical recycling, while ensuring capacity exists for more advanced reprocessing of the balance.

Again, government has an important role to play in calibrating market settings to favour sustainable options.

We are finally beginning to understand the true cost of packaging and plastic pollution – economically, socially, and environmentally. It is right that those costs are factored into bringing a product to the market, a practice that is becoming normalised in many sectors of the global economy.

It is the role of government to ensure that the carrots and the sticks are appropriately positioned to favour the sustainable outcome, and business will respond to price signals through the lens of profitability and the social licence to operate. As the cliché goes, ‘necessity is the mother of invention’.  

An additional driver is the global focus on plastics through the Intergovernmental Negotiating Committee for an International Legally Binding Instrument (Treaty) to end plastic pollution, including in the marine environment. While the final scope of Treaty remains unclear, the agreement is likely to influence the global approach to this issue in coming years. Negotiations are on-going, but after INC-5(.1) in South Korea in November 2024 and INC 5.2 scheduled in Geneva in July 2025, a growing body of proactive UN Member States have amplified the call for a robust and enforceable accord that will address plastics from a whole lifecycle perspective, from extraction through to disposal. Unquestionably, the targets that emerged back in 2018, which reflect mitigation opportunities in the higher levels of the waste hierarchy, have provided a strong foundation for the shape of the draft treaty. It is hoped that the final instrument will continue with this holistic approach, to close gaps in the circle, and to ensure that all economies are adequately financed to facilitate the transition. And the reality is that once a Treaty is agreed, these types of voluntary, locally-calibrated targets may well be back on the table at a global level.

It is clear that responsibility for delivery of these targets lies across a complex network of players, and no one link in the chain can solve the whole problem. For businesses that have committed to targets they find themselves unable to deliver, it is fair to say that while progress has been made, some responsibility continues to lie with them, to continue improving system inputs and becoming a customer for the recycled outputs. But as discussed, all the participants in the circular value chain, and the governments that shape the circular economy landscape, have work to do to build the foundations that will deliver plastics circularity. And given what’s on the horizon from a regulatory perspective, dropping the ball entirely may not be in the best interests for businesses this far along the path.

How Anthesis Can Help

Anthesis understands the reputational impact that this type of exposure can have, with both your customers and your stakeholders. We can help you to understand the hotspots where internal action can bring you closer to meeting your existing targets and how long that might take; we can help you to celebrate the achievements that your business has made towards target objective, but also help articulate the story behind those hurdles that are beyond your control. If you’re business is feeling the heat from your target commitments, our Packaging and Purpose teams are at your disposal, and we would welcome the opportunity to support you through the process of managing your target reset.

Packaging Targets & Public Commitment Strategy

We support businesses in building strategy to address and manage packaging related commitments and targets through exposure review, target realignment, and identification of drivers and barriers.

Our approach consists of:

  1. Target Review: Reviewing and aligning existing packaging commitments across the business, and conducting a horizon scan in relevant jurisdictions for future circularity policy, infrastructure developments, and potential obstacles to target delivery.
  2. Ideation: Facilitating a collaborative and focused workshop with key internal stakeholders – guided by Anthesis’ expertise – to identify priorities and opportunities for “off-track” commitments.
  3. Strategic Direction: Providing detailed recommendations for business actions and communication opportunities based on existing commitments, their current status and obstacles to delivery, and workshop findings.
  4. Telling the Story: Developing targeted internal and external communication strategies that are relevant to each commitment, celebrating successes and addressing the risk factors identified.

Many companies have struggled, often due to barriers outside their control, to deliver on their packaging targets – and exposed businesses are finding themselves managing reputational risk. Anthesis can support you in building a tailored strategy for addressing this risk and taking the next steps in delivering on your packaging commitments.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
The EU Omnibus Package on Sustainability Disclosure https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/eu-omnibus-regulation/ Wed, 09 Jul 2025 17:29:59 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=64987

The EU Omnibus Package on Sustainability Disclosure

What it means for your organisation and how to respond

9 July 2025

abstract colours

Discussions relating to the Omnibus package of proposed amendments to the CSRD are ongoing as of November 2025. The current intent from the EU is to release final versions of the simplified ESRS and to reach agreement on key aspects of the Directive, including thresholds for inclusion, by the end of 2025 calendar year. Anthesis will keep monitoring the latest announcements from the EU and update these pages accordingly.

In February 2025, the European Commission announced a new package of proposals aimed at streamlining sustainability reporting, known as the EU Omnibus Directive. Although some elements are pending legislative approval, the announcement has created uncertainty for businesses navigating key regulations, including the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD), Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence Directive (CSDDD), and EU Taxonomy.

This article outlines what we know, what’s coming next, and how businesses should prepare.

What we know

The EU Sustainability Simplification Omnibus package

In November 2024, the Commission signalled plans to reduce the reporting burden on companies by aligning and simplifying sustainability legislation. On the 26th of February 2025, the first ‘Omnibus Package’ was published, proposing changes to:

  • Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD): A directive requiring companies to disclose environmental, social, and governance (ESG) impacts to enhance corporate transparency and accountability.
  • Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence Directive (CSDDD): A directive mandating companies to identify, prevent, and mitigate adverse human rights and environmental impacts in their operations and chains of activities.
  • EU Taxonomy Regulation: A classification system defining environmentally sustainable economic activities to guide investment and corporate sustainability practices.
  • Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM): A regulation imposing a carbon price on imported goods entering the EU to prevent carbon leakage and promote global emissions reduction.

What has happened since?

  • 3rd April: The European Parliament voted on the EU Omnibus stop-the-clock proposal to approve some of the proposed changes affecting reporting deadlines, which became an effective CSRD Amendment on the 17th of April. The changes included:
    • CSRD: A two-year postponement for companies in their second and third reporting waves that haven’t yet reported, who will now be required to publish their first reports in 2028 and 2029, respectively. There is no delay for EU-listed companies that are already reporting to the CSRD.
    • CSDDD:
      • Member States will have an additional year, until July 2027, to transpose the rules into national legislation.
      • Large companies and non-EU firms in the EU within a certain threshold will have until July 2028 to comply.
  • 23rd June 2025: The EU Council proposed language changes to simplify and clarify corporate sustainability reporting and due diligence requirements, including company size thresholds, reporting scope under CSRD, and due diligence scope under CSDDD.
  • Earlier in June: The European Parliament, via the Legal Affairs Committee (JURI), issued a draft report. Members of the European Parliament (MEPs) and other political groups had until the 27th of June to submit their proposed amendments to the report. A plenary debate and vote are expected in October to establish the Parliament’s official position, before it enters into negotiations with the European Council and the European Commission to reconcile differences between legislative positions.
  • 4th July 2025: The European Commission announced a set of measures to simplify the EU Taxonomy, in line with the Omnibus Package.
  • July/November 2025: The European Financial Reporting Advisory Group (EFRAG) prepared a second draft of the revised European Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS)in July 2025. EFRAG are planning to launch the final draft of these new standards at an event on 4th December, with regulatory implementation expected by summer 2026. Find out more about the proposed ESRS changes here >
  • 13th November 2025: The European Parliament voted on the final version of proposed amendments to the CSRD and CSDDD, introducing a significant reduction in the number of companies within the scope of both directives and proposing additional amendments to the scope of due diligence and climate-transition planning.

Updated: 26.11.2025

What is still at the proposal stage?

The wider package, still subject to legislative approval, introduces the following additional key changes:

CSRD Commission Proposal (25th Feb 25) Council Position (23rd June 25) EU Parliament (JURI) Proposal (6th June 25)
Timeline Delay wave 2 (large non-EU and EU subsidiaries) & wave 3 (listed SMEs) by 2 years (to 2028) Agrees on delays Agrees on delays
Scope – thresholds Increases, limiting mandatory compliance to companies with >1,000 employees and either >€50 million turnover or €25 million balance sheet Aligned, but increased the turnover requirement to ≥€450 million Much stricter: Raises in line with the CSDDD and EU Taxonomy to >€450 million net turnover and >3,000 employees worldwide.

Additionally, raises the net turnover criteria for EU branches from €40m to €450m.

Key requirements Assurance:

  • Removes mandatory reasonable assurance, keeps limited assurance

Double materiality:

  • Remains a key element of the CSRD

Value chain data:

  • Limits requests from smaller companies

SMEs

  • Introduction of a voluntary reporting standard (VSME) for companies no longer in scope
Value chain data:

  • Provides some exemptions to subsidiary reporting and flexibility to SMEs to refuse information requests
Value chain data:

  • Expands limits, adding a requirement to explain where necessary data isn’t available and how they will obtain for future
  • Expands limits for smaller companies to what is reasonably available
  • Introduces the term ‘chain of activities’ (as used in the CSDDD) to replace ‘value chain’, ensuring consistency

Other:

  • Exempts ultimate parent companies that are financial holding entities and not involved in management, provided a designated EU subsidiary reports on their behalf
  • Removes allowance for member states to introduce more stringent due diligence requirements
  • Clarifies that trade secrets and certain information are generally exempt

Alongside the negotiations listed above, EFRAG is reviewing the content of the ESRS with final technical guidance due to release in November 2025. Find out more about the proposed ESRS changes here >

CSDDD Commission Proposal (25th Feb 25) Council Position (23rd June 25) EU Parliament (JURI) Proposal (6th June 25)
Timeline
  • 1-year delay for large companies, to 2028
  • A 1-year extension for Member States to transpose the rules into national legislation, until 26 July 2027
  • Delays for all companies to July 2029
  • Postpones the member state transposition deadline to July 2028
  • 1-year postponement for the release of additional European Commission guidance to 26th July 2027
  • Agrees with the Commission’s delay
Scope (thresholds) No change Increases to >5,000 employees and >€1.5 billion net turnover for EU companies, and €1.5 billion turnover in the EU market for non-EU companies Increases to >5,000 employees and >€1.5 billion net turnover for EU companies, and €1.5 billion turnover in the EU market for non-EU companies.
Key requirements Assessments:

  • Limits in-depth assessments of impacts in Tier 2+ supply chains (unless there is plausible information that they have arisen or may arise)
  • Reduces the frequency of periodic assessments and monitoring required from annual to every 5 years, with ad hoc assessments where necessary

Climate Transition Plans (CTPs):

  • Removes the requirement to implement CTPs (although maintaining the requirement to develop CTPs and include actions that have been implemented or planned)

Value Chain Data:

  • Limits the amount of data companies can request from smaller companies in their value chain
Assessments:

  • Limits in-depth assessments of impacts to those that have been identified as most likely and severe based on the initial scoping exercise or if a company beyond tier 1 can be reasonably expected to know of these impacts
  • Lightens requirements from a comprehensive mapping to a general scoping exercise, based on reasonably available information
  • Clarifies stakeholder engagement requirements as proportional and only for certain parts of the due diligence process

Climate Transition Plans (CTPs):

  • Further limits and postpones for 2 years the requirement to implement CTPs, aligning with the CSRD, to an outline of implemented and planned actions

Value Chain data:

  • Agrees the focus on Tier 1 suppliers (own operations, subsidiary operations and direct business partners).
  • Further limits data requests from smaller companies to necessary information that cannot be obtained by other means for the purposes of value chain mapping.
Assessments:

  • The risk-based approach from the original CSDDD text is preserved.
  • Lightens requirements from a comprehensive mapping to a general scoping exercise, based on reasonably available information.
  • Limits in-depth assessments of impacts to those that have been identified as most likely and severe based on the initial scoping exercise.

Climate Transition Plans (CTPs):

  • Removes requirements altogether.

Value Chain data:

  • Limits the amount of data companies can request from smaller companies in their value chain for the purposes of value chain mapping
EU Taxonomy Commission Proposal (25th Feb 25) Council Position (23rd June 25) EU Parliament (JURI) Proposal (6th June 25)
Scope (thresholds) Relaxation of rules for companies with >1,000 employees and a turnover below EUR 450 million by making the reporting of Taxonomy voluntary, and the option of reporting on partial Taxonomy-alignment Not mentioned Raises in line with the CSRD and CSDDD to >€450 million net turnover and >3,000 employees worldwide

On the 4th of July, the European Commission announced a set of measures to simplify the EU Taxonomy, in line with the Omnibus Package. While still subject to review by the Parliament and Council, the updated rules are due to begin in 2026, covering the 2025 financial year. Find out more about the proposed changes, here. 

What’s driving the initiative?

This Package is the EU’s response to concerns about the complexity of sustainability reporting requirements and remaining competitive within the broader global economic landscape. Some believe that EU regulations create an uneven playing field compared to markets like the U.S. and China, placing an administrative burden on companies. Anti-ESG lobbyists, including some oil and gas companies and carbon-intensive industries, claim that excessive regulation puts the EU at a disadvantage.

While there is room to streamline the regulations, properly implemented, these regulations can enhance competitiveness by increasing transparency and promoting cleaner, more environmentally aligned products and services. The core concepts of ESG regulation, including the CSRD and CSDDD, make sound business sense. The EU has historically led on ESG, and this should be a competitive advantage it should seek to maintain.

Governmentslarge businesses, and regulatory bodies have also expressed support for the existing regulations, raising concerns about the uncertainty this review process has introduced. In July 2025, nearly 200 signatories, including over 150 businesses and investors, issued a joint statement urging EU policymakers to retain the core elements of the EU’s sustainability framework. These include maintaining double materiality, the inclusion of companies with 500+ employees, value chain transparency, risk-based due diligence, and climate transition planning.

Resistance to sustainability regulation isn’t new. We saw similar resistance when financial disclosure requirements were introduced, yet today, transparent financial reporting is considered fundamental to market confidence. The same will soon be true for sustainability. ESG data auditing may seem new now, but financial auditing also evolved into a rigorous and regulated norm.

How should your business respond?

Despite ongoing uncertainty, businesses should continue with sustainability reporting and due diligence. The ESG agenda isn’t driven by regulators alone – it is driven by investors, consumers, and corporate stakeholders. This hasn’t changed.

The CSDDD and CSRD due diligence requirements are grounded in long-standing voluntary standards, such as the UN Guiding Principles on Business and Human Rights (UNGPs) and OECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises on Responsible Business Conduct. Standardising these expectations through regulations aims to enable fair comparability and transparency, not to lead the agenda.

If you’re unsure about what to do next, speak to your Anthesis representative, legal advisors, and financial auditors. The proposed changes are subject to amendment and need interpretation for each business’s unique structure.

In short, to support your reporting planning under CSRD, we advise that:

EU listed large companies (wave 1) – maintain business as usual

If you reported against CSRD in FY2024, and the Non-Financial Reporting Directive (NFRD) before that, there are no changes to thresholds or timelines. While simplification of the ESRS is underway, there may limited opportunity to respond to the changes in your next report. Focus on aligning with its intent by developing strategies to manage your Impacts, Risks, and Opportunities (IROs) and that you are clearly reporting on how they align with the actions you’re taking, the metrics and KPIs you’re using, and your performance.

In July 2025 the EU Commission adopted targeted “quick fix” amendments to the first set of European Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS), designed to reduce burden and increase certainty for companies that had to start reporting for financial year 2024 (

According to the current ESRS, companies reporting on financial year 2024 can omit information on, amongst other things, the anticipated financial effects of certain sustainability‑related risks. The “quick fix” amendment, which applies from financial year 2025, will allow them to omit that same information for financial years 2025 and 2026.

This means wave one companies will not have to report additional information compared to financial year 2024. Moreover, for financial years 2025 and 2026, wave one companies with more than 750 employees will benefit from most of the same phase‑in provisions that currently apply to companies with up to 750 employees.

Businesses due to report in FY2025 (now FY2027) (Wave 2) – do not press pause on your planned actions

For companies with a two-year delay, use this time to prepare. If you haven’t already, start your double materiality assessment, using the draft ESRS revisions as a guide. This will give you time to collect data, close gaps, and shape an integrated sustainability strategy ahead of the FY2027 deadline.

If you’ve already finalised your Double Materiality Assessment, begin preparing for a gap analysis focused on at least three core ESRS: E1 (Climate), S1 (Own Workforce), and G1 (Business Conduct). Analysis of existing reports from Wave 1 companies shows that these were universally adopted, making them a logical and low-risk starting point. Prioritising mandatory quantitative disclosures within these ESRS will help maintain momentum without overcomplicating early-stage reporting efforts.

See our recent webinar recording for more information >

SMEs – take a stakeholder-focused approach

Even if requirements shift, early action has benefits. Conducting a Double Materiality Assessment will help meet investor expectations, improve your corporate reputation, support your value chain relationships, and identify and benefit from better risk management and cost efficiencies ahead of potential regulatory changes.

To support your due diligence planning under CSDDD, we advise that:

Large companies – continue existing due diligence programmes

If you fall under the CSDDD, under the original or newly proposed thresholds, it is essential to continue your existing due diligence efforts. The directive is reasonable and proportionate but requires robust prioritisation. Invest time and effort in properly conducting scoping or mapping activities to identify potential and actual impacts across your operations and chains of activities. This will position you to respond to many of the CSDDD requirements, whether the directive focuses on Tier 1 or expands beyond.

SMEs – identify due diligence focus areas

You may not fall directly under the scope of CSDDD, but you are likely part of the value chains of larger companies that do and may receive information requests about your due diligence practices. Standardising your approach now will help you respond efficiently while managing reputational and operational risks.

Adapt, don’t pause

The core principles of EU sustainability regulation, like Double Materiality and impact prioritisation, represent best practice and aren’t going away. These frameworks offer strategic value, strengthen governance, support risk management, and improve stakeholder communication.

Given legislative timelines, businesses shouldn’t wait for final outcomes before acting. Stay the course, remain adaptable, and continue investing in efforts that build resilience and long-term business value.

There is no reason for most companies to question or dial down their ESG efforts in response to these regulatory changes. It is investors, corporates and consumers that have heavily steered progress to date on ESG; the role of regulation is to provide the standardised methodology and approach to allow comparability. Carefully implemented, ESG frameworks offer value beyond compliance, whether that’s strategic insights, stronger governance, or a sharper focus on stakeholder priorities – and many business leaders know this. Those that stay on course in reporting, maintain a sound understanding of materiality, and take positive action will find themselves ahead in terms of resilience, competitiveness and stakeholder confidence.

Chris Shaw, Technical Director, ESG & Reporting

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
The Impacts of US Tariffs and Other Uncertainties on Apparel Supply Chains https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/the-impacts-of-us-tariffs-and-other-uncertainties-on-apparel-supply-chains/ Wed, 09 Jul 2025 12:40:18 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=64970

The Impacts of US Tariffs and Other Uncertainties on Apparel Supply Chains

The great unravelling, or time for a tighter knit?

9 July 2025

Blue yarn

The effects of the imposition and subsequent delay of US tariffs have rippled around the globe for the last couple of months. The 90-day pause is up on August 1st, and the likely outcome is as unknown as the sudden implementation. The phrase ‘the only constant is change’ has never felt so appropriate.

In the apparel sector, the challenge has been particularly salient around the now-paused tariffs. 98% of clothing sold in the US is imported. If the tariffs go ahead – or in a similar vein – as those stated on April 9th, key countries in the cut-and-sew portion of the supply chain – those nodes adjacent to import – will be hit with the highest US tariffs, barring any changes from ongoing negotiations.

Possible Responses to Tariffs and Instability

Given the prolonged uncertainty regarding tariffs – and the broader shifting commercial landscape the US and the world is experiencing through Executive Orders – companies are considering the following options for their supply chains:

Knit

Supply chains double down and hold their existing presence in tariffed countries, largely predicting that any tariffs incurred would be passed on to the end consumer. The average tariffs on clothes, shoes, and accessories are already more than five times higher than on other U.S. imports, so this wave of additional tariffs could easily further impact the purses of those closest to or below the breadline.

It is, however, possible that suppliers in tariffed countries could absorb the tariffs in the short term to maintain orders with customers. This has potentially the best outcome from a sustainability stand-point – relationships extend and investment into labour best practices, new technology, and innovative materials continues – though likely at a slower pace.

Consolidating supply chains becomes attractive, driving volume through a smaller number of suppliers and deepening trust. Though harder to justify the cost upfront, the advantage of brands and retailers having access to de-risked, sustainable, and visible supply chains through certification schemes like organic certification and Cotton Made in Africa, present longer-term strategies too.

Unravel

Tier 1 and tier 2 suppliers, those most directly connected to a company’s supply chain, could shift to countries with lower tariffs – or at least away from China. Rules of Origin are complicated and often undefined by countries with regards to what constitutes the attribution of ‘value add’ at the country level. This makes things complicated and risky but potentially has the least impact on the customer.

Chinese tariffs were already introduced earlier in 2025, causing reactive shifts to other countries, but the potential second unilateral set of tariffs is making those shifts even less economical. The CAFTA (Central America Free Trade Agreement) countries have gained more interest as potential hubs for supply chain operations, though there are concerns for labour-related risks in countries like Nicaragua, and labor costs in Mexico.

When new supply chains are being created, it is imperative that sustainability metrics are taken into consideration. Lack of due diligence and understanding of water stress or soil health, for example, could have anywhere from short to medium and/or long-term impacts directly on raw cotton price.

Environmental and social risk is now linked to current and future cost and needs to be integrated into financial modelling as such. Integrated climate and nature risk assessments are a powerful tool in these scenarios for making informed decisions. In addition, supplier scorecards are useful to put in the hands-on merchants and sourcing teams as they negotiate new (or existing) contracts.

Cutting the Thread

The most widely thought-to-be desired outcome by the current US administration is a re-ignition of industry and domestic manufacturing within the country. This would be a long-term play given that the US is not currently set up with the scale, skills, and production facilities needed to take on this volume ‘overnight’.

However, some companies are taking steps in this direction. Anecdotally, we heard one brand has already moved over a quarter of its supply chains to the Western hemisphere, including the US, as a result of recent economic trade shifts. Again, this could lead to higher costs for garments in order to justify the production cost increase.

One result of this move could be an increase in ‘slow’ fashion with shorter supply chains. Compared to fast fashion where margins are tight, slow fashion has higher margins, a smaller environmental footprint (product volumes are lower) and the impact on social elements of the supply chain – those producing the garments – are not as pressurized.


As decisions are being made here and now, the integration of the triple bottom line (people, planet, and profit) is important. An indirect result of any of these realities – all of which likely result in cost increases either immediately or over time – is that circular business models become more attractive. Reuse, repair, recycling, take-back, and secondary markets will be much more attractive financially for the end consumer, shifting demand further in this direction.

The US secondhand market grew 14% in 2024, outpacing the broader retail clothing market by five times. Online resale is responsible for the vast majority of that growth, now accounting for 88% of resale spend. (Re)establishing successful opportunities in apparel requires consumer incentives to be aligned and engaging, the implementation of design for durability/quality principles and the ability to scale.

How Anthesis Can Help

In the coming months, and beyond, we aim to guide our clients in making the ‘right’ choices; those that have longevity and that support the just transition to a Net Zero future while balancing and acknowledging economic drivers. This will mean doing things like:

  • Supporting the investment and implementation of digital documentation and factory Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs).
  • Increasing supplier engagement and partnerships to strengthen relationships. Established trust goes a long way when situations become strained.
  • Refreshing assessments of circular business models to understand if they have become more attractive.
  • Ensuring supplier scorecards or equivalents have integrated environmental metrics from data sources like the Higg index.
  • Ensuring risk is effectively integrated into a company’s ERM. Starting with a double materiality assessment is a particularly useful place to start.
  • Getting into the mindset of the end consumer in order to consider the strains and desires on demographics over time. Communicating and balancing brand, value, and pricing will continue to be paramount.

The core of a sustainable business is often found within its supply chain and operations, regardless of the threat of tariffs or regulatory shifts. We support clients to drive truly sustainable change on a global scale, working with a diverse range of brands, retailers, suppliers, and manufacturers to understand the sustainability performance of their suppliers and consider both the social and environmental impacts of global supply chains.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Canadian Green Claims Regulatory Update https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/canadian-green-claims-regulatory-update/ Tue, 08 Jul 2025 17:28:08 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=64960
Guidance

Canadian Green Claims Regulatory Update

8th July 2025

On June 5th, 2025, Canada’s Competition Bureau published new environmental claims guidance based on amendments to the Competition Act, which came into force in June 2024.

While Canada’s approach aligns with global efforts to address greenwashing, it goes further by directly targeting “greenwishing” – future-facing environmental targets or commitments made without credible delivery plans or follow-through.

This paper outlines what’s changed in the Act and guidance, what it means for companies operating in Canada, and how businesses can gain real value from credible, substantiated sustainability efforts.


This guide outlines:

  • Key changes to the Competition Act
  • The core principles of the Competition Bureau’s official green claims guidance
  • Our 5 key steps to responding to the new regulations
Loading…
]]>
Integrating ESG: Creating Value Through Portfolio Engagement https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/integrating-esg-creating-value-through-portfolio-engagement/ Tue, 08 Jul 2025 09:17:37 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=64522

Integrating ESG: Creating Value Through Portfolio Engagement

Explore how ESG programmes and frameworks can be effectively delivered through a portfolio esg engagement solution

8 July 2025

Collaboration

It’s fair to say that ESG has seen a few turbulent months. Throughout this time, and looking ahead, one thing remains clear: ESG helps build lasting resilience in every business. Basic ESG practices, policies, and processes provide a stable foundation for resilient growth and can help minimise disruption in the wake of merger and acquisition activity. However, strong ESG performance, coupled with a clear sense of purpose, can be truly transformative and unlock significant business value. For private equity firms, this is critical for maximising exit value across the portfolio. But how can ESG managers engage portfolio companies in a way that demonstrates the opportunity to de-risk and improve performance?

In this article, Claire Richards, Anthesis Principal Consultant, explores how ESG programmes and frameworks can be effectively delivered through portfolio ESG engagement solutions and drive value creation.

Set out a focused pathway prioritising material ESG risks and opportunities

In a post-deal environment, management teams face significant shifts – additional financial metrics, potential team changes, and a new board with its own reporting requirements. ESG considerations must be seamlessly integrated into this critical path. Onboarding portfolio companies onto the firm’s ESG programme soon after investment creates an opportunity to engage and educate management teams on the value creation opportunities of sustainable performance, and to develop management plans for ESG risks raised in the due diligence process.

Effective prioritisation and a strategic roadmap tailored to each company’s material issues are key for busy management teams. Materiality assessments help pinpoint priority issues, such as carbon emissions, labour practices, or governance risks, based on sector, geography, and business model.

Building capacity and awareness

In today’s rapidly evolving landscape, keeping up to date with new regulations and shifting customer expectations is increasingly challenging. Many management teams face capacity constraints and lack the technical expertise needed to navigate complex ESG requirements. Investors can play a crucial role by providing regular updates, training, and facilitating knowledge sharing across the portfolio. Meanwhile, companies can stay informed by seeking external expertise and subscribing to relevant newsletters and webinars. The Anthesis sustainable private equity newsletter not only highlights key private equity insights but also relevant content to share with your portfolio companies.

Hosting annual ESG conferences or forums is an effective way to keep the portfolio informed about the latest developments and upcoming requirements relevant to their sectors. Involving an ESG sponsor alongside someone in an ESG operations role helps renew focus and clarify responsibilities, especially when personnel could change from year to year. Additionally, these forums offer valuable opportunities to engage investment teams and continuously reinforce and embed the firm’s ESG framework throughout the portfolio.

Empower through collective upskilling and education

Sector- or topic-specific training offers a valuable opportunity to upskill portfolio companies collectively on issues that affect multiple businesses.

Selecting the delivery method is critical to the success of portfolio education. E-learning can provide a flexible, cost-effective option to upskill your portfolio on key topics, such as ESG knowledge or climate essentials, whereas more workshop-based delivery will drive active participation and group interaction. Workshops can help uncover shared challenges faced by the portfolio.

In 2021, Anthesis supported Palatine PE to develop and deliver Carbon Literacy training as a full-day interactive workshop. Since then, Palatine’s in-house sustainability team has sustained this momentum by hosting two sessions annually to train over 300 individuals. Carbon Literacy empowers leadership teams to understand the implications of their carbon footprint and the strategic importance of emissions reductions, while bringing portfolio companies together to discuss shared challenges and learnings.

Workshop

Leverage portfolio forums to align priorities and facilitate networking

Hosting in-person conferences or virtual forums brings together ESG representatives from across the portfolio to network and socialise ideas around a specific industry theme or focus area defined by the PE house. By inviting an ESG sponsor and operational lead, a recurring event re-engages those responsible each year and provides them insights to take back to the business. Experts and advisors at these events can deliver thought leadership and introduce value creation opportunities that may not have been considered.

In May 2025, Anthesis was invited to join Volpi Capital and its portfolio for its annual ESG Forum 2025. Our experts provided an update on the regulatory landscape for climate risk and reporting. This outlined the value of developing robust decarbonisation strategies aligned with costed levers, which demonstrated significant financial paybacks.

Initiate peer-led collaboration forums

Private equity firms are leveraging opportunities to share insights across their portfolios, recognising that companies often face similar challenges, even across funds and different sectors. Working groups create a non-competitive collaborative environment for companies to share experiences, challenges, best practices, ideas, and tools on common themes such as Science Based Targets (SBTs), Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) compliance, or social valuation.

Palatine’s sustainability team supports its companies in navigating sustainability-related questions in tenders, particularly surrounding Social Value. Driven by the recent Procurement Act 2023 and the new Social Value Model (PPN002), Social Value can no longer be an afterthought when it comes to responding to public sector tenders. Palatine’s Social Value Working Group, initiated by Palatine with support from an Anthesis secondee, aims to create a space for portfolio companies to share knowledge, ideas, and tools around social value, with social valuation methodologies and tools being a predominant discussion theme.

Private equity firms that embed ESG into portfolio operations through clear frameworks, tailored roadmaps, and continuous education position their investments for stronger performance, greater resilience, and enhanced exit readiness. This level of engagement future-proofs individual companies and can elevate the overall reputation and performance of the fund. Ultimately, value beyond valuation is achieved by how actively portfolios are engaged, and how effectively opportunities, such as knowledge sharing, can be realised. That’s where real impact — and value creation — lies.

How Anthesis can support

Our global team of sustainability and private equity experts can support you in designing, implementing, and reporting on your responsible investment strategy, while helping your portfolio companies reach their full potential. We develop tailored engagement approaches that enable you and your teams to clearly demonstrate the value of ESG to a range of stakeholders. Whether it’s onboarding new investments into your ESG programme or creating bespoke training initiatives, we ensure your ESG approach is understood, embedded, and actively adopted across the portfolio.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Anthesis Ireland Connect: Leading and Influencing in Uncertain Times https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/anthesis-ireland-connect-june-25/ Mon, 07 Jul 2025 17:41:05 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=64909

Leading and Influencing in Uncertain Times

Key Insights from the Anthesis Ireland Connect June Event

dublin ireland

Managing Director – Anthesis Ireland

Belfast-Ireland

In June 2025, Anthesis Ireland kicked off its inaugural Connect series by bringing together a diverse group of ten sustainability professionals from ten different companies operating across Ireland in a peer-led workshop. The idea was to share challenges, opportunities, and insights in a session focused on leading and influencing in uncertain times.

Designed to foster open conversation and meaningful networking, this in-person event created the space for participants to speak candidly about the realities of working in a sustainability role today. From the challenges of embedding sustainability within an organisation’s business model to the complexities of affecting positive change across teams and operations due to myriad internal and external factors, attendees were able to share examples of real-world experiences and problems they currently face.

We plan to use this first roundtable session as the foundation for future events, with the aim to strengthen relationships amongst like-minded peers and to facilitate discussions on pertinent topics and live scenarios as elected by the group.

Key takeaways

Reflecting on our time together, the key takeaways from our first Anthesis Ireland Connect are summarised below:

Insight #1: Maintaining Momentum

As sustainability leaders, you are all grappling with maintaining momentum amidst one or more of the following: organisational complexity; multiple competing demands; and a shifting regulatory landscape. Nuanced challenges relating to decarbonisation and supply chain engagement emerged as particularly dominant themes.   

Specifically, we heard that:

  • Internally, sustainability is still often framed as a business cost as opposed to an opportunity.
  • Externally, the ESG regulatory landscape is changing rapidly, fostering mistrust in the long-term reliability of regulation as a driver for sustainability planning and investment. Despite this, it was recognised that leaders are keen to maintain momentum on compliance preparedness.
  • For some, initial carbon reduction efforts (Scope 1 & 2) are exhausted, and the more straightforward “low-hanging fruit” has been tackled (and achieved). This leaves the challenge of finding new solutions and maintaining momentum within decarbonisation programmes.
  • For the majority, addressing and reducing Scope 3 emissions resonated as a consistent challenge for companies of all sizes, geographical spans and sectors. Many face difficulties with supply chain engagement, and the quality of both organisational and supply chain data to enable accurate measurement.

Insight #2: Connecting sustainability to business growth

Across a diverse range of contexts and priorities, many echoed a need to connect sustainability initiatives to revenue and tangible business growth. For this to happen, sustainability cannot operate in a silo but needs to be woven into the core activities of multiple teams.

  • We heard details from one attendee on their organisation’s plans to move from a ‘reactive’ to ‘integrated’ state of organisational sustainability in the next three years. This journey requires mindset shifts internally as well as when engaging external partners, suppliers and contractors. A tactical approach of investing in relationship-building activities upfront and prioritising a ‘face before forms’ strategy, resonated with the group – particularly when considering the number of requests being handled by both internal and external stakeholders who may have had very little engagement in sustainability before.
  • The concept of maximising the impact of small sustainability teams, by utilising the ‘hub and spoke’ model, and building specific sustainability expertise within expert areas (for example, climate risk within risk functions) has already seen great success within certain organisations.
  • It was felt that the ‘why’ or the altruistic nature of sustainability is not always the strongest message when looking to gain internal buy-in, but rather speaking the language of each department – whether that’s sales targets or procurement spend. This is the skill that will ultimately drive results and affect change. The costs (both quantitative and qualitative) associated of NOT “doing” sustainability, however, must also be factored in.
  • Attendees recognised that quality data was just one side of the equation with the other being how that data should be communicated in order to ensure effective storytelling and engagement.

Insight #3: Effective leadership

Effective leadership, especially in uncertain times, requires a balance of transparency, emotional intelligence and adaptability. Leaders need to model core ‘human’ values, such as honesty, empathy and authenticity, whilst being strong and agile in the face of rapid change.

While exploring findings from Anthesis’ ‘Leading Through Uncertainty‘ report, it was unanimously agreed that clear communication is essential for effective leadership. In large organisations, however, it was recognised that this is not always straightforward to achieve.

  • Participants highlighted that leaders don’t just exist at the top but need to be present and visible at all levels of an organisation.
  • Although it was noted that leaders need to be trustworthy and keep promises, there is a reality that, in practice, adaptability and agility is required when navigating change. If communication is consistent and honest in relation to change and decision-making, employees are typically found to be accepting of new plans and course corrections.
  • Lastly, we heard that the tone of communication in uncertain times is imperative – employees value honest optimism and a demonstration of courage from their leaders.

Key priorities, challenges & opportunities identified

  • Understanding group emissions
  • Complying with EUDR
  • Embedding sustainability into the design process
  • Setting 2025-2030 ESG targets
  • Developing and publishing sustainability strategy
  • Improving data quality
  • Taking longer-term strategic view
  • Multiple competing demands
  • Challenge of scope 1 and 2 – low hanging fruit achieved
  • Scale and complexity of organisation
  • Communication with employees and customers
  • Innovation e.g. materials
  • Supply chain transparency
  • Sustainability being seen as a cost, not investment
  • Finding the right tool at the right price (improve data and create insights)
  • CSRD omnibus uncertainty
  • Supply chain engagement: data gathering and validation
  • Identifying a source/use of material
  • Decarbonisation of LCV vans/ fleet
  • Alignment across sectors as a common approach
  • Revenue generation from sustainability
  • Focus on what matters: reprioritise and nail the basics
  • Brand reputation and exceeding expectations
  • External communication (first sustainability report)

Next steps

Each participant expressed a strong desire for ongoing peer learning and collaboration. The value of shared language, collective problem-solving, and learning from each other’s approaches was evident.

Whether tackling CSRD requirements, engaging the C-suite, or making the case for sustainability as a growth-driver, the session reinforced a key message: while contexts differ, shared experiences can help leaders move faster and more effectively towards solutions. Anthesis Ireland is committed to facilitating future in-person sessions to further foster connections and to enable peer-to-peer engagement.

A copy of the Leading in Uncertainty report which formed the basis of the conversation can be found here: Leading in Uncertainty

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
EU ETS-2 Uncovered: Navigating the Future of EU Emissions Trading Whitepaper https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/ets2-future-of-eu-emissions-trading/ Wed, 02 Jul 2025 13:38:12 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63389
Whitepapers

EU ETS-2 Uncovered: Navigating the Future of EU Emissions Trading | Whitepaper

The EU ETS-2 (Emissions Trading System) expands the EU’s existing emissions trading framework to include new sectors such as road transport, accelerate decarbonisation, and deliver a 42% emissions reduction by 2030 on the way to net zero by 2044.

Download the white paper to learn all about ETS-2 and which actions are relevant for companies that are directly or indirectly affected by this new regulation.

Key Takeaways

  • Identify the relevant actions to take, such as training. .employees, conducting scenario analysis, exploring the best business and financing opportunities, and leveraging CO₂ cost avoidance.
  • Gain a detailed understanding of ETS-2.
  • Learn about standard coverage and the Opt-out & Opt-in provisions.
  • Understand the implementation timeline and flexibility criteria.
  • Discover how ETS-2 will impact CO₂ prices and explore price projections.
  • Learn how to manage price risks via complementary policies.
Olav Provily

Olav Provily

Director Carbon Sales: Europe

Netherlands

Nils van Veen

Nils van Veen

Sustainability Consultant

Netherlands

Loading…
]]>
ISSB: Global Momentum for Sustainability Reporting https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/issb-global-momentum-for-sustainability-reporting/ Mon, 30 Jun 2025 14:52:00 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=58216

ISSB: Global Momentum for Sustainability Reporting

30 June 2025

World

Updated in June 2025

The standards released by the International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB) in June 2023 are rapidly gaining traction across the world, but the pace and approach of adoption have been significantly varied. The standards are comprised of IFRS S1 on general sustainability-related financial disclosures, and IFRS S2 on climate-related disclosures, which we have unpacked in a previous article. These standards will provide investors and other stakeholders with the comparable, decision-useful information they need to assess the financial impacts of sustainability and climate change on a company, and the adequateness of their governance and strategies to manage sustainability-related risks and opportunities.

In this article, we dive into how different jurisdictions are approaching and implementing the ISSB with our experts from around the world sharing their insights on key developments.

The European Union

The primary and most comprehensive sustainability disclosure framework in the EU is the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD), under which the European Financial Reporting Advisory Group (EFRAG) has developed the European Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS). These standards cover the full range of sustainability-related issues and are intended to standardise sustainability reporting within the EU.

The EU has adopted European Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS) to comply with CSRD. Both The ISSB and the European Commission have highlighted the high degree of alignment between ESRS climate disclosure requirements and the ISSB standards.

EFRAG has expressed strong support for the ISSB and its standards, and highlights that the ESRS incorporate ISSB disclosures under a thorough interoperability approach. Entities preparing sustainability reports in compliance with the ESRS on climate change will therefore be meeting the requirements of the ISSB standards to a large extent, thus preventing the need for separate reporting under the ISSB standards.

The ESRS and IFRS S1 and S2 have been developed in parallel, ensuring a high degree of alignment between both sets of standards. EFRAG and the ISSB have recently released an interoperability map that illustrates this alignment.

Whilst in the EU, the CSRD remains the key ESG mandatory reporting framework, the commitment to interoperability from both the IFRS and EFRAG is crucial; especially for those companies headquartered outside the EU, but with significant operations within. We’re finally seeing more clarity on how the needs of both frameworks can be met, for example in materiality assessment and stakeholder engagement.”

Chris Shaw, Technical Director, Anthesis EMEA

The United Kingdom

On 25th June 2025, the UK Government announced the launch of three public consultations aimed at strengthening the UK’s sustainability reporting framework. These consultations cover the following key areas: 

  1. Adoption of International Sustainability Standards 
    The UK is proposing to adopt the International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB) standards through the development of UK Sustainability Reporting Standards (UK SRS). The UK SRS will establish a consistent baseline for sustainability disclosures, closely aligned with global best practices. Feedback is sought on adopting these standards with minimal UK-specific modifications. 
  1. Mandatory Climate Transition Plans 
    The government is consulting on introducing mandatory requirements for Climate Transition Plans, ensuring organisations clearly articulate their strategies for aligning with climate goals. 
  1. Regulatory Oversight of Sustainability Assurance Providers 
    A new framework is being proposed to introduce regulatory oversight for sustainability assurance providers, enhancing trust and accountability in sustainability reporting. 

These consultations are a key step in the UK’s ambition to build a world-leading regulatory framework for sustainable finance, one that promotes transparency, accountability, and sustainable economic growth. 
All three consultations are open for comment until 17th September 2025. We strongly encourage UK businesses and stakeholders to engage with these consultations and provide their input to help shape the future of sustainability reporting in the UK. 

The exposure drafts of UK SRS S1 and UK SRS S2 closely align with the International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB) Standards—IFRS S1 and IFRS S2. As part of its consultation, the UK Department for Business and Trade has proposed six minor amendments to tailor the standards for the UK context: 

  1. Removal of Initial Transition Relief: Reporting entities will be required to publish their sustainability disclosures at the same time as their financial statements from the first reporting year. The ISSB’s original one-year delay allowance has been removed. 
  2. Extension of Climate-First Transition Relief: Entities may focus solely on climate-related disclosures for the first two years, with broader sustainability-related risks and opportunities to be reported from Year 3 onwards. 
  3. Flexibility in Industry Classification: The requirement to use the Global Industry Classification Standard (GICS) has been removed. Entities may now use any appropriate industry classification standard to disaggregate disclosures, such as those for financed emissions.
  4. No Prescribed Effective Date: The UK SRS will be made freely available for voluntary use upon endorsement. The mandatory application will depend on a separate consultation on the implementation pathway. 
  5. Voluntary Reference to SASB Standards: The previously mandatory use of SASB standards for industry-specific disclosures has been made voluntary. Entities may refer to the IFRS S2 Industry-based Guidance, which draws from SASB standards, at their discretion. 
  6. Clarification on Application of Transition Reliefs: Entities will only be bound by the transition relief restrictions in IFRS S1 and S2 once mandatory reporting requirements apply to them. Voluntary early adopters can apply the full set of reliefs during their first reporting year. Reliefs cover areas such as: 
  • Greenhouse gas emissions methodologies 
  • Disclosure of Scope 3 emissions 
  • Provision of comparative information 

The ISSB is currently consulting on potential amendments to IFRS S2, including: 

  • The requirement to use GICS 
  • Possible exclusions to Scope 3 Category 15 emissions 

The UK Government is monitoring these developments closely and aims to minimise divergence between the UK SRS and the ISSB standards. 

The Government is particularly interested in: 

  • The costs and benefits associated with adopting UK SRS S1 and S2 
  • Areas where additional guidance would support effective implementation 

Next steps: 

  • Following this consultation, the Secretary of State for Business and Trade will decide on the final endorsement of UK SRS S1 and S2.

  • If endorsed, the final standards will be published in autumn 2025.

  • The Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) and the UK Government will consult separately on mandatory reporting implementation, including:

    • Which entities will be covered

    • Timelines for the first year of reporting for both listed and large unlisted companies

The Department for Energy Security and Net Zero has launched a consultation on introducing mandatory transition plan requirements for financial institutions and FTSE 100 companies. This proposal marks a significant step toward aligning corporate climate action with the 1.5°C goal of the Paris Agreement. 

  1. Entities would be required to explain why they have not disclosed a transition plan or transition plan-related information, or 
  2. Entities would be required to develop and disclose transition plans.

In addition to the implementation pathway, the consultation seeks comments on the following:  

  • Benefits and use cases of transition plans 
  • Implementation options 
  • Developing and disclosing a transition plan 
  • Mandating transition plan implementation 
  • Aligning transition plans to net zero by 2050 
  • Climate adaptation, resilience and nature alignment 
  • Scope and legal risk 
  • Related policy and frameworks 

Next steps:  

  • Responses to this consultation will be considered alongside responses to the other two consultations, after which the UK Government will propose a package that considers the UK’s sustainability-related regulatory landscape as a whole. 
  • The FCA will also consult on strengthening transition plan expectations for listed companies.  
  • The Government will consider the recommendations set out in the Transition Finance Market Review and has co-launched the Transition Finance Council alongside the City of London Corporation to drive ambition on these recommendations. 

 

The United States of America

The US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) approved its own climate disclosure rulemaking in March 2024. The general disclosures mandated through this regulation are broadly aligned with the TCFD framework. In the final rule, the SEC emphasises disclosure of only those climate-related risks that have been found to be potentially material to the company as well as Scope 1 and 2 GHG emissions only if found to be material. Companies subject to the SEC’s rule will also be required to disclose the actual financial impacts from climate-related events and/or transition planning activities on their income statement and balance sheet for the reporting period, subject to a reporting threshold.

Upon approval of the final rule, the SEC faced litigation from various groups stating concerns such as the SEC’s authority to implement such regulations and arguments that the ruling does not go far enough. In light of these legal challenges, the SEC put a pause on implementation of the rule until litigation is resolved, with hearing expected in 2025.

Canada

Canada has adopted ISSB standards by releasing its own set of standards, called the Canadian Sustainability Disclosure Standards (CSDS), which were developed based on ISSB Standards. These were released by the Canadian Sustainability Standards Board (CSSB) in December 2024, and comprise CSDS 1, i.e., General Requirements for Disclosure of Sustainability-related Financial Information, and CSDS 2, i.e., Climate-related Disclosures. Key modifications in relation to ISSB standards include an effective date from 1st January 2025, a year later than the global ISSB baseline, a Scope 3 emissions relief of three years (until 1st January 2028) before mandatory disclosure of Scope 3 emissions is required, and a transition relief of two years (until 1st January 2027) before needing to report beyond climate-related disclosures.

We welcome the proposed Canadian Sustainability Disclosure Standards (CSDS). Aligning disclosures on sustainability-related information with the rest of the world is crucial for Canada’s long-term economic success. The CSDS represent a significant step forward in ensuring Canadian companies continue to act for crucial sustainability risks and opportunities while remaining competitive and attractive to global investors through standardised and consistent disclosures, echoing the actions recently taken by key trading partners such as the US and the EU.”

Mari Desangles, Principal Consultant, and Bridie O'Boyle, Principal Consultant, Anthesis North America

Mexico

In January 2025, The Banking and Securities Commission of Mexico made several key amendments to Mexico’s security laws. The amendments require companies in Mexico to integrate sustainability information in their financial statements, in compliance with the ISSB Standards, IFRS S1 and S2.

Through these new changes, The Banking and Security Commission of Mexico has directed companies to report their sustainability information in their financial statements for 2025, reporting in 2026.

Additionally, from 2026 onwards, companies will be required to include assurance from an external auditor on their sustainability reports.

The APAC region is leading the global response to the ISSB standards and implementation of these through the various national sustainability and climate reporting frameworks.

Australia

Australia is among the first countries to implement mandatory climate reporting standards aligned with the ISSB standards, through its climate-related financial disclosure regulation Treasury Laws Amendment (Financial Market Infrastructure and Other Measures) Act 2024, which was passed in September 2024.

The Australian Accounting Standards Board (AASB) issued its final climate reporting standards in December 2024, ahead of the 1st January 2025 start date. The Australian Sustainability Reporting Standards (ASRS) comprise of AASB S1 – General Requirements for Disclosure of Sustainability-related Financial Information and AASB S2 – Climate-related Disclosures, align with ISSB standards with minimal variations, albeit only climate-related disclosures as a starting point.

Legislation to mandate the new ISSB-aligned reporting requirements was introduced to Parliament in March 2024. This includes a phased implementation timeline for mandatory reporting in the private sector over several years, with large listed and private entities meeting certain revenue, asset, employee, or emissions thresholds being required to publish mandatory climate-related disclosures. The legislation includes a phased approach to assurance requirements, with the expectation that companies will be required to obtain reasonable assurance over their full disclosure by FY2030. The Australian Auditing and Assurance Standards Board has been tasked with setting the roadmap to phase in assurance over a five-year period.

The Australian Government is separately developing mandatory climate-related disclosure requirements for the public sector based on the ASRS/ISSB tailored to Australian government entity circumstances, commencing for annual reports ending 30th June 2025. The Australian government is also running a pilot disclosure program for some government entities to include a limited sub-set of climate-related disclosures their annual report ending 30th June 2024.

As we move into this mandatory setting, companies will gain the most by focusing not only on compliance, but ultimately on the strategic benefits to gain deep business insights, improve resilience and performance and attract investment and other opportunities.”

Amy Quinton, Principal Consultant, Anthesis Australia

Singapore

In September 2024, the Singapore Exchange Regulation (SGX RegCo) announced it would enhance its sustainability reporting by requiring companies to report on climate and to refer to ISSB standards as the guiding framework. It prescribed the general requirements and conceptual foundations of IFRS S1 insofar as they relate to the climate-related risks and opportunities, along with IFRS S2 requirements with the exception of the disclosure of Scope 3 GHG emissions. Reporting beyond climate-related disclosures is currently encouraged but not mandated. This is effective starting the 2025 financial year.

In practice, listed companies and large unlisted companies will be required to publish mandatory climate-related disclosures fully in line with IFRS S2 in a phased approach over FY2025 to FY2030. SRAC may review the implementation of the ISSB Standards for broader sustainability-related risks and opportunities beyond CRD a few years later.

Singapore’s adoption and mainstreaming of the ISSB standards is a clear signal that it is fully committed to the green transition and demonstrating credibility in its climate initiatives. It is also the first Asian country to extend mandatory climate-related disclosures to non-listed companies while implementing support mechanisms to support capacity building in meeting the new reporting requirements. This helps to position Singapore as a leader in advancing sustainability reporting in Asia and enable Singaporean companies to become more resilient and adaptable in a low-carbon economy.”

Peggy Oh, Director, Anthesis Singapore

Read further regional insights below:

Japan is actively moving towards adopting sustainability disclosure standards (SDS) based on the ISSB framework. The Sustainability Standards Board of Japan (SSBJ) published three exposure drafts in April 2024:

  1. Universal SDS Exposure Draft “Application of the Sustainability Disclosure Standards”
  2. Theme-based SDS Exposure Draft No. 1 “General Disclosures”
  3. Theme-based SDS Exposure Draft No. 2 “Climate-related Disclosures”

These drafts are largely based on the ISSB’s IFRS S1 and IFRS S2 standards, with some potential adjustments for the Japanese context.

In March 2025, the SSBJ issued the sustainability disclosure standards, i.e. SSBJ Standards. The final disclosure standards adopted are as mentioned above.  It is important to note that the SSBJ has divided the sustainability standards aligning with IFRS S1 standards into two standards, which are issued separately. The SSBJ has highlighted that the ‘Core content’ section of IFRS S1 is included in the ‘General Disclosures’, while the other requirements of IFRS S1 have been included in the ‘Application Standard.’

New Zealand pre-empted the ISSB by developing its own mandatory climate-related disclosure requirements through the Aotearoa New Zealand Climate Standards 1-3, in 2022. New Zealand companies are currently publishing climate-related disclosures[1] in line with the NZ CS, which are comprised of:

  • NZ CS 1 Climate-related Disclosures
  • NZ CS 2 Adoption of Aotearoa New Zealand Climate Standards
  • NZ CS 3 General Requirements for Climate-related Disclosures

These were established by the External Reporting Board (XRB), which closely monitored the ISSB’s development process and ensured a high degree of alignment between the NZ CS and the IFRS S1 and S2 standards. The XRB is continuing to monitor the development and implementation of the ISSB standards and is open to further aligning the NZ CS with the standards in the future, especially as the ISSB releases additional industry-specific or thematic standards.  In October 2023, the XRB published a comparison guide to demonstrate the alignment of the NZ CS and the ISSB standards. The XRB plans to publish a similar comparison guide against the Australian ASRS.

The XRB plans to review New Zealand’s current climate standards in December 2025 to determine whether they need to make any changes to their current standards to align better with the present and future sustainability requirements.

[1] The first tranche of reports are now publicly available on the New Zealand Government’s register: Climate Reporting Entities (companiesoffice.govt.nz)

In April 2023, the Stock Exchange of Hong Kong Limited (the Exchange) published a consultation paper seeking feedback on the implementation mandatory climate-related disclosures in line with IFRS S2 under its environmental, social and governance framework.

In December 2024, The Hong Kong Institute of Certified Public Accountants (HKICPA) published their sustainability disclosure standards, HKFRS S1 and HKFRS S2 which align directly with the ISSB standards, IFRS S1 and IFRS S2 respectively.

 

HKIPCA has suggested that these sustainability standards may be applied to ‘publicly accountable entities’ including listed entities and regulated financial institutions in Hong Kong initially, from the 1st of August 2025.

 

The timing and approach of adopting the sustainability standards, HKFRS S1 and S2 will be decided by individual regulators and authorities.

Most recently, in 2024, the HKEX also imposed new climate requirements based on IFRS S2 directed to listed issuers commencing from 1st January 2025.

The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) has published the Draft Disclosure framework on Climate-related Financial Risks, 2024, which is proposed to implement mandatory climate disclosure requirements for commercial banks, cooperative banks, financial institutions, as well as non-banking financial companies in India. Proposed climate-related disclosure requirements have been developed in line with the four pillars of the TCFD and IFRS S2 – governance, strategy, risk management and metrics and targets – and would be phased in from FY2028 onwards.

The Advisory Committee on Sustainability Reporting (ACSR) launched a consultation from February to March 2024 on the implementation of the ISSB standards for listed and large non-listed companies in Malaysia. The consultation aimed to seek feedback on the scope and timing for implementation, transition reliefs, and assurance-related matters. It is expected that the ISSB standards will form the baseline for the National Sustainability Reporting Framework in Malaysia.

Following the consultation, in September 2024, through the publication of The National Sustainability Reporting Framework (NSRF), Malaysia adopted the ISSB standards.

 

The ISSB standards, according to the NSRF is applicable to all listed companies on Bursa Malaysia’s main market and ACE market, along with, large non-listed companies whose annual turnover exceed RM 2 billion.

 

The NSRF highlights the adoption of the ISSB standards will follow a phased approach – from 2025 onwards, all large-listed issuers on the main market with a market capitalisation of RM 2 billion will apply these sustainable disclosures.

In 2026, all other main market issuers will have to adopt the sustainability standards, followed by ACE Market issuers and large non-listed companies adopting these sustainability standards by 2026.

Publicly listed companies in the Philippines currently have mandatory sustainability reporting requirements on a ‘comply or explain’ basis. The Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) is revising the Sustainability Reporting Guidelines to consider a range of global reporting frameworks, including the ISSB standards. The draft revised guidelines were released for comment in October 2024. Under the revised guidelines, listed companies will be required to submit Sustainability Reporting Narratives together with their annual reports, as well as a dedicated Sustainability Report Form, which would be comprised of sections on sustainability and climate-related risks, opportunities and exposures, and metrics (both cross-industry and industry-specific) in 2025, reporting on the 2024 financial year.

In December 2023, the Sustainability Working Group of the Accounting Standards Board published a recommendations paper outlining the study, consultations and recommendations for implementing the ISSB standards in Pakistan.

Most recently, on 1st of January 2025, The Securities and Exchange Commission of Pakistan (SECP) announced the adoption of the IFRS standards, applying to only listed companies through a phased approach on criteria’s such as a company’s total assets, turnover and number of employees.

In August 2023, the Financial Supervisory Commission of Taiwan published a roadmap for Taiwan-listed entities to align with the ISSB standards – both S1 and S2. These will be adopted from 2026, after which the FSC will continue assessing and endorsing ay additional standards released by the ISSB. Mandatory reporting will be phased in based on capital thresholds, and the same transition reliefs as are in the ISSB standards will be applied. In addition, entities may disclose qualitative information for matters involving a high degree of uncertainty and difficulty in quantification.

In May 2024, The Korea Sustainability Standards Board (KSSB) published the Sustainability Disclosure Standards in Korea, KSSB 1, KSSB 2 and KSSB 101. The sustainability disclosure standards KSSB 1 and KSSB 2, follow the IFRS S1 and S2 standards respectively while KSSB 101 is an optional disclosure requirement which serves as a country specific set of standards that provides guidance on disclosure of sustainability related information is required by South Korean Laws.

The current scope and timing for when these disclosures will be implemented has not been confirmed yet.

In December 2023, The Central Bank of Bangladesh, issued guidelines for the adoption of Sustainability Disclosures based on ISSB standards, specifically, IFRS S1 and IFRS S2 for banks and financial institutions.

The adoption of these Sustainability Disclosures will follow a phased approach in a three-year timeframe.

 

According to the Central Bank, financial institutions and banks will be required to file a limited intermediate report for June 2024, a limited supervisory report for December 2024 followed by a limited disclosures in annual reports in 2025, more detailed disclosures in 2026 and full disclosure in 2027.

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Sri Lanka (CA Sri Lanka) announced the mandatory adoption of the Sri Lanka Sustainability Disclosure Standards, SFLRS S1 and SFLRS S2, based on ISSB Standards, IFRS S1 and IFRS S2, commencing 1st January 2025 with full implementation expected by 2030.

Adoption of Sustainability Disclosure Standards will follow a phased approach:

Phase 1: First 100 entities listed in the Columbo Stock Exchange are mandated to comply with SFLRS S1 and SFLRS S2 by 2025, reporting in 2026.

Phase 2: All listed entities on the main board of CSE mandated to adopt SFLRS S1 and SFLRS S2, and report by 2027.

Phase 3: Entities with an annual turnover exceeding LKR 10 billion in the last two consecutive years mandated to comply with these standards by 2028, followed by entities with an annual turnover exceeding LKR 5 billion in the last two consecutive years adopting these standards in 2029.

Phase 4: All listed entities on CSE empower board, i.e., small and medium size companies required to adopt these standards by 2030.

In May 2025, China’s Ministry of Finance published a draft sustainability disclosure standard, based on ISSB Standards termed ‘Corporate Sustainability Disclosure Standards – Basic Standard.’ This exposure draft outlines the general requirements for corporate sustainability information disclosures that all companies established in China are required to adhere to.

 

The adoption of these sustainability disclosure standards is plannedto follow a phased approach, starting  with listed companies  and subsequently extending to non-listed companies.

China aims to implementthe climate-related disclosure standard, based on IFRS S2, by 2027. The entire suite of sustainability disclosures standards are expected to be fully issued by 2030.

South Africa has created a set of complimentary systems starting with the SA Green Finance Taxonomy, which defines what is to be considered a sustainable asset or project in the South African context. This feeds into the Johannesburg Stock Exchange Sustainability & Climate Disclosure guidance, which in turn aligns with the ISSB disclosure standards at an international level. What we are witnessing is the incremental infilling of identified gaps that when filled will enable local and international finance to flow towards increasingly sustainable projects inside our country.”

The ISSB is gaining traction in Africa, with several key developments having taken place in recent times:

Nigeria

Nigeria is positioned to be another early adopter of the ISSB standards. The Financial Reporting Council (FRC) developed a Draft Roadmap Report for Adoption of Sustainability Disclosure Standards in Nigeria, which was open for consultation until March 2024 and in April 2024, the FRC published the completed roadmap for the adoption of the Sustainability Disclosure Standards in Nigeria. The Roadmap affirms the ISSB standards as the recommended framework for Nigerian entities, discusses assurance, monitoring and enforcement considerations,

Presently, Nigeria has adopted the sustainability disclosure standards on a voluntary reporting basis until 2026.

Mandatory reporting of the Sustainability Disclosure Standards will occur through a phased approach, with full application of mandatory reporting applicable to all entities starting on or after January 1st 2028.

Ghana

In 2023, The Institute of Chartered Accountants, Ghana (ICAG) announced the adoption of the ISSB standards, specifically IFRS S1 and IFRS S2. The adoption of the ISSB standards will follow a phased approach, starting with voluntary adoption for entities from January 2024. Mandatory adoption will apply to significant public entities from January 2025, followed by other companies, with full implementation for all public sector entities based on the timeline issued y the International Public Sector Accounting Standards Board (IPSASB)

Tanzania

The National Board of Accountants and Auditors of Tanzania (NBAA) announced the adoption of ISSB Standards effective from 1st January 2025. 

Under this guidance, all public interest entities (PIEs) are directed to adopt and comply with these standards from 1st January 2025.

While public sector entities are not required to apply these standards, the timeline for mandatory adoption date for this sector will be reviewed by the NBAA based on the timeline by when IPSASB is issued, and until then the NBAA has encouraged public sector entities to voluntarily apply these sustainability disclosures.

Zambia

The Zambia Institute of Chartered Accountants on the 21st of November 2023, announced adoption of the ISSB standards, specifically IFRS S1 and IFRS S2.

According to the Zambia Institute of Chartered Accountants, all publically accountable entities (PAEs) are mandated to apply and comply with IFRS S1 and IFRS S2 and the Integrated Reporting framework for annual reporting periods beginning on or after January 2025.

 For all other companies, the reporting of these standards are voluntary until further updates.

Kenya

The Institute of Certified Public Accountants of Kenya (ICPAK) issued a roadmap in September 2023 on the phased adoption approach of the ISSB standards, specifically IFRS S1 and IFRS S2  from January 1st 2024 in Kenya.

The adoption of these standards follows a phased approach:

  • Phase 1: Voluntary Adoption – all organisations are encouraged to voluntarily adopt the sustainability standards from 1st January 2024. Phase 2: Mandatory Adoption
  • Public Interest Entities (PIEs) – apply from 1st January 2027
  • Non-PIEs (Large Entreprises) – apply grom 1st January 2028
  • Non-PIEs (SMEs) – apply from 1st Janusary 2029
  • Phase 3: Public Sector Adoption – the timelines for public sector adoption will be reviewed based on IPSASB’s standards.

Uganda

The Institute of Certified Public Accountants of Uganda (ICPAU) produced a roadmap for the adoption of ISSB standards, specifically the IFRS S1 and the IFRS S2.

The adoption of these standards follow a phased approach where by:

Public Interest Entities (PiEs), including listed companies, financial institutions and state-owned enterprises are encouraged to comply and apply the sustainability disclosures for the financial year 2026, reporting in 2027 voluntarily.

The mandatory adoption of PiEs will start with the period beginning on or after 1st January 2028.

All other Entities are encouraged to voluntarily report on the ISSB standards from 2029, based on 2028 financial year.

Zimbabwe

The Public Accountants and Auditors Board (PAAB), the Zimbabwe Stock Exchange (ZSE) and the Victoria Falls Stock Exchange (VFEX) have mandated all listed companies to  submit their sustainability reports for financial years commencing on or after January 1st 2024, based on the ISSB Standards.

The PAAB is also working on an implementation roadmap for the implementation of IFRS S1 and IFRS S2 for all other companies.

Costa Rica

The College of Public Accountants of Costa Rica announced in December 2023 the adoption of the ISSB standards in full through a phased approach as follows:

  • Commencing 1 January 2024: voluntary for any entity
  • For the financial year ending 31 December 2025: mandatory for companies regulated by the National Council for Supervision of the Financial System (Consejo Nacional de Supervisión del Sistema Financiero/CONASSIF)
  • For FY ending 31 December 2026: mandatory for companies classified as large taxpayers

Latin American jurisdictions have historically been leading the mandating of sustainability disclosures, with both Chile and Colombia having mandated TCFD disclosures and reporting in line with the standards published by the Sustainability Accounting Standards Board (SASB). Several South American nations are expressing growing interest in the ISSB standards. Recent developments in relation to the ISSB standards include:

  • Superintendency of Banks of Panama announced support for the ISSB in October 2023.
  • The IFRS Foundation published the Spanish and Brazilian Portuguese translation of IFRS S1 to support uptake of the standard across South America.
  • The Inter-American Development Bank and Latinex co-hosted an event focused how the IFRS Accounting and Sustainability Disclosure Standards can support a more resilient and competitive financial sector.

Brazil

Brazil became the first South American country to adopt the ISSB standards in October 2023 when the Brazilian Ministry of Finance and the Comissão de Valores Mobiliários (CVM), the country’s securities regulator, announced that the ISSB standards would be incorporated into the Brazilian regulatory framework.

The CVM released Resolution No. 193, which sets out that publicly listed companies, securitisation firms and investments funds may choose to voluntarily disclose in line with IFRS S1 and S2 from 2024, while mandatory disclosures will be required for listed companies from 1st January 2026. A stringent assurance pathway has also been outlined beginning with limited assurance until the end of FY2025, after which reasonable assurance over disclosures will be required. More recently, in October 2024, the CVM published Resolution No. 217, 218 and 219 that made the adoption of The Brazilian Sustainability Pronouncements Committee (CBPS)’s technical pronouncements 01 and 02 mandatory for all listed companies.

Therefore the new Resolution mandates adoption of IFRS S1 and through the Brazilian Sustainability Pronouncements Committee (CBPS)’s technical pronouncements, CBPS Technical Pronouncement 01 General Requirements for Disclosure of Financial Information Related to Sustainability

  • CBPS Technical Pronouncement 02 Climate-related Disclosures

Through the CVM resolution No. 219, a new deadline of the voluntary adoption of the disclosures has been adopted.

Additionally, in 2024, the Brazilian Central Bank (BACEN) mandated that financial institutions under BACEN regulations are required to adopt the following CBPS standards under these specific timelines:

1. Larger financial institutions classified:  mandatory adoption beginning 1st Jan 2026.

2. For all other regulated financial institutions:  mandatory adoption beginning on 1st January 2028.

Bolivia

The College of Auditors or Public Accountants of Bolivia (CAUB) published a resolution in April 2024, announcing the mandatory adoption of the ISSB standards for all entities ‘carrying out economic activities’ in Bolivia, starting from the 1st of January 2027.

While the mandatory adoption of these standards start in 2027, CAUB has encouraged early applications.

Chile

In October 2024, The Financial Market Commission (CMF) of Chile announced the mandatory adoption of IFRS S1 and IFRS S2 standards commencing from 1st January 2026.

Exception:  entities whose average total consolidated assets for the two years has been lesser than UF 1million are exempt from reporting on IFRS S1 and S2 standards.

A ‘transition relief’ period of one year has been directed by CMF specifically for those entities who previously may not have reported on sustainability and corporate governance before.

Turkey

In December 2023, Turkey’s Public Oversight, Accounting and Auditing Standards Authority (KGK) announced that businesses meeting certain asset, revenue or employee thresholds, and regulated banks will be subject to mandatory sustainability disclosure requirements. The KGK has adopted IFRS S1 and S2 in Turkish, published as the Turkish Sustainability Reporting Standards (TSRS) 1 on general sustainability disclosures and TSRS 2 on climate-related disclosures.

 Sustainability disclosures will be subject to assurance under the International Auditing and Assurance Standards Board (IAASB)’s upcoming International Standard on Sustainability Assurance (ISSA) 5000: General Requirements for Sustainability Assurance Engagements.

Most recently, the Turkish Official Gazette made assurance mandatory on corporate sustainability matters from 2024. The Gazette directed that initially limited assurance will be completed in compliance with GDS 3000 and GDS 3410 till the SDG 5000 is issued.

Global collaboration

The ISSB is actively engaging with national and regional standard setters to facilitate the implementation of a global baseline of sustainability disclosures. With jurisdictions around the world starting to consult on and finalise the adoption of IFRS S1 and S2 into national regulatory frameworks to varying extents, the IFRS Foundation is developing an Adoption Guide to support these efforts. A high-level roadmap to the Adoption Guide has been published, which documents the mechanisms available to support implementation.

The ISSB is focusing on four key areas to enable globally aligned adoption, i.e.: proportionality, transition reliefs, consistency in phasing in and scaling requirements, and capacity building to support implementation.

Key challenges that the ISSB and IFRS Foundation are likely to see in the global uptake of the ISSB standards include:

  • Jurisdictional alignment: While the development of globally applicable standards consolidating several former best practice frameworks is a welcome step to standardising sustainability disclosures around the world, the inherent variations in jurisdictional contexts and market preparedness mean that modifications of the standards to some extent will be inevitable. The ISSB is emphasising the importance of maintaining a high level of alignment to ensure global comparability, which has been the key driver behind the development of the standards.
  • Capacity building: Fully aligning with the requirements of IFRS S1 and S2 will present a significant reporting burden for companies which have not previously considered and assessed climate or sustainability-related matters. Mandatory reporting regimes are largely being designed through phased approaches in recognition of varying levels of maturity. National regulators and standard-setters will need to supplement this with sufficient capacity building, guidance and implementation support to ensure that the implementation of mandatory reporting achieves the aim of enhancing the understanding of climate and sustainability-related financial impacts and the management of these issues.

The development of the ISSB standards and subsequent global uptake represent significant steps towards a more transparent and accountable global business environment. As jurisdictions around the world continue to engage with the ISSB standards, we can expect a new era of sustainability reporting to emerge. Companies around the world reporting on their climate-related disclosures should think beyond mere compliance, to focus on the wealth of opportunities, innovations, and efficiencies that arise from understanding and managing their climate and sustainability challenges. Proactively managing these risks will not only drive sustainable performance but also position businesses for resilience and prosperity in the years ahead.

How Anthesis can support

Anthesis helps organisations cut through the complexity of reporting frameworks and focuses on what matters to key stakeholders, with an end-to-end offering that sets the stage for ISSB-aligned disclosure, risk management and value creation.

While many organisations have carried out single materiality assessments to help shape their ESG strategies, most have not focused in on financial materiality of sustainability-related risks and opportunities. As a crucial step towards ISSB-aligned reporting, our materiality process helps organisations focus in on and prioritise sustainability-related risks and opportunities that could affect the organisation’s prospects. Our ISSB alignment offering extends beyond climate, using our experience across all areas of sustainability, industry, geography, and along the value chain.

To keep informed of the latest sustainability regulations, standards and disclosure requirements subscribe to our sustainability reporting newsletter and you can find our latest insights on the regulations hub.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
How Climate Targets and Actions Fit into Your Business Strategy https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/how-climate-targets-and-actions-fit-into-your-business-strategy/ Mon, 30 Jun 2025 13:56:43 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=64686

How Climate Targets and Actions Fit into Your Business Strategy

Using strategic targets to navigate risk, create opportunity, and build resiliency

30 June 2025

vines climbing a wall

Embedding target setting and achievement into business functions, budget processes, and 1-to-3-year strategic plans is critical to incremental–and ultimately transformative–change and resiliency.

Companies have been setting climate targets for more than 20 years and the rate of target setting, as well as the aggressiveness and coverage of these targets, has increased in large part due to pressure from external stakeholders, including customers, regulators, and investors.

Climate targets are the most viable way for companies to navigate risks, create opportunities, and ensure long-term resilience and profitability in a changing world. 

Navigating climate risks

Climate risks encompass the potential financial and operational impacts that may affect a business because of climate change. They include both physical risks and those associated with the transition to a low-carbon economy:

  • Physical risks: Climate change creates physical risks, including extreme weather events that damage infrastructure, disrupt supply chains, and increase operating costs.
  • Transition risks: As more companies and countries transition to a low-carbon economy, transition risks include changes in regulations, market demand for sustainable products, and technology disruption.

Companies should assess and quantify these risks across their value chain, develop a plan to address and mitigate them, and report these risks and plans publicly.  By adopting effective governance, risk management, and strategic planning practices, companies can enhance their resilience to various risks and capitalise on emerging opportunities. Clear and comprehensive reporting further empowers them to make informed decisions for future growth while keeping stakeholders well-informed about their operations and successes.

Identifying opportunities

In addition to navigating existing and potential risks, targets can also function as a doorway to new opportunities by spurring on innovation and enhancing cost savings:

  • Innovation and new markets: The transition to a low-carbon economy can present opportunities for innovation in sustainable products and services. Companies that develop offerings that deliver sustainable attributes to their customers will be more competitive and increase their market share.
  • Cost savings: Improving energy efficiency, integrating renewable energy into your portfolio, and reducing waste in operations can lead to significant cost savings.

Organisations that embed sustainability into their core strategies not only help build a more climate-resilient future but also gain a competitive edge and unlock new avenues for value creation. Integrating circular business models, sustainable product and packaging design, and waste reduction initiatives serves as a catalyst for environmental progress—driving innovation, strengthening resilience, and supporting the achievement of ambitious climate targets.

Integrating climate action into business functions 

In tandem to setting near- and long-term climate targets, companies should create a decarbonisation roadmap that details emissions reduction measures by category of emissions from the base year through the goal year of their climate targets. Measures can include energy efficiency and renewable energy within owned and leased operations, as well as supplier engagement on upstream emissions reductions and product adjustments to impact downstream use of sold products.

Companies should update their decarbonisation roadmaps  annually to reflect business changes and budgets and to integrate actual data to replace modeled projections. These plans allow companies to integrate targets–and the measures needed to achieve them–into business functions, annual budgets, and 1-to-3-year strategic plans that drive resilience.

By disclosing and reporting on these activities, companies can share with their external stakeholders their progress on climate action, further demonstrating their value.

How Anthesis can help

Climate targets and action have played a major role in how corporations have evolved over the last decade and will continue to drive the way companies do business in a world that has already breached 1.5° C of warming and is experiencing increasingly urgent effects of climate change.

Achieving net-zero demands a comprehensive, coordinated effort across every facet of an organisation. Anthesis supports businesses in navigating the complexities of decarbonisation with customised strategies and services aligned to their unique goals. By drawing on the deep expertise of our decarbonisation specialists and a systems-wide approach, we help accelerate emissions reduction, strengthen climate resilience, and uncover new commercial opportunities.

Our team offers strategic advice on energy and carbon transitions, delivering localised insights and decision-making support to drive sustainable growth—both now and into the future.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
ESRS Revision Progress Report: What You Need to Know About the Latest Updates to the ESRS https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/esrs-revision-progress-report-what-you-need-to-know-about-the-latest-updates/ Wed, 25 Jun 2025 11:26:29 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=64554

ESRS Revision Progress Report

What You Need to Know About the Latest Updates to the ESRS

25 June 2025

River
Andrea

Andrea Smerek

Director

North America

On 19th June 2025, the European Financial Reporting Advisory Group (EFRAG) released a progress report on the revision of the European Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS). This marks a key step in the European Commission’s broader Omnibus Simplification Package, which aims to reduce the regulatory and administrative burden of key sustainability regulations, while still upholding the ambitions of the EU Green Deal.

As a member of Friends of EFRAG, Anthesis contributed to this process through the consultation phase and welcomes the direction of travel in these proposed changes.

While not yet final, the progress report outlines a draft of what a revised, simplified ESRS could look like, targeted at making sustainability reporting less burdensome, more strategic, and more aligned with global frameworks. A second draft is expected in late July, followed by a consultation period running until the end of September. The final technical guidance is due to be submitted to the European Commission by the end of November 2025.

How does this fit within the broader CSRD changes?

These proposed ESRS revisions are one component of the EU Omnibus Simplification Package released in February 2025 and updated in June 2025, focusing on what needs to be disclosed under the ESRS standards.

While the widely discussed ‘stop the clock’ amendment pushed back reporting deadlines for many companies, other regulatory elements, such as who is in scope and how reporting should be conducted, remain at the proposal stage.

The EU Council released a new proposal on 21st June 2025 that aligns with EFRAG’s efforts to streamline ESRS disclosures by removing data points, clarifying which disclosures are mandatory, and emphasising the importance of interoperability between the ESRS and ISSB standards.

What does the progress report tell us?

The draft can be summarised into four key areas of simplification:

EFRAG acknowledges that current requirements for double materiality are resource-intensive and risk becoming a box-ticking exercise rather than a strategic assessment of the impacts, risks and opportunities relevant to an organisation’s unique business model.

The revised approach aims to:

  • Prioritise an organisation’s business model to support the identification of material topics
  • Avoid requiring full disclosure on a topic where only a sub-topic is deemed material
  • Clarify how mitigation should be considered when assessing material impacts
  • Focus assessments on information that is relevant and decision-useful, not exhaustive
  • Emphasise a proportionate and evidence-based process

The revised changes should help organisations generate insights that are more relevant to their unique business models and value chains, strengthening double materiality as a foundational step in identifying what matters most. This clarity supports the implementation of more targeted and effective sustainability practices and enables more meaningful and aligned reporting under CSRD.

The report acknowledges that a lack of clarification around how flexible preparers can be with the report template has led to organisations finding it difficult to tell their unique sustainability story, and an increasing focus on CSRD as a compliance exercise.

To support more coherent and impactful reporting:

  • Organisations will be able to include an executive summary
  • Detailed disclosures can be moved to appendices to enhance readability
  • Disclosure will be limited to material matters, with clearer distinctions between mandatory and non-mandatory requirements
  • Guidance will be provided on the flexibility of reports to avoid duplication of information to suit a rigid report template, helping companies tell their sustainability story more effectively

 

In line with the aim to simplify reporting, EFRAG recommend a significant reduction in the required data points, achieved by:

  • Better aligning the requirements between the two cross-cutting (ESRS 1 & 2) and the ten topical ESRS standards to reduce duplication
  • Removing non-essential data points (both qualitative and quantitative), but with a retained focus on quantitative data points
  • Clarifying which disclosures are mandatory

 

Another key area is the focus on achieving greater interoperability with other standards, with priority given to alignment with the IFRS’ International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB) S1 and S2 standards. This includes aligning reporting boundaries and language across the standards.

 

What this means: A strategic step forward for double materiality

At Anthesis, we welcome these proposed simplifications, particularly the emphasis on positioning the double materiality process as a strategic tool rather than a compliance hurdle. This aligns closely with our established approach and the feedback we shared through the consultation process.

We’ve heard from many large organisations, whose assessments were led by providers without deep ESG knowledge, that the double materiality process was not robust enough compared to other risk management processes and the impacts, risks and opportunities identified felt too generic or disconnected from their actual business or sector context. This creates challenges for developing strategies to address them and leaves a gap between what is reported and what needs to be managed.

Done right, double materiality should enable companies to reflect the unique characteristics of their value chain, prioritise what’s most material to their business, and drive long-term, measurable value.

Our double materiality assessments are grounded in strong ESG expertise and a deep understanding of business strategy, enabling us to deliver insights that are both tailored and decision-useful.

How Anthesis can help

At Anthesis, we help clients go beyond compliance to unlock the full value of sustainability reporting.

Our approach ensures your CSRD disclosures:

  • Reflect your unique risks and opportunities
  • Are decision-useful for internal and external stakeholders
  • Support governance, performance, and long-term impact

With 1,400+ sustainability experts across climate, human rights, supply chain, finance, and beyond, we bring deep technical know-how, regulatory insight, and a proven ability to implement change.

Whether you’re starting your CSRD journey or preparing your second report, we can help you bridge the gap between materiality and action.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Accelerating Your Journey Towards a Sustainable Supply Chain https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/accelerating-your-journey-towards-a-sustainable-supply-chain/ Tue, 17 Jun 2025 16:15:47 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=64462

Accelerating Your Journey Towards a Sustainable Supply Chain

Delivering on your organisation's sustainable procurement ambitions

17 June 2025

Freight train

More than 60% of organisations plan to increase their focus on sustainable sourcing, driven by an increasingly complex web of global compliance requirements, rising investor pressure, and increasing consumer demand for sustainable supply chains.

How confident are you in your organisation’s overall readiness to deliver on its sustainable procurement ambitions?

The reality is that most procurement and sustainability leaders are operating without a clear baseline and face significant hurdles to improve responsible sourcing effectively.

Cost pressures remain a top concern, with 83% of procurement professionals identifying inflationary pressures and rising commodity prices as their primary external challenge. Resource constraints are also a barrier: organisations cite a lack of internal capacity and specialised sustainability expertise as one of the most critical factors slowing progress.

Misalignment across departments and lack of C-suite buy-in, on the other hand, hinder strategic alignment and effective decision-making, often due to siloed communication and unclear requirements. Meanwhile, limited supplier visibility and fragmented supply chain data poses risks, with only 60% of companies having comprehensive visibility into their tier-one suppliers, and even fewer beyond that.

These challenges can make the journey to supply chain transformation difficult and potentially costly. However, by establishing a comprehensive baseline, you can better measure progress and benchmarks, more clearly communicate successes and needs, make more effective and efficient decisions, and produce stronger outcomes.

Where to Begin

The potential gaps and key opportunities within your procurement programme are a good place to start a supply chain transformation journey. With the many pillars that make up a successful sustainable supply chain programme, it is important to know the areas that should be prioritised so that you can build upon the existing foundation strategically and confidently.

As you begin to better structure your procurement programme, it’s also important to measure your supply chain’s performance against key metrics for efficiency and sustainability. Peer analysis can also help in ensuring any changes are proactive and competitive.

Before setting targets or launching new initiatives, the most effective organisations begin with a structured review of where things stand today. That means not just asking whether you have a policy or a code of conduct, but looking at how well your procurement, sustainability, and leadership teams are aligned around your goals, and how those goals are embedded into your systems, processes, and supplier relationships

Sustainable Supply Chain Programme Maturity

Assessing the maturity of your sustainable supply chain programme will enable you to define a clear path to improvement.

A maturity assessment will enable you to:

  • Identify Critical Risks and Compliance Gaps: Global sustainability regulations are evolving rapidly. Understanding where your sustainable supply chain programme may fall short against the evolving landscape allows you to take proactive action before risks turn into penalties or reputational harm.
  • Create Strategic Clarity: By highlighting strengths to build on and gaps to close, a  maturity assessment brings structure to your programme. It clearly identifies what’s working and what needs improvement, and help prioritise actions that align with your business goals, sustainability commitments and market demands.
  • Grow Stakeholder Confidence: Investors, customers, and partners increasingly expect transparency and accountability. A clear maturity assessment positions you to communicate your efforts credibly and confidently and strengthens stakeholder relationships.
  • Operate with greater agility and resilience: Knowing your baseline enables faster decision-making, better risk management, and stronger supply chain continuity when facing market or regulatory disruptions.
  • Unlock competitive advantage: Sustainability leaders are capturing market share, driving innovation, and future-proofing their supply chains.
Supply chain maturity scale

Evaluating Your Maturity

Anthesis has created the Sustainable Supply Chain Tool (SCT) to eliminate barriers to understanding your programme’s maturity in an approachable, easy, and efficient way. The tool can be applied to organisations across varying industry types, sizes, and locations and takes into consideration the key elements of leading social and environmental standards and regulations (i.e., EU Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence Directive) and aims to align with ISO 20400 Sustainable Procurement Guidance.

The Sustainable Supply Chain Tool (SCT) helps structure input, benchmark progress, and highlight critical improvement areas across five essential pillars:

pillars of supply chain management
  1. Policy, Strategy and Communication: Evaluates the existence, integration, and communication of sustainability goals, policies, and strategies within your procurement practices.
  2. People and Leadership: Assesses governance structures, leadership accountability, and employee training to embed sustainable procurement across the organisation.
  3. Procurement Process and Practices: Reviews how sustainability considerations are incorporated into supplier onboarding, contracting, due diligence, and ongoing management processes.
  4. Supplier Engagement and Monitoring: Measures how you engage, collaborate, and communicate with suppliers to drive sustainability improvements throughout your supply chain.
  5. Measurements and Progress: Focuses on tracking, analysing, and benchmarking performance to ensure continuous improvement and transparency in sustainable procurement.

By guiding users through targeted questions and a simple checklist of key documents and activities, the tool makes it easy to pinpoint gaps and identify strengths. Just as importantly, the process itself fosters internal engagement—bringing together procurement, sustainability, and leadership teams to build shared awareness of supply chain sustainability and the urgency for improvement.  

How Anthesis Can Help

The SCT doesn’t just generate a report, it opens the door to strategic conversations and planning. Anthesis’ supply chain experts work closely with clients to interpret results, align internal stakeholders and empower them to build or refine their sustainable supply chain strategy. We co-develop a tailored roadmap with actionable milestones, to ensure you remain compliant, competitive, and resilient. From setting ambition to implementing key actions, we provide the advisory support needed to embed sustainability in procurement processes and drive long-term impact.

Get in touch to learn more about the Sustainable Supply Chain Tool (SCT) and how assessing your supply chain sustainability maturity can give you the insight and direction needed to act with confidence, deliver on your commitments, and future-proof your business.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
UK Activator Summit 2025 Insights https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/uk-activator-summit-2025-insights/ Fri, 13 Jun 2025 14:27:33 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=64426

UK Activator Summit 2025

Panel discussions and workshop insights
Stuart McLachlan at the UK Activator Summit 2025

In May, Anthesis hosted its fourth annual UK Activator Summit in London, bringing together sustainability leaders for a morning of insight and action.

The morning featured insightful panel discussions with guest speakers from Virgin, Nestlé Waters, Peers for the Planet, and Centrica, exploring Sustainability Leadership in a New Era and Rethinking Communications: The Cost of Silence.

Participants also took part in interactive workshops focused on unlocking the value of sustainability, fostering practical dialogue and collaborative problem-solving.

Watch the panel discussions, gain insights from the workshops, and explore additional resources from Anthesis experts below.

Activator Summit hosts:
Host: 

Nearly three-quarters of employees think their leaders are not very well equipped to navigate the current period of global and regulatory uncertainty. 

That’s according to new research conducted by Anthesis and presented by Ben Hayman in the first session of this year’s Activator Summit.  

In this panel discussion, we heard from Darshana Myronidis, Global Director of Sustainability at Virgin, Tom Pakenham, Commercial Director at Centrica, and Lynette Huntley, Founding Director of Peers for the Planet, on what makes for a good leader in the sustainability space. 

The panel was followed by a workshop focused on the qualities employees value in leadership and practical strategies to boost team performance. Attendees also reflected on their own and their organisation’s strengths and weaknesses.

The session was energising and solution-focused, aimed at driving meaningful team change.

panel discussion at the UK Activator Summit 2025

What if you could measure the business return of your organisation’s social and environmental impact initiatives? And what if you could quantify how much it costs your brand if, conversely, it employs greenwashing or greenhushing tactics?  

Anthesis’s new report, The Cost of Silence, looks at just this – and attendees of the Activator Summit were given a preview of the report’s findings ahead of its June release. 

Olly Lawder, Senior Strategy Director, took us through some of the key data points and recommendations after analysing more than 500 companies across 16 sectors over a three-year period. Coupled with a panel session including Anthesis’ Chief Strategy Officer, Pippa Morris, and Sian Chapman, Global Head of Corporate Affairs and Sustainability at Nestlé Waters, we heard how brands reaping the rewards in this space have the smallest say-do gap. 

This fascinating report was of great interest for those looking for tangible data and examples of proving the business case of sustainability. 

Want early access to the report? Subscribe to our Waypoint newsletter to be the first to receive it.

Hosts: 
Olly Lawder

Olly Lawder

Senior Strategy Director, Brand & Comms

Pippa Morris removebg preview

Pippa Morris

Chief Strategy Officer, Brand & Comms

Navigating ESG Reporting in Uncertain Times

Optimising Product and Packaging Portfolios 

Global Director, Circularity & Value Chain Transformation Growth

Associate Director, Sustainable Packaging

The session opened with an overview of the current ESG reporting landscape, focusing on CSRD, ISSB, and CSDDD, and shared key statistics from our analysis of early CSRD reports. Begonia Filgueira, Director at Squire Patton Boggs Law Firm, provided insights on reporting against mandatory frameworks, outlining key compliance considerations.

A roundtable discussion followed addressing what frameworks to align with, how ESG reporting can create strategic value, and what a future-proof ESG roadmap looks like.

While perspectives varied, there was clear consensus on the need for adaptability, strong materiality assessments, stakeholder-focused approaches, and transparent, credible reporting through this time of change.

 

This session focused on how to transition from complexity to circularity to unlock savings and deliver business value. We explored three key levers for driving return on investment: Gaining a deep understanding of your portfolio, engaging the right internal and external stakeholders, and identifying actionable opportunities for change.

The discussion highlighted the importance of end-to-end system changes to support circularity and the value of collaborative partnerships. Participants also reflected on the need for new operating models that go beyond traditional business boundaries, enabling more integrated and sustainable solutions across the value chain.

 

workshop at the UK Activator Summit 2025
workshop at the UK Activator Summit 2025

Accelerating Positive Climate and Nature Impact

Unlocking Industry Collaboration and Collective Investment

In this workshop, we explored how accelerating climate and nature impact can unlock business value and support growth strategies. A key theme was the power of communication in driving change.

We discussed the importance of reframing conversations to avoid climate fatigue, using emotionally resonant messaging to engage audiences more deeply, and identifying effective conversation starters to navigate emerging sensitivities around environmental topics.

Participants agreed that integrating climate and nature considerations can significantly contribute to value creation, but emphasised the need for broader stakeholder engagement to catalyse meaningful and sustained action.

In this session, we explored how geopolitical shifts and short-term financial pressures are challenging business leaders to deliver both impact and value, and how doing so in isolation is increasingly difficult.

We examined how innovative Impact Capital Solutions, such as Industry Pivot Funds, enable corporates to co-invest in shared industry challenges, helping to deliver scalable impact while sharing risk and maximising financial, strategic, and impact returns.

The roundtable discussion revealed strong alignment across sectors, including coffee, wine, and others, on the importance of collaborating with peers and value chain partners to achieve meaningful, scalable impact.

 

Related Insights

Get in touch

Loading…
]]>
UK Activator Summit 2025 Insights | Anthesis Global nonadult
Why Private Equity Can’t Afford to Ignore Nature https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/why-private-equity-cant-afford-to-ignore-nature/ Wed, 04 Jun 2025 16:11:59 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=64327

Why Private Equity Can’t Afford to Ignore Nature

Explore how Private Equity firms can embed nature into investment decisions

4 June 2025

Leaves

Private Equity (PE) firms have begun exploring nature-related strategies in recent years, often with caution, given the perceived lack of tangible returns. Many have treated nature as an extension of climate initiatives, applying similar methodologies without clear financial incentives. However, it is becoming evident that climate action cannot succeed without also addressing nature, and vice versa.

The market is evolving. The focus is shifting from narrow emissions reduction and removal to integrated climate and nature strategies that account for impacts, risks, dependencies, and opportunities across both domains. In this article, we explore why PE must act now, where to focus, and how to embed nature into investment decisions.

Why nature is now on the agenda

The Inextricable Link Between Climate and Nature
  • Over 50% of global GDP ($44 trillion) is moderately or highly dependent on nature and its services, from pollination to water filtration.
  • Nature can provide up to 37% of the mitigation needed to reach the goals of the Paris Agreement, while also playing a key role in adaptation and building resilience.
  • Global wildlife populations have plunged by 73% on average since 1970, threatening the ecosystems underpinning supply chains.
  • An unprecedented water crisis looms: global freshwater demand is predicted to exceed supply by 40% as soon as 2030.
Regulatory and Market Momentum
Financial Materiality is Clear
  • UK & EU Context: Nature degradation could cause a 12% loss to UK GDP, a greater impact than that of the global financial crisis or Covid-19. These material financial impacts are likely to affect banks and other financial institutions, with some banks potentially seeing reductions of 4-5% in the value of domestic portfolios. In the EU, almost 75% of bank loans are granted to companies that are highly dependent on at least one ecosystem service. In the Netherlands, De Nederlandsche Bank conducted a TNFD-LEAP (Locate Evaluate Assess Prepare) assessment of assets in their own account investments and found that a substantial part of the portfolios could have high/very high impacts or dependencies on nature.
  • Value Creation: By utilising frameworks such as the TNFD LEAP approach, investors can identify material nature-related risks and opportunities, leading to more strategic investment decisions and informed investment management. This can ultimately lead to value creation at exit for portfolio companies, through evidenced nature risk management, future-proofing, and seizing of relevant opportunities.

Interactions with nature vary across sectors. For example, agriculture & food and utilities have direct and visible relationships to nature, which can result in financial materiality.

Where PE should focus: short-, medium-, and long-term levers

Time HorizonJustificationFocus AreasExample Actions
Short-termProven ROI Direct operations (e.g., agriculture, forestry)Adopt regenerative farming (e.g., cover cropping, agroforestry, polyculture planting).
Medium-termEmerging upsideValue chain (Tier 1–2 suppliers)Screen for nature-related impacts, risks, and dependencies in due diligence; partner with suppliers to implement sustainable practices.
Long-termValue creation & strategic differentiationPortfolio-wide alignmentSet science-based nature targets (SBTN); leverage carbon credits with biodiversity co-benefits; review nature/biodiversity credit options as further options emerge.

How leading firms are adapting

Due Diligence
Many firms are incorporating nature and biodiversity in due diligence and screening processes. For example, KKR identified a significant dependency and hence risk related to palm oil during the pre-acquisition due diligence of Unilever’s Upfield. To resolve this, the company committed to 100% sustainable palm oil sourcing, which the firm saw as a value creation opportunity. 

Frameworks
PE firms are adopting nature-related frameworks, such as TNFD and SBTN, through materiality assessments, target setting, and disclosure and reporting. For example, Blackstone has joined the TNFD forum, contributing to the development of standardised nature-related disclosures and encouraging reporting on nature-related risks. PAI Partners has also developed the BLOOM framework, which is the firm’s structured approach to integrate nature considerations and promote nature positive actions within the investment lifecycle.

Natural Climate Solutions
Some of the world’s largest PE firms, such as Mirova, HSBC Asset Management, and Bregal Investments, are investing directly in projects aimed at carbon sequestration and ecosystem restoration through natural systems, including afforestation/reforestation, wetland restoration, mangroves, and biochar.

Nature- and Biodiversity-specific Investment Vehicles
Some firms, such as Sienna Investment Managers and Mirova, have created funds with the explicit goal of protecting or restoring nature and biodiversity.

Natural Capital Investment Strategies
Firms including Bregal Investments (Bregal Sphere Nature) and Climate Asset Management have developed investment strategies focused on natural capital, recognising the intrinsic and financial value of forests, water, biodiversity, and soils.

How Anthesis can support

Our global sustainable finance team designs, implements, and reports on responsible investment strategies, helping portfolio companies reach their potential. We support clients in creating strategies and policies on biodiversity, water, and deforestation, aligning with frameworks like TNFD, SBTN, and CSRD, while ensuring alignment with industry best practices. We offer comprehensive support through the following services:

GP Support:

  1. Nature Risk and Opportunity Evaluation: Developing tailored approaches to assess portfolio-level risks and opportunities.
  2. Nature Strategy Development: Developing firm-wide strategies and policies aligned with industry standards and enhancing how nature is integrated into responsible investment programs, including costed and uncosted levers to guide prioritisation.
  3. Reporting readiness: Gap analysis and preparation for TNFD and CSRD disclosure.

Pre-acquisition:

  1. Nature Due Diligence: Evaluating portfolio company dependencies and impacts and integrating risks and opportunities into acquisitions.

Active Ownership:

  1. Nature Strategy Development: Creating TCFD-aligned strategies, conducting materiality assessments, engaging stakeholders, and designing KPIs to track progress.
  2. Risk and Opportunity Assessment: Evaluating risks using tools like ENCORE and WWF Risk Filters, assessing supply chain impacts.
  3. Disclosure and Compliance: Conducting workshops to identify disclosure risks, aligning reporting with PRI, SFDR, TCFD, and TNFD standards.
  4. Value-Driven Research: Analysing financial links with nature, identifying revenue streams like biodiversity/nature credits and carbon offsets.
  5. Peer Benchmarking: Comparing competitors to position portfolio companies effectively.
  6. Policy and Strategy Integration: Enhancing policies aligned with TNFD, SBTN, and CSRD, and developing nature-related targets.
  7. Training and Capacity Building: Delivering training on nature and biodiversity, regulations, and sustainability.

Nature can no longer be ignored. With $17.7 trillion in assets already committed to TNFD, firms that act now will mitigate risks, unlock revenue, and stay ahead of the curve.

Contact us below to discuss how to turn nature from a risk into a return driver.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
PRI Reporting for Private Equity https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/pri-reporting-for-private-equity/ Wed, 04 Jun 2025 14:00:00 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=61889

Principles for Responsible Investment (PRI) Reporting for Private Equity

4 June 2025

The Principles for Responsible Investment (PRI) is the world’s leading proponent of responsible investment. Understanding and adhering to PRI reporting requirements is now essential for investment managers, asset owners and service providers aiming to align with global sustainability goals.

With the PRI reporting cycle opening in May 2025, early preparation is key to accurate and efficient reporting. For those just starting out, it’s crucial to allocate enough time to align internally, establish a dedicated reporting team, and gather the necessary data. For seasoned reporters, focusing on identifying and addressing gaps will ensure a robust submission that highlights year-on-year improvements and showcases your commitment to continuous ESG progress. Ahead of the 2025 reporting cycle, we provide an update on how General Partners can begin preparing their PRI submission.

What is the PRI?

The PRI is a well-established, United Nations-supported network of investors committed to sustainable investment practices. Founded in 2006, PRI helps signatories integrate ESG factors into their investment and ownership decisions. As of February 2025, there are 5,296 signatories, with investment managers making up approximately 76% of signatories.

What are the Principles?

Signatories commit to six voluntary principles:

  1. Incorporate ESG issues into investment analysis and decision-making.
  2. Be active owners and incorporate ESG issues into ownership policies and practices.
  3. Seek appropriate disclosure on ESG issues by investees.
  4. Promote acceptance and implementation of the Principles within the investment industry.
  5. Work together to enhance effectiveness in implementing the Principles.
  6. Report on activities and progress towards implementing the Principles.

These Principles guide investors toward practices that not only drive financial performance but also benefit the environment and society.

About the PRI Reporting Framework

The PRI Reporting Framework is designed to track signatories’ ESG integration progress, helping them benchmark against peers and demonstrate accountability. The 2025 Reporting Framework is closely aligned to that of 2024 and 2023, providing some continuity for a third consecutive year.

Who Must Report?

New signatories are given a grace period during which reporting is voluntary and responses can be kept private. After this, signatories are subject to mandatory reporting against their relevant modules on an annual basis.

Signatories that are part of the Net Zero Asset Managers initiative can report on their commitments to the PRI or the CDP (Carbon Disclosure Project).

Reporting Modules

The 2025 reporting framework includes the following modules:

  1. Senior Leadership Statement: Mandatory for all signatories.
  2. Other RI Reporting Obligations: Mandatory for signatories not in their grace period in 2025.
  3. Organisational Overview: Mandatory for all signatories.
  4. Policy, Governance and Strategy: Mandatory, but some indicators are voluntary.
  5. Manager Selection, Appointment and Monitoring: For signatories that outsource activities.
  6. Asset Class Modules: Only for investment management signatories in the relevant asset classes:
    • Listed Equity
    • Fixed Income
    • Private Equity
    • Infrastructure
    • Real Estate
    • Hedge Funds
  7. Sustainability Outcomes: Completely voluntary.
  8. Confidence Building Measures: Mandatory for all signatories.

Reporting Timelines: Preparing for the 2025 Reporting Cycle

As of February 2025, the PRI have now released the updated 2025 Reporting Framework which provides guidance on the reporting output ahead of the  July 2025 deadline.

The 2025 reporting process follows this schedule:

  • February: Release of updated Reporting Framework.
  • May-July*: PRI signatories will have 12 weeks to report on RI activities and upload to the Reporting Tool.
  • August-October: Data analysis, testing and generation of reports.
  • November: Transparency Reports and Assessment Reports released.

*Exact dates will be confirmed by the PRI one month before the Reporting Tool opens.

What’s New in PRI Reporting

The PRI’s latest developments aim to streamline reporting and enhance the signatory experience.

The new, voluntary Progression Pathways initiative, set to launch in November 2025, supports signatories in advancing their responsible investment practices. These pathways offer tailored guidance, resources, and benchmarks based on varying levels of ESG maturity and ambitions:

Progression Pathways

  1. Pathway A: Those seeking primarily to incorporate sustainability risks and opportunities.
  2. Pathway B: Those aiming to address drivers of sustainability-related financial risks.
  3. Pathway C: Those seeking a positive, real-world impact alongside financial goals. 

Partial Reporting Option: Senior Leadership Statement and Other RI Reporting Obligations Module Requirements in 2025

Signatories that submitted a publicly available report in any previous year and met the minimum requirements will only be required to report on the ‘Senior Leadership Statement’ module and the ‘Other RI Reporting Obligations’ module. The remaining modules are voluntary for this group.

The ’Other RI Reporting Obligations’ module, new for 2025, allows signatories to disclose other responsible investment frameworks and regulations they report against, offering an opportunity to outline the extent of their reporting obligations. It consists of two indicators featuring tick boxes and short-answer fields.

These indicators:

  • Give signatories an opportunity to share the extent of their reporting on responsible investment practices.
  • Provide the PRI with a better understanding of current and future reporting demands on signatories.
  • Collect data on international and regional reporting obligations to help the PRI develop and guide the future development of PRI reporting within the Progression Pathways model.

See the 2025 Indicator changes guide for a detailed breakdown of changes to indicators within all modules.

Reduced Reporting Effort

Alongside the partial reporting option, PRI has introduced new reporting efficiencies such as including a button to skip to incomplete indicators and text clarification boxes to help signatories provide additional information. The pre-filling will continue to be available for signatories who reported in 2023 or 2024, automatically populating 96% of indicators.

Key Considerations for Private Equity

The top 5 things we recommend Private Equity firms to consider ahead of the next reporting cycle:

  1. Review your previous submission to identify gaps and develop an improvement roadmap.
  2. Establish an internal reporting group to support your data collection process.
  3. Ensure portfolio companies are contacted early in the process to aid data collection efforts.
  4. Stay up to date with the latest PRI developments, including reporting modules tailored specifically to Private Equity.
  5. Due to the volume of signatories participating in the process, early submission to the PRI reporting portal is recommended.

How Anthesis Can Help

Navigating PRI reporting can be complex, but Anthesis provides end-to-end support through services tailored to your organisation’s needs:

  • PRI training: Online or in-person workshops explaining the PRI reporting process, modules, and data reporting best practices.
  • PRI gap analysis: Conduct a gap analysis against the PRI scoring guidance and provide improvement recommendations.
  • PRI submission preparation: Preparation and project management of the draft submission. Assistance with the final submission upload process.
  • PRI uplift program: Use recommendations from the gap analysis to develop a pre-reporting cycle improvement program.
  • Trusted advisor to guide you: By partnering with Anthesis, signatories can approach the 2025 PRI reporting cycle with confidence every step of the way. 

Need support with your PRI reporting? Partner with Anthesis to strengthen your ESG credentials and navigate the reporting cycle with confidence. Contact us today to learn how we can guide you every step of the way toward responsible investment success.

]]>
Leading through Uncertainty https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/leading-through-uncertainty/ Mon, 02 Jun 2025 09:12:55 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=64252

Leading through Uncertainty

How to navigate purposeful leadership in a new era
water

Nearly three-quarters of employees believe their leaders need to be better equipped to meet today’s challenges.

Our latest research reveals a crisis in leadership and uncovers the most important characteristics employees seek in their leaders.

In an era defined by constant and significant disruption, employees are increasingly looking to business leaders for guidance and clarity.

President Trump’s return to office and implementation of protectionist economic policies has fuelled instability across global markets. Add to this the threat of a full-scale trade war, escalating conflicts, climate volatility, social inequality, and the rapid advance of AI – and it’s clear that today’s leaders aren’t just running business as usual. They’re navigating a tumultuous global landscape.

But how well equipped are leaders to face these new challenges and, crucially, what are the qualities that employees look for in their leaders?

In our latest research, we posed both these questions to desk-based employees of large organisations – and the answers are striking:

Nearly three quarters (70%) of 1,001 desk-based employees of large companies say their senior leaders are not very well equipped to lead effectively in an increasingly chaotic global business environment.

This finding reveals there is a distinct lack of confidence in the abilities of those in senior leadership teams to adequately meet the challenges of today’s world. Levels of confidence vary according to respondents’ gender, industry and role, but the message is consistent: leaders are falling short of what this moment demands.

Our research also reveals the qualities employees value the most in their senior leaders – with two characteristics rising to the top: ‘clear communication’ and ‘a clear purpose, beyond just making money’. These results echo a growing demand for leadership that is not only decisive, but also meaningful.

But why do these insights matter?

Consistent research indicates that when employee confidence erodes, workplace performance suffers, culture weakens, and talent retention drops.

The results of our survey offer a rare and timely glimpse into how leadership is being experienced on the ground – and what qualities employees really need from senior leaders in times of great uncertainty.

The results of our survey offer a rare and timely glimpse into how leadership is being experienced on the ground – and what qualities employees really need from senior leaders in times of great uncertainty.

In this piece, we’ll reveal the most important traits of good leaders, and provide five essential strategies leaders must adopt now to lead effectively in this moment – when trust is fraying, expectations are shifting, and the stakes have never been higher.

These strategies will see today’s underperforming leaders become tomorrow’s great ones. Leaders who don’t retreat into short-term thinking or strongman posturing, but step up with clarity, conviction, and a responsibility that extends beyond the bottom line.

A reality check for leadership

Trust in leadership is under pressure.

Recent studies – including Edelman’s Trust Barometer and The Purpose Gap from Given, part of Anthesis – reveal a growing disconnect between what leaders say and what employees experience.

Edelman reports a 21% rise in distrust towards business leaders over the past four years. Meanwhile, The Purpose Gap found that over half (52%) of employees believe there’s a clear gap between the stated purpose of an organisation and its actual behaviour.

Our latest research adds further weight: less than a quarter (23%) of employees in large organisations believe their leaders are ‘very well equipped’ to handle today’s turbulent business environment. Nearly half (48%) think their leaders are only ‘somewhat’ prepared, and one in five (22%) hold a distinctly negative view.

It is clear that in the eyes of employees, senior leaders in large businesses have some work to do.

There were some differences between industries, which can be explored in the graphs on the following page.

How well equipped are our leaders to handle turbulent business environments?
How well equipped are your leaders to handle turbulent business environments?

Our research suggests, out of 11 industry categories, the three sectors with the lowest confidence in their leaders were:

  • Legal
  • Sales & Marketing
  • Manufacturing & Utilities

By contrast, respondents in the following sectors displayed the highest confidence levels:

  • IT & Telecoms
  • Finance
  • Architecture, Engineering & Building

These are categories that are at the sharp end of the changes in the world, so it is positive to see confidence that the right people are guiding the ships.

2 Sector
2 Sector2
2 Sector3
2 Sector4
2 Sector5
2 Sector6
2 Sector7
2 Sector8
2 Sector9
2 Sector10
2 Sector11
2 Sector12

Qualities for effective leadership

It’s indisputable that over the last decade, the role of business leaders has become more complex. But as mounting evidence suggests, the majority of leaders do not have all of the tools they need to lead effectively.

As part of our research, we asked what employees look for in their leaders – and it’s these findings, which perhaps offer the most value. They provide a vital roadmap for those ready to lead with greater impact.

Our poll shows one quality stands head and shoulders above the rest: ‘clear communication’.

When asked to choose the top three most important skills a senior leader should have, nearly half (43%) of employees said they valued communication above other qualities. Employees want to hear from their leaders on both the good and bad to provide reassurance and a sense of unity in times of uncertainty.

The second most-valued quality was ‘a clear purpose, beyond just making money’ (28%). Despite the short-term turmoil, people are looking for leaders with vision and conviction they can get behind. The ‘we’re here to make money’ mantra of old just doesn’t cut it in terms of the incentivisation of a workforce.

In fact, ‘making as much profit for the company as possible’ ranked last out of a choice of 11 characteristics, with only 13% citing it as a desirable leadership trait. Employees are sending a powerful signal that the leaders who inspire trust and commitment are those who stand for more than the bottom line.

There are also important differences across demographics. Women placed even more emphasis on communication and purpose, while men were more likely to value tough decision-making.

These insights aren’t just interesting – they’re actionable. They give today’s leaders a blueprint for building trust and motivating their teams. But to truly lead effectively, senior leaders must approach these findings with honesty and integrity. It takes courage to reflect on your own personal qualities – and where they may be falling short.

By turning the performance lens on themselves, leaders can use these findings not just as feedback, but as a roadmap for growth – and a guide to becoming the kind of leader their teams truly need.

top qualities for effective leadership

Five strategies for purposeful leadership in uncertain times

In addition to the qualities a leader needs to demonstrate, we have also identified five core strategies for CEOs and business leaders to adopt now.

Based on our own extensive experience and expertise working with leaders and their teams, read on to discover the new approaches that will help leaders to deliver successful, sustainable performance in an era defined by uncertainty.

1. No compromise on performance

With the UN’s ‘Decade of Action’ at its halfway point, some organisations are already scaling back their ambition as the 2030 targets begin to draw closer. As a result, business leaders who want to maintain a progressive, profitable long-term agenda will need to focus relentlessly on commercial performance.

It is good business to be a good business.

Jesper Brodin, CEO of INGKA Holding

Sustainability and social responsibility cannot be an adjunct, a business cost or merely a campaign. Those who lead successfully in this arena do so by building strong business cases that remove any semblance of compromise.

Today’s leaders need to demonstrate to all stakeholders – but especially to the investor community – that long term-business planning depends on building resilience and sustainability. This isn’t about being ‘woke’. It’s about being commercially resilient in the future. It’s about being ready for what’s next.

The good news is there’s mounting proof that you don’t have to choose between profit and purpose. The Word Economic Forum’s Alliance of CEO Climate Leaders achieved a collective 10% reduction in emissions, while simultaneously increased their revenues by 18% in just three years.

And the Sustainability for Business Resilience Report 2024 shows nearly 9 in 10 business leaders agree: integrating sustainability strengthens their organisation’s resilience.

Critically, leaders must tell this story of sustainability through a lens of uncompromising commitment to business performance.

Our latest research indicates that effective communication is the most vital of tools in demonstrating intent and commitment to performance both internally and externally.

This isn’t greenhushing – it’s a smarter, more commercial way of framing sustainable performance. Using language centred on efficiency, innovation, and growth helps stakeholders see the value in a long-term agenda.

We’re already seeing leaders strike this balance. Among them, Jesper Brodin and his team at IKEA show what’s possible when you treat sustainability as a performance driver – not a cost. As Brodin says: “It is good business to be a good business.”

Speak to us for a free leadership workshop to explore the strengths and weaknesses within your team or organisation, and learn how to adopt strategies which can unlock sustainable performance.

2. New agility

Agility is often cited as essential to modern leadership – and with good reason. Today’s leaders are operating in a state of near-constant disruption, where the ability to adapt quickly is no longer a nice-to-have but a baseline expectation for C-suite members.

But true agility goes beyond fast decisions. It requires continuous learning, humility, and self-awareness. This can be difficult to accept for those at the height of their professional careers.

Our research found that ‘being open to learning’ ranks among the top five qualities employees value in senior leaders – a reminder that even those at the top must remain students of the world around them.

Agility has in the past been used as an excuse for opting out of the longterm agenda. This is not a mandate for compromise or retreat.

The best leaders are those who adapt in the moment while staying focused on sustainable performance. They surround themselves with diverse, informed voices – making bold decisions rooted in insight, not instinct.

WE DEFINE NEW AGILITY THROUGH FIVE KEY CAPABILITIES:

I.
Temperament

Are you able to make and present calm, rational and well-informed decisions in the face of rapidly changing environments?

II.
Beliefs

Can you maintain core beliefs and remain focused on your North Star while adapting quickly to changing circumstances?

III.
Skills

Are you able to increase your awareness, understanding and capabilities around rapidly emerging subjects or disciplines?

IV.
Support

Can you delegate and empower others to support you where you have gaps in skills, experience or knowledge? Can you offer guidance and mentorship to develop those that need it?

V.
Communication

Can you do all of the above and take people on the journey with you, delivering the balance between transparency and comfort?

3. Enable followership

Although leadership is an idea that dominates in organisations, it is a narrow concept: focused on individuals rather than the cultures they create. In our experience, ‘followership’ is just as critical in organisational outcomes.

To be clear, the concept of followership is not about passive obedience, but about engaged, values-driven people who actively support and shape the culture around them.

The idea of ‘exemplary followership’ highlights the latent potential of people within organisations who aren’t just led, but who think critically, act with purpose, and take ownership. More recent studies indicate that strong followership directly improves leadership effectiveness.

Yet this sits counter to the current image being projected of leadership being about strong individuals and concentrated power.

In a world where populist and egoistic traits have become mainstream and almost expected, senior leadership teams will need to challenge this narrative — replacing it with individual autonomy, empowered teams, and collective intelligence.

To encourage followership, tools such as effective communication, offering and receiving support and seeking out diverse perspectives consistently rank highly in leadership attribute surveys – including in our own latest research.

Using a framework such as the Inner Development Goals (pictured below), leaders can assess and develop the inner skills their teams need – like empathy, resilience, and critical thinking – to build more conscious, collaborative, and purpose-driven cultures that enable sustainable performance and positive impact.

When done well, ‘exemplary followership’ doesn’t just support leadership. It builds the next generation of it.

inner development goals
Source: Inner Development Goals

4. Stay close to the action

Our new research reveals that more than three-quarters of employees believe their leaders aren’t very well equipped to meet today’s challenges. This echoes findings from our recent Purpose Gap Report, which uncovered a similar disconnect – this time between how C-suite leaders perceive their organisation compared to how middle managers experience it.

The message? Leaders are often too far from the reality of day-to-day operations.

The mandate for sustainability is often set from senior executives, fully bought in and incentivised to deliver. But their success hinges on mid-level executives – “the cohort of hidden actors and unsung heroes” as Paul Polman et al. described them in a recent article written for the Harvard Business Review.

The success or failure of sustainability initiatives often depends on a cohort of hidden actors and unsung heroes: an organisation’s mid-level executives and team leaders.

Paul Polman, founder and co-chair of Imagine, and former CEO of Unilever

As our own research demonstrates, it’s this cohort who crave a clear purpose, beyond just making money. In our poll, this quality was selected as the second most important leadership value after communication.

So how do business leaders provide that ‘clear purpose’ middle managers are looking for to help them deliver vital initiatives?

To meet that need, leaders must get closer – both to the work, and to the people delivering it.

This is particularly relevant in sustainability where complex regulation and reporting creates layers between executives and the reality of the work going on in their businesses.

Agile leaders who have taken the time to understand the complex sustainability agenda will be able to tackle on-the-ground challenges, building trust, sharpening decision-making, and helping spot gaps early.

It also means knowing your people: what support, skills or freedom do your middle managers need to succeed? How do you empower them to lead confidently without fear of failure or repercussion?

The most effective leaders model the behaviours they want to see. They lead with clarity, connect across teams, and create the conditions for others to thrive.

Again, clear communication, persuasive business cases and incentives are key to this.

5. Own your legacy

As we hit the halfway mark in the 2020s, a decade heralded as critical in the future of humanity, many leaders are thinking about what they will leave behind.

Legacy is a powerful motivator – an innate human trait focussing on the impact you want to make and how you’ll be remembered. While it can be fuelled by negative drivers – ego, vanity or existential angst – it can also offer clarity and purpose.

With the average CEO in the UK aged 55 years (Spencer Stuart Board Index, 2024), legacy thinking can provide focus: lifting leaders out of short-term firefighting and aligning them to a bigger vision rooted in values, not just quarterly goals.

The idea of legacy usually hinges around making a positive impact based on personal values and a bigger purpose, rather than just hitting the targets of the commercial cycle.

“There is no greater thing you can do with your life and your work than follow your passions – in a way that serves the world and you.”

Richard Branson, founder of Virgin Group

Leaders who can understand and plan for a legacy will be better able to navigate the complexities of the changing environment with the courage required to make difficult choices and build something that outlasts their tenure and creates real, lasting change.

Responding to this moment

Our latest research reveals a distinct gap between what employees need from their leaders and what they’re currently experiencing in a world in flux.

With less than a quarter of respondents in our survey believing their senior leaders are ‘very well equipped’ for today’s challenges, it’s clear that traditional approaches to leadership are falling short.

And once employees lose trust in their leaders, it becomes significantly harder to inspire, align, and retain teams. Productivity drops, engagement wanes, and the path to meaningful change becomes harder and more uncertain.

The road ahead requires more than charismatic figureheads or bold statements – it demands leaders who are present, open to learning, committed to sustainability, and capable of creating meaningful followership. And while some sectors are faring better than others, confidence gaps across industries indicate this is not an isolated issue, but a systemic one.

The next five years will be defined by how leaders respond to this moment – whether they retreat into the safety of familiar tactics or step forward with a renewed sense of purpose, clarity and courage.

By adopting the traits and the strategies explored here, senior leaders won’t just manage uncertainty – they’ll inspire confidence and engagement through it.

And in doing so, they’ll reshape what it means to lead, while delivering sustainable performance and tangible impact.

ABOUT THIS REPORT

For this report we surveyed 1,001 desk-based employees (middle management and below), in large organisations in the UK across a variety of sectors and job functions. The research was conducted by independent market research company Censuswide in April 2025.

HOW WE CAN HELP

Anthesis partners with ambitious organisations to build the leadership and create the change needed to unlock true sustainable performance. We bring together a unique set of capabilities including business strategy, purpose, transformation, innovation and education and equip businesses and leaders with the tools they need to navigate uncertainty.

Speak to us for a free leadership workshop to explore the strengths and weaknesses within your team or organisation, and learn how to adopt strategies which can unlock sustainable performance.

]]>
CDP Plastics Disclosure: What This Means for Your Company https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/cdp-plastics-disclosure-what-this-means/ Fri, 30 May 2025 16:08:00 +0000 https://anthesis1.wpenginepowered.com/?p=53515

CDP Plastics Disclosure Changes

Plastics questionnaire updates you need to know for the 2025 reporting season

CDP Guidance Hero - Plastic wrapping

Director

North America

CDP Disclosure season has begun and if your company uses plastics, there are some important changes to the CDP reporting questionnaire that you need to know.

What is the CDP plastics disclosure?

In January 2023, CDP (formerly the Carbon Disclosure Project) updated its water questionnaire to include a new module assessing the risks of plastics pollution to water security. The new module is informed by existing plastic disclosure frameworks such as the Ellen MacArthur Foundation and UNEP’s New Plastics Economy Global Commitment framework. Any company that uses, produces, or commercialises plastics falls within the scope of the disclosure.

The Water Security questionnaire W10 consists of nine plastics-related questions. Companies are being requested to disclose information on whether they have:

  • Mapped the weight and types of plastic products and packaging across the value chain.
  • Assessed human and environmental concerns related to plastics used or produced within the value chain.
  • Assessed plastics-related financial or strategic risks along the value chain.
  • Set plastic targets across products and/or packaging.
  • Eliminated problematic and/or unnecessary plastics in products and/or packaging.
  • Adopted reuse models.

In 2023, CDP asked 7,000 companies to answer these nine questions regarding their understanding of their plastic footprint. However, CDP reported that only 2,962 companies (42%) provided responses to the water security questionnaire for 2023 and that most of them did not report plastic-related risks.

Key differences in the 2024 CDP questionnaire

For the CDP 2024 Questionnaire, CDP is asking all disclosing companies, over 23,000 in total, to disclose their plastics risks and their risk mitigation efforts as part of an integrated questionnaire.

Some companies in high-impact sectors will get additional questions. However, as in 2023, the responses to the Plastics questions will not be scored by CDP in 2024, as CDP recognizes that many companies are in the early stages of developing their action, accountability, and reporting on plastics.

There are also some significant changes to the questionnaire. Namely, plastics questions are now incorporated throughout the questionnaire, signaling the potential impacts to climate and nature. Plastics are no longer siloed within the Water Security questionnaire. Instead, they are embedded across the environmental domain, in particular in Section 10: Environmental Performance – Plastics.

2024 questionnaire changes

The 2024 changes to Section 10: Environmental Performance – Plastics include:

  • Mapped plastics use – 1.24.1 (W10.1): Have you mapped where in your direct operations or elsewhere in your value chain plastics are produced, commercialized, used, and/or disposed of? Reasons are requested for a “No” response.
  • Plastic targets & metrics – 10.1 (W10.4): Do you have plastics related targets, and if so what type? Target type and metric required.
  • Business activities – 10.2 (W10.5): Indicate whether your organisation engages in plastics-related activities (e.g., production/commercialisation, packaging, services, waste management, financial products).
  • Quantitative disclosures – 10.3 (W10.6): Provide the total weight of plastic polymers sold and indicate the raw material content (virgin, renewable and recycled content percentage).
    • 10.4 (W10.7): Provide the total weight of plastic durable goods/components sold and indicate the raw material content.
    • 10.5 (W10.8): Provide the total weight of plastic packaging sold and/or used, and indicate the raw material content.
  • Circularity potential – 10.5.1 (W10.8a): Indicate the circularity potential of the plastic packaging you sold and/or used (reusable, technically recyclable, recycled in practice and at scale).
  • End of life waste – 10.6 (NEW): Provide the total weight of waste generated by the plastic you produce, commercialise, use and/or process and indicate the end-of-life management pathways.

By adding the mapping question 1.24.1 to the Introduction section of the questionnaire, an expectation of disclosure is being established as the very minimum.

2024 Questions (2023 Analog)Requested Responses
1.24.1 (W10.1) Have you mapped where in your direct operations or elsewhere in your value chain plastics are produced, commercialized, used, and/or disposed of?Yes
No and planned
No and not planned
Upstream
Downstream
End of life
Other
*Reasons are requested for a No response.
(W10.2) Deleted
(W10.3) Deleted
10.1 (W10.4) Do you have plastics related targets, and if so what type?Target type and metric required
10.2 (W10.5) Indicate whether your organization engages in the following activities.Production/commercialization of plastic polymers (including plastic converters), durable plastic goods and/or components (including mixed materials).

Usage of durable plastics goods and/or components (including mixed materials), Production/commercialization of plastic packaging, goods/products packaged in plastics.

Provision/commercialization of services that use plastic packaging (e.g., food services), waste management and/or water management services, financial products and/or services for plastics-related activities.

Other activities not specified.
10.3 (W10.6) Provide the total weight of plastic polymers sold and indicate the raw material content.Total weight of plastic polymers sold (MT).

Virgin, renewable and recycled content percentage.
10.4 (W10.7) Provide the total weight of plastic durable goods/components sold and indicate the raw material content.Total weight of plastic polymers sold (MT).

Virgin, renewable and recycled content percentage.
10.5 (W10.8) Provide the total weight of plastic packaging sold and/or used, and indicate the raw material content.Plastic packaging sold, used (MT).

Virgin, renewable and recycled content percentage.
10.5.1 (W10.8a) Indicate the circularity potential of the plastic packaging you sold and/ or used.Plastic packaging sold, used (MT).

Reusable, technically recyclable, recycled in practice and at scale percentage.
10.6 (NEW) Provide the total weight of waste generated by the plastic you produce, commercialize, use and/or process and indicate the end-of-life management pathways.Production, commercialization, usage, processing (MT).

End of life management pathway percentage.
CDP Guidance: Changes to the 2024 Questionnaire

What can your company do to prepare?

  1. Understand your plastics: Where do they come from? How are they used? What is their end-of-life fate? To help answer these questions, Anthesis supported the WWF in building the ReSource Plastic Footprint Tracker to provide brands with the ability to map the fate of their plastic packaging around the world.
  2. Understand your plastic usage: A packaging baseline can give you insight into plastic used to produce and package each item you produce. A supplier engagement activity is usually part of this process to fill in the information gaps. A properly built baseline can also support goal tracking and compliance reporting.
  3. Set impactful targets: An essential element of any sustainability plan is goals and targets that are rooted in reducing the environmental and social impacts of consumption. While it is important to reduce the effects of unmanaged waste on our ecosystem, we have reached a tipping point where these targets need to be assessed by climate-change impact, too. Targets should best match the concerns of all stakeholders and be holistic in their scope.

Three-Step plastics assessment for CDP reporting

Most companies will need to assess their current corporate plastic situation as it relates to plastic products and packaging for CDP reporting. We recommend the following 3-part assessment.

  1. Conduct a plastics baseline assessment. For most companies, the first step to enable plastics reporting is conducting a baseline assessment. It’s important to remember that every organisation’s baseline looks different and is largely contingent on the company’s ability to track and manage plastic-related data. A baseline assessment helps to identify where plastics are used within the company’s products and operations. This assessment will help identify types and volumes of specific plastics used with products and packaging. From there, the company is best equipped to map plastics further across the value chain.
  2. Map the plastics value chain. A value chain is a series of consecutive steps that go into the creation of a finished product or packaging – from start (e.g., initial design) to finish (e.g., its arrival at a customer’s doorstep). Mapping the value chain will help to identify where plastics are used across the value chain.
  3. Identify plastic-related risks, opportunities, and circularity potential. Mapping the value chain not only helps identify where plastics are used across the value chain, but also provides insight into value chain risks and opportunities related to plastic use, reduction, elimination, and/or circularity potential. Where relevant and feasible, this assessment should ideally include an identification of raw materials used in plastics products and packaging.

Developing a plastics strategy, roadmap, and action plan

Once the analytics are completed – the next step is to develop a strategy, roadmap, and action plan on how to address plastics used in products and packaging.

This should reflect:

  • The outcomes of the analytics phase, and how they impact the overall strategy and roadmap
  • The business priorities related to plastics
  • Corporate policy or position on plastics across product and packaging portfolios
  • Any plastic related targets related to reduction and/or elimination
  • Any product and/or packaging redesign needed for plastic reduction or improving circularity
  • The viability of recycled content or alternative materials
  • How transitioning to a circular business model can bring a sustainable advantage
  • The roadmap and timeframe for plastics reduction activities
  • Actionable next steps that should be taken to address plastics and enable CDP disclosure

The implementation phase should operationalise the strategy through policies and processes, and disclosure should be updated annually to CDP.

Implementing and operationalising the plastics strategy

Once the strategy, roadmap, and action plan have been developed, socialised, and agreed upon by relevant stakeholders, the implementation process must begin. While every organisation’s journey will be different based on their level of maturity, the following tasks should be considered for implementation:

  • Implement the plastics strategy, roadmap, and action plan with policies, processes, and procedures that help operationalise it.
  • Disclose progress to CDP annually.
  • Hear from Anthesis experts as they discuss how you can improve your CDP score.

How can Anthesis help?

Anthesis have extensive experience supporting companies to understand, strategise, and progress their sustainability and ESG objectives. Our team includes experienced CDP practitioners and sustainable production experts, covering products, packaging, and waste recovery.

We have honed our methodology for baseline assessments and specialise in advising complex organisations with global supply chains. Our life-cycle assessment (LCA) experts can also support in setting objectives that make sustainable sense for your business and stakeholders.

Our CDP expertise

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Reflections from Circularity 2025 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/reflections-from-circularity-2025/ Wed, 21 May 2025 15:02:17 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=64143

Reflections from Circularity 2025

Denver, Colorado | 29 April – 01 May

21 May 2025

Aluminum can production

Circularity 2025, one of the top circularity-focused events in the world, wrapped up in Denver, Colorado a few weeks ago. Several Anthesis representatives were on hand to participate in panel discussions, lead roundtable sessions, and generally take the pulse of the industry.

The conference presented a dynamic and, at times, conflicting atmosphere, reflecting both a sense of meaningful progress and the large scope of work still ahead in achieving sustainability goals. Following are reflections from the Anthesis attendees on a few of the hot topics discussed at the event.

Textiles

Apparel circularity has been a major discussion topic for years, with many brands exploring owned, peer-to-peer, and partner-supported resale models. However, with the introduction of California SB 707, commonly known as the Responsible Textile Recovery Act of 2024, there has been a noticeable shift of attention toward textile collection, sortation, and recycling technologies to enable fiber-to-fiber solutions. Though most of the hard details of the California regulation are still in formation, the conversation is gaining momentum among all players.

To accelerate this avenue of circularity, new partnerships and agreements are being announced with great frequency. One example: Goodwill Industries is positioning itself in the middle of the action as a go-to source for reliable end-of-life textile supply, and other familiar corporate names will rise in relevance as they shift traditional business models to meet the new opportunity created by California legislation. 

Key takeaway: Smart brands are not sitting on their hands while they wait for rules to be written, they are building their knowledge about EPR in general, looking to current regulation in Europe to help scenario-plan, and making sure their sales, product, and sourcing data are ready to go.

Reuse

When it comes to reuse, a recent and limited-time pilot program executed in Petaluma, California was the subject of discussion and deserved praise. A joint effort from Closed Loop Partners, competing beverage brands, and a host of local restaurants and coffee shops produced impressive results.

It’s long been understood that successful reuse models must minimise friction for consumers, with the best results coming from closed circuit environments—like those at sporting events and concert venues—where reuse options are the only choice. The Petaluma project took this idea to the next level by making reusable cups the default option at many local businesses, and making cup-drop locations nearly ubiquitous downtown.

These efforts boosted item cycle rates (the rate at which containers are returned by users and ultimately reused) over the threshold of environmental impact viability, uncommon for open circuit experiments. It’s a big step forward that highlighted both the possibility of achieving success with a city-wide reuse program, but also the large challenge that remains. Ultimately, container cycle rates are the most important metric. These rates will have to get much higher to have a meaningful environmental impact, while associated costs will need to come down.

Key takeaway: The power of precompetitive collaboration and a relentless focus on maximising consumer convenience and clarity of message are key to circular initiatives.

Built Environment

The magnitude of the environmental footprint of buildings is often overshadowed at circularity events by topics related to consumer brands. Fortunately, this trend seems to be changing, and several sessions addressed important topics in the built environment. Of note were discussions delving into strategies for building deconstruction, with a representative from the city of Boulder citing impressive results from a pilot they ran which successfully diverted >85% of reclaimed materials to recycling and reuse pathways. The effort was greatly helped by local policy requiring deconstruction over demolition, engineers to certify certain materials (like structural steel) as safe for reuse, and the ability to use available government land to store materials.

Just as with efforts in other industries, circularity for the built environment relies on our ability to accurately identify, grade, sort, and path reclaimed building materials to next life. Unsurprisingly, a number of technology providers are stepping up to help catalog and market reclaimed materials. This is great work, but even more significant progress will be unlocked by working further upstream, designing buildings for deconstruction from the very start, embracing Digital Product Passport (DPP) at material creation, and creating local policies that favor, or even require deconstruction versus traditional demolition.

Key takeaway: There is an already-high rate of material salvageability in building deconstruction, with more room to grow, and local policy and governmental partnerships are critical to encourage and facilitate it.

Measurement

A recurring theme of the conference was the lack of consensus around how to define and measure circularity. The multitude of metrics (e.g., CTI, MCI, LCAs) reveals a fragmented landscape with no unified approach, making it difficult to benchmark progress or set meaningful targets. In the absence of a universal framework, LCAs remain a critical tool, particularly at the design stage, for assessing the environmental impacts of circular interventions.

Anthesis Director Karine Kicak was a panelist in one of the best-attended sessions, Carbon Emissions and Circularity: the Scope 3 Quagmire. It drew a large and engaged audience, highlighting both the interest in and the challenges of aligning circularity with decarbonisation goals. A central issue discussed was how current greenhouse gas (GHG) accounting methodologies often fail to capture—or even disincentivise—the benefits of circular practices like reuse and remanufacturing. This misalignment between climate and circularity metrics is further compounded by organisational silos, where climate and circularity teams rarely collaborate. Despite these obstacles, the message was clear: don’t wait for perfect data or methodologies—begin implementing circular strategies now, with the understanding that measurement frameworks will eventually catch up.

A tension emerged throughout the conference between the urgency to scale up circular solutions and the slower, necessary work of impact assessment. There is a distinct difference between circularity at launch and at scale, with real implications for environmental outcomes.

Key takeaway: Measuring specific programs through LCAs and broader strategies via indices like CTI is essential, and critical refinements must be made to improve accuracy and incentivise taking the right actions. However, we mustn’t let progress slow while we reach measurement perfection. The ultimate goal is impact reduction. Measuring the precise magnitude of impact and apportioning it to the right sources is a means to the end—not the end in itself.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
The “Why” of Target Setting https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/the-why-of-target-setting/ Tue, 20 May 2025 14:49:04 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=64136

The "Why" of Target Setting

Feeling confident in setting and maintaining climate targets

20 May 2025

A vine in the sun

If there’s one element that holds true in corporate sustainability, it is that change is always present. In 2025 alone, we have witnessed a shift in key regulations, a change in political headwinds, and the release of updated frameworks such as the SBTi’s draft  version 2.0 of the corporate net-zero standard.

In light of these shifts, some companies are considering not pursuing SBTi validation for their targets, downshifting their target ambition, or altogether abandoning their climate commitments. Other businesses, meanwhile, still perceive targets to be a necessary part of securing future resiliency and are doubling down.

Amid all this change, how can you feel confident in setting or maintaining your climate reduction targets?

What You Need to Know

At Anthesis, we have seen several examples of climate targets driving action and accountability within organisations.

And we’re not alone in our finding. According to the SBTi, companies with SBTs have successfully reduced their emissions by 25%, contrasting with an increase of 3.4% in global emissions from energy and industrial processes over the same period. Perhaps this is why the number of companies with SBTs continues to grow, breaking over 6,000 in 2024.

Additionally, companies are being asked to set targets by their large customers, such as Microsoft, Salesforce, and Astra Zeneca, along with government organisations. This growing trend is also reflected in the 24% year-over-year increase of the number of large scale purchasers asking suppliers to report environmental data.

These statistics indicate that setting a climate target is still good for business.

What You Should Do Next

So how do you get leadership’s buy-in to set a target, or refresh an existing one? It’s all about building the business case.

Key steps to building the business case for target setting include:

  • Talking with your sales teams to collect data on how many of your clients are asking your organisation to reduce emissions.
  • Discussing with Procurement how driving efficiency and improving supplier relationships will both reduce emissions and improve business value.
  • Brainstorming how new, sustainable products may spur innovation, expand customer reach, and drive progress toward a target.

Once your leadership is on board to set a target, you will need to design the target that is the right fit for your business. This can be based on your business growth strategy as well as consideration of your peers, your stakeholders, and your customers. For example, a high growth company may opt for a Scope 3 intensity-based target, while a large company with a few very large suppliers may choose a supplier engagement target.

In an follow-up insight piece, Melissa Donnelly and Drummond Lawson discuss how targets and climate action should fit into an an overall business strategy.

How Anthesis Can Help

At Anthesis, we work with clients of all industries and sizes on their target setting journey. For companies in the early stages, we help them build the stakeholder environment and business case to set and deliver a target, as well as to design the best fit target for them. For those further along in their journeys, we partner together on target submission and validation, decarbonisation road mapping, and building out corporate governance structures to support progress. To date, Anthesis has helped over 70 companies receive SBTi validated targets.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
2025 CDP A List Criteria & Scoring Methodology Explained https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/cdp-a-list-criteria-2025-scoring-guide/ Mon, 19 May 2025 14:09:43 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=64118

Preparing for 2025 CDP Success: Scoring Methodology and A-List Criteria Themes

How to make an early start on your 2025 CDP submission and maximise your score.

19 May 2025

Ocean

Although the CDP Portal does not officially open until w/c 16th June, companies can now make an early start on their 2025 CDP disclosure since the 2025 Questionnaire, Reporting Guidance and Scoring Methodology documents are now available. With this now available, understanding the CDP A List criteria and scoring methodology early is key to maximising your performance.

When it comes to scoring, CDP has released a whole range of documents that support response preparation, particularly if you are looking to obtain a particular score.

What are the key CDP scoring documents?

  • Scoring Introduction – an informative introduction to how the scoring at CDP works, including the scoring process, principles and disclaimers.
  • Scoring Methodology – informs how each question will be scored (i.e., what points will be given) at each scoring level.
  • Essential Criteria – the specific minimum criteria that must be met at each scoring level for the climate theme.
  • Scoring Category Weightings – details the different scoring categories and the weightings applied to each for scoring.
  • Scoring Changes – a list of the key changes in scoring methodology compared to 2024.

All CDP scoring documents can be found here.

What are the big scoring changes this year?

In alignment with the questionnaire, CDP is focused on stability this year, and therefore, changes mainly relate to improvements and corrections made in wording for the clarity and consistency of scoring criteria, rather than any major scoring updates. This should hopefully mean there is less to learn this year for seasoned CDP responders.

A word on Essential Criteria

CDP introduced Essential Criteria last year, below the A level, which we believe may have tripped up a few companies who were not aware of its importance to the overall soring process.

What does Essential Criteria stand for?

The essential criteria are additional requirements – beyond a minimum score at each level. Even if a responder has passed the scoring threshold at a particular scoring level, they will not be eligible for that level if they do not meet all of the essential criteria.

This means that in addition to the CDP Scoring Methodology, responders must also follow the Essential Criteria document, as this could make all the difference to your score.

  • For climate change, essential criteria remains in place at the Awareness, Management, Leadership and A-List scoring levels.
  • For forests and water, essential criteria remains in place for the Leadership and A-List scoring level only. 

Essential criteria is only applicable to those responding to the full corporate questionnaire.

Key leadership and A-list criteria themes

To meet the 2025 CDP A List criteria, organisations must align their climate disclosures with a set of key leadership themes that reflect high-impact actions and transparent reporting.

  • Transition Plan – disclosing a public, credible transition plan aligned with limiting global warming to 1.5°Candincludes financial planning, capital allocation, and decarbonisation levers.
  • Reduction targets – has set an SBTi-approved target for Scope 1 and 2 emissions or discloses a target that is fully aligned with a 1.5⁰C scenario.
  • Verification of all emissions – has obtained third-party verification for all disclosed emissions, including Scope 3.
  • Value chain engagement – discloses proactive engagement with suppliers/customers to manage and reduce emissions. This may include specific supplier requirements, training, or incentives.
  • Incentives for climate action – has climate-related performance metrics linked to executive compensation.
  • Transparent public reporting – publishes climate data in mainstream financial or sustainability reports and demonstrates progress tracking against goals.

Maximising your score in 2025

In addition to following the Essential Criteria closely, we recommend paying careful attention to the following, no matter what score you are going for:

  • Ensure all questions that you can answer are answered – unanswered questions will be scored zero out of the maximum available points for that question or set of questions.
  • For questions where multiple rows are being disclosed, put your best row first – for some questions, CDP scores your best row, look out for this throughout the questionnaire and as a general rule, always put your strongest row first.
  • Look out for cross-scored questions – if you are conducting a mock score of your response, be sure to also check the cross-scored questions to ensure you have maximised all points.
  • Tailor open text questions and ensure they relate to each environmental issue – if you plan to copy and paste qualitative responses, remember to review them and edit so they make sense for each environmental issue.
  • Pay attention to the Scoring Categories Weighting document – this is worth a read to understand where you should spend most of your efforts when it comes to developing your responses.

How Anthesis can support

For over a decade, Anthesis has supported both new-to-CDP and A List organisations through the reporting process. With deep expertise across climate, water, forests, biodiversity, and plastics, combined with extensive CDP disclosure experience, we provide strategic guidance to help clients navigate their responses and stay ahead of evolving CDP requirements and their implications.

If you are aiming to improve your disclosure and meet the stringent CDP A List criteria, we can help you focus efforts where they matter most. Book a call with Anthesis experts to discuss how our in-house scoring tools will help give you a mock score and identify those questions to prioritise before submitting.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Effective Target Setting: A Critical Pathway to Net-Zero https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/effective-target-setting-a-critical-pathway-to-net-zero/ Tue, 13 May 2025 12:52:44 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=64029

Effective Target Setting: A Critical Pathway to Net-Zero

Addressing climate challenges, and looking ahead toward a sustainable future

13 May 2025

Leaf on a vine.

It has been nearly a decade since the Paris Agreement was negotiated in December 2015. In that time, the world has witnessed some of the most unimaginable impacts of climate change, with tragic weather-related events that rival fiction.  

In the same period, there has also been a plethora of activities focused on climate, including: 

All these shifts and changes are not just a lot to list, but also to navigate. Yet despite differences in politics and perspectives, there is little question that we need a livable, sustainable planet for the future.  

From a corporate perspective, the sentiment is not too dissimilar: business needs to be relevant and resilient in a future sustainable economy.  

Grounding this “need” for sustainability within the “noise” of the past decade can be quite overwhelming. At best it is confusing and difficult to understand what really matters and how to prioritise what you need to do next, or perhaps even where to begin. 

Over the next year, our net-zero and decarbonisation experts will offer a series of regular thought-pieces that will include both retrospective and forward-looking insights. Over the course of this series, we aim to provide a distillation of the most business-critical elements, clarity on why these are important, and succinct guidance on what you need to do next.  

We will cover topics including: 

  • The “why” of climate targets and fitting them into overall business strategy. 
  • The pros and cons of the SBTi, navigating “regulatory alphabet soup,” and target compliance  
  • What does ‘best’ look like for the Technology, Food & Agriculture, and Retail & Apparel sectors? 
  • Roadmapping the net-zero journey and integrating Nature and Just Transition into your strategy and transition plans. 

In our next installment, Associate Directors Dana Jennings and Jonathan Oon provide an overview of climate targets and why they are necessary.

How Anthesis Can Help 

Anthesis offers comprehensive support to organisations throughout their business climate and sustainability journey.  

Partnering with Anthesis ensures that your organisation’s sustainable performance is credible, ambitious, and aimed at securing future relevancy and resiliency for your business. 

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Insights on the Current State of Net-Zero Action  https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/insights-on-the-current-state-of-net-zero-action/ Fri, 09 May 2025 20:57:00 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=65037

Insights on the Current State of Net-Zero Action 

Addressing changes, and looking ahead toward the future 

9 May 2025

Carbon Literacy Training Reducing emissions relies on every single person in an organisation being aware of the carbon impacts of their choices, and feeling motivated and supported to take action.
Curtis Harnanan

Curtis Harnanan

Director

It has been nearly a decade since the Paris Agreement was negotiated in December 2015. In that time, the world has witnessed some of the most unimaginable impacts of climate change, with tragic weather-related events that rival fiction.  

In the same period, there has also been a plethora of activities focused on climate, including: 

All these shifts and changes are not just a lot to list, but also to navigate. Yet despite differences in politics and perspectives, there is little question that we need a liveable, sustainable planet for the future.  

From a corporate perspective, the sentiment is not too dissimilar: business needs to be relevant and resilient in a future sustainable economy.  

Grounding this “need” for sustainability within the “noise” of the past decade can be quite overwhelming. At best it is confusing and difficult to understand what really matters and how to prioritise what you need to do next, or perhaps even where to begin. 

Over the next year, our net zero and decarbonisation experts will offer a series of regular thought pieces that will include both retrospective and forward-looking insights. Over the course of this series, we aim to provide a distillation of the most business-critical elements, clarity on why these are important, and succinct guidance on what you need to do next.  

We will cover topics including: 

  • The “why” of climate targets and fitting them into overall business strategy. 
  • The pros and cons of the SBTi, navigating “regulatory alphabet soup,” and target compliance  
  • What does ‘best’ look like for the Technology, Food & Agriculture, and Retail & Apparel sectors? 
  • Roadmapping the net-zero journey and integrating Nature and Just Transition into your strategy and transition plans. 

In our next installment, Dana Jennings and Jonathan Oon will lead provide an overview of climate targets and why they are necessary. 

How Anthesis can help 

Anthesis offers comprehensive support to organisations throughout their business climate and sustainability journey.  

Partnering with Anthesis ensures that your organisation’s sustainable performance is credible, ambitious, and aimed at securing future relevancy and resiliency for your business. 

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
A New Era of ESG Uncertainty and Opportunity https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/a-new-era-of-esg-uncertainty-and-opportunity/ Tue, 29 Apr 2025 11:50:52 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=63884

A New Era of ESG Uncertainty and Opportunity

29 April 2025

staircases

Through conversations with colleagues, clients, and external networks, we’re hearing a clear and consistent message: companies are navigating a period of heightened uncertainty around sustainability. Shifting global regulations, evolving stakeholder expectations, and growing political sensitivities are creating a tension between the need to keep making progress and a growing hesitancy – both in the pace of ESG efforts and how organisations position themselves publicly.

This dynamic environment is prompting critical conversations within organisations about how to sustain momentum, reframe the business case, and adapt strategies to remain credible, resilient, and future-focused.

Key themes emerging

  • Regulatory push-pull: Organisations are navigating both expansions and contractions in regulatory frameworks – such as CSRD rollbacks in the EU, evolving US regulations, and ISSB developments – creating ambiguity around compliance requirements and timelines.
  • Time as a strategic asset: For those facing delays, ESG leaders are seeking ways to capitalise on the extra time to reinforce internal alignment, build capabilities, and keep sustainability positioned a value driver – not just a compliance exercise.
  • Structural questions: In the absence of a clear regulatory north star, companies are re-examining how ESG is embedded internally. Should it remain centralised, or be decentralised across business units? We’re seeing experimentation and adaptation.
  • Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion (DEI) is under the spotlight: Topics like DEI are under renewed scrutiny. Amid mixed regulatory signals and public debate, companies are reassessing how they engage on socially sensitive issues.
  • Systemic shift or passing moment? A key question remains: is the current turbulence temporary, or indicative of a long-term shift? Seasoned sustainability professionals recognise the cyclical nature of public sentiment and are focusing on long-term value creation. Leading companies are choosing agility – building resilience into ESG strategy and governance.

Reframing the value of sustainability in a post-compliance era

As regulatory timelines shift and political landscapes evolve, companies must rearticulate the business case for sustainability – one grounded in strategic value, not just compliance.

ESG leaders are under increasing pressure from boards, investors, and private equity stakeholders to demonstrate short-term wins alongside long-term vision. This includes translating ESG into tangible business metrics: cost savings, risk reduction, capital access, employee retention, customer loyalty, and long-term growth.

Case studies and peer benchmarks are in high demand. ESG professionals are seeking examples that clearly show how others have delivered measurable impact. These proof points are critical to sustain momentum and secure internal buy-in. In a function that can often feel isolated, cross-organisational collaboration is key – not only to share technical expertise, but to exchange practical strategies for engaging internal audiences.

Walking the Line: Communicating Sustainability in a Politicised Environment

In today’s polarised climate, ESG communication requires precision. Messaging that resonates in one market may trigger backlash in another – especially evident in the differing dynamics of the US and EU.

Amid growing political scrutiny and resistance to ESG-related themes, especially in the US where DEI, climate, and perceived ‘woke’ practices are under increasing pressure to soften or scale back their language. Meanwhile, investors, consumers, and employees continue to demand transparency and bold commitments.

Our upcoming Cost of Silence report shows that staying silent can be as risky as overexposure. Companies that retreat in the face of criticism risk reputational harm, eroded trust, and reduced influence. We can see this dynamic playing out in real time: Some companies that have rolled back their DEI commitments in response to public pressure have experienced noticeable drops in engagement, while those that maintained their stance have seen increases in consumer support and traffic. This underscores how public positioning on ESG can directly impact consumer engagement and business performance.

In parallel, we are seeing growing evidence that effective sustainability communication starts with language. Terms like “clean air,” “fairness,” and “opportunity” resonate more broadly than charged terms like “climate justice” or “equity.”  Strategic language choices allow companies to stay values-driven while sidestepping unnecessary controversy. Internally, messaging must align with business priorities and use the language of frontline teams. Externally, it must resonate across stakeholder groups – from regulators to employees.

Bottom Line: ESG leaders must not only decide what to say, but how, where, and to whom they say it. Strategic messaging is no longer a nice-to-have – it’s a core competency for sustainable business leadership in a divided world.

Sustainability progress happens when we speak the language of business concerns and personal values rather than regulatory frameworks and technical terminology. When we translate abstract concepts such as environmental, social and governance into tangible outcomes that matter to stakeholders, whether that is soil health, business longevity or generational legacy, we find common ground that transcends divisions.

Stuart McLachlan, CEO, Anthesis.

How do we maintain momentum? 

From recent collaborations and internal discussions, a clear path forward to maintaining momentum is emerging. Successful organisations are taking a thoughtful, strategic approach – balancing realism with resilience.

Pause to see clearly: Leaders are taking a moment to pause, cutting through the noise, headlines, and political rhetoric to focus on what’s materially important. By grounding their strategy in core business drivers and stakeholder needs, they are better able to navigate the distractions and maintain clarity of purpose.

Scenario planning for agility: The future is always uncertain, but in today’s rapidly shifting environment, building flexibility into ESG strategies is critical. Many are developing 3–4 broad scenarios that span a range of potential future states:

  • Best-case: The current pushback on sustainability follows a familiar “Gartner Hype Cycle” trajectory, leading eventually to a stronger, more mature focus on sustainable value creation.
  • Middle-path: Current turbulence is a short-term anomaly, and regulatory expectations and market pressures soon return to 2024 levels, but with sharper emphasis on data quality and value generation.
  • Worst-case: Resistance to sustainability becomes systemic in certain regions, deepening social and environmental risks until new breaking points prompt a recalibration.

Prioritising no-regret actions: Organisations are focusing on steps that make sense regardless of the scenario: reinforcing the business case for sustainability, focussing on operational performance, refining language and messaging, investing in efficiency and impact, and engaging with peers to collectively track and respond to emerging developments.

Continuing to move forward: Anchored in values, backed by science, and aligned with long-term business goals, sustainability leaders are discovering new ways to differentiate, build resilience, and create stakeholder value.

In navigating these shifting tides, those who remain grounded in purpose, yet agile in approach, will not only weather the storm, but they will also shape what comes next.

Thank you to our clients for generously sharing their insights – both directly with our teams and through our Forums. These conversations are vital in helping us collectively navigate the challenges and opportunities in sustainability.

If you’re interested in joining future sessions or sharing your perspective, we’d love to hear from you – do get in touch.

]]>
How to Streamline ESG Data Collection https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/how-to-streamline-esg-data-collection/ Thu, 24 Apr 2025 12:08:34 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=63849

How to Streamline ESG Data Collection

24 April 2025

colorful data lines

ESG data provides crucial insights into the environmental, social, and governance (ESG) attributes of a company. This data is used by investors, analysts, companies, policymakers, and other stakeholders to assess business effectiveness, risk exposure, and sustainability performance.

Effective ESG data collection supports risk mitigation, enhances corporate reputation, improves investor confidence, and enables informed decision-making. It is increasingly required for both mandatory reporting (such as CSRD, SFDR, and SEC) and voluntary disclosures (such as GRI, SASB, and CDP).

With growing investor and consumer demands for transparency and sustainability, having an accurate, auditable ESG data collection process is more critical than ever.

  • Environmental Data – Metrics on resource usage, carbon footprint, climate risks, waste management, and biodiversity.
  • Social Data – Insights into labour practices, diversity and inclusion, community engagement, and customer satisfaction.
  • Governance Data – Information on board structure, executive compensation, business ethics, regulatory compliance, and risk management.
  • Investors & financial institutions – Use ESG data for due diligence, risk mitigation, and sustainable investment decisions.
  • Corporations & business leaders – Leverage ESG data to ensure regulatory compliance, enhance brand reputation, and improve sustainability performance.
  • Regulators & government bodies – Enforce ESG regulations and monitor corporate disclosures.
  • Insurance companies – Assess climate risks and underwrite sustainable projects.

ESG data collection challenges

In today’s digital landscape, good data is the foundation of all good decision-making. Yet in its current form, ESG data isn’t very useful. In fact, the challenges associated with proper data collection and processing may be skewing results, misleading stakeholders, wasting resources and leading to poor decisions.

Companies often face several hurdles when gathering ESG data, such as managing large volumes of information stored across disparate sources, ensuring data accuracy, and dealing with integration challenges within existing business operations. Additionally, they must navigate the complexity of evolving ESG regulations, collect data from suppliers across the value chain, and overcome resource constraints caused by limited internal expertise and bandwidth.

Best practices for ESG data collection

How to address the challenges associated with ESG data collection

1. Determine the right data to collect

To effectively collect ESG data, organisations must first determine what the right data is to collect. This begins with identifying key reporting frameworks that your organisation needs to report on, such as CSRD, TCFD, and GRI, to establish the data points required. This will help you to determine the data you need to collect and when.

2. Establish a governance and controls framework

Establishing a governance and controls framework is essential in defining data ownership and responsibilities. ESG data collection should involve collaboration across various departments, including finance, HR, operations, and legal. Organisations must then implement clear processes that outline how data is collected, verified, and reported to maintain consistency and accuracy.

3. Engage stakeholders and data owners

Companies should conduct education sessions with employees to ensure all stakeholders understand the importance of ESG data, their roles in the collection process, and the broader implications for corporate reporting. Regular progress check-ins, dashboards, and tracking tools can also incentivise timely data submission and improve internal accountability.

4. Utilise ESG data management tools

Implementing an ESG data management tool can significantly enhance efficiency and accuracy. Digital tools such as Anthesis’ Mero platform streamline the data collection process, reducing manual effort and streamlining compliance with reporting frameworks. These tools automate data validation, minimise duplication, and provide centralised data storage, allowing for better analysis and decision-making.

5. Ensure data integration and accessibility

Companies should align their ESG data strategy with existing IT systems and financial reporting tools to create a seamless flow of information. Exploring ways to efficiently integrate with third-party platforms and external data sources, such as through APIs, can further improve the accuracy and comprehensiveness of ESG reporting.

6. Enhance data quality assurance

Organisations must also establish validation mechanisms to verify data accuracy, completeness, and reliability. Adopting audit-ready controls ensures that ESG data meets regulatory requirements and can withstand external scrutiny.

How to streamline ESG data collection

Adopting a robust ESG data management platform offers significant benefits to organisations, streamlining the ESG data collection and management processes, and helping bring it in line with best practice. If this is something you are considering, look for a system that provides:

  • Configurability – Seamlessly integrates data from multiple sources, including APIs, minimising manual effort and centralising information.
  • Framework compatibility – Ensures compliance with the reporting frameworks and standards that your organisation reports to, for instance CSRD, GRI, SASB.
  • Technical and advisory expertise – Is backed by ESG specialists who understand your organisation’s material impacts, risks, and opportunities, helping you make informed decisions and uncover commercial value.
  • Security and compliance – Implements strong security measures to safeguard data and prevent unauthorised access.
  • Accessibility and user-friendliness – Simplifies data input and analysis, enhancing usability across your organisation.
A comprehensive ESG data platform can:

Simplify reporting and automate data collection.

Improve real-time monitoring for better decision-making.

Reduce manual data entry errors.

Enhance security, traceability, and assurance readiness.

Streamline supplier data collection and management.

Improve internal and external ESG communication.
Benefits of digital ESG data management

Case Study: Nutresa’s ESG Data Transformation

Nutresa, a global food conglomerate, faced challenges managing ESG data across 52 production plants, 32 companies, and 8 business units. Their reliance on Excel-based manual data collection led to inefficiencies, errors, and limited real-time insights.

By implementing Mero, Nutresa:

  • Automated data collection and minimised errors.
  • Enabled more frequent and detailed ESG reporting.
  • Gained granular visibility into ESG performance across operations.
  • Strengthened investor confidence through transparent disclosures.

Nutresa’s success illustrates how ESG data automation drives efficiency and sustainability leadership.

Key questions to ask at the beginning of your ESG data collection journey

  • How does your company assess ESG disclosures today?
  • Have all ESG data sources been identified?
  • How is ESG data captured, and what internal controls exist?
  • How reliable and complete is the current ESG data?
  • How prepared is your company for ESG assurance and audit requirements?

Ensuring a structured and efficient ESG data collection process is essential for regulatory compliance, investor confidence, and sustainability success. Organisations should evaluate their current data strategy and consider implementing an ESG data management system to streamline data gathering, improve accuracy, and enhance reporting capabilities.

Get in touch with Anthesis today for a demo of Mero and discover how digital ESG data management can transform your organisation.

Frequently asked questions

Companies report ESG data through standalone sustainability reports (GRI, SASB), integrated annual reports, regulatory filings (CSRD, SFDR), and voluntary disclosures (CDP, B Corp).

  • Mandatory: CSRD, TCFD, SFDR, EU Taxonomy, SEC (proposed).
  • Voluntary: GRI, SASB, CDP, ISSB.

Explore these regulations

Anthesis offers modular digital solutions such as Compliance Suite and Anthesis RouteZero, which integrate ESG data collection with supply chain due diligence and ESG training.

By leveraging digital tools and best practices, companies can streamline ESG data collection, ensuring accuracy, efficiency, and compliance in a rapidly evolving regulatory landscape.

Discover how digital ESG data management can transform your organisation.

]]>
SBTi’s Draft Corporate Net-Zero Standard Version 2.0 Whitepaper https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/whitepaper-sbti-draft-corporate-net-zero-standard-v2/ Tue, 22 Apr 2025 16:26:29 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=63831

Get in touch

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Earth Day https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/earth-day/ Tue, 22 Apr 2025 10:32:45 +0000 https://anthesis1.wpenginepowered.com/?p=53629

Earth Day 2025

Our Power, Our Planet

planting a tree


What
 is Earth Day?

Every year on April 22, Earth Day marks the anniversary of the birth of the ‘modern environmental movement’ in 1970. Earth Day has become a significant annual occurrence observed by billions of people worldwide, with the aim of mobilising citizens into action to help to protect our planet.

Our Power, Our Planet

As Sustainability Activators, Anthesis proudly supports the official 2025 Earth Day theme: “Our Power, Our Planet.” This global call to action urges governments, businesses, communities, and individuals to unite behind renewable energy and accelerate the transition to clean power—with the goal of tripling global clean electricity generation by 2030.

Realising this ambition requires bold collaboration and urgent action. At Anthesis, we’re proud to play our part—working alongside clients to deliver measurable sustainability performance, advocating for systemic change, and supporting the shift to a net zero, nature-positive economy.

Whether through our commitment to the highest standards as a certified B Corporation, or through the everyday climate-positive actions of our people, we believe in the power of collective impact. Together, we have the power to shape a more equitable, resilient, and sustainable future.

Our Work

Explore how Anthesis is helping clients across sectors unlock the power of renewable energy, accelerate decarbonisation, and deliver impactful solutions to support a just and sustainable energy transition.

Play Earth Day Bingo

earth day bingo 1
Click the image to see the full version

For Businesses

Businesses and investors play a critical role in accelerating the transition to a more prosperous and equitable economy. It is now widely understood that companies who develop strong Environment Social Governance (ESG) standards and sustainable business practices have better profitability, stronger financials, happier employees, and more resilient stock performance.

However, at present, the investment in the shift to a low carbon world is about 6 times lower than it needs to be. It is now more crucial than ever that businesses and investors embrace the benefits of a green economy to help save our planet from a climate disaster. This Earth Day can be a catalyst for acceleration.

Ways for businesses to support Earth Day:

  • Implement an ESG programme and prioritise sustainable practices
    Now is the time for stakeholders, investors and business leaders to prioritise sustainability in their agendas. Explore how Anthesis works with a broad range of businesses to improve their Environmental, Social and Governance performance and reduce their carbon emissions.
  • Become a B Corp
    A B Corporation uses business as a force for good; it is a company that has pledged to hold itself up to the highest standards of ESG in order to balance profit and purpose.  Our B Leaders at Anthesis are experienced sustainability professionals who have been fully trained to support companies to gain B Corp certification. Additionally, Anthesis is registered as a B Corp Way partner to provide bespoke support to companies looking to improve their broader impact, whether they are a B Corp or not.
  • Ensure your workforce is ‘carbon literate’
    Reducing carbon emissions relies on every single person in an organisation being aware of the carbon impacts of their consumer and lifestyle choices, and feeling motivated and supported to take action. Anthesis is proud to be both an accredited Carbon Literate Organisation and a qualified trainer in Carbon Literacy. Explore our Carbon Literacy services; whether you are members of the C-suite looking to gain a better handle on your own sustainability responsibilities, an individual looking to reduce your own impact, or an investor looking to take ownership and support portfolio companies, we can support you.


For Communities

We believe that for communities to thrive, we must accelerate the process of humanising cities, creating spaces for citizens, and promoting local nature. Anthesis supports governments, cities and regions to take ownership of their impact in mitigating the climate crisis and helps to create healthy living spaces for all.

There are many ways to help strengthen communities in order to support the shift to a more sustainable an healthy planet.

Ways for communities to support Earth Day:

  • Explore our sustainable Cities &  Environment services
    From assessment of environmental and social impact through to waste solution implementation, we define strategies for creating sustainable low carbon cities and regions. 
  • Join a local Earth Day event in your community
    There are events worldwide, both virtual and in-person. Use the Earth Day map to find your closest event.
  • Support a local environmental organisation
    Volunteer with or join a local group that focuses on supporting our earth – for example community gardens and orchards, local compost groups, conservation groups, Land Trusts and Sierra clubs.
  • Join a community ‘clean-up’
    Contribute to a cleaner and healthier community by participating in a litter-pick. You can do an individual clean-up, organise a group event, or join Earth Day’s ‘Global Clean Up’.
  • Support reforestation 
    Reforestation is one of our best hopes for restoring our Earth. Plant a native tree to benefit your local community or consider making a donation to the Canopy Project, an initiative that improves our shared environment by planting trees across the globe.
earth day communities


For Individuals

It may feel like our individual actions are a drop in the ocean, however we have the simple yet effective power to make our voices heard through our lifestyle, consumer and financial choices, our civic actions, and our personal interactions. The more people we can encourage to make positive choices each day, the greater the ripple effect on the pace of corporate and government action and the greater the positive impact on our earth.

Ways for individuals to support Earth Day:

  • Research your pension provider
    Ask your employer who your pension provider is, what options you have to invest in sustainable funds, and whether your provider has made a net zero target. Ask your investment advisor about funds with an ESG component. Explore the Make My Money Matter website; you could consider asking your employer to sign their green pensions charter.
  • Research your bank
    Find out how sustainable your bank is on Switch it and consider switching to a more sustainable option.
  • Donate to a climate action charity
    Research your local not-for-profit or charity that focuses on climate justice, climate action, conservation or community investment. Make a donation or get involved with volunteering opportunities.
  • Shrink your ‘foodprint’ and adopt a plant-based diet
    To reduce your impact on the earth, buying and consuming less meat is one of the most effective things an individual can do. Shrink your ‘foodprint’ by switching to a predominantly plant-based diet – there are many climate-friendly recipes online.
  • Buy local and seasonal
    Visit your local supermarket or farmer’s market instead of the big chain stores when buying groceries and always check the labels to see where your food was grown (the more local, the less carbon mileage).
  • Contact your local legislator / government representative
    Tell your local representative that the health of people and the planet should be their top priority. Urge them to support a key legislative initiative – for example Build Back Better, Extended Producer Responsibility, Greenspace Protection, Voter’s Rights.
  • Switch to a more sustainable mode of transport
    Walk, cycle or take public transport whenever you can, instead of driving or flying. If you need a car, consider buying an electric or hybrid vehicle – it’s a big investment, but will pay off in the long run form you, amidst rising gas prices and for the planet, due to the zero emissions.
  • Reduce your plastic waste
    Look for ‘zero-plastic’ groceries in your local supermarket or research your nearest ‘zero-waste’ shop. Only buy products with recyclable packaging and ensure you understand the recycling facilities in your neighbourhood. Bring your own re-usable shopping bags to avoid single-use plastic bags.
earth day individuals

Earth Day gives us time to reflect on how we take action on climate. It is going to take all of us to act, to innovate, and to implement changes to protect the planet.

]]>
Does CDP Reporting Still Hold Value in 2025? https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/does-cdp-reporting-still-hold-value-in-2025/ Wed, 09 Apr 2025 13:40:58 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63794

Does CDP Reporting Still Hold Value in 2025?

Exploring CDP’s role in the current reporting landscape and how to prepare for the 2025 cycle

9 April 2025

Mountains

As organisations navigate the increasing changes and uncertainties in the sustainability reporting landscape, especially in light of the EU’s recent Omnibus Proposal, the Climate Disclosure Project (CDP) still emerges as an influential platform for organisations to disclose environmental impact and demonstrate commitment to transparency. CDP remains a central player in the global push for corporate accountability on climate change, deforestation, water security, and now, plastics and biodiversity.

In this article, we explore CDP’s role in the current reporting landscape, what we learned from the 2024 submission and how to best prepare for the 2025 cycle.

CDP’s role in reporting

With increased regulatory pressures and changes, a rise of data standardisation, and a focus on Scope 3 emissions and supply chain transparency, CDP still has a significant role to play in the current reporting landscape and here is why:

  • Consistent and credible ESG reporting: The ESG mandatory reporting bar is rising and changing, and CDP is a good, steady test case for preparing and maintaining your reporting muscle.
  • Alignment with other reporting frameworks: CDP is aligning with mandatory reporting frameworks such as the European Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS) and the International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB), making it a valuable tool for gaining exposure to these standards.
  • Keeping up to date: CDP continues to refine and expand its questionnaire, introducing new themes such as plastics and biodiversity in recent years and incorporating reporting on impacts and dependencies across topics, encouraging continual improvement in your disclosures.
  • Globally aligned and widely adopted: CDP disclosers continue to grow in number, with 24,000+ responders in 2024, up 6.3% from 2023.

What we learned from the 2024 submission

In 2024, CDP launched a new portal and integrated questionnaire, unifying all topics – now referred to as themes – into a single format, which aims to streamline responses and minimise duplication. 

Also, the 2024 questionnaire asked all companies to disclose their plastics risks and risk mitigation efforts, and Science-Based Targets were embedded within the questionnaire.

Summary of the significant changes
A simplified questionnaireCDP unified climate change, forests, and water security data into a single questionnaire to streamline the process. It’s more simple, avoids duplication, and provides a holistic view.
Improvements for small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs)A new questionnaire was designed to address the needs and capacities of smaller businesses, making CDP disclosure more accessible. It aims to encourage greater participation from SMEs and support their sustainability journeys.
Biodiversity and ecosystemsData on biodiversity and ecosystem services was strengthened in 2024. This recognises the synergy between climate change and biodiversity. The natural ecosystem impact will now be considered, as well as efforts to protect and restore biodiversity.
Increased focus on supply chain engagementMore detailed information is required on how businesses are working with their suppliers to address climate-related risks and reduce emissions. It aims to encourage collaboration and improve accountability.

However, not all changes made by CDP in the last year have been well received. Along with a new questionnaire and portal came the decision to lock viewing entire responses behind a paywall, which some would argue was the most valuable part of CDP, even more so than the scores.

This year, we have also witnessed some frustrating scoring surprises and delayed detailed score reports. As CDP moves towards more quantitative scoring, there might be a few kinks to iron out in the scoring process, which some companies may have been subject to this year.

While we know CDP still holds a valuable spot on the list of reporting frameworks, with more responders than ever in 2024, companies need to be aware of these changes and do what they can to prepare early.

Ocean_Water_Coast_Nature

Implications for the 2025 CDP reporting cycle

As we look ahead to the 2025 cycle, set to begin soon, we’re prepared for a smoother season, building on the lessons learned from the significant changes introduced in 2024.

Some considerations you should prepare for and build into your CDP timeline are:

  • Benchmarking against peers may be challenging, so it’s essential to draft responses carefully, closely following CDP’s reporting guidance and scoring methodology.
  • Conduct a gap analysis early to identify areas for improvement and understand what’s needed to elevate your score.
  • Pay attention to the new Essential Criteria. Introduced in 2024 as part of the scoring methodology, these are critical for advancing to higher scoring levels and ensuring your progress is accurately reflected.
  • Stay alert to last-minute updates. CDP made changes to the scoring methodology just two weeks before the deadline last year – even after some participants had submitted – so always work from the latest version of CDP documentation.
  • Start uploading responses to the CDP Portal early. This helps you understand question dependencies and leaves time for final checks to ensure you’re submitting your strongest response.
  • Run a mock scoring assessment before submission to catch any last-minute scoring opportunities. Also, take note of programmatic gaps that can be addressed post-submission to strengthen your overall ESG strategy.

How Anthesis can support

For over a decade, Anthesis has supported both new-to-CDP and A List organisations through the reporting process. With deep expertise across climate, water, forests, biodiversity, and plastics, combined with extensive CDP disclosure experience, we provide strategic guidance to help clients navigate their responses and stay ahead of evolving CDP requirements and their implications.

If you would like help to understand your score from last year or require support with your submission this year, please contact us below.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Unpacking the First CSRD Reports: What Can We Learn? https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/unpacking-the-first-csrd-reports-what-can-we-learn/ Tue, 08 Apr 2025 15:47:00 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63777

Unpacking the First CSRD Reports: What Can We Learn?

Anthesis reviews the first round of CSRD reports to identify how companies are approaching them and what they are reporting on.

8 April 2025

River

The European Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS) have raised the bar, even for the most experienced reporters. Despite the proposed changes under the EU Omnibus package, the ESRS continue to set the benchmark for best-practice reporting.

With the first CSRD reports now published and many more on the way, we have analysed the initial round to identify key insights on how companies are approaching these new requirements and what they are focusing their efforts on.

Amount of CSRD reports

What do the first CSRD reports highlight?

Substantial, detailed disclosures

The most immediate takeaway? Sustainability Statements are substantial disclosures. On average, they exceed 98 pages and typically include material disclosures from 6-7 of the 10 topical ESRS standards. ​

Unsurprisingly, the ESRS standards related to Climate Change (E1), Workforce (S1), and Business Conduct (G1) were almost universally reported on. Every company reviewed disclosed information on  E1, all but one reported against S1, and just six had no material topics under the G1 standard. This trend is also reflected in the maturity of performance against these topics.

Going beyond the minimum on climate

All companies reporting under the Climate Change (E1) standard must establish a net zero target date by 2050. However, many are going further.

A significant number have conducted climate scenario analyses, and nearly a third have set net zero targets before 2050, going beyond the minimum requirement.

Less commonly reported standards

The least reported standards were Affected Communities (S3), Water & Marine (E3), and Pollution (E2).

The industries most likely to report against these standards are:

  • Affected Communities (S3): Engineering and construction, energy (electricity generation, utilities, oil and gas and renewables), commercial banks and food retailers.​
  • Water & Marine (E3): Pharmaceuticals, food, alcoholic beverages, chemicals and, engineering and construction​.
  • Pollution (E2): Pharmaceuticals, engineering and construction, air freight and logistics, and medical equipment and supplies.

This indicates where these industries might want to invest valuable time and resources for maximum impact while also keeping up with the maturity of their peers and customers.

ESRS is raising the bar for sustainability – not just in reporting but in the action and systems behind it. One great story is not going to cut it anymore, companies need plans and strategies to improve performance and manage risk across their material topics.

Alex McKay, Technical Director

Material impacts, risks and opportunities ​(IROs)

There is a wide variation in the number of identified IROs. The average number identified is 31.7, with one company reporting as many as 120 material IROs and some as few as 9. Unsurprisingly, the more carbon-intensive industries tend to identify more IROs. The approach to defining IROs varies significantly, ranging from brief, generic descriptions to highly-specific explanations.

Average number of IROs

A higher number of identified IROs generally correlates with a longer overall report, with approximately 1 IRO per 3 pages of content.

Balance is needed between being specific enough for the IROs to be useful and insightful while keeping the number low enough to be manageable. IROs – both wording and scoring – should be regularly reviewed to ensure they are complete and useful.

IROs are the foundation of ESRS reporting, so getting them right really matters. We recommend clearly defining the impact, risk, or opportunity, identifying where it sits in the value chain, and specifying the consequences for the business and the wider world.

Justine Vandermotten, Principal Consultant

How is the information reported?

Most Sustainability Statements are presented before the financial statements within annual reports.

Placement of sustainability statement

Companies often use ESRS-specific terminology throughout the main body of text, whether this be topic codes, disclosure codes, or both.​ Over time, we would expect to see companies referencing ESRS terminology less in their reporting. However, as we learn and adjust to this new form of reporting, this provides useful structure for the report creator and reader. Given the complexity of ESRS, companies may hang on to this referencing for longer than expected.

ESRS terminology

Assurance

Unsurprisingly, given that we are still in the early days of ESRS reporting, almost all the reports received an unqualified opinion from an auditor, meaning the statements were deemed to be fair and transparent.​ One company received a qualified opinion, while another did not state whether the opinion was qualified or unqualified.

It is clear from the first reports and conversations with our clients that the spend on assurance through audit firms is significant – typically 20% of the financial audit budget. For companies still in scope of the CSRD post-omnibus, both listed and non-listed large EU firms, there is now an opportunity to reassess this spending, ensuring it is proportionate. By better preparing for the audit process in year two, businesses can ensure that more of the budget is allocated to projects that generate sustainable impact and strategic value for the organisation.

Companies need to use the extra time the Omnibus changes afford them and get their data and controls in order. It will make reporting and assurance simpler and smoother and could pay dividends in the long run.

Chris Shaw, Technical Director

How Anthesis can support

The first wave of CSRD reports marks the beginning of a more robust, transparent, and consistent approach to sustainability reporting, whatever happens next with the EU Omnibus.

At Anthesis, our CSRD experts guide clients through every step of the journey. We help cut through complexity to not only ensure compliance but also unlock insight, inform strategy, and create lasting advantage.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Why Sustainable Product Design Is Becoming a Business Imperative https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/why-sustainable-product-design-is-becoming-a-business-imperative/ Tue, 01 Apr 2025 19:45:49 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63704

Why Sustainable Product Design Is Becoming a Business Imperative

Examining the shift from ad-hoc sustainability projects to embedded solutions

1 April 2025

hands using a pump bottle

Over the past six months, we’ve seen a significant shift in how companies approach sustainable product design. More businesses are moving beyond isolated eco-initiatives and are instead working to embed sustainability holistically across their product portfolios. The goal is clear: align with decarbonisation pathways, regulatory demands, and circularity principles, while also ensuring sustainable design is practical, scalable, and commercially viable.

This evolution marks a maturing of sustainable design efforts—companies are no longer just looking at individual products but at system-wide solutions that integrate sustainability into decision-making, supply chains, and product strategies. It’s a shift driven by a mix of regulatory pressure, financial incentives, and an increasing recognition that sustainability is now a core business function, not an add-on.

Why Sustainable Design Makes Business Sense

Sustainable product design isn’t just about reducing impact—it’s about building resilient, future-ready businesses. Companies that integrate sustainability into their design processes see benefits that go beyond compliance, from stronger market positioning to long-term cost savings.

Sustainability as a Competitive Advantage

Sustainability is no longer an optional add-on—it’s a defining factor in market leadership. Consumers are increasingly aware of the environmental impact of their purchases, and in our work with global brands, we see that companies making genuine, measurable commitments to sustainability are building stronger customer loyalty. Businesses that fail to align with these expectations risk losing market share, as sustainability-conscious consumers actively seek out alternatives.

The investment landscape is shifting too. Over the past year, we’ve seen investors implement more rigorous ESG assessment processes, requiring companies to demonstrate how sustainability risks are managed at both the corporate and product levels. The introduction of mandatory reporting frameworks like the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) will accelerate this trend, making it easier for investors to distinguish between companies that take sustainability seriously and those that don’t.

For businesses, this means that sustainable product design isn’t just about regulatory compliance—it’s about staying relevant in an evolving marketplace. Companies that embed sustainability into product development from the start will have a clear advantage over those scrambling to retrofit solutions later.

Resilient Supply Chains Start with Sustainable Design

Product design decisions impact every stage of the supply chain, from raw material sourcing to production, logistics, and end-of-life recovery. As companies move toward circularity and responsible sourcing, many are facing short-term disruptions—switching suppliers, seeking alternative materials that are not yet available at scale, or adapting to regional supply constraints.

However, these challenges are part of a necessary transition. Companies that embed sustainability into their supply chains are ultimately building resilience in several key ways:

  • Reduced dependency on volatile raw materials – Many traditional materials are subject to geopolitical risks, price fluctuations, and regulatory restrictions. By prioritising recyclable, bio-based, or locally sourced alternatives, companies can gain greater control over long-term supply stability.
  • Diversified supplier networks – Businesses that proactively shift to more sustainable suppliers—even when it requires an initial adjustment—reduce the risk of future disruptions caused by compliance failures, resource shortages, or shifting regulations.
  • Efficient production & material use – Designing for remanufacturing, modularity, and recyclability not only reduces waste and costs but also improves supply chain agility, as businesses are less reliant on virgin materials and single-source suppliers.
  • Regulatory & market alignment – Many industries are seeing increased due diligence requirements (e.g., the EU Deforestation Regulation (EUDR), Supply Chain Due Diligence Act (CSDDD)). Companies that proactively integrate sustainability into supplier selection and procurement are better positioned to navigate these evolving compliance landscapes.

Sustainable product design is no longer just about lowering emissions—it’s about future-proofing operations. Businesses that invest in supply chain sustainability today will be the ones that can scale efficiently and adapt to future market pressures.

Operational Efficiencies & Cost Savings

Sustainable product design and circularity isn’t just about reducing environmental impact—it’s also a smart financial strategy. By making better materials choices, extending product lifespans, and designing for repairability, companies can lower operational costs, reduce waste, and improve customer satisfaction.

Many businesses underestimate the costs of product failures, high return rates, and warranty claims—all of which impact profitability. Investing in durability and modular design reduces these expenses while enhancing customer loyalty.

Selling replacement parts and repair kits is also emerging as a profitable, low-cost strategy that benefits both companies and customers. This approach aligns with right-to-repair regulations and strengthens brand perception and customer retention.

At the same time, optimising material use leads to cost savings across manufacturing and logistics. Companies that use fewer, better materials can simplify production, reduce waste, and improve supply chain efficiency.

By embedding sustainability into design from the outset, businesses avoid costly retrofits, stay ahead of compliance requirements, and build long-term financial resilience.

Sustainability is Now a Financial Imperative

Sustainability is no longer just a reputational issue—it’s a core financial consideration. With mandatory ESG reporting requirements such as the CSRD coming into effect, businesses must provide transparent, quantifiable evidence of how they manage sustainability risks.

Investors are no longer relying on self-reported commitments; they are actively assessing whether businesses have a structured, data-driven sustainability strategy. Companies that lack clear, measurable sustainability plans are increasingly seen as high-risk investments, facing capital access challenges, and shareholder scrutiny.

Conversely, businesses that embed sustainability are gaining preferential access to financing and investment opportunities. Many financial institutions are now offering sustainability-linked loans and green bonds, providing lower interest rates or better terms for companies that meet specific carbon reduction or circular economy goals.

Beyond investment, corporate buyers and major retailers are also raising supplier sustainability standards, integrating ESG criteria into procurement decisions. Companies that cannot demonstrate compliance with evolving environmental expectations risk losing business opportunities.

In this landscape, sustainable product design is an essential financial risk management strategy.

Regulations Driving Product Sustainability

The European Union is at the forefront of promoting a circular economy, implementing comprehensive regulations to ensure products are designed with sustainability in mind. Key among these are:

  • Ecodesign for Sustainable Products Regulation (ESPR): Enforced since July 18, 2024, the ESPR sets ecodesign requirements for a wide range of products, aiming to make them more durable, repairable, and recyclable, thereby reducing their environmental footprint throughout their lifecycle.
  • Packaging and Packaging Waste Regulation (PPWR): Adopted by the EU Parliament, the PPWR seeks to reduce packaging production and associated waste, improve recyclability, and grow the market for recycled content. It impacts all entities placing packaging on the EU market, both small and large.
  • EU Battery Directive: The Battery Directive, coming into force in 2027, imposes stricter recyclability and information disclosure requirements on batteries used for electronic devices and electric vehicles.

These regulations, which may also apply to companies outside the EU that do business in Europe, underscore the EU’s commitment to a sustainable future, compelling businesses to integrate circularity principles into their product designs.

Digital Tools Are Now Critical for Compliance

As compliance and sustainability expectations grow, companies need reliable, scalable tools that integrate sustainability data into product development workflows. Regulations like ESPR, the Digital Product Passport (DPP), and the EU Battery Regulation are making Product Carbon Footprint (PCF) and Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) data a core requirement—not just for compliance, but for market access. At the same time, procurement teams and buyers are demanding greater transparency of product-level sustainability impacts before making purchasing decisions. This is particularly true in industries like electronics, automotive, and consumer goods. Traditional LCAs remain invaluable but can be slow and resource-intensive—creating a gap between sustainability ambitions and execution.

This is where smart digital tools are making an impact. For example, PortfolioPro, Anthesis’ digital LCA tool, is helping businesses:

  • Equip product teams with instant datapoints of product environmental footprint to support sustainable design decisions.
  • Create Scenarios of sustainable product design, enabling for direct and quick comparison on how changes in your design impact the overall environmental footprint of your product
  • Generate compliance-ready data that can be used for reporting, acting as a central repository of the data as well.
  • Assess product portfolios for impact hotspots and opportunities.
Anthesis Portfolio Pro

The businesses making real progress in sustainable design aren’t just tracking footprints—they’re actively integrating sustainability into decision-making across teams and departments.

The Shift from Ad-Hoc Sustainability Projects to Embedded Solutions

For years, many companies treated sustainable product design as a series of one-off initiatives—responding to specific regulations or market pressures rather than developing a unified approach. However, this fragmented strategy has often led to stalled progress and internal roadblocks.

Now, companies are recognising that sustainability must be an embedded, system-wide capability. Successful businesses are moving towards:

  • Portfolio-Level Sustainability Strategies – Ensuring sustainability is embedded across product roadmaps rather than individual projects.
  • Cross-Functional Collaboration – Integrating sustainability across R&D, procurement, compliance, and commercial teams.
  • Implementation Support & Governance – Ensuring sustainability strategies aren’t just designed—but executed effectively.

Many of the businesses we work with have already taken steps towards sustainable product design and are now looking for the right structure, tools, and internal alignment to take it further. For example, we worked with Culligan International to develop a custom Design for Sustainability (DfS) program, helping them build a structured, scalable approach to sustainable product innovation. Through a bespoke toolkit, training, and internal engagement strategy, Culligan is now embedding DfS principles across its product portfolio, ensuring sustainability is a core driver of decision-making, rather than an afterthought.

How Anthesis Can Help

Sustainable product design is no longer about small improvements—it’s about transformation. Companies that build sustainability into their core business strategy will be the ones that thrive in a rapidly evolving market.

At Anthesis, we help businesses design, implement, and scale sustainability strategies that align with regulatory demands, commercial goals, and long-term resilience.

If your company is looking to go beyond ad-hoc sustainability efforts and create a truly embedded approach, we’d love to explore how we can support your journey.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
SBTi Releases Version 2.0 Draft of the Corporate Net-Zero Standard https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/sbti-releases-version-2-0-draft-of-the-corporate-net-zero-standard/ Mon, 31 Mar 2025 14:38:48 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63685

SBTi Releases Version 2.0 Draft of the Corporate Net-Zero Standard

Here’s What You Need to Know

31 March 2025

Green pathway through forest.

The Science Based Targets Initiative (SBTi) has released a new draft of its Corporate Net-Zero Standard for public consultation. Following a robust review process, this updated version (“Version 2.0,” published March 2025) includes proposed new requirements that will affect how businesses set, track and adjust their near-term and net-zero targets.

Overall, Version 2.0 emphasises action and aims to provide more flexible pathways for companies to reduce their greenhouse gas emissions by 2050 or sooner. These pathways include tailored requirements based on business size and location, adjusted criteria for target setting and emissions mitigation across all scopes, a greater focus on carbon removals and recognition of mitigation efforts beyond a company’s value chain.

Key Changes and Implications

Version 2.0 is structured into six chapters, the first covering criteria for net-zero commitments and transition plans, and the following five focusing on criteria that supports a “continuous improvement” cycle across GHG inventories, and target setting, assessing, and updating. Collectively, this structure puts forth a new validation model intended to facilitate ongoing improvement throughout a company’s transition to net-zero.

Of note are key changes in seven core areas:

Categorisation

The draft introduces a new categorisation of businesses based on size and geography, and tiers requirements accordingly. The company size categorisation is guided by EU regulatory definitions and the geographical categorisation is based on the World Bank classification. 

Commitments & Transition Plans

Large companies and those located in certain high-income countries will no longer be allowed to set near-term targets without also setting a net-zero target for 2050, at the latest. Version 2.0 also proposes a requirement for these companies to publish climate transition plans following validation of their targets by SBTi.

Greenhouse Gas (GHG) Inventories

Version 2.0 introduces several changes to GHG emissions inventories, with a focus on consolidation approach, base-year selection and performance, Scope 3 emissions , and ensuring data quality of the inventory, including through a new requirement for third party assurance.

Targets

Notably, Version 2.0 proposes that SBTi no longer allow for a range of target time periods to be adopted. Instead, near-term targets will be set on 5-year timeframes. Additionally, separate 1.5°C aligned targets will be required for each Scope (no more combined Scope 1 and 2 targets), companies will be required to set location-based as well as market- based scope 2 targets, and Version 2.0 provides some additional flexibility and options on Scope 3 target setting and mitigation.

Ongoing & Residual Emissions, BVCM, and Removals

SBTi is currently considering different options for companies to address residual Scope 1 emissions, either by mandating removal targets or offering greater flexibility in removal pathways. Version 2.0 indicates an acceleration in SBTi’s treatment of removals and may help to build the removals market.

Regarding Beyond Value Chain Mitigation (BVCM), Version 2.0 provides optional and additional pathways for companies to seek recognition of their reduction efforts, however BVCM will continue to not count towards the achievement of science-based targets. 

Progress Against Targets

A core objective of Version 2.0 is to integrate continuous improvement and assessment of progress against set targets by introducing an assessment and communication of progress requirement to enhance accountability and recognise companies leading on decarbonisation.

Claims

Version 2.0 significantly expands on guidelines for companies to use when communicating about commitments and target validation, pushing for consistent, transparent, and accurate claims.

What This Means for You

Setting Targets Today and the Status of Existing Targets

While these proposed changes will surely affect future target setting, companies setting targets in 2025 and 2026 will use the current SBTi criteria, setting targets that will be valid for 5 years or until 2030 (at which time new targets will be set using Version 2.0). Starting in 2027, Version 2.0 will be required to be used for new target setting.

Meanwhile, existing near-term targets are expected to remain valid until 2030 or their end date, whichever comes first.

The Public Consultation Period

The Science Based Targets initiative (SBTi) is seeking feedback on Version 2.0 from March 18th to June 1st, 2025. This is a chance for all businesses to review the draft and provide input to help shape the final version. This feedback will ensure the standard is effective in promoting corporate ambition towards a net-zero future.

If your business has existing or planned near-term or net-zero targets, participating in this consultation is highly recommended. Additionally, if you want more influence on the final standard, consider joining SBTi’s pilot testing in the second half of 2025.

How Anthesis Can Help

Anthesis encourages companies to continue their decarbonisation journeys and to account for annual unavoidable emissions via carbon credits and projects. We offer comprehensive support to organisations throughout the inventory, target-setting, revalidation, and decarbonisation process, and throughout their net-zero journey. We also support companies and organisations through investing in high-quality carbon removal projects.

Partnering with Anthesis ensures that your organisation’s SBTs remain credible, ambitious, and aligned with the latest climate science, mitigating your climate risk and ensuring your business’ future relevancy and resiliency in a net-zero economy.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
The EU Omnibus Package: Navigating the New Landscape for Private Equity Firms https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/the-eu-omnibus-package-navigating-the-new-landscape-for-private-equity-firms/ Fri, 28 Mar 2025 17:37:37 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63630

The EU Omnibus Package: Navigating the New Landscape for Private Equity Firms

Understanding the implications of the EU Omnibus for Private Equity and portfolio companies and how to adapt.

28 March 2025

EU Omnibus guidance for private equity
Joana Capote Soares

Joana Capote Soares

Director

Transactions & Sustainable Finance

Chris Shaw

Chris Shaw

Technical Director

ESG & Reporting

The European Commission recently proposed the EU Simplification Omnibus Package (Omnibus Package) aimed at streamlining sustainability reporting requirements. While some elements of the package are still subject to legislative approval, businesses are already feeling the impact of uncertainty around potential changes to key regulations, such as the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD), the Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence Directive (CSDDD), the EU Taxonomy, the Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM), and European public investment programs in venture capital and growth. 

As these changes unfold, it is crucial for Private Equity (PE) firms and their portfolio companies to understand the implications and adapt their strategies accordingly. 

Key Changes and Their Impacts

CSRD

The Omnibus Package proposes several significant changes intended to relieve companies, particularly small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs), of the associated administrative burden. One of the most significant of the proposed changes has been to narrow the scope of the CSRD. In summary:

Changes to the CSRD

Additionally, the Omnibus package proposed a two-year postponement for companies in the second and third reporting waves, that haven’t yet reported. This element of the Omnibus Package was approved by the April 3rd Stop-the-Clock vote, meaning those companies will be required to publish their first reports in 2028 and 2029, respectively. There is no delay for EU listed companies already reporting to CSRD.

For PE firms, if the remaining proposed changes are implemented, the change in the scope of CSRD reporting means that many of their portfolio companies are likely to be released from the reporting obligations of CSRD. Those still in scope may be subject to a 2-year delay. Consequently, there will be a reduction or spreading out of compliance obligations and costs. However, those that remain in scope will have to satisfy the new requirements, which may require further reporting.

The Omnibus Package offers positive impacts for companies that remain within its scope. With more time to prepare and align, businesses can strategically plan their compliance efforts, ensuring a smoother transition and better integration of sustainability practices. The simplified data requirements and reduced assurance/verification obligations further ease the compliance burden, allowing companies to focus on meaningful sustainability initiatives rather than administrative tasks. This period of adjustment is a great opportunity for companies to refine their reporting processes and enhance their overall sustainability strategy. 

On the other hand, voluntary compliance can lead to industry and sector differentiation, setting companies as leaders in sustainability. This proactive approach can significantly enhance market reputation, showcasing a commitment to transparency and responsibility. An early alignment with future reporting standards through simplified reporting can provide a competitive edge, as companies will be better prepared for eventual mandatory requirements.  

EU Taxonomy

Another important proposed change relates to the EU Taxonomy disclosure obligations, as summarised below:

EU Taxonomy updates post EU Omnibus

Companies that fall outside the proposed thresholds can choose to report voluntarily. The Commission will develop a template for required disclosure that reduces the required data points by approximately 70%. 

A major advantage of aligning with the EU Taxonomy is access to funding. The EU Taxonomy helps to identify economically sustainable activities and provides a clear basis for the identification of sustainable investment. For PE firms, this means that portfolio companies aligning with the EU Taxonomy can become more attractive to a broader range of investors, potentially leading to increased capital inflows. 

Engaging in voluntary EU Taxonomy reporting can also yield benefits such as enhanced transparency, accountability, and improved reputation. KPIs calculated as part of this exercise could be leveraged for ESG ratings and other voluntary reporting.  

Financial market participants (such as investment firms, pension funds, asset managers, insurance companies, and banks) in scope of SFDR will consider EU Taxonomy in their disclosures – those aligning with SFDR article 9 need Taxonomy information in order to invest. Thus, aligning with EU Taxonomy can lead to enhanced financing opportunities.  

To capitalise on these opportunities, PE firms should encourage their portfolio companies to integrate the EU Taxonomy into their business strategies. This involves identifying and reporting on activities that meet the Taxonomy’s criteria for environmental sustainability. By doing so, companies can demonstrate their commitment to sustainability, which can enhance their appeal to investors and improve their access to financing. 

CSDDD

Further, the Omnibus Package postpones the transposition deadline of the CSDDD by one year, pushing the first wave of application to 2028. This delay has been confirmed via the April 3rd Stop-the-Clock Proposal and will allow additional time for companies to prepare for compliance with the new remaining proposed requirements, as summarised below:

Proposed changes to the CSDDD

The goal of the proposed Omnibus Package is to align the CSDDD’s reporting obligations with those of the CSRD. This alignment minimises complexity and administrative burden for companies that are subject to both Directives. 

CSDDD encourages sustainable and responsible corporate behaviour that supports the company, its stakeholders, and society in general. The Directive encourages further transparency, allowing stakeholders to make fair and informed decisions.

Guidance for PE and Their Portfolio Companies 

In light of the changes brought on by the Omnibus Package, private equity firms need to offer clear guidance to portfolio companies on how to manage the new regulatory environment. Here are several key recommendations to consider: 

  1. Understand the new requirements and how they affect your portfolio: Familiarise yourself with the proposed and confirmed changes to the CSRD, EU Taxonomy Regulation, and CSDDD. This includes understanding the new thresholds and reporting requirements, as well as any timelines for implementation. Ensure you have your portfolio mapped according to new requirements.   
  2. Conduct a high-level gap analysis: Undertake a careful gap analysis that will pinpoint the areas in which reporting and due diligence procedures may require enhancement. This involves comparing current practices with the new requirements and identifying any gaps that need to be addressed. 
  3. Engage with your portfolio to outline the steps needed to meet the new requirements, including any changes to internal processes, data collection, and reporting mechanisms. 
  4. Communicate in a clear and transparent way: Ensure that commitments to sustainability and compliance with the new regulations are conveyed. This can help build trust and enhance the portfolio reputation. 
  5. Focus on initiatives that create business value: The demand for sustainable finance products hasn’t changed. While navigating this evolving space and waiting for clarity on deadlines, investing in initiatives that build resilience and create business value will position companies for long-term success. 

Challenges and Considerations

While the proposed Omnibus Package aims to simplify and reduce the regulatory burden, it also presents several challenges for PE firms and their portfolio companies. One of the main challenges is the need to balance compliance with the new requirements while maintaining competitiveness.  

Additionally, the phased implementation of the new requirements implies that companies will need to stay informed about ongoing changes and updates. This requires a proactive review of compliance with applicable regulations at the organisation level, with companies regularly reviewing and updating their practices to ensure they remain in line with the latest requirements. 

It is also important to note that in case the Omnibus package is not approved, companies may face continued uncertainty and potential delays in aligning with evolving sustainability standards, which can potentially impact their strategic planning and market positioning. This could result in higher compliance costs and administrative workloads for companies while trying to manage a fragmented regulatory landscape.  

By understanding the new requirements, conducting thorough gap analyses, and actively engaging with portfolio companies, PE firms can unlock value from ESG efforts beyond compliance and navigate this new landscape effectively. 

Get in touch to discuss how we can help you to understand the proposed changes and how they will impact your portfolio.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
ESG Data in Private Equity: Transitioning to a Digital ESG Platform  https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/esg-data-in-private-equity-transitioning-to-a-digital-esg-platform/ Fri, 28 Mar 2025 11:38:59 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63600

ESG Data in Private Equity: Transitioning to a Digital ESG Platform

We explore how private equity firms can leverage ESG data management tools to streamline data collection across their portfolio.

28 March 2025

green leaf

For General Partners (GPs), establishing a robust environmental, social, and governance data management system as part of their portfolio engagement and data reporting process has become crucial to meeting regulatory compliance obligations, benchmarking portfolio progress, and driving sustainable growth.  

Mature digital platforms can also support GPs with their own reporting and disclosure requirements, including alignment to the ESG Data Convergence Initiative (EDCI), Principles for Responsible Investment (PRI), and Sustainable Finance Disclosures Regulation (SFDR), provide valuable data-driven insights to inform their portfolio improvement programmes, and assist in exit preparations. 

With more GPs considering a standardised approach to ESG data collection, we explore how private equity firms can leverage ESG data management tools to streamline data collection across their portfolio, unlock value creation opportunities, and support regulatory compliance. 

ESG Data Management Platforms: What are the Key Drivers and Opportunities?

Managing scattered sustainability data across a diverse portfolio can be overwhelming and time-consuming, especially with ever-evolving and demanding compliance needs. ESG data management platforms turn sprawling data into streamlined reports and dashboards, in the process, revealing insights to drive value creation. By automating ESG data gathering, validation, and reporting, portfolio managers can significantly improve efficiency, allowing them to focus on meaningful, data-driven discussions with portfolio companies about sustainability performance rather than being burdened by manual data collection challenges. 

ESG data management platforms offer the following opportunities: 

  • Streamlined ESG data collection and reporting: Automating data gathering from portfolio companies, ensuring accuracy, consistency, and efficiency. 
  • Regulatory and disclosure compliance: Simplifying adherence to ESG disclosure requirements (e.g., SFDR, SEC, EDCI, PRI, TCFD), reducing regulatory risks, and identifying broader company risks. 
  • Portfolio oversight and performance tracking: Providing centralised dashboards to monitor ESG performance across all portfolio companies in real time. 
  • Stakeholder engagement: Enhancing transparency and trust with LPs by providing clear, verifiable ESG reporting and impact metrics across diverse portfolios. 
  • Value creation and competitive advantage: Helping identify ESG-driven value creation opportunities that enhance financial returns and long-term sustainability. 
  • Exit readiness: Robust datasets can show how ESG activities and initiatives have created value through margin improvement and top-line and bottom-line growth. 

How to Select a Portfolio ESG Reporting System

An ESG portfolio reporting programme should be underpinned by robust ESG data governance and data management processes. By adopting secure, framework-aligned, and integrated ESG software, GPs are well positioned to monitor and benchmark ESG performance across their portfolio, regardless of sector or geography.

Here are our top tips when considering your portfolio data management process: 

1. Encourage Portfolio Companies to Leverage Existing Datasets

Organisations often possess valuable data, but the information is often fragmented and located in disparate systems across different business units. Integrating these data sets in a single platform can provide a holistic view of a portfolio company’s ESG vulnerabilities and strengths. 

2. Upskill and Educate GP ESG and Portfolio Management Teams

Developing in-house capacity is essential for General Partners. Educating ESG and deal teams on how to scrutinise and assess portfolio ESG data analytics will deepen understanding of the value of strong portfolio ESG data and the steps required, post-acquisition, to implement sustainable practices to drive improvement.

The delivery of a portfolio-wide training programme will also educate portfolio management teams on the importance of regular and robust ESG data reporting, while guiding how to integrate a GP’s ESG data management platform within their own internal processes and systems. 

3. Understand What Criteria Will Best Support Your Portfolio Reporting Needs

  • Integration with Existing Portfolio Data Collection Processes: Your selected platform should collect and integrate each portfolio company’s data in a simple, systematic, structured way configured to your disclosure needs and responsible investment strategy. Moving away from spreadsheets and into a digital solution opens opportunities for GPs by creating efficiency and accuracy in the data collection process and visualising data in a standardised way to gain actionable insights. Advanced platforms are SaaS based and support API integrations, enabling seamless data transfer and ease of transition. This connectivity simplifies the tracking of ESG metrics across departments, making the entire data pipeline cohesive and manageable.
  • Regulatory and Industry Reporting Requirements: Critically assess which frameworks you need to support with your broader stakeholder disclosure requirements and portfolio performance analytics. ESG data platforms which align to frameworks such as the EDCI, PRI and SFDR can streamline a GP’s external reporting requirements, establish consistency within portfolio data requests and support portfolio benchmarking and baselining. Some regulatory requirements, such as CSRD, also require complex audit requirements, so investing in a digital platform that can provide audit trails is a useful reporting function. 
  • Protecting Sensitive Portfolio Data: Cybersecurity and digital resilience are of paramount importance to GPs and their portfolio companies throughout the investment lifecycle. Safeguarding sensitive ESG information and ensuring compliance with privacy regulations means that any digital platform should incorporate robust security measures to protect data integrity and prevent unauthorised access, such as multi-level encryption. Regular ethical hacking and an incident management process are indicators of best practice. As a minimum, identify a platform with an information security management certificate, such as ISO 27001, and SOC Type 2 certification to ensure the safeguarding of data.
  • Value Creation Through Data Visualisation: Effective ESG data management goes beyond just collecting information – it’s about turning portfolio data into actionable insights for portfolio management, deal teams and prospective buyers. A well-designed ESG data management solution should include dashboards tailored to the unique needs of a GP, offering customised views that align with investment strategies and reporting frameworks. Whether it’s portfolio benchmarking, bespoke scoring systems, framework-specific dashboards, or tracking data collection progress, a flexible digital solution ensures that ESG insights are not only accessible but also drive meaningful decision-making.

How Can Anthesis Help? 

For private equity firms seeking comprehensive ESG data management solutions, Anthesis is equipped to support. We combine insights from our award-winning global team of private capital consultants with our comprehensive ESG data management platform, MERO, to offer GPs and their portfolio companies an effective ESG data collection and management platform. 

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Sustainability Strategy Reset: Going Deep on What Matters Most https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/sustainability-strategy-reset-going-deep-on-what-matters-most/ Thu, 27 Mar 2025 19:16:50 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63618

Sustainability Strategy Reset: Going Deep on What Matters Most

27 March 2025

moutain hiker sunset sky cropped

Halfway Through the Decisive Decade

The 2020s are widely seen as the ‘decisive decade’ for sustainability action. Many organisations set their initial sustainability strategies and targets between 2019 and 2021, with interim targets in 2025 and final goals in 2030. These deadlines are far from arbitrary as 2030 aligns with global climate goals, regulatory shifts like the EU’s CSRD, and growing investor and consumer demands for measurable action.

With 2025 underway, we have officially entered the year where interim targets will start to expire, requiring companies to reassess their progress towards sustainability goals and Environmental, Social, and Governance (ESG) targets. Through this process, many are finding that they are off track to meeting their goals and need to recalibrate to ensure their new targets are focused, clear, and ultimately impactful.

Over the years, businesses have expanded their sustainability strategies and the ESG metrics that track them to cover an ever-growing list of material ESG topics, including, among others, climate commitments, human rights and DEI programs, and circular design initiatives. This comprehensive approach has been effective at managing a wide range of environmental and social impacts and ensuring stakeholder interests are addressed.

As organisational priorities shift and resources become increasingly constrained – driven by economic pressures, evolving regulations, and the imperative to demonstrate a clear return on investment – sustainability teams are facing heightened scrutiny. In response, these teams must look at approaches that ensure sustainability initiatives remain both viable and impactful, even amidst limited funding and growing accountability demands.

It’s not about doing less—it’s about doing more of what matters most.

At Anthesis, we’re seeing a shift toward more strategic prioritisation within ESG, where organisations are leaning in on the issues that drive the most meaningful business and sustainability outcomes while thoughtfully deprioritising others. This doesn’t mean abandoning responsibility or compliance but rather focusing resources and attention on the areas where they can lead, differentiate, and create real value.

Instead of spreading efforts thin across a long list of commitments, companies should consider identifying and prioritising fewer, bigger, and better sustainability initiatives backed by evidence for higher levels of investment and commitments that are unique to their business and ultimately drive value creation. Companies that focus on a few high-impact, business-aligned initiatives will create value and deliver on sustainability goals. It’s not about doing less—it’s about doing more of what matters most.

Focusing on What Matters Most

Addressing these strategic imperatives can help to cut through the noise, align your sustainability strategy and ESG efforts with what drives business and societal value, and move from intent to impact.

1. Reprioritise Efforts on High-Value Initiatives

Many companies continue to track and report on a long list of material ESG topics without clear prioritisation in their sustainability strategy, which can dilute their overall impact and messaging. A focused reprioritisation of sustainability efforts will clarify which can drive the most value and impact. Rather than addressing each material issue in isolation, organisations should identify areas where they have both the ambition and capability to lead. This begins with distinguishing between initiatives that are critical to business success while ensuring continued compliance with regulatory and stakeholder expectations.

2. Embed Value Creation at the Core

Many sustainability programs operate in parallel to business strategy, rather than as an integrated driver of business performance. In Anthesis’ experience, successful sustainability leaders clearly link sustainability to value creation, and ensure their efforts directly contribute to growth, cost savings, risk mitigation, or differentiation. Financial return and relevance to strategic business priorities are becoming core expectations for major sustainability investments.​

3. Elevate Performance Metrics and Accountability

For sustainability efforts to drive meaningful impact, they must be backed by high-quality metrics, transparent reporting, and strong accountability mechanisms. Many companies still feel pressured to track an overwhelming number of ESG indicators while losing sight of the strategic sustainability goals they were meant to support, often leading to data collection that becomes an end in itself, rather than a tool for informed decision-making. Too often, the data gathered lacks the consistency and rigor needed to be truly decision-useful. By focusing on fewer, higher-impact topics and improving the quality of the data collected—using digital solutions when applicable—companies can better integrate sustainability into core business strategy.

4. Make Sustainability a Defining Part of Organisation Identity

Any strategy will inevitably run into obstacles if it’s disconnected from your organisation’s culture and brand – after all, it’s your employees and leaders who bring these goals to life. To gain momentum, sustainability efforts in particular must go beyond compliance and risk management, evolving into a visible, strategic pillar of the organisation’s long-term positioning. Shifting the perception of sustainability from a cost center to a value driver requires embedding it at the heart of corporate strategy. For many leading companies, sustainability is shifting from a siloed vertical to a horizontal enabler supporting critical business objectives. By aligning sustainability with your organisation’s values, identity, and strategic direction, you create stronger internal buy-in and a foundation for sustained impact.

Final Thoughts

Imagine two hikers gearing up for a challenging journey. The first hiker brings many items into their backpack—useful or not—making it heavy, unfocused, and difficult to carry. Along the way, unexpected obstacles force them to shed gear or slow down. Meanwhile, the second hiker carefully selects a few high-value tools aligned with the route and conditions they will face—each item has a purpose tied directly to the journey’s success. By focusing on depth over breadth, keeping track of their gear, and seamlessly weaving these essentials into their identity as a skilled adventurer, this second hiker maintains agility, resilience, and ultimately makes more meaningful progress.

Whether you’re an early-stage organisation developing your first sustainability program or a mature organisation seeking to sharpen your focus and maximise impact, this approach can help you achieve meaningful results.

The companies making the most progress in sustainability aren’t the ones addressing the most ESG topics—they’re the ones making deliberate choices about where to focus and lead. The future of sustainability will be defined by sharp, strategic, and business-integrated approaches over broad, all-encompassing efforts.

The question isn’t just whether your organisation is addressing sustainability, but whether your organisation is focusing on its unique spheres of impact and influence that also drive business value.

How Anthesis Can Help

Anthesis partners with businesses to refine their sustainability strategies by focusing on what truly drives impact and value creation. Our expertise helps companies transition from managing ESG checklists to executing high-impact sustainability strategies that align with business priorities.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
The Business Case for CDP Reporting https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/the-business-case-for-cdp-reporting/ Tue, 25 Mar 2025 16:39:41 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63568

The Business Case for CDP Reporting

Explore how CDP offers a consistent framework to help companies navigate the shifting regulatory landscape across various jurisdictions

25 March 2025

Gasses from a power plant

Companies today are caught in a whirlwind of shifting regulations, geopolitical tensions, and evolving stakeholder expectations. The sustainability reporting landscape is increasingly fragmented, with different jurisdictions imposing different rules and no clear global standard. In this environment, many businesses are stuck in a familiar dilemma: disclose too little and risk being seen as opaque; disclose too much and risk scrutiny over every detail.

CDP reporting offers something rare in this space—consistency. By providing a structured, trusted framework, it helps companies navigate uncertainty with confidence. But beyond compliance and scoring, why does it truly matter? 

A trusted baseline for investors and the need for consistent ESG data 

No matter the political climate, one reality remains unchanged: investors and regulators want clear, comparable data, not vague sustainability claims. Market instability, climate risk, and supply chain disruptions make it even more critical to differentiate between companies with real strategies and those relying on greenwashing.

CDP has long provided a rigorous benchmark for environmental disclosure, allowing investors to assess material risks and opportunities without guesswork. The investor-backed CDP Non-Disclosure Campaign (NDC) is pushing organisations to disclose more each year, reinforcing the expectation that transparency is non-negotiable. A strong CDP track record signals to investors that a company is serious about integrating sustainability into its business model—not just treating it as a PR exercise. 

No regret actions amid change

Regulatory change is inevitable, but preparation shouldn’t be a reactive scramble. CDP’s alignment with frameworks like the European Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS) and the International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB) makes it an invaluable test case for companies adapting to new ESG disclosure mandates. With the proposed EU Omnibus changes adding further complexity, companies need a reporting foundation that can flex with evolving requirements without compromising on rigor. CDP offers that. 

Future-proofing your sustainability strategy 

The numbers speak for themselves—over 24,000 companies responded to CDP in 2024, an increase from the previous year. This isn’t just about ticking boxes. It’s about companies recognising that robust disclosure drives competitive advantage. CDP’s focus on climate, forests, water security, and now plastics and biodiversity, provides a critical lens on risk exposure and resilience, helping businesses make strategic decisions grounded in data. Investors, too, are using this information to reward companies that are proactively managing environmental challenges rather than reacting to crises. 

CDP’s role in the broader ESG ecosystem 

CDP doesn’t exist in a vacuum. Its data feeds into key ESG ratings, including MSCI and ISS, amplifying its influence in corporate sustainability assessments. As reporting requirements tighten, companies using CDP effectively aren’t just checking a box—they’re strengthening their position in the broader market and investor landscape. 

In short, CDP doesn’t just need to be about disclosure —it can be about resilience. In an era of volatility, it offers clarity, comparability, and credibility. Embracing CDP equips businesses with the insights and credibility they need to remain agile in a rapidly changing world. 

Anthesis can help – we support over 80 CDP responses annually across sectors and geographies. Please reach out if you would like to discuss. 

How Anthesis can support

As an Accredited Solutions Provider for the CDP, Anthesis supports clients throughout their CDP journeys, providing both strategic and technical expertise in a partnership to improve ESG program performance and scores. We guide clients new to the reporting process, support existing reporters to maximise scores, and maximise CDP leaders’ efforts toward target setting, environmental stewardship, and innovation.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Digital Product Passports https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/digital-product-passports/ Tue, 25 Mar 2025 16:03:29 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63533

Digital Product Passports

A guide to DPPs, their upcoming requirements and their role in enabling transparency and circularity in products

25 March 2025

qr code on a product

What are Digital Product Passports?

Digital Product Passports (DPPs) are innovative tools designed to collect, aggregate, and share comprehensive data about a product throughout its entire lifecycle. From raw material sourcing to end-of-life management, DPPs provide essential information on a product’s provenance, authenticity, sustainability, and circularity. This system enhances transparency and empowers businesses, consumers, and regulators to make informed decisions that support sustainability goals.

DPPs play a crucial role under the European Union’s Ecodesign for Sustainable Products Regulation (ESPR) and a number of further sectoral legislation on batteries, toys, detergents, etc., making them an essential component in global efforts to achieve sustainability and climate targets.

Why Digital Product Passports matter

Environmental and economic impact

Through improving the availability of information and tracking chemicals and materials, DPPs help reduce environmental impacts by encouraging sustainable sourcing, and promoting recycling and reuse. They also support compliance with sustainability regulations, reduction of waste, and optimised resource efficiency.

Key benefits for stakeholders

For businesses, DPPs offer enhanced supply chain visibility, streamlined reporting processes, and a significant competitive advantage in the marketplace. Consumers benefit from the ability to make informed purchasing decisions based on transparent sustainability data, allowing them to choose products that align with their environmental values. Regulators find DPPs invaluable for simplifying compliance tracking, verifying that products meet environmental standards, and ensuring that sustainability criteria are consistently upheld.

The evolution of DPPs

The concept of Digital Product Passports (DPPs) emerged from the growing need for greater supply chain transparency and sustainability. This initiative was spearheaded by the European Commission as part of the broader European Green Deal, aimed at fostering a circular economy and reducing environmental impacts.

Key milestones and implementation timeline

Digital Products Passport Timeline: 
March 2020: The Circular Economy Action Plan (CEAP) was launched, laying the groundwork for sustainable product policies across the EU.

March 2022: DPPs were formally introduced under the proposal for Ecodesign for Sustainable Products Regulation (ESPR), marking a significant step towards mandatory product traceability.

August 2023: Battery Regulation entered into force, mandating a digital product passport (Battery passport) for the first time under EU law.

19 July 2024: ESPR entered into force and established a future requirement for DPP for a much wider scope of products via product group-specific Delegated Acts.

31 July  2024: The European Commission issued a standardisation request on the technical requirements for the DPP system.

November 2024: Call for evidence regarding the future delegated act ‘setting out the requirements that digital product passport service providers are to comply with.’

End of 2025: The harmonised standards for the DPP system is anticipated to be completed, providing detailed guidelines for businesses.

2026: This year will serve as the compliance phase for DPP service providers, allowing them to align their systems with the new regulations.

19 July 2026: The official establishment of the DPP registry, a critical infrastructure to manage and verify product data.

18 February 2027: DPPs will become mandatory for certain types of batteries.

2027-2028: The first DPPs under ESPR will become mandatory, starting with key sectors such as electronics, textiles, and steel.

Who needs to implement DPPs?

The implementation of Digital Product Passports impacts a broad range of industries that produce goods for the European Union (EU) market. The obligation to comply extends beyond manufacturers to include importers, distributors, and retailers who play a role in the product lifecycle.

Industries affected

DPPs will initially apply to sectors with significant environmental impacts, including:

  • Electronics: Covering devices such as smartphones, laptops, and other consumer electronics, where materials sourcing, energy efficiency, and recyclability are critical.
  • Batteries (under Battery Regulation): Particularly for industrial and electric vehicle batteries, focusing on raw material sourcing, durability, and end-of-life recycling.
  • Textiles: Including garments and footwear, with emphasis on sustainable materials, production processes, and waste reduction.
  • Furniture: With a particular focus on resource use.
  • Tyres: Although already regulated by other EU legislation (such as the Tyre Labelling Regulation (EU) 2020/740), there is a gap which ESPR can fill on recyclability and recycled content.
  • Construction Materials: Focussing on energy use and resource efficiency. Intermediate products like steel and aluminium will be covered under the ESPR, while other products, such as insulation materials, will be covered under the revised Construction Products Regulation with differing rules on DPP.

The ESPR Regulation aims to regulate 30 product groups by 2030; by introducing requirements to intermediate products such as aluminium, steel & iron, chemicals, potentially plastics & polymers, the impact will cascade down to a vast number of sectors. Furthermore, the DPP is expected to be implemented by a number of other sectorial legislation, further extending the scope to toys, detergents, etc.

What information is included in a Digital Product Passport?

Delegated Acts under the ESPR will set out information requirements of the DPP. These are expected to include:

  • Basic Product Data: Make, model, batch, etc.
  • Material Data: Origin, quantity, properties.
  • Environmental Data: Life cycle environmental impacts including resource use, water consumption, and emissions.
  • Substances of Concern (SoC): Information on substances of concern with hazardous properties or that may bear an impact on the reusability and recyclability of the materials.
  • Use Data: Product performance, durability, energy use.
  • End-of-Life Data: Reuse, recycling, disposal instructions.

How Digital Product Passports work: the technology behind DPPs

Digital Product Passports rely on a combination of technologies that work together to ensure the secure, accurate, and efficient sharing of product data across the supply chain.

Harmonised standards will be developed by the European Standardisation Organisations CEN/CENELEC to address the minimum requirements of the DPP-system. However, these standards will remain technology-neutral. Companies can implement the technology of their preferences, or work with a service provider as long as they meet the requirements set in the legislation and harmonised standards.

Technical challenges in adoption

Implementing Digital Product Passports (DPPs) comes with several challenges, particularly around data privacy and security. Ensuring the protection of sensitive information while maintaining transparency can be complex, especially in industries dealing with proprietary technologies and intellectual property. Additionally, the high implementation costs can be a barrier for small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs), making it challenging for them to allocate resources towards compliance. Complex supply chains with multiple stakeholders further complicate data collection and management, requiring robust coordination and standardised processes.

A more imminent challenge businesses face in implementing DPPs stems from the demanding extent of information requirements. Providing detailed sustainable performance data for entire product portfolios requires scalable technology solutions for gathering, calculating, and managing data.

How to set up a DPP that meets future regulatory requirements

Digital Product Passports (DPPs) offer far more than compliance—they can become powerful tools for innovation, transparency, and competitive advantage. By developing and implementing a robust Design for Sustainability programme, your organisation can not only meet DPP requirements but also embed ecodesign principles directly into product development and modification processes.

The data collected and consolidated through DPPs can be leveraged to substantiate environmental claims, supporting credible and transparent communication with stakeholders. Furthermore, by understanding and addressing the optional data needs of your customers, DPPs can be transformed into valuable marketing assets that drive growth and strengthen your brand’s sustainability credentials.

How Anthesis can help

Our team combines extensive industry knowledge with a forward-thinking approach, tailoring solutions to align with each organisation’s unique goals. Through our advisory services and digital solutions, we help you transform the products you create to drive better environmental and social impact, while expanding market opportunity and business resilience. Anthesis can support you to navigate DPP through ensuring compliance, enabling data management, and taking your DPP beyond compliance to becoming a brand asset.

DPP development under the ESPR Regulation
DPP development under the ESPR Regulation

Ensuring compliance

Preparing for Digital Product Passport (DPP) compliance requires a proactive and strategic approach. Key steps include:

  • Understanding the legal requirements of the DPP and potential impacts to your business by conducting a readiness assessment. The window from when the full data and technical requirements will be available, to the deadline for implementation, will be incredibly short. It is therefore essential to monitor activities and discussions within stakeholders and peers.
  • Mapping and collecting relevant data from the supply chain.
  • Circularity assessments, full or partial LCAs to generate the necessary data to show compliance with performance requirements.  
  • Designing your DPP by selecting the most appropriate technical features and integrating the data in the necessary format to meet your reporting requirements.

Effectively managing data with Anthesis Compliance Suite

Our Compliance Suite enables digital data management and combines technology, data structures, workflow automation and process operations. The system can be deployed as a comprehensive data hub for the DPP. It comes with predefined data structures, based on international data standards and best practices, real-time analytics on data quality and reporting interfaces to your existing software infrastructure.

anthesis compliance suite's capabiltiies for Digital Product Passports

The solution covers client requirements out of the box and can be set up within two weeks. The system allows for piloting and ramp-up phases, with an increased focus on design customisations, process streamlining and extension of data structures.

Anthesis provides qualified resources and expertise to operate the supplier campaign process from beginning to end. With an actively managed request campaign, clients can increase the submission rate and data quality significantly. Our team will also validate incoming submissions and can digitise unstructured data records.

The future of Digital Product Passports

More and more EU legislation will require the DPP for products such as detergents, and toys. Whilst these efforts mainly focus on product and downstream activities, more intermediate products will be included and eventually upstream value chain will also use DPP as the key communication tool of sustainability and other information, of sustainability and other information,

Businesses will want to include information beyond what’s required by legislation, to make it as useful for their customers and stakeholders as possible, and eventually also use DPPs as the one true source of information feeding into their sustainability reporting data, green claims substantiation and more.

Resources

Ready to implement Digital Product Passports in your business? Contact us for expert guidance on compliance, data management, and sustainability strategies.

]]>
How to Lead Courageously When Sustainability is Under Attack https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/how-to-lead-courageously-when-sustainability-is-under-attack/ Mon, 24 Mar 2025 12:26:29 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63452

Sustainability Leadership in a New Era

How to lead courageously when sustainability is under attack

24 March 2025

The Economist Impact Sustainability Week event
lucy todd

Lucy Todd

Marketing Operations Manager

Discover our purpose and strategy solutions

The uncertainty around ESG, fuelled by the US’ withdrawal from the Paris agreement and the proposed simplification of European regulation, is forcing some leaders to reevaluate their sustainability plans. Yet, with climate risks intensifying and consumer demand for responsible business remaining strong, future-proofing business strategy has never been more critical.

At The Economist Impact Sustainability Week event earlier this month, Anthesis hosted a workshop exploring what effective leadership looks like in this evolving landscape.

The session brought together a panel of experts to discuss how businesses can drive meaningful action, demonstrate value, and maintain their commitments without getting caught in political crossfire.

Reframing the narrative

One of the key takeaways from the workshop was the need for businesses to reframe their sustainability narrative. David Croft, Group Head of Sustainability at Reckitt, noted that “sustainability is not an inclusive language.” Instead of speaking in broad terms, companies need to be specific. For example, discussing water security can resonate more with stakeholders than the abstract concept of sustainability.

Croft shared an example from Reckitt’s operations in India, where their primary concern when building a factory was ensuring water availability in five years. By embedding sustainability into core business decision-making — rather than treating it as a regulatory requirement — companies can future-proof their operations. “If you’re only using legislation as an incentive, when that gets rolled back, sustainability initiatives get deprioritised. But if it’s properly embedded, those initiatives remain,” Croft explained.

If you’re only using legislation as an incentive, when that gets rolled back, sustainability initiatives get deprioritised. But if it’s properly embedded, those initiatives remain.

David Croft, Group Head of Sustainability, Reckitt

Leading with conviction

Panellists agreed that the investor community is divided on ESG, but there remains a strong contingent of long-term investors who want businesses to remain viable decades into the future. “Many of our investors are pension funds. They want to know that the factory will still be there in 15 years,” Croft pointed out.

Vijaypal Bains Singh, Chief Sustainability Officer at Emirates National Bank of Dubai, highlighted that for financial institutions, sustainability is increasingly viewed as a profit centre — “but only if customers are interested in it,” he addedWhile corporate clients are showing strong interest, engaging consumers remains a challenge. “We need to make the financial rewards of sustainability more proximate so they are recognised on the balance sheet,” Singh added.

Several panellists underscored the importance of maintaining commitments, even as political rhetoric shifts. Dr Kamiar Mohaddes from ClimaTRACES Lab at the University of Cambridge warned: “If you row back on your commitments, you challenge your integrity. There can be a softening of language, but abandoning targets is not good for business or brand reputation.”

If you row back on your commitments, you challenge your integrity. There can be a softening of language, but abandoning targets is not good for business or brand reputation.

Dr Kamiar Mohaddes, ClimaTRACES Lab, University of Cambridge

The business case for sustainability

Despite increasing politicisation, sustainability remains a crucial driver of long-term business resilience.

Dr Nirav Mandir, Head of Sustainability at SRK, highlighted historical evidence showing that businesses prioritising sustainability endure. “Since the Fortune 500 launched in 1955, around 10,000 companies have been listed, but only 49 companies have remained on the list for the full 70 years. These businesses have prioritised people, planet, profit, and purpose.” Longevity in business, he argued, requires a commitment to resilience.

The challenge for many businesses, as highlighted by Astrid de Reuver, Head of Capital Solutions at Anthesis, is funding the transition. “Our answer is radical collaboration. The problems are too big for any one company to tackle alone. Capital is the glue that holds sustainability efforts together, and we need to scale solutions across industries.”

Our answer is radical collaboration. The problems are too big for any one company to tackle alone. Capital is the glue that holds sustainability efforts together, and we need to scale solutions across industries.

Astrid de Reuver, Head of Capital Solutions at Anthesis

Driving change in a shifting landscape

While some Western economies are experiencing a rollback of ESG commitments, other regions are scaling up investment, it was encouraging to note.

Singh pointed out that in the UAE, climate change is increasingly tangible. “It’s not just a political debate—temperatures have risen dramatically. People can’t go outside during summer. That’s why cleantech and renewables have taken off rapidly.”

He also noted a major shift in water sustainability in the region. “Three years ago, if you drank a glass of water in the UAE, it came from a desalination plant powered by fossil fuels. Now, it’s all run on renewable energy.” By focusing on real-world impacts, such as water security and energy transition, businesses can connect sustainability efforts to consumer priorities.

Mohaddes argued that the cost of inaction is often overlooked: “People often complain about the cost of sustainability being upfront, but that’s nothing new. It’s nothing different than what companies face all the time with capital expenditure. The real cost is in doing nothing.”

People often complain about the cost of sustainability being upfront, but that’s nothing new. It’s nothing different than what companies face all the time with capital expenditure. The real cost is in doing nothing.

Dr Kamiar Mohaddes, ClimaTRACES Lab, University of Cambridge

Meeting the moment with leadership

The panellists agreed that courageous leadership requires balancing long-term sustainability goals with short-term business pressures. That means embedding sustainability into strategy, communicating it effectively, and ensuring alignment with financial incentives.

There is no one-size-fits-all solution, but as Croft put it: “You can’t do everything, everywhere, all at once. But you need to have five key priorities of where your organisation can make the most impact – and make sure you’re executing them well.”

For business leaders, the challenge is clear: sustainability remains a strategic necessity, and those who integrate it effectively will build the most resilient, future-proofed companies. As the political and regulatory environment shifts, true leadership means staying the course and finding innovative ways to demonstrate value—without necessarily using the term ESG.

The message from the Economist Impact Sustainability Week workshop was resounding: sustainability is not just about compliance; it is about survival, growth, and long-term business success.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
FAQ: How Will the EU Omnibus Affect CSRD Reporting Requirements? https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/how-will-the-eu-omnibus-affect-csrd-faq/ Mon, 24 Mar 2025 09:31:28 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63503

How Will the EU Omnibus Affect CSRD Reporting Requirements?

Explore questions and answers to the potential changes, key impacts, and what businesses should do now.

mountain lake

The Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) was set to transform corporate transparency and sustainability disclosure requirements, but the recent Omnibus Simplification Proposal signals potential changes that could impact its implementation. With potential changes to reporting thresholds, deadlines, and compliance obligations, many companies are left wondering: What happens next? Does the CSRD remain in force? Will supply chain partners still need to report under the same scrutiny? And—crucially—will companies face fines if they fail to meet existing deadlines?

In this FAQ, we break down exactly what these proposed changes mean, who they impact, and what businesses should be doing right now to stay ahead.

What are the key changes proposed in the Omnibus package?

The European Commission has introduced a new package of proposals, known as the Sustainability Simplification Omnibus Package, aimed at simplifying sustainability reporting requirements for businesses operating within the EU and streamlining requirements across regulations. These proposed changes include:

  • Threshold changes: An increase in company thresholds, which reduces the number of companies required to report to the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) by approximately 80%.
  • Delay: EU Companies still within the thresholds but yet to report under the CSRD, will receive a two-year delay in their reporting obligations.
  • Reporting timelines: EU-listed companies already reporting to the CSRD will see no delay in their reporting timeline.
  • Scope: Non-EU companies (Wave 4) with significant operations in the EU will remain in scope with the original deadline.
  • ESRS data points: The European Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS) will undergo revisions aimed at reducing the number of mandatory data points.
  • VSME Standard: The potential introduction of the Voluntary SME Reporting Standard (VSME) for businesses that are no longer included in the revised CSRD scope.
  • Materiality: The retention of the Double Materiality Principle, the requirement for in-scope companies to report on both how sustainability impacts their business and their effect on people and the environment

Most of these changes are still just a proposal and are pending legislative approval, a process that may take 6-12 months or longer (see below for confirmed changes). This means that the current requirements under the CSRD remain in effect until further notice.

Which of the EU Omnibus changes are confirmed?

On the 3rd of April, the European Parliament voted on the EU Omnibus stop-the-clock proposal to approve some of the changes proposed through the EU Omnibus Package, affecting reporting deadlines.

For CSRD, this includes a two-year postponement, meaning companies in the second and third reporting waves, that haven’t yet reported, will be required to publish their first reports in 2028 and 2029, respectively.

The remaining proposals are still awaiting legislative approval.

Who the CSRD applies to under the Omnibus Proposal

How are companies impacted by the EU Omnibus changes?

Under the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD), companies are categorised into different “waves” based on when they are required to comply. Each wave represents a distinct group of entities with specific reporting obligations and timelines:

  • Wave 1 – EU listed large companies. For EU-listed large companies, there are no immediate changes to thresholds or timelines under the EU Omnibus changes. These companies should maintain their current reporting timelines. However, there may be a reduction in the number of European Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS) data points required for future reporting. This change could simplify compliance efforts, but does not alter the fundamental reporting obligations.
  • Wave 2 – Companies due to report in FY2025. For companies scheduled to report on their financial year 2025, a two-year delay has now been confirmed. Despite this delay, businesses should continue with their planned actions to prepare for reporting. The additional time offers an opportunity to refine processes and improve the quality of the first report.
  • Wave 2 – Companies due to report in FY2025 – coming out of scope. For companies that may now fall outside the reporting scope, sustainability remains important to meet stakeholder expectations. Even if reporting obligations are relaxed, key factors such as customer and investor expectations, corporate reputation, value chain relationships, and overall business resilience still drive the need for strong ESG practices.
  • Wave 3: Small and medium-sized entities – due to report in 2027. Small and medium-sized entities that are public interest entities, issuers, or fall under specific categories (e.g., small and non-complex institutions or captive insurance undertakings) will receive a two-year delay. As a result, these entities would begin reporting in 2029 based on data collected during 2028.
  • Wave 4: Non-EU companies – due to report in 2029. For non-EU companies, the reporting timeline remains unchanged. However, the proposed changes introduce new thresholds. The net turnover threshold for non-EU undertakings has increased from EUR 150 million to EUR 450 million. Additionally, the EU branch threshold has risen from EUR 40 million to EUR 50 million. Moreover, the requirement to report on the ultimate non-EU parent company now applies only to large subsidiary undertakings. These changes may reduce the reporting burden for some non-EU entities while still ensuring that significant operations remain accountable.

What’s the definition of a ‘large undertaking’ (wave 2 companies)?

The first wave covers large EU-listed undertakings, which already have to report under the Non-Financial Reporting Directive (NFRD). This remains unchanged by the Omnibus updates. The definition of a large undertaking has changed to:

  • (a) more than 1,000 employees AND meets at least one financial test
  • (b) net turnover: above EUR 50,000,000
  • (c) balance sheet: above EUR 25,000,000.

How is the employee compliance threshold calculated?

  • Does it apply based on the size of individual EU entities, the total EU-wide headcount, or global headcount?
  • Are part-time and temporary employees counted?
  • How does this threshold apply to a parent company of a large group versus individual entities?

The Omnibus proposal does not change the methodology for calculating employee thresholds under CSRD. Companies must consider this threshold at both the individual entity level and on a consolidated basis if they have subsidiaries. For EU entities with subsidiaries, the 1,000-employee threshold is assessed on a consolidated basis, meaning that the parent entity must aggregate its employees with those of its subsidiaries when determining compliance.

For non-EU companies that may be required to report under Article 40A of the CSRD, the rules differ slightly. In this case, an entity must assess whether it has an EU subsidiary or branch that qualifies as a “large undertaking” (see the answer to the previous question for a definition). Additionally, non-EU companies must consider whether they generate more than €450 million in revenue from the EU.

The calculation for the CSRD employee threshold includes full-time, part-time, temporary employees and other workers in non-standard forms of employment.

In countries where CSRD has been transposed – are we still obligated to report based on the current rules?

Transposition is the process by which each EU member state incorporates the requirements of an EU directive (such as the CSRD and CSDDD) into national law. During this process, member states can fully adopt the directive’s requirements, introduce stricter measures, or make adjustments to align with their existing national laws.

Some EU member states have already transposed the current version of the CSRD. These national laws are valid and effective; therefore, to avoid penalties, companies should comply with these national regulations when preparing and issuing their CSRD reports.

For countries that have not yet transposed the CSRD, companies should monitor the progress of transposition at the country level. Member states may choose to pause or continue the transposition process.

How should companies apply scoping requirements (parent vs. entity level)?

Under the Omnibus proposals, companies need to consider both parent and entity-level scoping requirements for compliance. Here are some key points for reference:

  1. Assess Reporting Obligations:
    • Evaluate whether each entity within the group meets the proposed new thresholds (including the employee count, net turnover, and balance sheet).
    • Evaluate whether the group (especially non-EU companies) meets the proposed new thresholds.
  2. Consider Exemptions: Determine if any exemptions apply, such as inclusion in a consolidated report (especially for countries that have already transposed the CSRD).
  3. Factor in Data Availability: Use the existing CSRD-ESRS as a baseline to evaluate data availability, feasibility, and the timeline for compiling the information. This readiness helps prevent last-minute compliance scrambles and associated costs.
  4. Talk to Key Stakeholders: Consider the information needs of your key stakeholders when deciding the reporting approach.

When can we expect the Omnibus proposal to enter into force?

The regular EU legislative process may take 6-12 months to pass or reject a proposal. Most EU legislatives files are agreed at the first and second reading. However, this can vary depending on the complexity of the directive and potential disagreements between the European Parliament and the Council. Once the changes are agreed at the EU level, individual jurisdictions will need time to transpose the updates into national law.

The proposed CSRD/CSDDD changes under the Omnibus package was released in two parts. The more immediate proposal, called the ‘stop-the-clock’ proposal, focusing on postponements for companies in the second and third reporting wave, passed through Parliament and the Council on 3rd April 2025. This gives European Parliament time to process the other changes.

You can find an example timeline for approval here

What organisations should do in the interim for delayed reports 

If the EU Parliament and Council have not yet deliberated, does the CSRD remain suspended, or do the previous regulations still apply?

The proposal to postpone the reporting date (‘stop the clock’ omnibus proposal) was passed by the EU Parliament. Once formal approval is received by the EU Council, the 2-year delay for wave 2 and wave 3 companies will become effective.

Until the EU Parliament and Council have deliberated and reached a consensus on the remaining Omnibus proposals (including the new thresholds), the existing CSRD remains valid and effective.  

For organisations that remain within the scope of the CSRD but have been granted a two-year extension (wave 2 and 3), how should they proceed this year? Additionally, if negotiations lead to further changes later in the year, how should they respond to ensure compliance?

Organisations that remain in scope but have received a two-year extension should continue with their compliance efforts rather than pausing entirely. If your company is already engaged in a Double Materiality Assessment (DMA) or another significant workstream related to the CSRD, it is advisable to proceed with these initiatives.

While some recalibration of work plans may be necessary, larger companies are generally continuing their preparations.  These efforts provide broader benefits beyond regulatory compliance, such as enterprise risk management.

Will companies be subject to fines if they miss deadlines under the current Directive?

Penalties typically apply only after the Directive has been transposed into national law. If a company pauses CSRD compliance due to the Omnibus proposals, and changes are not made to national legislation in a timely way, the company may be subject to fines according to those national laws[CS9] [PW10] [VF11] .

National regulators may issue non-enforcement guidance to address compliance uncertainties, and we have seen this approach applied in other regulatory contexts. However, organisations should stay informed of developments at both the EU and national levels to adapt their compliance strategies accordingly.

What about companies operating in a country where the current CSRD regulation has not been transposed?

Member states that have not transposed the existing CSRD regulation officially remain obliged to do so. Companies should monitor the progress of transposition at the country level as member states may choose to pause or continue the transposition process.

How this will affect companies within the supply chain of other CSRD-obligated companies 

What data requirements will there be for supply chain partners that do not fall in scope?

The Omnibus proposal mentions that for undertakings not subject to mandatory sustainability reporting requirements, the Commission proposes a proportionate standard for voluntary use which would be based on the Voluntary SME Reporting Standard (VSME) standard developed by EFRAG.

The Omnibus proposal does not permit in-scope companies to require value-chain companies below the thresholds to disclose information beyond the voluntary standard, unless mutually agreed upon by the parties.

We will closely monitor the development of the proposed voluntary standard and share updates as more information about the data requirements becomes available.

What does best-in-class reporting look like, and how can we find good examples?

A best-in-class CSRD report typically includes some key elements that ensure comprehensive and transparent sustainability reporting. Here are some considerations for your reference:

  • Understand the Reporting Requirements: Fulfil all the requirements to ensure compliance. Understanding these requirements will help identify the key data points and performance indicators that need to be included.
  • Clear Structure, Visuals and Accessible Language: Use a clear structure and visuals and accessible language to allow users to follow the content easily.
  • Comprehensive Disclosures: Cover general disclosures as well as specific ESG data.
  • Stakeholder Engagement: Engage with stakeholders and incorporate their feedback into the report. This ensures the report addresses the concerns and interests of various stakeholders.
  • Double Materiality Assessment: Conduct a double materiality assessment to identify significant sustainability impacts from both a financial and societal perspective. This is a key requirement under the CSRD and serves as a foundation for the report.
  • Data Accuracy and Verification: Ensure the accuracy of reported data and have it verified by qualified third parties.
  • Future-Oriented Goals: CSRD reports should not only show a company’s current status but also indicate future development. Setting clear, measurable sustainability goals and outlining the steps to achieve them demonstrates a company’s commitment to continuous improvement.

What should organisations do now?

This landscape is evolving rapidly, with key updates expected soon. Stay informed by signing up for Anthesis’ reporting newsletter to receive the latest developments and expert analysis of the first CSRD reports.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Best Practices for Private Equity ESG Reporting  https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/best-practices-for-private-equity-esg-reporting/ Wed, 19 Mar 2025 09:49:50 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63342

Best Practices for Private Equity ESG Reporting

Key trends and best practices to help General Partners (GPs) navigate the complexities of ESG reporting.

19 March 2025

Green leaf

Investors, regulators and stakeholders are demanding greater levels of transparency, making ESG reporting an important tool for building trust, demonstrating impact, and showcasing a private equity firm’s commitment to ESG and sustainable growth.

An ESG report brings a General Partner’s (GPs) responsible investment approach to life through qualitative insights and quantitative data. It illustrates a firm’s ESG portfolio engagement programme, including the systems, policies and processes integrated within their own operations and investment strategy to drive sustainable performance.

With growing regulatory and industry expectations, GPs face increasing pressure to provide stakeholders with more ESG data driven by frameworks such as the Sustainable Finance Disclosure Regulation (SFDR), Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD), ESG Data Convergence Initiative (EDCI), Principles for Responsible Investment (PRI), and Science Based Targets initiative (SBTi). Consequently, the annual ESG report is now a vital communications tool for GPs. Based on our experience of helping over a dozen PE firms with their ESG reporting, we have outlined key trends and best practices for preparing useful, engaging ESG reports. 

What makes a compelling ESG report?

Private equity ESG reporting has unique challenges – not least how to report on a diverse portfolio, covering multiple sectors and geographies. GPs also tend to use an annual ESG report to provide updates on their own ESG activities, governance processes and operational systems. To achieve clarity and engagement, these reports should combine clear structure with compelling visuals.

As a result, we see few private equity sponsors using mainstream corporate sustainability reporting frameworks such as the Global Reporting Initiative (GRI). Instead, sector-specific best practices have emerged, including :

1. Strategic positioning

A well-positioned ESG report should reinforce a GP’s identity and leadership in ESG, demonstrating how its values, internal policies and governance structures shape its approach. Whether as an impact investor, a sector specialist or a B Corp, the report should clearly articulate the GP’s strategic priorities and why specific ESG issues are material to its investment portfolio and philosophy. By outlining public commitments, third-party certifications, and accountability mechanisms, GPs can build trust and credibility with investors, portfolio companies, and broader stakeholders.

2. Commitments and goals

Stakeholders expect a clear narrative that explains a GP’s material ESG topics – those identified through stakeholder engagement as most relevant to the private equity firm’s investment strategy, risk profile and value creation approach – and the concrete steps taken to address them.

Equally important is articulating why these goals matter, both for the private equity sponsor and its portfolio. For instance, a GP investing primarily in food retailers might consider responsible food sourcing, food safety and fair labour standards as material topics within its ESG strategy.

Certain ESG metrics, such as Scope 3 financed emissions and female representation on portfolio company boards, are becoming industry standards, driven by a broader push for accountability. Initiatives like the Science Based Targets initiative (SBTi), the 30% Club, and HeForShe are driving these efforts. With more GPs aligning to these standards, stakeholders are demanding transparent, year-on-year updates on how GPs, and their portfolio companies, are taking action and addressing challenges. A well-crafted ESG report doesn’t just document progress – it sets the course for future impact.

3. Showcase value creation opportunities

Private equity ESG reports tend to highlight initiatives at both the firm and portfolio levels, aligning with the GP’s investment proposition and fiduciary duty. However, merely stating what portfolio companies are doing is not enough. Instead, the report should illustrate how responsible investment is embedded throughout the ownership period and how GPs actively encourage portfolio management teams to drive action. Case studies, testimonials and graphs are the perfect way to demonstrate impact. However, GPs must ensure their use of language and visuals is not misleading or overstate any achievements.

CRESS Programme
The Livingbridge Responsible Investment Report demonstrates actions throughout the investment lifecycle and across material topics.

4. Data transparency and credibility

A growing portfolio can make reporting comparable data challenging. Establishing a structured data collection process, communicated at the start of the ownership period, ensures transparency. Robust year-on-year data is critical to demonstrate progress, identify gaps, and develop performance improvement programmes, helping firms track ESG performance in a consistent and meaningful way.

GPs can take several approaches when collecting data for ESG reports, including:

  • Reporting on the influence of the portfolio against the GP’s minimum standards, such as key policies, plans and governance structures.
  • Presenting data thematically by grouping portfolio companies by sector to highlight material trends. This can help Limited Partners and other key stakeholders see how ESG considerations vary across the portfolio and sector-specific impacts.
  • Aligning with industry-standard data sets, including those outlined in frameworks like Ethical Data Coalition Initiative (EDCI) and Principles for Responsible Investment (PRI), alongside GP-specific metrics tailored to the firm’s strategic priorities. This ensures consistency and relevance when communicating progress.

Collecting all this data across the portfolio is a logistical challenge and one that means many GPs are turning to data management software, such as Anthesis’ Mero to collect, validate and aggregate all this data.

Key sustainability regulations affecting private equity firms
Key sustainability regulations affecting private equity firms

Metrics for ESG reporting

The ESG Data Convergence Initiative (EDCI) has emerged as a key framework for private equity firms, driving consistency in how ESG performance is measured and disclosed. EDCI metrics focus on core areas such as carbon footprint, diversity, health and safety, new hires and employee engagement. By leveraging standardised frameworks such as the EDCI, GPs can provide investors with clear, comparable data while also aligning ESG efforts with value creation and risk mitigation strategies.

5. Communication through design

Printed ESG reports are becoming a thing of the past with more interactive formats incorporating QR codes and videos, providing dynamic, real-time engagement in a more environmentally conscious format. Infographics, charts, and dashboards simplify complex ESG data while visualising year-on-year trends reinforces transparency and accountability.

Importantly, the design of the report should not only reflect the GP’s overall brand, aligning with its positioning, culture and values but also ensure that the messaging is authentic and grounded in real actions. A compelling design must visually communicate the GP’s genuine commitment to responsible investment in an authentic way.

How to get started on an ESG report

Getting started on an ESG report involves a structured, collaborative approach. For GPs, establishing an internal working group will help align on key messages, responsibilities and internal timelines. This group can support with ESG data collection and analysis, both at the firm and portfolio level, narrative development and provide valuable input into the overall report design.

Early engagement with portfolio companies is crucial given their critical role in providing valuable data, sharing case studies, and bringing a GP’s approach to responsible investment to life.

Finally, engaging with external advisors and leveraging data management platforms can streamline the ESG report writing experience by providing specialist expertise and automating the portfolio data collection process.

Finding the value of ESG

By combining credible data, compelling case studies and thoughtful design, GPs can demonstrate progress, enhance stakeholder engagement and drive sustainable value. As ESG expectations continue to evolve, compelling reports will offer dynamic, investor-friendly and seamless integration into the firm’s investment philosophy.

With our global team of PE subject matter experts and specialist strategy and reporting capabilities, Anthesis is well-positioned to guide GPs and their portfolio companies through the complexities of ESG report writing.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
California’s Fashion Environmental Accountability Act (AB 405) https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/californias-fashion-environmental-accountability-act-ab-405/ Mon, 17 Mar 2025 18:48:07 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63365

California's Fashion Environmental Accountability Act (AB 405)

A Bold Step Toward a Sustainable Industry

17 March 2025

Clothing apparel

California is introducing a new bill that will impact the fashion industry, encouraging increased accountability in reducing Green House Gas (GHG) emissions and greater supply chain transparency.   

The bill, the Fashion Environmental Accountability Act of 2025 (AB 405), was introduced by Assembly member Dawn Addis on February 4, 2025, and is currently under consideration in the 2025-2026 legislative session. 

New York is also re-introducing a similar bill this legislative session to target similar fashion sellers, requiring them to carry out environmental due diligence for the portions of their business related to wearing apparel, footwear, or fashion bags, including wearing apparel, footwear, or fashion bags produced as a private label; it also establishes a fashion remediation fund.

AB 405 would apply to businesses selling fashion goods in California with annual gross receipts exceeding $100 million (referred to as “fashion sellers”). The bill excludes fashion sellers that sell used fashion goods and does not include multi-brand retailers, unless the total annual gross receipts of all of the private labels under the retailer exceed $100 million.  

What Does AB 405 Propose?   

First, in-scope companies must establish a quantitative GHG emissions baseline, as well as both short-term and long-term reduction targets, aligning with the Science Based Targets initiative. Companies with over $1 billion in global revenue must use the absolute contraction approach for calculating Scope 3 emissions, and their GHG emission inventory shall be independently verified once every two years. 

Second, companies will also need to disclose supply chain details in phases from 2027 to 2032, taking steps towards greater supply chain transparency by carrying out effective environmental due diligence. Companies shall prepare an Environmental Due Diligence Report to communicate all relevant information concerning the existence, implementation, and outcomes of the due diligence. 

The bill proposes the following schedule for companies to disclose information on their supply chain, including names, addresses, parent companies and product types:  

  • By January 1, 2027, Tier 1 suppliers must be disclosed (covering at least 80% by volume).  
  • By January 1, 2028, Tier 2 suppliers must be disclosed (75% by volume).  
  • By January 1, 2030, Tier 3 suppliers must be disclosed (50% by volume or dollar value).  
  • By January 1, 2032, Tier 4 suppliers must be disclosed (50% by volume or dollar value).  

Third, companies would have to have insight into their supplier’s chemical and wastewater testing.  By 2028, companies would need to require Tier 2 suppliers (dyeing, finishing, printing, garment washing) to report wastewater chemical concentrations and water usage, including verification from a 3rd party.  

AB 405 also requires both the GHG emission inventory and the chemical and wastewater testing content to be included in the annual Environmental Due Diligence Report.

The Potential Risks of Non-Compliance

The Department of Toxic Substances Control (the Department) will oversee chemical and wastewater compliance, while the State Air Resources Board will regulate greenhouse gas emissions.  

Under AB 405, if a company fails to file a complete Environmental Due Diligence Report, the Department will grant a 30-day grace period for submission. If the fashion seller does not file a complete report within three months of the due date, penalties will be imposed. These penalties include listing the fashion seller on a publicly available noncompliance list and/or a civil penalty of up to 2 percent of its annual revenues. Civil penalties collected pursuant to this section shall be deposited in the Fashion Environmental Remediation Fund. 

If a company fails to meet its GHG reduction targets, it has 18 months to get back on track. Companies with over $1 billion in revenue will be in violation if their absolute emissions increase for five consecutive years. Enforcement follows existing regulations, but companies won’t face penalties for Scope 3 emission misstatements if made in good faith.  

The Motivations Behind AB 405

The fashion industry is linked with impacts on the environment that are less than fashionable, or favorable. California’s proposed AB 405 addresses significant environmental challenges posed by the fashion industry, including:  

  1. High Greenhouse Gas Emissions: The fashion sector contributes approximately 10% of global carbon emissions, surpassing the emissions from international aviation and maritime shipping combined.    
  2. Excessive Water Consumption: Textile production is responsible for about 20% of global water usage, straining California’s already limited water resources.    
  3. Textile Waste Accumulation: In the United States, 85% of discarded textiles end up in landfills, generating methane and releasing hazardous chemicals into the environment.    
  4. Chemical Pollution: The use of harmful chemicals in textile manufacturing can contaminate water sources, posing health risks to both ecosystems and communities.    

By proposing AB 405, California aims to mitigate these environmental impacts through increased transparency, accountability, and sustainable practices within the fashion industry.    

California’s Fashion Environmental Accountability Act (AB 405) also aligns with the state’s broader push for corporate climate responsibility, echoing the goals of SB 253, the Climate Corporate Data Accountability Act, and SB 707, California’s Responsible Textile Recovery Act. Similar to SB 253, which requires large companies to disclose their Scope 1, 2, and 3 emissions, AB 405 enforces strict emissions reporting and due diligence for fashion sellers. Additionally, it complements SB 707, which establishes an Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR) framework for textiles, ensuring that manufacturers take responsibility for the greater life cycle management of products. AB 405 reinforces California’s commitment to holding industries accountable for their environmental impact and advancing towards a circular economy in fashion.

What’s the Next Step?

In recent years, California and other states have focused on the environmental aspects of the fashion industry, using climate disclosure as an entry point. While AB 405 is pending review, companies may need to proactively assess their climate strategies to ensure alignment with legal requirements and streamline their internal processes to enforce these requirements. Notably, multiple bills recently passed or introduced in California require companies to maintain an accountable GHG emission inventory. If companies are not already working on emissions baselines & reduction targets,they may need to consider adding this item to the agenda.  

For companies navigating these new regulatory requirements, tools like the Higg Facility Environmental Module (Higg FEM) could potentially provide a structured approach to chemical management and wastewater monitoring, supporting Tier 2 supplier reporting under AB 405. Additionally, Anthesis has established methodologies to integrate carbon emissions reported through Higg into Scope 3 footprints, ensuring alignment with Science-Based Targets initiative (SBTi) standards. As members of Cascale, Anthesis supports companies in advancing sustainability efforts and implementing tailored processes for emissions tracking, supply chain transparency, and regulatory compliance.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
EU CBAM Proposal: Key Changes and Implications   https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/eu-cbam-proposal-key-changes-and-implications/ Thu, 13 Mar 2025 15:28:32 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63268

EU CBAM Proposal: Key Changes and Implications 

Explore the proposed updates from the recent Omnibus Simplification Package and how they affect CBAM

13 March 2025

a working dock

CBAM Update Guide

Access a comprehensive breakdown of these key proposed changes to the CBAM, and gain a deeper understanding of the broader impact they may have on your business.

On the 26th February, the EU proposed a set of targeted amendments to the Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM), informed by insights gained during its Transitional Phase. These changes aim to simplify compliance, reduce unnecessary burdens, and align CBAM more effectively with the EU Emissions Trading System (ETS) while ensuring its environmental objectives remain intact. 

Overall, the amendments that were part of the Omnibus Simplification Package reflect practical policymaking—they are responsive to business feedback and grounded in real-world implementation challenges. These proposed changes introduce meaningful simplifications, address practical challenges, and reflect a responsive approach to regulatory development. 

If approved, CBAM-affected businesses both within and outside the EU will see reduced reporting burdens, clearer carbon pricing rules, and greater certainty on compliance requirements. The amendments now need to pass through the EU’s legislative process, which will take several months at a minimum. 

Major proposed changes 

Proposed ChangeOverviewAction if approved 
New Mass-Based Threshold Businesses importing less than 50 tonnes of CBAM goods annually into the EU will no longer be subject to CBAM obligations. CBAM importers should assess if their annual imports exceed 50 tonnes to determine if they remain in scope. 
Exclusion of Emissions from Finishing Processes for Steel and Aluminium Manufacturers engaged only in finishing processes for steel and aluminium products will no longer need to report emissions from these processes, only from their precursors. Non-EU manufacturers engaged only in finishing should revise their reporting processes to exclude these emissions. 
Default Carbon Pricing Values The EU may introduce default carbon prices for third countries from 2027, based on best available data. CBAM importers and non-EU manufacturers should monitor default carbon price values and incorporate them into reporting where primary data is unavailable. 
Stronger Penalties for Non-Compliance The EU is enhancing its authority and increasing the severity of financial penalties under CBAM. EU importers of CBAM goods not yet reporting to the CBAM Registry must act now or face steep financial penalties 
Exclusion of ETS-Covered Precursors from CBAM Accounting Emissions reporting for precursors produced in EU ETS countries, or those with fully-integrated equivalent system, will no longer be required. Non-EU manufacturers should exclude ETS-covered precursors from emissions reporting. 

Additional changes 

In addition to the major proposed changes, several additional updates could impact CBAM compliance and implementation. These refinements aim to enhance clarity, streamline processes, and address industry concerns. Here’s a brief look at other key adjustments businesses should be aware of: 

New reporting deadline 

The annual CBAM declaration deadline has been moved from May 31 to August 31, providing businesses with additional months to collect accurate emissions data, secure verification, and purchase the necessary CBAM certificates.

Delay in obligation to purchase CBAM certificates 

In a move to provide financial relief, importers will not be required to purchase CBAM certificates for carbon emissions on imported goods until 2027, even though these imports will be subject to carbon pricing from 2026 onwards. This delay offers businesses more time to adjust their financial strategies while ensuring emissions accountability remains intact. 

Digital operator registration & data sharing 

The introduction of a digital CBAM Registry formalises operator registration, data uploads, and information sharing. By enabling direct uploads from operators, the new system aims to reduce the administrative workload for importers, making compliance more efficient and transparent. 

Recognition of carbon pricing paid in third countries 

Another major reform is the recognition of carbon pricing paid in third countries at any stage of the supply chain. This ensures that CBAM imports face costs aligned with the EU ETS, preventing overcharging  and fostering fair competition between EU-produced and imported goods. 

Reduced certificate holding requirement 

To ease financial pressures, the EU has also reduced the required holding of CBAM certificates from 80% to 50% of total emissions at the end of each quarter. This adjustment lowers the upfront financial burden on businesses, improving cash flow management and reducing the strain of compliance. 

Delegated reporting for importers 

On the administrative front, importers will now be allowed to appoint third parties to submit CBAM declarations on their behalf. While legal responsibility remains with the importer, this delegated reporting option alleviates operational complexity and provides flexibility in meeting regulatory obligations. 

Emissions verification limited to actual values 

The verification process for emissions data is also seeing a crucial update. Only actual emissions data will require verification, with default values now exempt from this requirement. This practical amendment removes redundant verification processes, allowing businesses to focus on accurate and meaningful reporting. 

Removal of non-calcined kaolinic clays from CBAM scope 

Lastly, non-calcined kaolinic clay has been removed from the CBAM scope, further reducing the compliance burden for industries dealing with this material. This refinement highlights the EU’s commitment to ensuring that CBAM targets high-impact emissions while avoiding unnecessary regulatory complexity. 

How Anthesis can help

These updates represent a more pragmatic and business-friendly evolution of CBAM, balancing the EU’s carbon pricing ambitions with the realities of global trade. Companies must stay ahead of these changes to leverage the additional time, financial flexibility, and reduced administrative burdens these reforms provide. As CBAM continues to take shape, proactive compliance and strategic planning will be key to navigating the evolving regulatory landscape. 

If you’d like to understand how any of these changes impact your business and its CBAM requirements, Anthesis’ CBAM experts are available to help. 

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Why Supplier Engagement Programs are Still Good Business https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/why-supplier-engagement-programs-are-still-good-business/ Wed, 12 Mar 2025 18:45:44 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63264

Why Supplier Engagement Programs are Still Good Business

Driving growth by integrating supplier engagement into business strategy

12 March 2025

Distribution center

With recent shifts in the political landscape and a pullback in government-led sustainability regulations, many businesses and sustainability leaders are reevaluating their next steps. They face key questions: Where should they focus their efforts? How can they secure executive buy-in to continue investing in sustainability programs?

In this evolving era, it is more critical than ever for businesses to show that these investments not only have positive impacts for people and the planet but also serve as strategic imperatives—creating competitive advantages, reducing risk, and, when executed effectively, enhancing long-term profitability.

Embedding Supplier Engagement into Business Strategy Can Drive Growth

If sustainability initiatives are viewed solely as a regulatory obligation, they will continue to be seen as a cost center rather than a value creator. When businesses integrate sustainability into their core objectives, on the other hand, it becomes a driver of growth rather than just a compliance requirement.

To transform sustainability from a mere compliance task into a strategic advantage, it is essential to integrate it into every facet of your business operations, including across your supply chain. Supplier engagement is central to this, helping create trusted relationships and stakeholder buy-in.

To ensure your supplier engagement program supports business success, start by aligning it with your strategic goals. Map your business objectives to the positive outcomes your supplier engagement efforts can deliver—whether it’s reducing risk, driving innovation, improving efficiency, or enhancing brand reputation. By embedding sustainability into your broader business strategy, supplier engagement becomes a catalyst for long-term profitability and competitive advantage.

ObjectiveOutcomeTask
Risk Mitigation & ResilienceProactively address regulatory, reputational, and operational risks to manage compliance and avoid supply chain disruptions.Conduct a regulatory gap assessment and a supply chain risk assessment, implement a due diligence program and engage with suppliers to implement sustainable and ethical business practices and reduce vulnerabilities related to resource scarcity, geopolitical instability, and climate risk.
Cost Savings & Efficiency GainsThrough supplier engagement programs, identify opportunities to improve processes, lower operational expenses, and create innovative productsPrioritise and identify suppliers to engage with in order to enable collaboration and opportunities for cost savings.
Regulatory & Compliance AdvantagesEnsure program aligns with current and potential future compliance obligations.Engage with suppliers to collect data, ensure transparency and accuracy, and support streamlined reporting.
Brand & Competitive DifferentiationDevelop a narrative that promotes how your initiatives align with consumer desires.Engage with suppliers to drive alignment and seek opportunities to leverage relationships to develop positive impacts that will support your brand purpose.
Innovation & Market OpportunitiesCo-develop new products, utilise sustainable materials, and implement circular solutions jointly with suppliers.Develop new business models and identify new revenue streams using data collected with your supplier engagement program.

How Companies Can Show Positive ROI & Value Creation through Supplier Engagement

ROI Framework
ROI Framework for Supplier Engagement

Once you have developed or updated your supplier engagement strategy and established your KPIs, it is essential to determine how you will collect, store, and analyse data. A strong data strategy enables you to measure value creation and return on investment (ROI), ensuring your program delivers tangible business benefits.

While supplier engagement is built on trust and collaboration, data serves as the foundation for a successful program. It provides the visibility needed to prioritise suppliers, identify opportunities for innovation, and uncover insights that drive brand differentiation and market growth.

With a proper data strategy in place, you can:

  1. Define clear objectives and metrics by which to assess your suppliers and supplier engagement program.
  2. Measure efficiencies across your supply chain.
  3. Report on progress and compliance.
  4. Foster a culture of innovation and improvement.

Importantly, demonstrating ROI from supplier engagement requires a holistic approach, combining financial, operational, reputational, and supplier-focused metrics. When executed effectively, this data-driven approach will unlock significant value for your business and strengthen your supply chain.

How Anthesis Can Help

Digital solutions like Anthesis Compliance Suite can help streamline data collection, track engagement, and identify high-impact initiatives—such as energy and resource efficiencies, cost reductions, innovation opportunities, and new revenue streams.

Compliance Suite automates supply chain data collection and integrates seamlessly with enterprise systems, reducing manual effort, minimising errors, and ensuring your data is accurate and up to date.

Anthesis Compliance Suite

Additionally, our supplier engagement services support organisations in developing a proactive and strategic approach to building strong, sustainable, and mutually beneficial relationships with suppliers. Whether you are looking to create your first supplier code of conduct, develop a strategy to align with sustainability goals, implement a digital solution to support data collection, or curate a tailored program to support individual suppliers, our experts are ready to help.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
From CSRD Compliance to Competitive Edge https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/from-csrd-compliance-to-competitive-edge/ Mon, 10 Mar 2025 16:53:57 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63230

From CSRD Compliance to Competitive Edge

How your Double Materiality Assessment can create business value, despite regulatory shifts

10 March 2025

Mountain Landscape

This article explores how Double Materiality outputs can be integrated into enterprise-wide sustainability and impact strategies in a way that mitigates risks and creates value, regardless of your organisation’s CSRD-reporting obligations or timelines.

With changes to the CSRD, many market drivers stay the same

EU Omnibus Update

The EU Sustainability Simplification Omnibus Package, announced on the 26th of February 2025, introduced some key changes to the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD), Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence Directive (CSDDD), the EU Taxonomy Regulation, and the Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM). A full summary of what happened and what could happen next can be found in our recent article and webinar.

Despite significant changes, Double Materiality remains a key element of the CSRD, meaning that in scope companies must report on both how sustainability affects their business and how they impact people and the environment.

The drivers for corporate action on sustainability have also not changed, despite regulatory shifts. Ultimately it is investors, corporates, and consumers who have heavily steered progress on sustainability to date – the role of regulation is only to provide the standardised methodology and approach to allow comparability.

Adapting CSRD Outputs and Timelines

The original requirements of the CSRD included detailed reporting obligations for in-scope companies, with the required content defined by the European Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS). For EU listed companies already reporting to CSRD, there are no delays in the proposed Omnibus package. However, for companies that remain in scope of CSRD but haven’t yet reported, the proposed changes could delay reporting by up to two years, which could provide additional time for companies to prepare and recalibrate.

For companies who have been preparing to publish CSRD-compliant reports in 2025, these changes will likely prompt an adjustment to reporting timelines and approaches. However, if your organisation is working towards your Double Materiality Assessment or has started to close your implementation gaps, Anthesis recommends that you go ahead as planned. If your organisation delays your response and the regulations do not change as expected—or if the legislative process takes longer than anticipated—you could be at risk of non-compliance.

You can achieve greater value than just compliance by pressing forward with a robust double materiality assessment that informs sustainability/impact strategy setting and puts in place effective performance improvement plans that prepare your organisation to respond to stakeholder expectations related to Environmental, Social, and Governance (ESG) initiatives.

Maintaining momentum towards addressing and reporting on material impacts, risks, and opportunities

Many of our clients have been grappling with how to maintain momentum towards sustainability objectives despite changes and a lack of clarity regarding reporting requirements and timelines. While some companies are considering pausing compliance driven efforts, others are curious about how to shift focus back towards managing material impacts, risks, and opportunities (IROs). The good news is that, through your Double Materiality process, your organisation has already identified your most material ESG-related IROs. While waiting to confirm which ESRS datapoints will be in-scope for your company, and when you will need to report, you can proactively integrate these IROs into your wider enterprise risk management approach, as well as your overarching sustainability strategy.

Leveraging compliance outputs for value creation

Instead of simply identifying a long list of required actions to close your identified ESRS gaps, this moment presents a unique opportunity to zoom out and view your IROs more holistically. Indeed, it’s a crucial moment to communicate the wider business case for targeted sustainability investments. Framing actions solely as compliance-driven risks losing the budget or headcount your organisation worked so hard to secure based on the original CSRD timelines. As we await further clarity on the proposed Omnibus Regulations, consider refining your prioritisation approach. Rather than focusing solely on actions based on whether they can close an ESRS reporting gap, expand your prioritisation criteria to include whether actions:

  • Align with existing value-creation priorities and your enterprise-strategy
  • Close a competitive gap, or cement an already-existing leadership position in the market
  • Are valued by other important stakeholder groups (investors, customers, consumers)
  • Are cost effective and feasible to implement

Of course, your company’s unique drivers for sustainability will dictate the categories above. Regardless of your unique context, by assessing your ESRS gaps based on a wider range of criteria, you can make the case for immediate actions that create value or mitigate risk. Then, once practical implementation of any changes suggested in the Omnibus become clearer, you can finalise your in-scope ESRS datapoints and an implementation roadmap based on your CSRD-reporting deadlines.

How Anthesis Can Help

Anthesis offers a wide range of sustainability strategy services that can support you in this pivotal moment. Our approach to sustainability strategy can build upon the risk and opportunities identified in your Double Materiality Assessment and will integrate your most significant IROs into a unique strategy framework that aligns with your overarching business objectives.

If you’ve completed your Double Materiality Assessment and are in the process of identifying in-scope ESRS datapoints and your readiness to disclose them, Anthesis’ digital data platform, Mero, can simplify this process. Anthesis can customise Mero based on your in-scope topics and then apply the results of your action prioritisation to produce streamlined reports that support you to make the case for targeted sustainability investments while you await CSRD clarity. Based on your material ESRS topics, our specialised nature, net zero & decarbonisation, & human rights teams can support you to develop programs, set strategies, and improve your performance to meet your disclosure requirements.

Anthesis Mero

If we’ve learned anything over the past few years as sustainability regulations continue to morph and change, a solely compliance-driven approach is typically reactive and subject to changes and updates to requirements. Furthermore, seeing sustainability as primarily an exercise in compliance and disclosure could put your company at risk of greenwashing, greenhushing, or falling prey to the increasing polarisation related to ESG more broadly. As we covered in our recent whitepaper, companies must develop ironclad, business-focused communications that highlight integrated approaches, built on risks and opportunities, that make a business more successful. This approach to sustainability and impact is more resilient, relevant, and long-lasting.

Our team of Advisors would be happy to design a customised approach that meets your compliance requirements and creates real value for your organisation.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
XBRL for ESG Reporting https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/xbrl-for-esg-reporting/ Sat, 08 Mar 2025 20:19:00 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=66503

XBRL for ESG Reporting

diagram showing vector points

Companies are facing mounting pressure to disclose Environmental, Social, and Governance (ESG) data in a clear and comparable way. XBRL (eXtensible Business Reporting Language) offers a powerful framework for ESG reporting that aligns with regulatory standards like the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) and European Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS).

Find out more about how XBRL and ESRS work together to improve ESG disclosures and why they are essential for businesses striving to meet today’s sustainability expectations.

What is XBRL?

XBRL is a globally recognised framework that allows business data to be reported in a standardised way. This is particularly important for ESG reporting, where comparability has previously been hampered by the use of multiple different voluntary frameworks and methodologies for collecting data.

The process adds machine-readable labels to financial and non-financial metrics, which allows users to analyse and compare data across different companies and sectors more easily. As a result, the format of data is more structured and consistent, promoting greater transparency of reported data.

Having already been used to promote the systematic reporting of financial data for some time, it is increasingly being used for the reporting of ESG data, with regulations including CSRD mandating that companies prepare sustainability reports in XBRL format. The technology is also being used by the International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB) and the GRI, which have recently launched their own XBRL taxonomy.

Digital tagging of sustainability information is essential to ensure the data can be accurately analysed and compared across different companies and sectors.

Key benefits of XBRL for ESG reporting

Standardisation

With XBRL, companies can present ESG data in a standardised format, allowing stakeholders to compare performance across organisations seamlessly.

Data Quality

Automated data input reduces the risk of human errors, enhancing the reliability of ESG reports.

Efficiency

Machine-readable formats allow for quicker processing, reducing the time and cost associated with manually analysing ESG data.

Transparency

Companies can present detailed, trustworthy information that fosters greater stakeholder trust and compliance with regulatory standards.

Its role in ESRS reporting

The ESRS taxonomy enables companies to utilise XBRL in their sustainability disclosures, allowing them to align with CSRD requirements and produce high-quality, regulatory-compliant ESG reports. Here’s a closer look at how XBRL interacts with the ESRS framework:

  • Taxonomy-based structure: ESRS data, structured within XBRL, offers a standardised set of concepts and metrics tailored for ESG reporting. This approach ensures that ESG data is consistent across organisations, streamlining compliance and improving data comparability.
  • Accessibility: With XBRL, ESG data tagged to ESRS standards can be easily accessed and compared by regulators and stakeholders, enabling faster response and assessment.
  • Detailed concept tagging: Companies can use ESRS-based XBRL to tag individual ESG concepts, such as greenhouse gas emissions or diversity statistics, down to granular details, which provides in-depth insights into their sustainability practices.

How to use the XBRL taxonomy

Mero, Anthesis’ comprehensive ESG information management platform, allows companies to simplify the management and reporting of data. It enables users to turn sprawling data into streamlined reports, revealing insights to advance performance. Mero can be used by companies reporting under CSRD, and it is fully aligned with the XBRL-aligned ESRS dataset.

Steps to implement XBRL for ESG reporting

  1. Plan and align
    Identify the ESG regulations and frameworks that apply, review the relevant XBRL taxonomy, and map your current disclosures to pinpoint gaps. Establish a cross-functional team, assign data owners, and build XBRL tagging into your reporting timeline.
  2. Prepare and structure data
    Collect ESG data in a consistent format, validate its accuracy, and structure it to match taxonomy concepts. Ensure both narrative and numeric disclosures are ready for tagging.
  3. Tag, validate, and file
    Use an XBRL-enabled tool to apply the correct taxonomy tags. Validate the file for errors, test submissions if possible, then generate and submit the final iXBRL report to the regulator and publish it.
  4. Review and improve
    Gather feedback, monitor taxonomy updates, and refine processes to improve efficiency and compliance in future reporting cycles.

As sustainability reporting regulations continue to tighten, XBRL will play a crucial role in enabling companies to meet these demands efficiently. The ESRS taxonomy will likely evolve to include more specific requirements, allowing organisations to offer even greater transparency and accuracy in their ESG disclosures.

Early adopters of XBRL for ESRS reporting stand to benefit by positioning themselves as leaders in sustainability and compliance, gaining a competitive edge in a fast-moving market.

Contact Us

Speak with our experts and discover how we can support you in creating impactful, purpose-driven communications for your brand.

Loading…
]]>
Causes that Count https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/causes-that-count-2025/ Fri, 07 Mar 2025 13:45:16 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63157

Causes that Count 2025

Revolt, part of Anthesis, unveils the fifth edition of its annual index on critical issues shaping the world.

7 March 2025

people walknig near a makeshift tent
Alex Lewis

Alex Lewis

Revolt

causes that count

Revolt, part of Anthesis, has released its 2025 edition of the annual index of 50 critical issues shaping the world right now. At the crucial halfway point in what the UN has billed as ‘The Decade of Action’ on the Sustainable Development Goals, the index provides insight into shifting priorities as public concern responds to changing context and culture.

With five years worth of data we can now get a sense of which issues are here to stay, which are on their way up, and which are on their way out. While this report enables you to dig down into the trajectory of any of the issues that take your interest, it can help to consider the bigger picture before diving in.

Disruptive forces

The last five years have been shaped by three major disruptive forces; COVID-19 and its aftermath, domestic and international conflict and rising polarisation.

The data clearly shows that despite the worst of the pandemic passing, the strain on healthcare systems and the inequality built into them has meant that ‘Access to healthcare’ (3) has remained one of the top worries. However, COVID-19 wasn’t just a health crisis, it was an economic one too and the last five years have shown consistently high concern about the cost and standard of living, with ‘Unemployment and job security’ (2) and ‘Famine and food insecurity’ (9) consistently in the top 10 and ‘Fair wages’ (10) entering it for the first time this year.

While 2021 was influenced by the aftermath of the George Floyd murder in the US, with the emergence of the Black Lives Matter movement leading to the rise of the DEI agenda across business and civil society, since then ‘Race and race relations’ (34) has fallen ten places to its current position. Indeed, a set of social issues such as ‘Equality in the workplace’ (27), ‘Support for people with disabilities’ (28), ‘Gender inequality’ (45), and ‘Sexuality and gender rights’ (49) have either declined from their 2021 rankings or ranked consistently low. When you look behind the data on these issues, you tend to find polarisation with respondents either ranking them as very important or not important at all.

Unifying forces

The 2023 report followed the Russian invasion of Ukraine, and 2024 the violent and destructive conflict in the Middle East. As a result we saw ‘Large scale conflicts and wars’ (5) jump from the teens to a top 5 concern. However, where conflict may divide, other issues appear to be unifying. ‘Climate change’ (4), despite what might be expected given persistent efforts to undermine public support, has remained one of the most important issues year on year.

Similarly, a cluster of issues reflects the universal desire for a better life, for oneself, one’s family and for fellow citizens. Indeed, ‘Poverty, hunger and homelessness in my country’ (1), has taken the top spot for the last three years. Adding to this picture is ‘Decline of family relationships’ (11) which has jumped up the table, something to be considered along with the strong performance of concerns such as ‘Access to quality education’ (7), the essential gateway to a life of opportunity.

Hopes, fears and forgotten agendas

While hope remains, there are clear concerns for what the future holds, with worry about fundamentals such as, ‘Government transparency, corruption and threats to democracy’ (6) (though respondents may disagree on where that ‘threat’ is coming from), and emerging issues such as ‘AI’s effects on society’ (37).

Finally, the data also shows that a number of causes, (which are far from resolved), are fading from public awareness; ‘Child labour’ (42), ‘The plastics crisis’ (44), ‘Health of our oceans’ (21), ‘Recycling and waste’ (25), ‘Biodiversity and species extinction’ (38) are all trending downwards. While this may seem like a predominantly environmental trend, it’s countered by the sharp rise in concern for ‘Pollution of my local environment’ (12) suggesting higher interest in the more tangible aspects of this agenda such as air and water quality.

Explore the index to better understand which issues are on their way up, which are on their way out, and which are here to stay. It also includes an analysis on how these trends have changed over the last five years.

This year we’ve gone digital-first to give you the opportunity to better explore the data.

Check out the full report on our new microsite ctc.revoltlondon.com

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
How to Build a Sustainable Performance Culture in 2025 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/how-to-build-a-sustainable-performance-culture-in-2025/ Wed, 05 Mar 2025 14:34:09 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63075

How to Build a Sustainable Performance Culture in 2025

5 March 2025

coloured silhouettes of people

As we head further into 2025, businesses are facing new challenges, from talent retention and employee engagement to balancing sustainability and profitability. But don’t worry, we’re here to guide you through the latest developments, innovations and new approaches around business strategy and leadership.

What does 2025 mean for business culture?

In the first few months of the year, around one in ten of your workforce may be looking for new jobs. That’s according to research from Totaljobs. So what has that got to do with purpose and culture?

According to the Purpose Gap research from Given – part of Anthesis – nearly half of employees would consider leaving their jobs if their employer failed to live up to their stated values and purpose. As the old saying goes: Culture eats strategy for breakfast.

But what does it take to have a good business culture, and what role does purpose have in creating the culture that attracts – and retains – talent? 

Cultural shift

Embracing the idea of ‘sustainable performance’ requires a cultural shift. And the great news is that data shows us that a sustainable performance approach resonates with employees. In fact, according to PwC’s Workforce of the Future survey, nearly 90% of millennials want to work for companies whose purpose and values align with their own. 

As a result, businesses embracing this shift find it easier to attract, engage, and retain top talent. As Mitch Oliver, Global VP of Brand & Purpose at Mars, told us on Given’s Purposing podcast, she found it led to a huge increase in employee engagement: “Associates who believe we’re acting in line with our purpose are likely to be up to 12 times more engaged,” she told us.

Put simply: purpose is good for business

So, how can organisations create a culture that attracts and retains top talent while delivering on business objectives? Here are five actionable steps to help you embed purpose at the heart of your business culture in 2025.

Step 1: define a powerful purpose

There’s a big difference between having a purpose statement and being a truly purpose-driven business. Your purpose should resonate deeply with employees and customers alike.

We worked together with Claire Hawkins, Director of Corporate Affairs at Phoenix Group. She highlights the importance of clarity:

Purpose is only powerful if it’s 100% right – as soon as you start to dilute it, by using different words, it loses power.

Claire Hawkins, Director of Corporate Affairs, Phoenix Group

To define purpose effectively:

  • Recognise that defining your purpose is only the beginning, and you need a plan to make sure it’s lived in every part of the business.
  • Involve your entire organisation in the definition of your purpose. For a purpose to be lived, it needs to be owned by everyone and that comes through co-creation.
  • But make sure your executive team sees themselves as the ultimate owners – they need to be able to talk about and act with confidence and conviction. This involves making dedicated time for their engagement, individually and collectively. 

Step 2: embed purpose into culture and business strategy

Purpose shouldn’t sit on the sidelines; it should guide decision-making, strategic priorities, and daily activities. Chris Jackson, People Director at Centrica, puts it simply:

Purpose is your why, the strategy is what you’re doing, and culture is the change you need to see.

Chris Jackson, People Director, Centrica

How to change your culture:

  • Make sure you think about both hard-wiring and soft-wiring your purpose into your business
  • Think holistically – this is about governance and decision-making, products, services and innovation, brand and customer experience, your policies and operating system, leadership & engagement and partnerships & advocacy.
  • Remember that this is a multi-year journey – it takes time and effort!

Step 3: empower your employees

Employees need to not only understand your business purpose but actively contribute to delivering it. After all, if the values and culture you’re trying to instil don’t resonate with them, how are employees meant to live and breathe it?

As Stephen Beechey, from Wates Group, explains:

Articulation of purpose needs to be one that works at every level of the organisation, from the executive team to frontline employees.

Stephen Beechey, Wates Group

How to empower employees through purpose:

  • Incorporate purpose into recruitment and onboarding processes to set expectations from day one.
  • Empower employees to lead internal and external purpose-driven initiatives, with the right skills, tools and opportunities.
  • Reward team members who embody the organisation’s purpose and values. This could be linked to bonus as well as wider recognition programmes.

Step 4: communicate purpose with clarity

Clear and consistent communication builds trust and accountability around purpose, both internally and externally. Claire Hawkins reinforces this:

Your corporate personality comes to life through written form, pictures, reports, and the subjects you feel passionate about.

Claire Hawkins, Director of Corporate Affairs, Phoenix Group

To embed purpose into communications:

  • Share authentic stories internally that highlight how your business lives its purpose. 
  • Ensure leadership consistently uses purpose as a reference point in both internal and external conversations.
  • Consider how your purpose shows up in the stories you tell externally – it’s always more powerful when it’s integrated, rather than stand-alone content.

Step 5: evaluate impact

Progress builds momentum, reinforcing a sustainable performance culture. Tracking and sharing the impact of purpose-led initiatives ensures continuous improvement and credibility.

Kimberly-Clark’s Marketing Director, Alma Alejandro, gave us a great example of how she defined and measured one aspect of their social impact – by toilet rolls donated.

They used this as a way of measuring the number of lives they had positively impacted in line with their social impact goals. Alma said:

Defining clear success metrics ensures we stay accountable to both our people and our purpose.

Alma Alejandro, Marketing Director, Kimberly-Clark

How to approach this:

  • Think about what success looks like and how to measure it. It’s a good idea to start with the different roles your business can play in creating change and identify the KPIs from there 
  • Don’t shy away from linking to commercial goals – a well-executed purpose can and should drive performance 
  • Share regular updates on progress, challenges, and future plans to keep the momentum going.

In order to achieve a sustainable performance culture this year you need to:

  1. Define a powerful purpose
  2. Embed it into your culture and business strategy
  3. Empower your employees
  4. Communicate clearly, and
  5. Evaluate your impact

If you can do all this you’ll have a resilient, future-ready business, focused on impact and growth. 

What’s more, you’ll be able to attract – and keep – the best talent; foster a culture of innovation; and achieve long-term profitability. All this means you’ve arrived at sustainable performance. 

As we move further into 2025, embedding your purpose into your business culture is no longer a nice-to-have.  It’s a strategic imperative for organisations looking to thrive in a rapidly evolving world. 

At Anthesis, we’re here to help businesses unleash the power of purpose to drive business performance and positive impact.

From leadership transformation to integrated marketing strategies, our brand and communications solutions are geared towards delivering the salience, emotion, and meaning that brands need to grow.

]]>
EU CBAM Proposal Update Guide https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/eu-cbam-proposal-update-guide/ Wed, 26 Feb 2025 15:24:04 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=63267
Guidance

EU CBAM Proposal Update

12th March 2025

On the 26th February, the EU proposed a set of targeted amendments to the Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM), informed by insights gained during its Transitional Phase. These changes aim to simplify compliance, reduce unnecessary burdens, and align CBAM more effectively with the EU Emissions Trading System (ETS) while ensuring its environmental objectives remain intact. 

Within this guide, Anthesis experts have provided a comprehensive breakdown of the key proposed changes which are likely to affect CBAM, including:

  • A new mass-based threshold
  • The exclusion of emissions from finishing processes for steel and aluminium
  • Default carbon pricing values
  • Stronger penalties for non-compliance
  • The exclusion of ETS-covered precursors from CBAM accounting

Access the guide and gain a deeper understanding of the broader impact they might have on your business.

Loading…
]]>
GHG Protocol Announces Delay in Land Sector and Removals Guidance Release https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/ghg-protocol-announces-delay-in-land-sector-and-removals-guidance-release/ Wed, 26 Feb 2025 09:50:48 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=62984

GHG Protocol Announces Delay in Land Sector and Removals Guidance Release

aerial view of agricultural land

On February 20th 2025, the Greenhouse Gas (GHG) Protocol made an announcement regarding the delay of the much-anticipated Land Sector and Removals Guidance. Originally slated for release in quarter one of 2025, the new guidance will now be postponed until quarter four of 2025. 

Progress on forest carbon accounting

The delay is primarily due to challenges in achieving consensus around the issue of  quantifying  agricultural leakage. As a result, the Independent Standards Board will now take on the responsibility of making the final decision. This move aims to resolve the outstanding disagreements and move the process forward. Additionally, progress is being made on forest carbon accounting. The GHG Protocol has set up a dedicated Technical Working Group to specifically focus on this area. This finalisation of the forest carbon accounting portion is expected to align with the quarter four 2025 release. 

Impact on FLAG targets and No Deforestation commitment

This development may push back the timeline for companies setting Forest, Land, and Agriculture (FLAG) targets as they seek finalised guidance before moving forward. Many companies have already validated their FLAG targets based on the draft guidance and are pushing forward despite the uncertainty, as per SBTi’s recommendation. As it stands, targets are still expected to be required six months after the finalisation of the GHG Protocol Land Sector and Removals Guidance. 

One area of note is the requirement to set a No Deforestation Commitment with a target date of December 31, 2025. It remains uncertain how the delay will affect organisations seeking validation in 2026. The lack of clear guidance from SBTi is contributing to the hesitation that many companies have in pursuing validation if they cannot demonstrate 100% deforestation free sourcing by the end of this year.  In the absence of explicit guidance from SBTi, Anthesis recommends aligning with the latest guidance from the Accountability Framework Initiative (AFi) and being prepared to demonstrate continuous improvement. 

For businesses navigating these uncertain waters, experts at Anthesis are available to help clarify any concerns or questions related to the delayed guidance and its potential implications. As the situation continues to evolve, staying informed is crucial to understanding how the changes may impact your sustainability strategies and compliance efforts. 

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Maintaining Momentum After ISO 14001 Certification https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/maintaining-momentum-after-iso-14001-certification/ Sun, 23 Feb 2025 21:11:00 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=65997

Maintaining Momentum After ISO 14001 Certification

Guidance on post-cetification optimisation of your environmental management system

solar array on factory units

Implementing an Environmental Management System (EMS) is an important step in a company’s sustainable transformation journey. It guides the process for understanding environmental impacts and provides a framework for continually improving environmental performance through legal compliance, objective setting and tracking, and stakeholder engagement, among other topics.

Anthesis supports clients in implementing their new EMS, but what happens once this process is complete? In this article, we highlight how to get the most out of your new environmental management system post-certification.

How to maintain momentum

1. Communicate your successes

People love being part of something successful, so work with your comms team to help you share both the big and small wins. Talking about success encourages people to attend events, participate in training, and share ideas and feedback. A lot of environmental topics – like pollution, climate change, and waste generation – can feel daunting, so it’s helpful to highlight positive achievements when talking about environmental opportunities.

2. Keep management review meetings succinct

While it’s an ISO 14001 requirement to meet all the management review elements, there are ways of minimising the need for top management’s time. Consider including required elements of your ongoing ISO 14001 commitments as part of other meetings – you don’t have to cover everything in one go. Additionally, be careful to read the exact wording of the standard – you don’t need to read out your entire policy each time, just summarise any changes. You can also highlight trends from your internal audits rather than discussing every finding.

3. Keep your core team meetings going at a regular time

It’s tempting to delay or cancel meetings when you’ve had a few people decline, but keeping these events at a regular timeslot reminds people that the EMS will continue to need support over time. It’s especially important to show team members outside of core EMS roles that their thoughts and ideas are valuable and wanted, and keeping a regular slot for this demonstrates its priority.

4. Cross-organisational support

Maintaining a successful EMS requires involvement from all corners of the organisation. Extending a collaborative hand out to others can help encourage their support in EMS processes, like an internal audit. For example, consider getting trained in a standard relevant to another department so you can audit each other’s management system. Additionally, try combining training requirements into a schedule that suits the teams they’re aimed at. If a team will need to attend chemical spill training in person, why not show them F-Gas equipment labelling requirements at the same time and see if their own operational training could be completed while they’re already out of production? Environmental management shouldn’t rest solely on the shoulders of one or two individuals.

5. Don’t put off collating environmental monitoring information

Have you just had 10 electricity bills, 6 gas bills and a waste report land on your desk? If you’ve got a good system in place, it shouldn’t take too long to select the important numbers from these and refresh your tracker. The sooner you spot variations in key environmental performance indicators, the sooner you can investigate the root cause, and the more likely it is you’ll find the correct one. This will enable you to keep an eye on how you’re progressing against targets as you go along, rather than having a big surprise at the end of the year.

How Anthesis Can Help

Anthesis offers a wide range of support for organisations looking to build on their sustainability credentials. We provide different levels of EMS assistance, including:

  • Long-Term EMS Support: We offer ongoing support in the day-to-day management of an EMS, including regular check-ins to help guide the client, as well as in-depth practical management of the system.
  • Full EMS Implementation: Following our 7-step process, we lead organisations through the full implementation of an EMS, from initial project inception to final external certification.
  • Light-Touch EMS Implementation Guidance: We help clients set goals and provide training and guidance on how to fulfil each EMS requirement.
  • ISO 14001 Readiness Gap Analysis: We conduct an objective gap analysis and provide clear guidance on next steps for improvement.
  • Internal Audit: We act as an internal auditor for clients, reviewing an EMS and producing a compliant internal audit report.

Contact Us

Speak with our experts and discover how we can support you in creating impactful, purpose-driven communications for your brand.

Loading…
]]>
CBAM: Canada’s Steel and Aluminum Advantage https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/cbam-canadas-steel-and-aluminum-advantage/ Tue, 18 Feb 2025 15:37:53 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=62823

CBAM: Canada’s Steel and Aluminum Advantage

How Canada’s low-carbon producers can unlock growth in the EU market

18 February 2025

steel girders under a bridge

Starting in 2026, the European Union’s (EU) Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM) will impose a carbon price on imported energy-intensive goods, including steel and aluminum. The impact on carbon-intensive producers will be significant. For Canada’s low-carbon steel and aluminum sectors, however, CBAM presents a critical growth opportunity and a chance to diversify sales throughout the EU, helping producers weather the rapidly evolving tariff landscape in the United States. With proactive action, Canadian producers may gain a decisive edge over global competitors.

Download our CBAM Guide for Canadian Steel & Aluminum Producers

CBAM Overview

CBAM is the counterpart to the EU’s own domestic carbon pricing system, the Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS). Its goal is simple: ensure that imported goods face the same net carbon costs as the ETS applies to goods produced within the EU.  

By neutralizing the competitive disadvantage EU producers face under the ETS, CBAM levels the playing field between domestic and foreign producers—turning decarbonization into a competitive advantage for any company seeking to sell into EU markets.

Graph showing carbon costs under different carbon pricing schemes.

Notably, EU importers and customers will be looking for non-EU suppliers who are:        

  • Trusted, reliable data partners – Suppliers that provide timely, accurate, and verifiable CBAM data will be highly valued by EU importers.
  • Low-carbon leaders – Suppliers whose CBAM data demonstrate lower embedded emissions and reduced CBAM exposure will be in high demand, as EU importers seek to minimize financial and regulatory risks.

Canada’s CBAM Advantage

With proposed U.S. tariffs targeting Canadian steel and aluminum exports, CBAM offers a timely and strategic opportunity for Canadian producers to diversify into EU markets, where carbon efficiency matters more than trade protectionism. Canadian producers can leverage their low-carbon status to position themselves as preferred suppliers for EU buyers seeking to reduce carbon-related costs.

Aluminum

Industry Overview

Canada is the world’s fourth-largest aluminum producer, with 10 primary aluminum smelters located in Quebec and British Columbia. In 2023, 90% of the country’s aluminum exports went to the US; just 3% went to the EU (Government of Canada, 2025).

Chart showing the value of Canadian aluminum exports by country.
CBAM Advantage

Owing to extensive use of hydroelectricity, Canadian aluminum has by far the lowest carbon footprint of any major producer. As a result, CBAM goods made from Canadian aluminium will face a fraction of the CBAM costs applied to other major producers upon entering the EU.

Graph showing the carbon cost of EU aluminum imports from different countries.
Source: Carbon intensity figures adapted from Global Efficiency Intelligence, 2021.

Steel

Industry Overview

Canada ranks 16th globally in steel production, with 10 production plants: seven Electric Arc Furnace (EAF) plants and three Blast Oxygen Furnace (BOF) plants.

Canadian steel exports are more diversified than aluminum and enjoy a strong EU foothold on which to build.  Nonetheless, the sector remains heavily dependent on the U.S. market, accounting for 56% of exports in 2023 (Government of Canada, 2025).

Chart showing the value of Canadian steel exports by country.
CBAM Advantage

Canadian steel has the lowest carbon footprint among major producers. Like aluminium, the country’s EAF plants benefit from clean energy grids with carbon intensities below 30 gCO2e/kWh, while its three BOF plants are among the world’s least carbon intensive. Though the cost differential under CBAM is less dramatic than for aluminum, goods made from Canadian steel still hold a clear cost advantage under CBAM.

Graph showing the carbon cost of EU steel imports from different countries.
Source: Canadian Steel Producers Association (2021)

How Anthesis Can Help

Faced with an uncertain U.S. tariff landscape, CBAM presents a strategic opportunity for Canadian aluminum and steel producers to expand and diversify their presence in EU markets. With CBAM’s carbon pricing set to take effect in 2026, EU importers are already seeking low-carbon suppliers to decarbonize their supply chains and minimize CBAM costs.

To learn more about how CBAM carbon pricing works, what products are covered, and the 5 steps Canadian producers should start taking to demonstrate their CBAM advantage to EU customers and importers, download our quick guide:

Loading…

Anthesis provides end-to-end support in preparing and implementing your CBAM strategy. Contact our CBAM expert. today to get started.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
How Businesses in the Gulf Can Practice Responsible Recruitment https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/how-businesses-in-the-gulf-can-practice-responsible-recruitment/ Mon, 17 Feb 2025 11:37:41 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=62817

How Businesses in the Gulf Can Practice Responsible Recruitment

17 February 2025

gulf state

This article was originally published on wallbrook.com

The Gulf region is a major destination for migrant workers. With foreign nationals making up a significant portion of the workforce, responsible recruitment is a priority issue for businesses operating in the region. Companies must navigate a landscape of legal, regulatory and operational challenges to ensure fair recruitment practices. This article explores the region’s positive developments, challenges workers face in the recruitment phase and how businesses can effectively manage recruitment practices to protect workers and their operations.

Migrant workers in the Gulf

The six GCC member states – the United Arab Emirates, Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar and Saudi Arabia – are among the world’s largest immigration destinations. According to the Gulf Research Centre (GRC), a regional think tank, foreign nationals make up more than half of the Gulf’s population. The Gulf states rely heavily on migrant labour to support economic growth – for example, in the early 2020s, the Gulf Labour Markets, Migration, and Population Programme, a non-profit supported by the GRC, estimated that Qatar relied on non-nationals for over 90 percent of all employment in the country.

According to some estimates, there are approximately 30 million migrant workers in the GCC, many of whom are low-income workers active in the hospitality and construction sectors, among others. These individuals come from a variety of jurisdictions, though some of the largest sender countries include India, Pakistan, Nepal, Sri Lanka, Bangladesh and the Philippines.

These migration streams present a unique set of challenges for migrant workers and businesses operating in the region, including in relation to fair recruitment practices.

The International Labour Organisation (ILO), the United Nations agency responsible for setting international labour standards, defines fair recruitment practices as those that respect, protect and fulfil internationally recognised human rights.

According to the ILO, both governments and businesses are responsible for advancing fair recruitment and mitigating abusive practices against workers throughout their employment journey. The ILO recognises that unfair recruitment practices – such as the payment of recruitment fees and related costs which may result in debt bondage, as well as the retention of identity documents – are indicators of forced labour. 

Progress in responsible recruitment across the Gulf

All GCC states have made efforts to address recruitment-related harms.

Since 2009, each of the six member countries have introduced labour law reforms aimed at providing additional protections for migrant workers while enhancing productivity in the private sector. Despite these state-led efforts representing important progress, their full potential has yet to be realised in terms of tangible outcomes for migrant workers.

A case in point is the Abu Dhabi Dialogue (ADD), a voluntary and non-binding inter-governmental consultative process between ten migrant-sending countries and the six GCC countries, as well as Malaysia. The ADD aims to improve the processes of safe, orderly and regular labour migration through multi-lateral dialogue, cooperation, implementation and reporting. Although some critics argue that the ADD is not yet used to its full potential, it is a step in the right direction. 

Challenges for businesses and recruitment agencies in the Gulf – and beyond

Increasing regulatory requirements and international standards, such as the Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence Directive (CSDDD) and standards set by the ILO, place responsibility on businesses to prevent abusive or unfair recruitment practices within their operations and supply chains.

Businesses often contract with recruitment agencies overseas. While these stakeholders can expand opportunities for business growth and offer employment opportunities for workers, the lack of protective legislation and regulations in sending states, coupled with limited oversight and lack of transparency into agencies’ conduct and policies may exacerbate recruitment-related harms. These include:

  1. Recruitment fees and related costs: When securing a job through a recruitment agency in a sending country, jobseekers often must pay recruitment fees and related costs, such as medical, insurance, travel and administrative costs, to these agencies, which can amount to thousands of dollars. To pay these fees, workers may take out loans with high interest rates, sell personal property such as land or borrow money from family or friends, and are subsequently left in debt. ILO guidelines and laws in most GCC countries prohibit the charging of recruitment fees or related costs to workers or jobseekers.
  2. Wage theft: In cases where recruitment agencies pay for recruitment fees and related costs, employers often deduct these costs from workers’ monthly salaries. This can place workers in difficult financial situations with little income.
  3. Lack of transparency in contracts: Recruitment agencies in sending countries may present an offer letter or contract to jobseekers that may differ from the contract they receive upon arrival. Contracts may be substituted with less favourable terms, such as lower salaries or different responsibilities. These deceptive recruitment practices can trap workers in abusive conditions and are considered an indicator of forced labour by the ILO.

Mitigating recruitment-related risks

Businesses can take preventative action to mitigate against such recruitment-related harms by recruiting responsibly.

This begins with conducting rigorous Human Rights due diligence when screening potential recruitment agencies to ensure their practices align with local laws and international guidelines.

The following case studies highlight how we have helped businesses across the GCC region to address recruitment-related and worker welfare challenges with support from Anthesis:

  1. Recruitment Fee Investigation in the UAE:
    In 2023, Reckitt, a multinational consumer goods company, sought to identify instances where migrant workers had paid recruitment fees at one of its suppliers’ sites in the UAE. A detailed assessment was conducted to identify affected employees and calculate average recruitment fees by nationality, supporting the development of a repayment plan. The assessments aligned with the ILO general principles and operational guidelines for fair recruitment, as well as international best practices. This work was later included in Reckitt’s 2024 Modern Slavery and Human Trafficking Statement (see page 18: Reckitt MSS 2024). Our work for Reckitt was conducted as Wallbrook, now part of Anthesis Group.
  2. Human Rights Impact Assessment for a UAE-based Industrial Company
    In 2024, we were instructed by a major UAE state-owned industrial company to conduct a Human Rights Impact Assessment (HRIA) to evaluate risks within its local operations. Following our site visits in Dubai and Abu Dhabi, we evaluated the key risks based on our bespoke methodology and prepared a detailed HRIA including actionable recommendations. Based on our findings, we drafted the client’s first Modern Slavery Statement.
  3. Human Rights Impact Assessment in Oman
    An international metals company instructed us to evaluate worker welfare risks associated with the construction contractors of one of its business partners in Oman. We visited the construction site and accommodation in Oman and interviewed management, employees and subcontracted labour. We made recommendations to align the business partner’s management of risks in line with the 2023 Omani Labour Law.
  4. Labour Risk Assessment in the Hospitality Sector
    A global hotel chain carried out a labour risk assessment across six hotels in the UAE, Saudi Arabia, and Kuwait. The assessment involved site visits, engagement with over 300 workers in multiple languages including English, Arabic, Hindi, Urdu, and Malayalam, and training sessions for more than 200 department heads and human resources staff members on responsible labour practices. We analysed risks against internal labour standards, international best practices, and local legal requirements, resulting in actionable recommendations to improve worker welfare at both the hotel and corporate levels.

Does your business need support with responsible recruitment or human rights due diligence?

Conducting independent assessments and due diligence on recruitment and worker welfare risks – across your business, supply chains, and recruitment partners – helps proactively identify vulnerabilities, ensure compliance, and build a more ethical and resilient workforce.

Reach out to the Anthesis Human Rights team to see how we can help.

]]>
Seeding Sustainability in Agriculture Value Chains https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/seeding-sustainability-in-agriculture-value-chains/ Mon, 10 Feb 2025 14:29:04 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=62635

Seeding Sustainability in Agriculture Value Chains

Managing Risk, Building Resilience, and Supporting Farmers through the Transition

10 February 2025

plant crop seedling
Scott Franklin

Scott Franklin

Principal Consultant

Camille Woods

Camille Woods

Principal Consultant

Carlotta Esposito

Carlotta Esposito

Consultant I

In the past year alone, both agriculture and food & beverage industries have faced significant challenges due to an unpredictable climate, farm labour shortages, and rising demands from stakeholders. Many farms are experiencing climate-related risks and impacts firsthand, from severe flooding in Vermont, to olive shortages in Greece and declining cocoa quality and yield globally. The unpredictability of climate change is negatively impacting both farmers and the companies that depend on food and fiber from the field.

Balancing environmental goals with social equity is uniquely challenging for many agriculture stakeholders like aggregators, processors, distributors, and consumer-packaged goods companies. Facing external pressures from consumers, investors, and complex global regulations, these companies are tasked with achieving landscape-level restoration while also improving viable livelihoods for farm workers in complex and fragmented value chains. To succeed, a business must identify the risks, pain points, and opportunities within their unique business model to implement regenerative agriculture solutions that deliver measurable outcomes without overburdening farm workers or creating operational inefficiencies.

At Anthesis, we guide clients through their agricultural value chain challenges by leveraging strategic planning, multi-stakeholder collaboration, data, and innovative technology to align regenerative agriculture targets and programs with our clients’ environmental and social goals.

A Vision for a Regenerative Future

To ensure long-term business resilience and sustained value creation, companies must address environmental and social challenges in their agricultural value chains.

By investing in regenerative agriculture, companies can:

Build Resilient Supply Chains

Companies investing in regenerative agriculture can secure stable, sustainable commodity sourcing.

Regenerative agriculture restores soil health, reduces freshwater usage, increases biodiversity, and helps mitigate the impacts of climate change. Practices like cover crops, riparian buffers, and crop rotation protect soil health, provide resilience to extreme weather events such as drought or floods, and offer companies more stable and resilient production, creating fewer shocks and disruptions in supply chains.

Enhance Social Outcomes

Strengthened farmer livelihoods, fair labour practices, and supported communities foster long-term value for farmers and companies that rely on them.

By scaling no-till and cover crops to 80% adoption, American corn and soybean farmers could reap an additional $250 billion in economic value over a decade with net income increase, land value gains from improved soil health and ecosystem productivity, and ecosystem service payments for carbon or biodiversity.

Generate Climate and Nature Benefits Beyond Carbon

Regenerative agriculture can improve soil health, conserve both freshwater and groundwater use, and restore biodiversity while boosting crop productivity.

Regenerative practices protect soil by utilising cover crops, minimal or no-tillage, and rotational grazing to keep soil nutrients and moisture in the ground. In standard monocropping or conventional systems, soil can become excessively dry and vulnerable to erosion.

Secure Market Leadership

Demonstrating commitments to regenerative agriculture that are supported by data-driven outcomes can strengthen brand reputation and competitive advantage.

Embracing sustainable practices has tangible benefits and improves brand reputation. Consumers want to buy products that they know are sustainable, and responsible business practices enhance brand reputation by aligning with consumers’ growing values around impact. Data shows that consumers are more loyal to brands which share their values and align with their lifestyle. On the other hand, it is not uncommon to see a company directly impacted reputationally by an incident which exposes negative environmental or social impact, particularly when this is compliance-related or there are legal actions taken.

Enabling the Transition to Regenerative Agriculture

When regenerative agriculture is isolated within one business function (e.g., sustainability) or viewed solely as a cost center, it is likely to fail. Transitioning to regenerative agriculture is a journey that evolves from basic compliance to exemplifying the highest standards of regenerative practices. This “good > better > best” pathway ensures that companies can adapt progressively and effectively.

At Anthesis, we work with our clients to place regenerative agriculture at the core of their business model, securing their current operations and futureproofing them to drive new growth and brand engagement.

Our framework for success includes:

  1. Mapping the Current State: Companies often struggle to identify what is working well and the obstacles they face in achieving their climate or regenerative agriculture targets. We facilitate collaborative multi-stakeholder engagement across C-Suite, finance, R&D, sustainability, and farmer relations teams to build cross-functional awareness, clarify existing ambiguity, and help clients recognise the unique strengths and opportunities that exist within their business.
  2. Risk and Regulatory Assessment: Many companies are exposed to climate and human rights risks in their agricultural value chains and often respond reactively to regulations, treating them like a patchwork quilt. Using a suite of industry-aligned risk tools tailored to unique client needs, we help companies assess climate, production, manufacturing, and human rights in their supply chains, enabling them to manage risks effectively and proactively while ensuring compliance with relevant regulations.
  3. Strategy and Program Development: Many organisations face challenges in prioritising effectively, diluting focus and limiting program success. We collaborate with our clients to create strategic roadmaps with clear, actionable, and measurable goals that are supported by strong business cases for regenerative agriculture. We also engage directly with the farmers and ranchers in our clients’ value chains, co-developing or linking to regionally tailored solutions that incorporate farmer insights to ensure on-the-ground viability.
  4. Program Implementation and Scale: We help our clients leverage technology to engage their suppliers, collect farm-level data, and measure impact. We help clients scale outcome-driven approaches that deliver healthier soils, increased biodiversity, and strengthened community resilience. By developing new business models that view resiliency as a growth engine, supported by tangible case studies, we also help clients access innovative funding to drive on-farm change without passing on costs to consumers or negatively influencing cost of goods sold (COGS).

By guiding clients through this framework, we ensure that regenerative agriculture becomes an integral part of our clients’ core business models and is a source of sustainable growth and brand engagement for today and for the future.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Guidance on ESG & Climate Reporting for US Companies https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/esg-climate-reporting-for-u-s-companies/ Thu, 30 Jan 2025 14:15:06 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=62487
Guidance

ESG & Climate Reporting for U.S. Companies

30th January 2025

This whitepaper examines recent legal developments in mandatory ESG & climate reporting rules in the United States and key jurisdictions worldwide.

Our experts analyze the key trends in ESG reporting at both the domestic and international levels, summarize what your organisation should expect in the coming years, and outline actions companies should consider taking in the near term to respond to the rapidly evolving landscape of climate-related reporting. 

Authors

Melanie Kuhn

Melanie Kuhn

Director

Alison Dimond

Alison Dimond

Director


Going Beyond Compliance to Create Business Value

If companies choose to go beyond compliance, they may realize opportunities to generate business value through ESG. By making this choice, companies can transform compliance into an accelerator of business performance.

Learn more about how you can realize value from compliance activities by downloading our whitepaper.

Loading…
]]>
Private Equity Decarbonisation Playbooks https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/private-equity-decarbonisation-playbooks/ Tue, 28 Jan 2025 17:22:05 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=62378

Accelerating Decarbonisation Targets in Private Equity Portfolios

Anthesis Decarbonisation Playbooks

Rocks on Sea Shore with Wind Turbine

How can private equity firms effectively integrate ESG principles into their investment strategies and drive ambitious decarbonisation targets within their portfolio companies?

The reality is that many companies struggle with the complexities of setting and achieving Science-Based Targets (SBTs), facing limited resources and sector-specific challenges. A strategic approach is crucial.

A recent October 2024 report from the ESG Data Convergence Initiative (EDCI) highlighted this challenge: despite growing pressure, only 19% of the 6,200 private companies held by over 260 private equity (PE) firms have a short-term GHG emissions reduction target in place.

From our experience, five key factors are preventing sponsor-backed businesses from setting targets:

  1. SBT complexity: Understanding the requirements and nuances of different types of SBT is demanding.
  2. Practical implementation: Translating ambitious SBTs into tangible, actionable steps within resource-constrained organisations proves difficult.
  3. Cost uncertainty: Determining the financial implications of decarbonisation initiatives is challenging.
  4. Value quantification: Demonstrating the direct link between decarbonisation efforts and enhanced financial performance is not always straightforward.
  5. Differing priorities: Decarbonisation not always a high priority for stakeholders with differing views on climate action.

These challenges highlight the critical need for practical tools and strategies to accelerate decarbonisation within PE portfolios.

We have been working with PE firms and their portfolios to overcome the above challenges with a comprehensive, data-driven approach to decarbonisation, which led to the development of Anthesis’ Private Equity Decarbonisation Playbooks.

Built from decades of decarbonisation and private equity sector experience at Anthesis, the Playbooks introduce PE firms and their portfolio companies to the practical frameworks and tools needed to achieve ambitious decarbonisation goals. The resource is designed to maximise value, keep organisations ahead in a rapidly evolving landscape, and activate portfolio companies on their net zero and decarbonisation journey.

Once implemented, Playbooks aren’t just a set of instructions; they are a catalyst for internal knowledge sharing and collaboration, enabling your teams to work together to effectively navigate the complexities of decarbonising. Our Playbooks are already improving the dialogue and strategic alignment for our clients, empowering investment teams to work effectively with the ESG team and portfolio companies.

Discover the Private Equity Decarbonisation Playbooks

Find out more about our Private Equity playbook collection. Simply fill out the form to discover how these expert-crafted strategies can drive results for your organisation.

Loading…
]]>
Responding to ESRS E3 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/responding-to-esrs-e3/ Tue, 28 Jan 2025 09:24:24 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=62061

Responding to ESRS E3

Minimising impact on water and marine resources

Jelly Fish in water
Shivani Kawdeti

Shivani Kawdeti

Consultant

ESG & Reporting

Derek Nguyen

Derek Nguyen

Senior Consultant

Climate & Nature

Anthesis Nature & Water Stewardship team share insights into ESRS E3, detailing what it encompasses, its connection to the broader sustainability reporting landscape, and how organisations can prepare.

What is ESRS E3?

ESRS E3 Water and Marine Resources at a Glance 

ESRS E3 is one of the European Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS) ten topical standards developed by the European Financial Reporting Advisory Group (EFRAG) to provide a structured framework for implementing the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD). This standard focuses on reporting requirements related to water and marine resources. 

Two cross-cutting ESRSs and ten topic-specific ESRSs will require disclosure on governance, strategy, and impact, risk and opportunity management.

Number Subject
ESRS 1 General Requirements
ESRS 2 General Disclosures
ESRS E1 Climate
ESRS E2 Pollution
ESRS E3 Water and Marine Resources
ESRS E4 Biodiversity and Ecosystems
ESRS E5 Resource Use and Circular Economy
ESRS S1 Own Workforce
ESRS S2 Workers in the Value Chain
ESRS S3 Affected Communities
ESRS S4 Consumers and End Users
ESRS G1 Business Conduct

Companies complying with CSRD must first undertake a Double Materiality Assessment, which supports stakeholders in understanding the organisation’s impacts on people and the environment, as well as the material financial impacts of sustainability matters on the organisation. If water and marine resources arise as a material issue for the company in the Double Materiality Assessment, they must respond to ESRS E3. 

Reporting Requirements of ESRS E3

Companies must report information on: 

  • Water-related impacts, risks and opportunity management—and aligned risk assessment, policies and actions 
  • Metrics and targets related to water consumption, wastewater discharges, pollution, and the broader effects of their activities on surrounding ecosystems

Companies with activities within maritime areas must similarly report their dependencies, impacts, and marine resources-related metrics and targets. Additionally, the standard also emphasises reporting on related strategies, measures, and financial impacts based on identified impacts and dependencies.  

Within the environmental pillar, ESRS E3  has the fewest data points, with 51 data points spanning five disclosure requirements. From our experience, it is also one of the least commonly found as material during the double materiality assessment with some sectors more affected than others.

How Does ESRS E3 Connect with Other Standards?

ESRS E3 aligns with broader sustainability goals and policies at the European and global levels.

Alignment with European and Global Goals

  • European Green Deal: ESRS E3 supports the European Green Deal’s goal of restoring biodiversity. By focusing on key issues like water quality, pollution, and resource efficiency, it directly supports the Green Deal’s goal to preserve a healthy ecosystem and biodiversity
  • Other EU policies: Additionally, ESRS E3 aligns with the EU Water Framework Directive and Marine Strategy Framework Directive
  • UN SDGs: The standard contributes to achieving SDG 6 (clean water and sanitation) and SDG 14 (life below water)
  • Global standards: The ESRS framework is consistent with global sustainability standards like the GRI, ISSB and TNFD

Integration with Other ESRS Standards

As with all of the topical standards, ESRS E3 links to the overarching ESRS 1 and ESRS 2 as well we being interconnected  with other topical standards including:

  • ESRS E1 (Climate Change): addressing the water-related impacts of climate risks
  • ESRS E2 (Pollution): Tackling pollutants in water systems
  • ESRS E4 (Biodiversity): Ties closely to E3 by considering water and marine ecosystems as critical habitats 
  • ESRS E5 (Resource Use and Circular Economy): managing water as a finite resource

This cohesive approach encourages companies to address sustainability holistically, recognising water’s integration across climate and nature.

Non-Compliance

Non-compliance may result in financial penalties or exclusion from investor portfolios, underscoring the importance of this standard in both regulatory and investor contexts. By fostering transparency, ESRS E3 also supports water solution providers and innovation in water management, which could drive market growth for sustainable practices in the long term.  

Anthesis can support clients to navigate through the changing landscape of regulatory requirements and develop suitable solutions as an integral part of their sustainability strategies.  

Who Does ESRS E3 Apply To?

All companies within the scope of the CSRD must report on ESRS E3 if their double materiality assessment identifies water resources or marine ecosystems as material to their business.

ESRS E3 will be especially relevant for businesses that:

  • Depend heavily on water resources
  • Operate in water-stressed regions
  • Have a notable impact on marine environments
  • Have high water consumption or substantial wastewater discharge

Example industries most likely to have to report under ESRS E3 include:

  • Manufacturing: Sectors like textiles, chemicals, food and beverage, and pulp and paper often require large amounts of water in their production processes. For example, textile manufacturing is highly water-intensive and often associated with water pollution due to dyeing and treatment processes
  • Agriculture and Food Processing: These industries rely heavily on water for crop irrigation, livestock maintenance, and food processing. Companies operating in water-scarce regions face greater risks, making ESRS E3’s water usage and conservation guidelines material to their operations
  • Mining and Extractive Industries: Mining operations impact water quality through the discharge of contaminants and disrupt marine ecosystems, especially in offshore extraction. The ESRS E3 standards on water management and pollutant control are therefore particularly relevant to these industries
  • Energy Sector: Power generation, especially in sectors such as hydropower, nuclear, and fossil fuels, is water-intensive, relying on water for cooling processes. Energy companies are also significant stakeholders in marine resources when they are involved in offshore drilling and renewable marine energy
  • Tourism and Coastal Developments: Businesses involved in tourism, real estate, and recreational activities near coastal areas are likely to have a material interest in water and marine resources due to their direct impact on local water sources and marine biodiversity
  • Tech Sector: Data centres and technology manufacturing facilities can have water-intensive operations and are often located in basins facing high water risk. With the rise in AI models and their heavy computing power, water consumption has increased significantly for the cooling of data centres. With growing public and regulatory pressure, ESRS E3 disclosures on metrics and targets will encourage companies who operate or depend on data centres to develop strategies and set clear targets to minimise their negative impact on local water and marine resources
Coral reef

How Will it Drive Action?

ESRS E3 is intended to drive a positive change in corporate behaviour by embedding management of water and marine resources into their core business strategies. By mandating detailed disclosures on policies, targets, risks and impacts, the standard compels companies to evaluate their dependencies on and impacts to these critical resources. This is likely to prompt organisations to adopt innovative solutions—both within their direct operations and across their supply chains—such as incentivising water footprint reduction, implementing water recycling, fostering water stewardship, pursuing water-positive strategies, and developing sustainable marine practices initiatives. For industries heavily reliant on water or significantly impacting marine ecosystems, this framework encourages proactive risk management and regulatory compliance, helping them stay ahead of escalating environmental expectations. 

Beyond regulatory compliance, adhering to ESRS E3 can provide companies with a competitive advantage. Companies can enhance their reputation, strengthen ESG credentials and meet evolving stakeholder demands and investor expectations. Overall, holistically embracing ESRS E3 can act as a catalyst for positive change, driving industries toward a more sustainable future.  

How to Respond to ESRS E3

Anthesis can support businesses to prepare for ESRS E3 compliance throughout their journey.

  • Double materiality assessment: To begin, an assessment conducted on a business’s operations and supply value chain helps to identify impacts to and dependencies on water and marine resources. This includes mapping risks like water scarcity, flood risk, water pollution, and regulatory changes, alongside evaluating site-specific impacts on ecosystems and consultation with local affected communities.  
  • Water Inventories: Next, a company must collect and report the relevant water data by tracking metrics such as water withdrawal and consumption, discharge quantity and quality, and recycling rates. Integrating these processes into existing systems ensures alignment with ESRS E3 KPIs.
  • Water Risk Assessment: Conducting a Water Risk Assessment can then help identify where water impacts occur in regions experiencing high water stress. 
  • Water Policies: Anthesis experts can work with you to develop or hone policies relating to water impacts to align with ESRS E3, incorporate supply chain engagement best practices, and meet customer and investor expectations.
  • Context-based or science-based targets: As a company seeks to create and demonstrate progress on water and marine resources, it is important to implement mitigation strategies and improve over time. Anthesis can support in setting achievable targets.
  • Water stewardship strategies: Developing roadmaps and strategies for water quantity, water quality, and access to clean water and sanitation. Based on basin-level and operational site-level risk assessments, companies can adopt targeted water efficiency measures or improved water treatment and continue to monitor and report on progress over time.

Anthesis Nature Positive Water Stewardship service helps businesses to align with ESRS E3 compliance and prepare responses. We help businesses develop holistic water management strategies that integrate accountability and address shared water challenges to drive continuous improvement towards Water Stewardship.  

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Navigating the Evolving ESG Landscape: 4 Key Trends Shaping Private Equity in 2025 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/navigating-the-evolving-esg-landscape-for-private-equity/ Mon, 27 Jan 2025 09:52:12 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=62346

Navigating the Evolving ESG Landscape

4 Key Trends Shaping Private Equity in 2025

27 January 2025

office building

The private equity (PE) landscape is rapidly transforming, driven by increasing investor and regulatory focus on Environmental, Social, and Governance (ESG) factors. As we look ahead to 2025, four key trends are set to redefine how PE firms approach ESG integration and value creation.

1. Heightened Regulatory Pressure: CSRD and Beyond

The momentum around ESG data management continues to build, driven by regulations like the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) and the Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence Directive (CSDDD).

Whilst these directives primarily impact EU-based businesses – from 2025, large, listed EU companies are obligated under CSRD, and large EU companies will be collecting data ahead of reporting in 2026 – the implications are also trickling through global supply chains. As a result, PE firms increasingly expect non-EU based portfolio companies to comply with these standards to demonstrate ESG best practice.

The CSDDD fundamentally shifts the emphasis from reporting to due diligence, introducing significant complexities and responsibilities for companies—and their investors. 

This continued momentum means GPs need to consider:

  • Expanded Due Diligence. ESG assessments must now encompass a comprehensive view of sustainability risks and impacts across the entire value chain, including human rights considerations.
  • Robust Data Management. PE firms require sophisticated systems to collect, verify, and analyse data from diverse sources for both mandatory and voluntary disclosures (such as eDCI and PRI). These systems should also enable portfolio benchmarking visualisation.
  • Integrated Sustainability Decisions. ESG factors must be fully integrated into investment decisions. The responsibility of understanding lies with both the ESG and the investment team.
  • Enhanced Portfolio Engagement. PE firms must actively support portfolio companies in meeting and going beyond evolving ESG requirements to realise value creation opportunities.

The growing availability of high-quality data will increase the opportunity for benchmarking across portfolios and sectors, enabling more targeted action to drive value creation. These regulations and double materiality assessments establish clear guidelines on the ESG information vendors must convey and buyers should look for when considering new investments – further details below.

2. Increased Focus on ESG as a Driver of Value Creation

ESG in PE continues to evolve from a purely compliance-driven exercise to a critical lever for financial performance. As data management processes become optimised, we expect to see an increase in value creation activity like ESG-linked product and service innovation.

Vendor due diligence (VDD) is emerging as a key tool to highlight the financial materiality of ESG initiatives, particularly in areas like decarbonisation. This involves demonstrating the direct link between sustainable practices, such as cost savings from energy efficiency improvements, to enhanced financial returns, increased valuations, and enhanced access to capital from ESG-focused investors. VDD reports enable sellers to realise a premium for strong ESG performance at exit, reassuring buyers with a low-risk, future-proof investment.

ESG VDD proactively addresses questions a buyer may have about a target’s ESG performance, risk exposure and overall alignment to their investment strategy. Evolving regulations, such as the UK’s Sustainable Disclosure Requirements and the EU’s Sustainable Finance Disclosure Requirements, Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive and Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence Directive, have helped increase awareness of the risks associated with regulatory non-compliance.  

Alongside the data imperative, creating a narrative and storytelling are just as important. We expect to see an increased focus on external value creation narratives and exit stories demonstrating the commercial value of sustainability initiatives in ESG and impact reports.

3. Decarbonisation: Turning Targets to Action

While many PE firms have already set ambitious decarbonisation targets through frameworks like the Science Based Targets initiative (SBTi), translating these targets into tangible, actionable strategies remains a significant challenge that many GPs are now turning their attention to. Growing scrutiny around GHG inventories and the costs associated with meeting SBTs is increasing the need for robust decarbonisation planning for the acquisition phase.

The responsibility goes beyond the ESG team, and it is important for deal teams to be upskilled in this area. For investment managers, the key lies in understanding the financial implications of decarbonisation at every stage of the investment cycle, soon to be a requirement under CSDDD once the Directive is transposed to member states by July 2026.

Key elements of a successful approach to decarbonisation include:

  • Conducting targeted ESG due diligence to identify material risks and opportunities relating to decarbonisation.
  • Supporting the integration of decarbonisation initiatives throughout the ownership phase including portfolio company target setting.
  • Showcasing the strengthened ESG profile of portfolio companies to prospective buyers relating to decarbonisation progress and potential, maximising valuations at exit.

4. The Nature Imperative

Nature and biodiversity loss, driven by human activity and climate change, is emerging as a critical business risk, with approximately half of the world’s GDP ($58 trillion) moderately or highly dependent on nature. An increasing awareness of companies’ dependencies and impacts on nature, and transparency/reporting requirements, such as the Taskforce on Nature-related Financial Disclosures (TNFD) and the CSRD, are pushing investors and other stakeholders to consider nature.

What to expect from PE firms in 2025:

  • Nature due diligence. Integrating nature into decision-making by including nature and biodiversity screening in due diligence processes.
  • Double Materiality Assessments: Identifying nature-related dependencies, impacts, risks and opportunities through double materiality assessments, driven by the next CSRD reporting thresholds.
  • Mitigation Strategies: Developing nature strategies, KPIs and initiatives, including financial mechanisms contributing to nature positive.

As of October 2024, over 500 organisations, managing $17.7 trillion in assets are committed to TNFD-aligned risk management and corporate reporting. Leading PE firms are committing to aligning reporting to TNFD from 2025 and integrating nature into all stages of the investment cycle (including due diligence).

2025 will be a pivotal year for ESG in PE. Firms must adopt a proactive, data-driven approach to decarbonisation and ESG management, integrating sustainability into every aspect of the investment lifecycle, from due diligence to exit.

Anthesis provides the necessary expertise, tools, and data-rich methodology to help PE firms not only meet ambitious ESG goals but also significantly enhance financial performance and unlock substantial long-term value. We are uniquely positioned to be your strategic partner and thought leader in this transformative journey, supported by a strong suite of digital products.

Explore our services:

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

Related Articles

]]>
Achieving EUDR Compliance: A Practical Guide https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/achieving-eudr-compliance/ Wed, 22 Jan 2025 21:04:33 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=62310
Guidance

Achieving EUDR Compliance: A Practical Guide

22nd January 2025

The European Union Deforestation Regulation (EUDR) establishes stringent requirements for companies importing commodities linked to deforestation. Businesses must implement robust compliance strategies to navigate the complex regulatory landscape, reduce legal risks, and maintain market access. This whitepaper outlines our six-step process to achieve EUDR compliance.

Tim Mollenhauer

Tim Mollenhauer

Senior Consultant

Northern Europe


Our Six Key Steps to Compliance:

  1. Conduct a Materiality Assessment
  2. Establish Supply Chain Traceability
  3. Implement Due Diligence Processes
  4. Engage Stakeholder & Build Capacity
  5. Develop a Risk Management System
  6. Ensure Transparent Reporting & Disclosure

Learn more about implementing each of these steps and how to overcome common challenges with EUDR compliance by downloading our whitepaper.

Loading…
]]>
New Foundational Guidance for Private Markets on the Voluntary Carbon Market https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/guidance-for-private-markets-on-the-voluntary-carbon-market/ Mon, 20 Jan 2025 12:47:51 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=62225
Guidance

Navigating the Voluntary Carbon Market: Foundational Guidance for Private Markets


The Initiative Climate International (iCI), a PRI-supported initiative, and Anthesis have launched a comprehensive guidance document on the Voluntary Carbon Market (VCM), helping private market participants navigate this evolving landscape and achieve net-zero goals.  

The guidance provides an in-depth examination of the VCM, offering practical insights into responsible carbon credit procurement and opportunities to invest in innovative technological and nature-based solutions. As the VCM gains prominence, private markets are increasingly recognising its potential to complement robust emissions reduction strategies. 

Key Insights from the Guidance 

  • Private Markets Activity: The inaugral 2024 iCI VCM survey revealed nearly half of private market professionals are purchasing carbon credits, with 58% planning to increase their involvement in the coming year.
  • Understanding the VCM: Additionally, the survey highlighted 75% of iCI members have an average to below-average understanding of the VCM. The guidance aims to simplify the complexities of the VCM, offering clear routes to engagement without introducing a new standard.
  • Carbon Credits and Climate Mitigation: High-quality carbon credits, when aligned with science-based emissions targets, can support the global transition to net-zero while delivering significant environmental and social co-benefits. 
  • Market Growth: According to research by MSCI, The VCM, valued at approximately US $1.4 billion in 2024, is projected to grow to between US $7 billion and US $35 billion by 2030, and US $45 to US $250 billion by 2050. 
  • Investment Opportunities: The document outlines three key pathways for private market investors to engage with the VCM: 
    • Investing in VCM companies 
    • Direct investment in carbon projects
    • Investing in carbon funds 
  • Nature-Based Investments: Beyond carbon credits, the guidance emphasises the growing interest in nature-focused investments, including nature-based solutions and nature tech. These approaches deliver financial returns whilst addressing pressing environmental and climate challenges.  

A Responsible Approach to Carbon Credit Procurement 

The guidance includes a seven-step procurement process, offering private markets a framework to ensure responsible and effective engagement with the VCM. By aligning carbon credit purchases with a science-based reduction strategy, private market participants can strengthen their climate mitigation efforts while addressing the supply-demand gap for high-quality carbon credits. 

Nils van Veen

Nils van Veen

Sustainability Advisor

Read more about our Carbon solutions here.


Loading…

]]>
Sustainability Trends to Watch in 2025 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/sustainability-trends-to-watch-in-2025/ Tue, 14 Jan 2025 08:37:04 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=61935

Sustainability Trends to Watch in 2025

grid of arrows on gradient color

The inside look at what’s shaping the sustainability landscape.

As we enter another year, sustainability continues to evolve at a rapid pace. Regulatory changes, market expectations, and global treaties will make 2025 a pivotal year. Anthesis experts share some of the sustainability trends to watch in 2025.

Subscribe to our newsletter

Stay up to date with our latest thought leadership on trends for 2025

Listen to the podcast episode

activating sustainability podcast series
Activating Sustainability
Activating Sustainability | Ep 50: 2025 Sustainability Trends
Loading
/

Preparing for regulatory shifts in 2025

regulatory shifts

The ESG reporting landscape is set to undergo significant transformation in 2025, driven by new reporting requirements, global harmonisation of standards, and heightened accountability.

Harmonisation efforts, such as the proposed EU Omnibus simplification package aim to streamline compliance across jurisdictions, while a blend of voluntary and mandatory reporting emerges. Accountability will increase with enhanced assurance demands and the integration of digital solutions for reliable ESG data management. Companies proactive in aligning with these changes can enhance their compliance, bolster stakeholder trust, and align with broader sustainability goals.

The first challenge for many businesses is knowing which metrics to report on; that understanding comes before scrutinising data and recognising their impact on the environment. …Ultimately, the businesses that see regulation requirements as an opportunity for innovation and act as early as possible to embed a sustainable mindset within the company, will be best positioned to future-proof businesses for long-term success,” Paul Crewe, Chief Sustainability Officer

What to expect in 2025

  • New Reporting Standards: The impact of standards, such as the EU’s CSRD and ISSB standards, will be felt globally with new reporting deadlines and local interpretations.
  • Focus on Accountability: Limited assurance and complex disclosure requirements will require companies to ensure data accuracy and implement robust management systems and internal controls.
  • Harmonisation Efforts: Initiatives like the EU’s proposed Omnibus simplification package aim to align regulations such as the CSRD, CSDDD, and EU Taxonomy to simplify compliance and enhance the comparability of ESG disclosures across organisations and jurisdictions.
  • Voluntary to Mandatory Frameworks: An increasing blend of voluntary and mandatory frameworks at the country level, with transitional periods to prepare organisations for compliance with required standards.

Find out more about what to expect from the evolving landscape of ESG regulation in 2025


Tackling greenwashing: building trust in Green Claims

greenwashing

With consumers and regulators demanding greater transparency, green claims are under the microscope like never before. Misleading sustainability claims, or “greenwashing,” can severely damage brand credibility and lead to regulatory penalties.

Positioning credible green claims backed by science and third-party verification is crucial. Our tailored solutions help businesses create transparent, substantiated claims, ensuring they meet regulatory requirements and build consumer trust.

What to expect in 2025

  • Heightened enforcement of the EU Green Claims Directive and similar policies worldwide.
  • Consumer backlash against brands caught overstating sustainability achievements.
  • Rising demand for certifications and standards to verify claims.
  • Brands must focus on authenticity and transparency, leveraging third-party validation to navigate these challenges effectively.


Regulating the Voluntary Carbon Market

voluntary carbon market

The Voluntary Carbon Market (VCM) is evolving rapidly, driven by the urgency of climate action and recent breakthroughs at COP29 in Baku.

What to expect in 2025

  • High-quality carbon credits are becoming a priority, with greater emphasis on projects delivering verified environmental and social co-benefits.
  • Nature-based solutions—such as reforestation and wetland restoration—are gaining traction as investors seek to address biodiversity and carbon sequestration simultaneously.
  • Carbon credit procurement is increasingly being integrated into corporate net-zero strategies to address residual emissions while aligning with science-based targets.
  • The supply-demand gap for high-quality credits is driving investment in scalable nature and technology-based solutions.
  • Stronger regulatory frameworks and standards, highlighted at COP29, aim to harmonise practices across voluntary and compliance markets, ensuring accountability and impact.


A year of interim targets and dealing with uncertainty

interim targets

It’s customary to set goals in January, but in 2025, this tradition feels less optimistic. This pivotal halfway point in the UN’s ‘Decade of Action’ has companies assessing their sustainability targets—and realising many are off track for 2030.

Systemic challenges, overambitious goals, and political uncertainty, including the potential impact of a Trump administration, are causing businesses to hesitate or rethink. Some are revising goals to reflect practical realities, while others risk stalling progress entirely.

In this article, we explore why targets are being missed, the rise of “greenhushing,” and tips on how to reset goals strategically and transparently.

What to expect in 2025

  • Insights into why some companies are falling short of their 2025 sustainability commitments.
  • How potential policy rollbacks under a Trump administration could influence ESG strategies globally.
  • An exploration of trends like ‘greenwashing’ and ‘greenhushing’, alongside the regulatory risks posed by the EU’s Green Claims Directive. 
  • Advice on revising sustainability targets to ensure they are realistic, measurable, and aligned with business capabilities.
  • Practical tips for communicating updates on sustainability goals to maintain credibility and momentum.


The intersection of climate, nature, and social impact

flowers

As the sustainability landscape continues to evolve, 2025 is set to be a pivotal year for integrating climate action, nature conservation, and social impact into cohesive strategies. This intersection is no longer seen as a series of isolated efforts but as a powerful, interconnected framework that delivers measurable environmental and social benefits. For forward-thinking companies, this integrated approach represents a strategic advantage, offering opportunities to drive meaningful change while positioning themselves as leaders in the sustainability space.

What to expect in 2025

  • Nature-positive business models: Companies are embedding regeneration and restoration of nature into their core strategies, ensuring measurable contributions to halting and reversing biodiversity loss map to the resilience of the enterprise and business growth alike.
  • Social equity in climate and nature solutions: Climate action initiatives increasingly prioritise social justice, focusing on improving the livelihoods of vulnerable communities and addressing inequality as part of their sustainability efforts.
  • Blended finance mechanisms: Partnerships between private, public, and philanthropic sectors are driving investment in projects that deliver both climate resilience and social impact, bridging funding gaps in underserved regions.
  • Technology-driven monitoring and reporting: Advancements in technology are enabling companies to measure and report the combined impacts of climate, nature, and social initiatives with greater precision and transparency.
  • Policy and regulatory integration: Governments and international organisations are introducing frameworks that incentivise businesses to align climate, nature, and social goals with regulatory compliance.

Final thoughts

The sustainability landscape in 2025 will be shaped by regulatory evolution, consumer demands for authenticity, and global commitments to tackling climate challenges. By preparing for these trends now, businesses can position themselves as leaders in the transition to a sustainable future.

How are you preparing for these sustainability trends in 2025? Get in touch to discuss your sustainability plans for the year.

Loading…
]]>
A Year of Interim Targets and Dealing with Uncertainty https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/interim-targets-and-dealing-with-uncertainty/ Tue, 14 Jan 2025 08:35:19 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=62134

A Year of Interim Targets and Dealing with Uncertainty 

14 January 2025

tracking data on a digital screen

New year, new targets?

It’s customary to set new goals in January, but this year the activity may not be as forward-looking and ambitious as usual. Indeed, setting new targets in 2025 could involve an element of backtracking on previous goals, which may lead to slower progress toward sustainable development.

So, what gives?

This year marks a pivotal halfway point for companies aiming to meet sustainability targets set for the UN’s ‘Decade of Action.’ While these goals were intended to drive meaningful progress by 2030, many organisations are realising their ambitions were too lofty—and with interim deadlines now imminent, some have discovered they are not on the correct trajectory to meet these goals.

A mix of overambitious targets, systemic challenges, tightening economics and political uncertainty has left many businesses reassessing their targets— with some delaying timelines and others scaling back commitments altogether.

As a consequence, many will need to set new targets for the year/s ahead. But what’s the best way to do this from both a strategic and communications perspective?

In this article, we’ll explore the trends, reasons and political landscape into why some businesses are missing their targets, along with the rise of “greenhushing” and greenwashing. 

We’ll also share advice on what to do next if your company has missed its targets… 

Why Are Corporates Missing Targets?

While ambition is essential to driving change, a range of systemic issues and poor planning have hindered progress. These trends illustrate some of the obstacles companies have faced…

Trend 1: Systemic Infrastructure Challenges 

Many sustainability goals rely on external systems that remain underdeveloped, such as recycling infrastructure.

Companies including Unilever, PepsiCo, and Colgate-Palmolive have already acknowledged they’ll miss their 2025 packaging sustainability targets. 

Unilever, which pledged to halve plastic consumption by 2025, revised its goal to a one-third reduction by 2026, citing inadequate recycling systems. Analysts have warned this could exacerbate virgin plastic production, increasing the company’s environmental footprint by an estimated 100,000 tonnes annually.

This position from Unilever is shared by other global FMCG brands and highlights broader systemic challenges in scaling sustainable packaging solutions, serving to illustrate how insufficient infrastructure and inefficient recycling systems are common barriers to progress –  particularly for global supply chains.

Trend 2: Tightening Economic Conditions

A challenging global economic landscape has forced many boards of directors and senior leadership teams to prioritise short-term financial stability over long-term sustainability goals. 

Rising interest rates, higher energy costs, and inflation have stretched budgets, and seen lower capital expenditure on sustainable technologies or infrastructure. 

Smaller businesses, in particular, have struggled to balance sustainability with survival, while larger companies have delayed initiatives in favour of cost-cutting measures.

Trend 3: The Shadow of US Policy

In addition, one recent major factor influencing corporate hesitancy is the looming uncertainty surrounding Donald Trump’s incoming administration and its environmental policy priorities. 

If his government deprioritises climate commitments—by following his stated “drill, baby, drill”  approach to fossil fuel expansion, withdrawing the US from the Paris Agreement again, or sidelining ESG-focused investment protocols—the ripple effects could be felt globally.

Businesses may be likely to adopt a “wait-and-see” approach, holding back on ambitious sustainability initiatives until there’s more clarity on policy direction. This could lead to widespread stalling or even the abandonment of existing targets, particularly for organisations heavily reliant on US markets or leadership to drive progress.

Trend 4: Greenwashing and Greenhushing

Transparency is critical for building trust in sustainability efforts, but fear of regulatory backlash and reputational damage has pushed some companies to adopt “greenhushing.” 

This strategy involves downplaying or withholding public communication about sustainability initiatives to avoid scrutiny or accusations of greenwashing.

While greenhushing may seem like a safer option, it has significant downsides. It obscures meaningful progress, erodes stakeholder trust, and hinders collective learning. When companies avoid sharing their achievements or setbacks, they also prevent others from drawing inspiration or improving their own practices out of competitive spirit. This silence can stifle industry-wide progress.

At the same time, the risk of being called out for greenwashing has grown. The EU’s Green Claims Directive, introduced last year, imposes fines of up to 4% of global annual revenue on businesses found to mislead consumers. Broad claims such as “sustainable” or “responsible” are now banned unless backed by comprehensive proof encompassing environmental, social, and economic dimensions.

The solution? Candid transparency. Sharing setbacks alongside actionable plans for improvement fosters goodwill and demonstrates resilience. By acknowledging challenges openly, businesses not only build credibility but also contribute to broader conversations about systemic solutions.

This shift towards accountability is essential for creating a fairer market for genuinely sustainable products. And while the instinct to greenhush may be strong, companies must weigh this against the greater good of collaboration, progress, and stakeholder trust.

Goal Setting for 2025 and Beyond

Ambitious goals may have faltered, but how a business handles missed targets can make all the difference.

Organising goals so they are focused on key impact areas, and on what can practically be achieved across a more defined set of issues rather than a long bucket list of targets are just some examples of how 2025’s goal-setting should be approached.

Greggs exemplifies this approach by committing to short-term goals within its broader 2025 framework. 

Key achievements include sourcing 97% of electricity from renewable sources, incorporating eco-shop features in a fifth of its stores, and increasing the number of school breakfast clubs it supports. 

By sticking to a five-year plan and publishing detailed annual updates to stakeholders, Greggs has managed to maintain momentum and accountability to showcase steady progress.

The Road Ahead

Naked ambition can be a great driver for success, but after the initial flurry of excitement and bold sustainability claims, corporations must now prioritise transparency and accountability.

As 2025 marks the halfway point to many sustainability goals, businesses need to embrace a more mature approach now that they have a deeper understanding about what’s involved with achieving targets. An approach that focuses on measurable progress and honest communication rather than unattainable perfection or misleading claims.

However, the broader geopolitical climate cannot be ignored. The spectre of Trump’s potential policy rollbacks highlights the fragility of progress and underscores the importance of collective action and resilience. Businesses must take the lead in driving sustainability forward, even in the face of governmental backtracking.

While the path to sustainability is set with challenges, approaching hurdles with openness, adaptability, and courage will be essential for long-term success.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
The Evolving Landscape of ESG Reporting Regulation: Expectations for 2025 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/the-evolving-landscape-of-esg-reporting-regulation-expectations-for-2025/ Tue, 14 Jan 2025 08:34:32 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=62127

The Evolving Landscape of ESG Reporting Regulation

Expectations for 2025

14 January 2025

ocean waves

As environmental, social, and governance (ESG) standards continue to evolve, businesses worldwide face a transformative period of regulatory changes. 2025 promises to be a pivotal year, with new reporting requirements, harmonisation of standards, and increased accountability reshaping the ESG landscape.

Here, Anthesis’ regulatory and reporting experts share insights into expectations and their implications for businesses globally for 2025 and beyond.

New Reporting Requirements Come into Effect

The impending implementation of new reporting requirements will have a profound impact on businesses worldwide. Some of the most influential changes expected in 2025 include:

Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD)

In 2025, a new cohort of companies will come under the scope of the EU’s Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD), with large, listed EU companies now required to report (FY 2024) and all large EU companies required to collate 2025 data ahead of reporting in 2026 (FY 2025). However, at the date of writing this article, Germany has proposed changes to reporting thresholds that could significantly reduce the number of companies required to comply. While this isn’t confirmed and is arguably unlikely to manifest, it may cause market uncertainty through the first part of the year. Other member states are still yet to implement the CSRD into national legislation and are operating under an enforcement notice from the European Commission. Early 2025 is likely to be a turbulent period as companies navigate uncertainty while awaiting the implementation of some of these changes across the EU.

 International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB)

In 2025, the influence of the ISSB sustainability disclosure standards (IFRS S1 and S2) will be felt globally, helping to drive consistent and transparent sustainability reporting across jurisdictions in line with global ESG expectations. Some recent announcements regarding the ISSB standards include:

  • Canada launched its first Canadian Sustainability Disclosure Standards (CSDS) in December 2024, aligning with IFRS S1 and S2 but with modifications on reporting deadlines. Companies can voluntarily adopt these standards.
  • In December 2024, China unveiled the Chinese Sustainability Disclosure Standards for Businesses-Basic Standard, based on the Exposure Draft issued earlier in 2024. The Basic Standards’ core contents are aligned to those of IFRS S1.
  • In Australia, the new Australian Sustainability Reporting Standards (ASRS) came into effect on the 1st of January 2025, mandating comprehensive reporting on climate-related financial information including climate risks, opportunities, and Greenhouse Gas (GHG) emissions.
  • The UK Government announced in December 2024 that it is on the pathway to implementing the UK Sustainability Reporting Standards (SRS). The draft UK SRS is expected to be endorsed in Q1 2025, followed by public consultation, with the final SRS potentially effective from FY27.
  • Singapore will align its sustainability reporting with the ISSB standards, requiring Scope 1 and 2 GHG disclosures for listed companies in 2025, Scope 3 by 2027, and emissions assurance starting in 2027 for listed companies and 2029 for large non-listed companies.
  • Hong Kong has embraced the ISSB framework, starting with mandatory GHG emissions disclosures in 2025 and full adoption for large entities by 2028.

Other jurisdictions, including Malaysia, Japan, Brazil, Costa Rica, Bolivia, South Korea, Kenya, and Nigeria, are also exploring the adoption of ISSB standards to enhance sustainability reporting and align with global best practices.

California Regulations

Companies operating in California may need to comply with the Voluntary Carbon Market Disclosures Act (AB 1305) by meeting the disclosure requirements by the 1st of January 2025, the first compliance date. Additionally, the California Air Resources Board will publish regulation details by July 2025 regarding the implementation of SB 253 on GHG disclosure. Meanwhile, the due date for issuing the first compliance report for climate-related financial risk disclosure under SB 261 remains unchanged as of today.

Harmonisation of ESG Reporting Standards

The push for global alignment of ESG frameworks will culminate in more standardised reporting protocols. This is crucial for companies that operate in multiple jurisdictions, as it will simplify compliance and reduce the administrative burden associated with navigating a patchwork of regulations.

The European Union is discussing an ‘Omnibus simplification package’, to align the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD), the Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence Directive (CSDDD), and the EU Taxonomy, representing a significant step toward harmonisation. With further updates expected in February 2025, the Omnibus package aims to streamline compliance requirements and reduce redundancy in data points, fostering consistency across sustainability initiatives.

In parallel, the theoretical interoperability between the CSRD and ISSB standards will further support a unified approach, enabling stakeholders to make direct comparisons across sectors and regions effectively.

Increased Combination of Voluntary and Mandatory Reporting at the Country Level

The landscape of sustainability reporting is increasingly characterised by a blend of voluntary and mandatory frameworks at the country level. Some jurisdictions, such as China, are transitioning previously voluntary reporting practices into mandatory requirements, reflecting growing recognition of the importance of transparent sustainability disclosures. This shift often includes a transitional period, typically ranging from two to three years, during which organisations are encouraged to engage in voluntary reporting as they prepare for the eventual compliance with mandatory standards. During this phase, governments and regulatory bodies aim to build capacity, foster familiarity, and address challenges before full enforcement.

Additionally, some aspects of sustainability reporting remain voluntary, while others, such as climate-related disclosures or human rights impacts, are prioritised as mandatory due to their urgency and global significance. This hybrid approach allows for flexibility and incremental progress while advancing accountability and standardisation in sustainability practices.

Increased Accountability and Need for Digital Solutions

As the requirement for limited assurance becomes more widespread, companies will face greater pressure to ensure the accuracy and reliability of their ESG data. The scale, scope and complexity of new disclosure requirements, along with the need for greater accountability, will necessitate implementation of robust data management systems, such as Anthesis’ ESG Data Management Platform, Mero, enhancing the credibility of reported information.

Investors and stakeholders will demand transparency not only in what is reported but also in how data is collected, analysed, and assured, meaning that organisations will not only need to implement enhanced data systems to handle the greater complexity, but also robust internal controls.

Many companies captured in new reporting requirements, such as ISSB and CSRD, won’t have gone through an assurance process before, engaged with an audit firm to scrutinise their data or have robust data-collection processes in place. For these regulations, Excel simply won’t work. That’s why Anthesis has integrated the requirements into our ESG data platform, Mero, enabling seamless data collection, real-time insights, and transparent, supported by expert advisors, designed to support assurance processes.

Chris Shaw, Technical Director ESG & Reporting.

Global ESG reporting regulations continue to advance with 2025 set to be a pivotal compliance year. Companies that proactively adapt to these changes will not only enhance their compliance and reporting practices but also strengthen their reputational capital and stakeholder trust. The shift towards more unified and rigorous ESG reporting standards will ultimately drive more sustainable business practices, aligning corporate behaviours with the broader goals of sustainability and social responsibility.

The first challenge for many businesses is knowing which metrics to report on; that understanding comes before scrutinising data and recognising their impact on the environment…Ultimately, the businesses that see regulation requirements as an opportunity for innovation and act as early as possible to embed a sustainable mindset within the company, will be best positioned to future-proof businesses for long-term success.

Paul Crewe, Chief Sustainability Officer at Anthesis

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
The S&P Corporate Sustainability Assessment https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/the-sp-corporate-sustainability-assessment/ Thu, 09 Jan 2025 20:10:58 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=62108

The S&P Corporate Sustainability Assessment

What it is, and how to assess and improve your score.

9 January 2025

a lighthouse on the end of a peninsular

The S&P Corporate Sustainability Assessment (CSA) is an ESG-focused questionnaire administered annually by S&P Global. The CSA is designed to evaluate the sustainability performance of companies worldwide, measuring their management of material ESG risks, opportunities, and impacts.

Results of the assessment are publicly available on S&P’s website, distributed to subscribers via S&P’s Capital IQ Pro platform, and are featured on Bloomberg’s ESG dashboard.  Most prominently, the resulting scores are used to determine the composition of several sustainability-focused equity indexes, including the Dow Jones Best-In-Class indices (formerly Dow Jones Sustainability Index family, “DJSI”). In fact, many in the industry still refer to the questionnaire itself as the DJSI, partly the result of the questionnaire having changed hands from RobecoSAM to S&P, while the DJSI has remained the most relevant use of results.

DJSI Eligibility

Publicly listed companies can confirm their invitation status and eligibility for various indexes on the S&P website. Eligibility is based on company size within a specific geographic market. Please see the graphic below which presents the invited universe for each DJSI regional index. The most recent DJSI constituent lists are available on the S&P website, and rebalancing occurs each December. Companies not covered by the research universe can also solicit the CSA as a Service and get a Public, Confidential or Provisional (based on hypothetical data) CSA Score.

The Invited universe
Source: S&P Global

CSA Participation

Beginning in February, companies can access the CSA questionnaire. Companies are asked to select a 2-month participation window, spanning from April through January.

If looking to be eligible for the DJI Best-In-Class Index or the Sustainability Yearbook, companies should be sure to select a participation window with a submission date no later than August 31st. It is generally easy to request an extension through the CSA portal directly.

All companies who are part of S&P’s research universe will receive an S&P ESG Score, available publicly at the S&P website, which is based only on publicly available information. Companies do not need to directly participate in the CSA questionnaire to be eligible for DJSI inclusion or Yearbook membership. However, it is highly recommended that companies participate actively in the questionnaire because:

  1. Actively participating companies can submit detailed references and commentary to S&P analysts to ensure that the most relevant information is considered. S&P performs a high-level review of public reporting to score companies that do not actively participate, but S&P often misses certain details, scores companies inconsistently, or makes mistakes in their review, as they are scoring a high volume of companies and are ultimately not beholden to the requests of corporate issuers. They may not be able to find certain company policies outside of a few core documents (ESG Report, 10-K, Code of Conduct, for example).
  2. Several CSA questions permit the submission of nonpublic data or content. Thus, only companies who directly participate in the CSA are able to submit nonpublic information, as S&P’s review of companies is only based on public information. This enables companies to submit potentially sensitive information and receive credit for it without having to share it publicly.

CSA Questionnaire Structure

The questionnaire will open on the selected participation date, at which time you can choose to auto-populate the questionnaire with any content submitted in prior years. You will also need to select a data privacy option. Most companies choose not to share their data points and only share public information.

The questionnaire is structured by Dimensions, Criteria, and Questions.

Questionnaire example

  1. Dimension: Governance & Economic
  2. Criteria: Business Ethics
  3. Question: Codes of Conduct

The bulk of the questionnaire is the same across all companies, but a company’s industry will also determine the inclusion or exclusion of several questions, based on relevance. For example, all respondents to the CSA questionnaire will be asked core questions on Labor Practices, but an Automobile company will be asked questions regarding Warranty Provisions and Fuel Efficiency, while a Pharmaceutical company will be asked questions around Access to Healthcare and ethical Marketing Practices.

The structure of each question can vary drastically depending on the type of information requested. You will likely need to source information from across your organization to address the questions, and it is important to ensure that the information referenced directly addresses the question being asked.

Anthesis experts can support your response process by organizing data collection and filling out the questionnaire with the most relevant information from your public information and any supplementally collected data or documentation.

Questions may be scored on any combination of the following factors:

  • Provision of evidence for requested information, with a preference for publicly available evidence
  • Coverage of measures implemented or data reported
  • Trend of key indicators over last 3-4 years
  • Performance of key indicators in comparison to expected threshold
  • Awareness of internal and external issues and measures taken
  • Third- party verification of data or processes

In a questionnaire of over 100 questions and thousands of datapoints, it can be challenging to determine which gaps are most impactful for improving your company’s score. Anthesis experts can review your questionnaire for opportunities to improve your response and program to meet S&P CSA criteria.

CSA vs. ESG Scores

S&P shares two different score results for the CSA: A CSA Score and an ESG Score. The CSA Score reflects a company’s raw score on the CSA, based directly on which CSA criteria the company addresses in its reporting. The ESG Score is predicated on the CSA Score but includes a small amount of score modeling to account for discrepancies in scores between companies who actively respond to the CSA and those who do not. This allows end users of S&P data to compare “apples to apples” when comparing a company who actively participates in the CSA versus one that does not.

A company that actively participates in the CSA and provides nonpublic information regarding gender pay data, for example, will have a higher CSA Score than a company only scored based on public information that does not report anything on gender pay. However, these companies may have the same ESG Score. To model the ESG score, S&P makes a generalized estimate of a company’s ESG performance based on factors such as company size, industry, and geographic location. Both ESG Scores and CSA Scores are publicly available, but only CSA Scores determine DJSI index and Sustainability Yearbook composition.

Understanding & Improving Your Score

We recommend taking the following steps to interpret and learn from your CSA results, helping you to improve your score in future years:

  1. Review Analyst Revisions: S&P provides revised versions of your submitted responses, representing the accepted content that was used for scoring. Reviewing the revised content against your submitted evidence and the additional information provided can help you identify both areas for future improvement and possible oversights by S&P that require direct inquiry.
  2. Conduct a Gap Analysis: Take stock of where you lost points in your score. Review the questions where you did not score as well as expected, as well as new questions and those that have been changed significantly year-over-year. These questions pose opportunities to improve your disclosure and programs to meet more stringent scoring criteria.
  3. Submit Direct Inquiries: After receiving your score, you can submit a form through the CSA portal with three inquiries about your score. We recommend doing this after an initial high-level gap assessment and suggest that these three questions focus on opportunities to recoup lost points, rather than general requests for more information. If S&P determines that any of these inquiries may reflect an oversight in scoring, S&P will open a reassessment form for you to request that S&P take a second look at all questions you flag for review. If S&P concurs with your request, an analyst may revise the score.
  4. Identify Key Datapoints & Keywords: One of the best ways to improve your S&P CSA score is by targeting specific datapoints and keywords for inclusion in your annual ESG reporting, as well as ensuring that all relevant policies are publicly available. If specific datapoints are not tracked yet, connect with the relevant content owner within your organization to discuss if and how that KPI might be measured moving forward.
  5. Address Deeper Gaps: For deeper gaps that cannot be closed with expanded disclosure alone, consider your organization’s strategic ESG planning. For example, if your organization is performing a double materiality assessment in the next year, look for opportunities to align outputs with requested information in the relevant S&P question. If developing a new commitment, review the relevant S&P criteria against it as one way to evaluate the strength of the policy.
  6. Get Support: Often, it is advantageous to have a third party review your assessment and identify improvement opportunities. Through supporting several organizations with disclosures such as the CSA, Anthesis has developed expertise to help you understand and improve your score.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
What are Scope 1, 2 and 3 Emissions? https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/scope-1-2-and-3-emissions/ Wed, 01 Jan 2025 21:03:00 +0000 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/?p=68937

What Are Scope 1, 2 and 3 Emissions?

An introduction to greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions reporting and why measuring Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions is essential for achieving Net Zero

three lightbulbs hanging in the sky

Quick summary
Scope 1 Direct emissions from owned or controlled sources
e.g., company vehicles, on-site fuel use
Scope 2 Indirect emissions from purchased energy
e.g., electricity, heating, or cooling
Scope 3 Value-chain emissions from activities the company doesn’t control
e.g., purchased goods, transport, business travel, product use and disposal

Understanding GHG emissions and their scopes

At the heart of every decarbonisation journey lies the need to measure, understand, and track greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions. Before an organisation can set credible targets or implement effective climate solutions, it must first know where its emissions come from.

To standardise this process, the Greenhouse Gas (GHG) Protocol defines three categories—Scope 1, 2, and 3—that together account for all direct and indirect emissions linked to a company’s activities.

Scope 1 – direct emissions

Scope 1 emissions come from sources owned or controlled by an organisation. They are often the easiest to identify and measure.

Examples include:

  • Fuel combustion in boilers, furnaces, or generators
  • Emissions from company-owned vehicles
  • Fugitive emissions, such as refrigerant leaks from cooling equipment
  • Industrial process emissions (e.g., cement or steel production)

These emissions are under the company’s direct control and are typically the first to be addressed through efficiency upgrades or renewable energy adoption.

Scope 2 – indirect emissions from purchased energy

Scope 2 covers the indirect emissions generated by the production of purchased energy—such as electricity, heating, or cooling—that the organisation consumes.

Examples include:

  • Purchased electricity for offices, factories, or data centres
  • Purchased steam or district heating
  • Chilled water used for cooling systems

Although these emissions occur at the energy supplier’s facility, they are attributed to the company that uses the energy. Transitioning to renewable energy contracts or on-site solar generation can significantly reduce Scope 2 impacts.

Scope 3 – other indirect emissions across the value chain

Scope 3 emissions encompass all other indirect emissions that occur outside an organisation’s direct control but within its value chain. These are often the largest and most complex to measure, representing upstream and downstream activities.

Upstream vs downstream emissions explained

Understanding the distinction between upstream and downstream activities is essential when assessing Scope 3 emissions:

  • Upstream emissions occur before a product reaches your business—during material extraction, manufacturing, or inbound logistics.
  • Downstream emissions occur after a product leaves your control—during customer use, distribution, and end-of-life.

A holistic view of both helps organisations target interventions at every stage of a product’s lifecycle.

Upstream examples

  • Purchased goods and services
  • Capital goods and raw material extraction
  • Transportation and distribution of inputs
  • Employee commuting and business travel
  • Waste generated in operations

Downstream examples

  • Distribution and delivery to customers
  • Use of sold products
  • End-of-life treatment, recycling, or disposal of products
  • Investments and franchised operations

Measuring Scope 3 is challenging but critical for building a complete picture of corporate climate impact and for identifying opportunities to collaborate across the value chain.

Scope 3 emissions remain mostly voluntary to report, however, in most cases the reduction of Scope 3 has the potential to have the largest impact.

Why measure all three scopes?

While many organisations have ramped up their efforts to report on their carbon and energy emissions, there will continue to be an increase in the requirements associated with managing and auditing emissions. Frameworks such as the TCFD, SECR, and CSRD increasingly expect or require full value-chain reporting.

Reporting on Scope 1 and 2 is mandatory for many, whilst reporting emissions across the whole value chain will increasingly become harder to avoid.

Key benefits include:

  • Transparent, science-based reporting that builds trust with investors and customers
  • Identification of high-impact “hotspots” across the supply chain
  • Lower energy and resource costs through efficiency improvements
  • Enhanced readiness for future regulations
  • Stronger reputation and leadership on climate action

Understanding and reporting across all three scopes also helps organisations align with Science-Based Targets and develop credible Net Zero roadmaps.

abstract digital

How Anthesis can help

Anthesis provides global expertise in measuring, analysing, and reducing Scope 1, 2, and 3 emissions.

Our team supports organisations in:

  • Conducting GHG inventories and building robust data systems
  • Identifying emission hotspots and value-chain reduction levers
  • Developing Net Zero strategies and Science-Based Targets
  • Ensuring compliance with frameworks like TCFD, SECR, and CSRD
  • Enabling transparent disclosure and stakeholder reporting

Frequently Asked Questions

They are categories defined by the GHG Protocol to classify emissions as direct (Scope 1), indirect from purchased energy (Scope 2), and all other indirect value-chain emissions (Scope 3).

Scopes 1 and 2 are required under many national frameworks. Scope 3 is often voluntary but increasingly expected under global standards like CSRD and TCFD.

Because they typically account for 70–90% of a company’s total emissions footprint and offer the largest potential for systemic reductions.

Begin with a GHG inventory covering Scope 1 and 2, identify major Scope 3 categories, and partner with experts or tools like RouteZero to improve data quality and reporting consistency.

Ready to take action?

Understanding your emissions is the first step toward achieving Net Zero. Contact Anthesis to discuss how we can help you measure, report, and reduce Scope 1, 2, and 3 emissions across your operations and value chain.


Loading…
]]>
Reducing the Environmental Impact of the Construction Sector https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/environmental-impacts-of-construction/ Fri, 20 Dec 2024 16:07:43 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=61848

How to Reduce the Environmental Impact of the Construction Sector

Understanding the Construction Industry’s Environmental Impact

20 December 2024

construction activity

The construction sector is a key driver of economic growth and job creation across many European countries. However, the environmental impact of construction also accounts for a significant share of resource consumption, greenhouse gas emissions, and waste generation.

Key Environmental Impacts of Construction

Resource Depletion

It requires a large number of materials, representing approximately 50% of all extracted material, such as stones, gravel or sand, or wood consumption

Waste Generation

It generates a large amount of waste (e.g. cement or mortar), being responsible for more than 35 % of the total waste generation in the EU. 

Land Use and Habitat Loss

The construction of new buildings and the expansion of urban areas has a negative effect on the biodiversity present in the different areas, eliminating natural habitat or modifying space through construction, noise and particle pollution. 

Greenhouse Gas Emissions

Greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions generated by the sector come from different origins: from the material consumed to the proper management of this waste. In addition to the energy consumption of buildings during their useful life.

Energy Consumption

Buildings constructed in Europe account for 40% of final energy consumption and are responsible for 36% of GHG emissions.

Policy Solutions for Sustainable Construction Practices

In recent years, the European Commission has therefore promoted initiatives to improve the sector’s performance and reduce the negative effects of construction on the environment. The European Green Pact includes a package of policy initiatives with the aim of promoting the ecological transition and achieving climate neutrality by 2050. One of the sectors on which the European Green Pact focuses is the building and construction sector. Thus, considering the goal of being climate neutral by 2050, new initiatives and directives have emerged to promote this change such as: 

  • Energy Performance of Buildings Directive,(EPBD) which aims to reduce GHG emissions and energy consumption in the sector. From 2028, all new buildings must be zero-emission. For those occupied or operated by, or owned by, the public administration, the deadline will be 2026.
  • The new Strategy for a Sustainable Built Environment, which aims to ensure coherence between relevant policy areas such as climate, energy and resource efficiency, construction and demolition waste management, accessibility, digitalisation and skills. It will promote the principles of circularity throughout the entire life cycle of buildings.

Strategies to Address Sustainability in Construction

The concern of the construction sector has increased over the years, as resources are dwindling, and the impacts of emissions are increasing. In addition, new laws and regulations are promoting a change in our production model and our way of life.

Professionals in the sector increasingly see the need to advance in the implementation of circular strategies to reduce the environmental footprint of their construction activities and of the buildings during their use.

Building Life Cycle Decarbonisation

The sector, as a relevant contributor to greenhouse gas emissions, has a duty to promote decarbonisation by developing more sustainable solutions throughout the entire life cycle of a building. This means:

  • Using materials with lower environmental impact that allow the reduction of emissions generated during the use of the building. 
  • Prioritising the use of local materials whenever possible. 
  • Implementing technologies in buildings that allow an efficient use of resources. 
  • Recovering materials used to construct buildings.

Construction Materials and Sustainable Building

It is important to plan and design, taking into account the environmental impact of construction projects and the building itself throughout its life cycle in order to reduce its environmental footprint. The materials used and decisions made during the design phase will have an impact on the use and consumption of the building. 

Key considerations include:

  • Building location and orientation. 
  • Integration with the environment and landscape of the area. 
  • Investment in good insulation. 
  • Installation of energy or wastewater recovery systems. 

Life Cycle Assessments for Construction

To gain a comprehensive understanding of a building’s environmental impact, the Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) methodology can be applied. LCA is a methodology standardised by ISO 14040 & ISO 14044, which allows for the calculation of the environmental footprint of a product, service or process by analysing the inputs and outputs throughout all stages of its life cycle. 

What does the LCA allow? 

  • To identify the environmental impacts along the value chain of our product. 
  • To identify the critical points of products and processes. 
  • To make comparisons during the design phase of a product in order to make decisions to reduce the environmental footprint of our product. 
  • To obtain rigorous information for decision making, for external and internal communication.

Environmental Product Declaration (EPD)

In addition, the LCA methodology is used as the basis for calculating impacts for Environmental Product Declarations (EPD). EPDs have become an indispensable tool in the construction sector. 

EPD provides objective information on the environmental impact of products throughout their life cycle. It is an environmental eco-label that is made in accordance with ISO 14025, and it must also be verified by an independent third party that provides rigor and credibility to the document. 

They are a useful tool for the environmental improvement of products and production processes, as well as for compliance with current environmental legislation and for decision making in a supply chain or in purchasing procedures with demanding environmental requirements. 

Key benefits of having an Environmental Product Declaration

  • Anticipate legal or large customer requirements. For example, in the French market, manufacturers of construction products are already obliged to produce EPD.
  • Use it as a marketing and promotional tool to access new market opportunities. EPD can be used to position oneself in terms of transparency, rigor and environmental responsibility.
  • Obtain a positive assessment of the materials or components used in LEED, BREEAM, GREEN building, etc. certifications. Incorporating products with Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) or environmental footprint calculations into buildings can improve scores in building certification programs, with the points awarded varying based on the study’s scope.

How can Anthesis help?

At Anthesis, we bring extensive expertise in Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) methodology and verification processes, enabling us to support companies in achieving both short- and long-term sustainability goals. Our services range from developing and verifying Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) to implementing eco-design strategies, all focused on effectively reducing the environmental impact of your products.

We work alongside our clients at every step, from conducting thorough environmental footprint analyses to identifying improvement opportunities and implementing innovative, sustainable solutions.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Biodiversity, Social, and Climate Considerations for Corporate Sustainability https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/biodiversity-social-and-climate-considerations-for-corporate-sustainability/ Thu, 12 Dec 2024 16:54:11 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=61860

Biodiversity, Social, and Climate Considerations for Corporate Sustainability

12 December 2024

roots of trees


Associate Director

Supply Chain Sustainability

This article was written by Hope Bristow, Claire Bosch Zuazo, Vanessa Celis Gil, Alexa Cotton, Viviana M. Jiménez, and Karen Hamilton.


Carbon emissions are often used as a baseline for measuring anthropogenic impact on planetary systems. This solitary focus on carbon unfortunately comes with trade-offs that can have adverse effects on natural ecosystems and local communities, undermining the very core of what sustainability seeks to address. Increasingly, companies and stakeholders are recognising the need to integrate biodiversity and social considerations into strategies, plans, and practices, alongside climate and decarbonisation goals.

The climate is just one critical component of our life-sustaining web. Equally important are an abundance of diverse species, access to clean air and water, equity, and justice. Organisations across all sectors are now seeking best practices to baseline, measure, and minimise negative impacts across climate, biodiversity, and social aspects of their operations.

In this article and our conceptual framework (Figure 1) below, we describe the importance of an approach that integrates biodiversity, climate, and social considerations into corporate sustainability strategies.

Biodiversity,social and Climate framework
Figure 1. Our Biodiversity, Social, and Climate Framework.

Decarbonisation

The Earth’s temperature has increased by about 1.1°C since 1850 and the rate of warming has accelerated since the 1980s. In fact, the warmest year on record was 2023 at 1.35°C above pre-industrial levels. Unfortunately, 2024 appears to become a new record-breaker.

Under the Paris Agreement, 192 countries adopted a bold goal to minimise catastrophic impacts of climate change   by reduce greenhouse-gas (GHG) emissions enough to limit the rise of global temperatures in the 21st century to “well below 2°C above preindustrial levels” while working to limit global warming to 1.5 degrees Celsius. Similarly, regulatory bodies worldwide increasingly aim to ensure companies are resilient to climate change, aiding long-term investment decisions and strategic planning.

For these reasons and more, decarbonisation has become a key priority in mitigating climate change and reducing greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions from the atmosphere.

Nature & Biodiversity

Ecosystem services (natural capital) play a crucial role in the global economy and the operations of companies. Healthy ecosystems provide essential services, such as crop pollination, water regulation, and protection against natural disasters, all of which are essential provisioning services for many industries. In turn, biodiversity contributes directly to food security and the supply of natural resources, resulting in a reduction of risks and costs for companies that depend on these resources.

Biodiversity is also a vital indicator of the state of life on our planet. The main factors that contribute to biodiversity loss include pollution, habitat destruction, climate change, the presence of invasive species, and the overexploitation of natural resources.

According to the 2024 Living Planet report, the size of monitored wildlife populations (mammals, birds, reptiles, amphibians, and fish) has declined by 73% since 1970. The main driver of biodiversity loss remains humans’ use of land, though climate change is increasingly contributing to the decline of life on the planet.

Beyond sustaining life, biodiversity is also essential for climate change mitigation. Land and ocean ecosystems – and the biodiversity they contain – are natural carbon sinks, providing nature-based solutions to climate change.

For companies, biodiversity loss and the associated drivers of ecosystem degradation, such as pollution, habitat destruction, climate change, the introduction of invasive species, and the overexploitation of natural resources can affect the stability and sustainability of business operations in the long term. The reduced availability of key resources ultimately leads to increases in operating costs.

Social Impact

The International Labour Organisation (ILO) emphasises the importance of decent work and social protection as integral to a just transition. Similarly, the United Nations stresses the need to respect human rights and involve local communities in decision-making processes to avoid displacement and loss of livelihoods, and the OECD outlines responsible business expectations.

Nearly 50 governments have formally committed to developing just transition policies, and more than 19 governments have established national transition task forces or commissions.

Just Transition: “a set of principles, processes and practices that aim to ensure that no people, workers, places, sectors, countries or regions are left behind in the transition from a high-carbon to a low-carbon economy.”

There is also a growing recognition from the private sector of the importance of aligning with a just transition.

When greening the economy towards a net-zero context, we will need to transition from an extractive economy, where there is unsustainable extraction of planetary resources, to a regenerative economy, where principles of cooperation, ecological, and social wellbeing are prioritised.

This is the premise of a just transition: to maximise the social and economic opportunities of climate action, while carefully managing challenges and minimizing harmful impacts. These include respect for fundamental labor principles and rights, creating decent work, effective social dialogue, and leaving no one behind.

Adhering to just transition principles and principles of climate justice provides a clear path forward for business leaders and coalition builders to center equity and justice as part of their climate actions. Companies that adopt just transition frameworks are better positioned to navigate social risks with place-based stakeholders such as workers and communities, reduce reputational damage, and can better anticipate the physical, transitional, and adaptation measures necessary for their own operations and their supply chains, thereby reducing the number of shocks and stresses within their manageable control.

Regulations & Frameworks

Current regulations and frameworks are increasingly concerned with an integrated approach to sustainability, requiring organisations to understand the impacts their operations and value chains have on the climate, on nature and biodiversity, and on society.

At the multi-state level, regulatory processes have been led by key developments in the European Union, and there is a growing trend globally towards assessing and reporting on risks, opportunities, and impacts beyond climate and carbon, with more regulations, frameworks, coalitions, and goals that seek to integrate nature, social, and climate considerations (Figure 2).

Corporate Regulatory Landscape and ESG Frameworks
Figure 2. Corporate Regulatory Landscape and ESG Frameworks.

Biodiversity, Social, and Climate (BSC): Roadmap and Action Plan

The growing number of countries, sub-national entities, and organisations that have made climate net-zero pledges demonstrates the power and unifying force of these frameworks and regulations. As these stakeholders continue to recognise that altering biodiversity puts human livelihood and organisational operations at risk, we can expect more guidance and regulations to come.

Organisational sustainability strategies already integrate important social and governance issues across the entire lifecycle of their products and services, which are foundational to a beyond-net-zero world. For example, human rights, compliance, community impact, and employee diversity are critical components of many sustainability strategies. Increasingly, however, organisations have begun to assess how to integrate biodiversity, nature, the needs and views of the local communities in which they operate, and equity aspects into their operational strategies and processes. In fact, the need for an ‘equitable net-zero transition that leads to socio-ecological balance and broad economic opportunities for all’ (The meaning of net zero and how to get it right) is now presented as key to climate transition planning.

Anthesis’ BSC Roadmap (Figure 3) focuses on:

Anthesis BSC Roadmap
Figure 3. Our BSC Roadmap methodology.

1. Assess Risks and Opportunities

The first step in creating a mid- to long-term roadmap and a short-term action plan with integrated climate, nature, and social aspects, is to assess risks, gaps, and opportunities. This allows organisations to understand which issues are critical to their operations and stakeholders, the potential costs of failure to address them, and opportunities for increased value.  

The Taskforce on Nature-Related Financial Disclosures (TNFD) has developed an approach for organizations to integrate nature considerations into decision making by identifying an organization’s nature impacts, dependencies, and risks and opportunities. This approach, LEAP, involves locating your interface with nature, evaluating your impacts and dependencies on nature, assessing your nature-related risks and opportunities, and preparing to respond and report.  

The TNFD encourages companies to disclose their impacts and dependences on nature, as well as the measures they are taking to address these issues. By providing investors with reliable data on how companies are assessing and managing nature risks and opportunities, the TNFD enables capital flow towards companies that prioritise positive environmental outcomes.

Similarly, the Taskforce on Inequality and Social-related Financial Disclosures (TISFD) aims to approach social and inequality-related issues in an integrated and coherent manner that reflects the breadth of issues concerned with and the correlations between companies’ responsibility to respect human rights, efforts to reduce inequalities and enhance people’s well-being, and investments in human and social capital. The goal of the TISFD is to increase companies’ and financial institutions’ understanding of their impacts and dependencies on people, and strengthen their identification, measurement, management, and disclosure of inequality and social-related impacts and the associated financial risks and opportunities.

By using these key frameworks, we can identify priority risks and opportunities for your company to begin to identify key focus areas for the roadmap.

2. Prioritize Initiatives

Once risks and opportunities have been identified, the next step is to identify and frame a set of high-level initiatives and goals that can deliver the most business value, minimise risks, improve sustainability performance, and improve positive (or minimise negative) impacts.

At this point in the process, we integrate the company’s GHG emissions and key carbon hotspots into the roadmap development to determine key decarbonisation opportunities informed by natural and social impacts.

3. Design BSC Roadmap

Building off the analysis, we support the development of a mid- to long-term tangible roadmap and a short-term action plan to help implement and reach sustainability targets and priorities.

Throughout the process, and to activate change management within your organization to implement the BSC Roadmap, we engage key stakeholders to gather insights on priority areas, strategic interests, feasibility considerations, ownership of action steps, and governance.

First Mover Advantage

Throughout your sustainability journey, planning for impact beyond decarbonisation can place your organisation in a leadership role and minimise future risk related to climate, nature, and social impact. Since these risks are interconnected, a holistic approach reduces the likelihood of a company’s progress in one area at the expense of increased impact to another. This will also minimise material financial, regulatory, physical, and systemic risks and costs, and increase any value from opportunities that arise.

Proactively preparing for a world that lives within planetary boundaries gives your organisation a voice in the development of industry standards and best practices. Proactive companies which can operate through an integrated BSC lens have the strongest probability of creating value for all stakeholders (the planet, local communities, customers, and shareholders). Reactive companies, on the other hand, face the risk of increased costs and risks, as well as decreased brand reputation from being late adopters. 

How Anthesis Can Help

Climate, biodiversity and nature, and social impacts, risks, and opportunities are inherently interlinked through and beyond our changing climate. Achieving “net-zero” requires thinking of and investing in nature-based solutions, and understanding your company’s impact on communities and people is an effective way to bring stakeholders along. The most practical and efficient way to build a BSC Roadmap is through an integrated development process rather than retroactively fitting separate climate, nature, and social approaches together.

Increasingly, regulations ask companies to speak to and demonstrate real action through how their governance, strategy, risk management, and tracking of metrics & targets effectively mitigates risk and takes advantage of opportunities in the realm of sustainability. Considering all components at the outset of creating a corporate strategy will help companies prepare to respond and avoid the risk of implementation gaps.

Anthesis’ global expertise and range of sustainability services can support your company in the creation of a BSC Roadmap to transform the impact of your sustainability strategy. Change management and business transformation across relevant business functions will be critical, and successfully implementing this transformation will put your company on a pathway to compete and lead in a sustainable world.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
The UK Sustainability Agenda: Opportunities and Risks for Businesses https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/uk-sustainability-opportunities-and-risks-for-businesses/ Thu, 12 Dec 2024 11:12:21 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=61853

The UK Sustainability Agenda

Opportunities and Risks for Businesses

12 December 2024

an office building

Zara De Belder

Zara de Belder

UK Service Line Lead

ESG Transactions & Sustainable Finance

Lana Baker-Cowling

Lana Baker-Cowling

Consultant

ESG Advisory & Sustainable Finance

Sarah Jones

Sarah Jones

Principal Consultant

Climate Risk

Jessica Clavette

Jessica Clavette

ESG Manager, Equistone

In collaboration with Equistone, a mid-market private equity firm with a presence in the UK and Europe, Anthesis explores the evolving UK sustainability agenda, highlighting key opportunities and risks for businesses emerging with a Labour government. Insights shared in this article were adapted from a webinar delivered for Equistone’s UK-based portfolio companies in November 2024.

Setting the Scene

The UK’s sustainability journey has gained significant momentum in recent years, supported by reporting requirements issued by both Government and regulatory bodies, such as the Financial Conduct Authority. These efforts have encouraged UK businesses to incorporate sustainability into their strategies, operations and corporate identity, helping to foster sustainable growth across sectors.

The newly elected Labour Government’s manifesto addressed a wide range of priorities, with climate and sustainability emerging as notable features. The party emphasised clean energy initiatives, green finance and nature conservation, all signalling Labour’s intent to position the UK as a clean energy superpower and a global hub of green finance.

Key Policies and People

For Labour, within the broad spectrum of climate and sustainability, energy is a clear area of near-term focus. Key policies and promises include the development and rollout of Great British Energy, a commitment to Clean Power by 2030, increases in green investment and jobs and, most recently announced at COP29 in early-November, accelerating the country’s net zero ambitions by setting a target of an 81% reduction in emissions by 2035. Collectively, these policies aim to boost renewable energy production, create green jobs, and enhance the UK’s position within the global sustainability and clean energy markets.

Underpinning this ambitious agenda are several key government ministers:

  • Ed Miliband, Secretary of State for Energy Security and Net Zero – Milliband’s track record on climate dates back to 2008, when he was the Secretary of State for Energy and Climate Change. In this role, he oversaw the introduction of the world-leading Climate Change Act 2008, making the UK the first country in the world to put climate targets into law.
  • Sarah Jones, Minister of State at both the Department for Energy Security and Net Zero, and the Department for Business and Trade.

These ministers are supported by other key individuals, including Chris Stark, Head of Mission Control for Clean Power and former Chief Executive of the UK’s Climate Change Committee (CCC); his successor Emma Pinchbeck, the new Chief Executive of the CCC; Jürgen Maier, former Chief Executive of Siemens UK and now the Great British Energy Chairman; and Rachel Kyte, the UK’s Special Representative for Climate. Alongside those focused on climate and energy is Ruth Davis, who has been appointed the UK’s first Special Representative for Nature: evidence that the UK recognises the interconnected relationship between nature and climate.

UK Government Plans for 2025 and Beyond

Looking ahead to 2025, the government has a clear set of priorities with goals to address emissions, support climate finance, and drive domestic and international sustainability efforts.

In the near term, the Nationally Determined Contribution (NDC) of an 81% reduction by 2035 contributes to the ambition of a zero-carbon electricity system by 2030, implemented with support from a new Carbon Budget Delivery Plan. On a finance front, the government plans to expand funding to support nature-based solutions via the Nature for Climate Fund and provide £11.6 billion in climate finance to developing countries to address climate adaptation and mitigation needs from April 2026.

Although specific details of pledges and policies are still emerging, the government is likely to face pushback from sectors affected by planned changes, such as the introduction of the UK’s Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM) in 2027, and uncertainty around the economic impacts of a rapid green transition. Fortunately, COP29 fell at a beneficial time to aid global cooperation and strengthen certain international partnerships, but the UK will need to be sensitive to macroeconomic volatility and the balance of stances between the EU and the US given the recent outcome of the presidential election.

Implications for Businesses

With an updated policy agenda emphasising decarbonisation, renewable energy investment, and sustainable finance, the UK is entering a period of significant transformation, offering businesses opportunities to drive growth, enhance competitiveness, and future-proof operations. By proactively addressing sustainability, companies can position themselves to benefit from emerging markets, cost efficiencies, and strengthening their appeal to investors, consumers, and other key stakeholders.

Regulatory developments will play a key role in shaping this landscape. The introduction of measures such as the UK’s CBAM and the anticipated Industrial Strategy in March 2025 are expected to align the UK with international markets, incentivising emissions reductions across supply chains and attracting investment in green technologies.

The transition to net zero will create distinct challenges and opportunities across sectors. Increased scrutiny on supply chains and operations will require businesses to better understand their carbon footprints and address hotspots to comply with new ethical and environmental standards. Plans for greener industry signal substantial changes for high-emitting sectors, particularly manufacturing and energy. These sectors face heightened risks, including taxes and the need for capital-intensive investments in emissions-reducing technologies.

While the shift to clean energy and more sustainable operational practices requires upfront investment, it also presents avenues for long-term value creation. Businesses that invest in decarbonisation, emissions-reducing technologies, and efficiency improvements can achieve cost savings, better mitigate risks, and align with emerging consumer preferences. Technical solutions to improve efficiency, measure impact, and support compliance could see an uptick in demand. There’s also an opportunity to leverage government-backed programmes, such as the National Wealth Fund and nature-focused funding streams, to offset costs and foster innovation.

UK parliament

With the government seeking to establish the UK as a hub for green finance, the sector has significant opportunities to drive economic growth and create jobs through sustainable investment products and climate-focused lending. For private equity firms and their portfolio companies, aligning with net zero priorities can deliver operational benefits and long-term growth potential. Efficiency gains, supply chain resilience, and enhanced ESG credentials contribute directly to value creation, driving competitive advantage in an evolving marketplace.

Changing consumer expectations, particularly regarding supply chain transparency and circular economy practices, also offer opportunities for businesses to meet market and regulatory pressures whilst enhancing brand reputation. Though cost-of-living pressures may moderate the pace of change in some areas, sustainability remains a differentiator for companies looking to secure loyalty and growth.

By aligning early with climate priorities, fostering innovation, and investing in decarbonisation, companies can unlock growth opportunities, mitigate risks, secure long-term resilience, and play a leading role in building a more sustainable economy.

The Private Equity View: Insights from Equistone’s UK ESG Manager Jessica Clavette

As of July 2024, only 24–32% of the emissions reductions needed to reach the UK’s climate targets were covered by credible policy (Climate Action Tracker and CCC, 2024). Clear, consistent, and proactive government communication about upcoming policy is vital for private equity to help businesses to adapt effectively. Industry collaboration in policy development is key to achieving balanced priorities and clearer direction, building momentum for meaningful change.

For Equistone, engaging portfolio companies with input from external experts is instrumental in fostering the ongoing learning and knowledge-sharing required in this rapidly evolving area. We create regular, targeted opportunities for portfolio engagement that address businesses’ ESG performance at all levels, from fundamental compliance to strategic initiatives that unlock value. This approach empowers our companies to progress from reactive to more proactive stances.

Insights from Anthesis have been pivotal in helping our businesses navigate the implications of shifting political and economic conditions on climate and sustainability policy. This includes a better understanding of developments in decarbonisation and a sustained focus on climate priorities. Attendees of the webinar valued discussions on topics such as aligning with EU policy (given Labour’s emphasis on strengthening ties), the role that the UK could play as the US likely pivots its attention elsewhere in coming years, and the varied impacts across sectors.

Given our historic relationship with Anthesis, portfolio companies’ familiarity with their work, and their respected expertise in the space, they were the right advisors to engage. With the lead up to COP, recent budget release, and the US election, it felt timely to explore the outlook for 2025 and how businesses can prepare for the opportunities and challenges ahead. Anthesis’s broad industry experience, work with other private equity firms, and research-backed knowledge meant they could translate political developments within the sustainability space into tangible “what does this mean for me” guidance for our companies.

Jessica Clavette, ESG Manager at Equistone

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Responding to ESRS G1 https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/responding-to-esrs-g1/ Wed, 11 Dec 2024 12:10:00 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=60532

Responding to ESRS G1

Ethical Business Conduct at a glance

11 December 2024

tall office buildings

Two cross-cutting ESRSs and ten topic-specific ESRSs (5 environmental, 4 social and 1 on governance) will require disclosure on governance, strategy, and impact, risk and opportunity management.

Number Subject
ESRS 1 General Requirements
ESRS 2 General Disclosures
ESRS E1 Climate
ESRS E2 Pollution
ESRS E3 Water and Marine Resources
ESRS E4 Biodiversity and Ecosystems
ESRS E5 Resource Use and Circular Economy
ESRS S1 Own Workforce
ESRS S2 Workers in the Value Chain
ESRS S3 Affected Communities
ESRS S4 Consumers and End Users
ESRS G1 Business Conduct

What is ESRS G1?

ESRS G1 Business Conduct at a Glance

ESRS G1 is one of the ten topical European sustainability reporting standards (ESRS) that form part of the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD). It focuses on the strategy, processes, procedures and performance of business conduct by large companies operating in the European Union.

What Does the ESRS G1 Standard Cover?

G1 requires a company to make six business conduct disclosures, each with unique detailed assessment criteria:

  1. Corporate culture and policies on business conduct
  2. Management of its relationships with its suppliers and its impacts on its supply chain
  3. Corruption and bribery prevention and detection system including whistleblowing protection
  4. Information on confirmed incidents of corruption or bribery
  5. Political influence activities
  6. Transparency on its payment practices especially with respect to SMEs

ESRS G1 and the ESG Governance Reporting Landscape

ESRS G1 provides application guidance to ESRS 2 General Disclosures. It outlines governance and business conduct disclosure requirements, including management’s role in the governance processes, controls and procedures used to monitor, manage and oversee impacts, risks and opportunities. These governance requirements overlap with several other reporting requirements, such as:

  • The SEC Rule on Climate-Related Disclosures (US): This rule requires listed companies to disclose how their board of directors oversee climate-related risks and risk management processes.
  • The IFRS S1 and S2 standards: Launched by the ISSB in 2023 and endorsed by the International Organization of Securities Commissions (IOSCO), these standards provide a global framework for capital markets to develop the use of sustainability-related financial information.
  • The EU Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence Directive (CSDDD): Expected to be implemented by EU member states in 2026, this directive requires companies to conduct rigorous risk-based due diligence in their operations and ‘chains of activities’ and to report on adverse impacts on human rights and the environment.

What Could ESRS G1 Mean for Your Business?

ESRS G1, and related disclosures on the quality of governance and business conduct (ethics), are significant for investors and play a crucial role in indicating a company’s overall ESG performance.

For your business, this could mean scrutiny of your governance practices, from board diversity and executive pay to anti-corruption measures and stakeholder engagement.  Adopting ESRS G1 should go beyond mere compliance. It’s an opportunity to show your commitment to accountability and strong leadership. By proactively aligning with these requirements, your business can build trust with investors, employees, and customers while standing out in a marketplace increasingly focused on transparency and sustainability

office building in circular shape

How Does ESRS G1 Drive Action?

ESRS G1 encourages businesses to elevate their governance practices and critically evaluate how decisions are made. Effective governance involves cultivating the capacity for sound decision-making that supports sustainable performance. According to Dr Ali Intezari, a research specialist in decision-making at The University of Queensland Business School, this is the “extent to which the organisation is willing to make and is capable of forming sound judgments that lead to sustainable performance”. By aligning with the ESRS G1, businesses can build stronger operations and position themselves for long-term success.

For example, this might require a review of your board’s diversity and skill set to ensure balanced decision-making or introducing robust anti-corruption policies and training programs. It could also involve setting clear executive pay policies linked to sustainability goals or enhancing how you engage with stakeholders, such as through regular consultations with employees or community groups. These practical changes not only help you meet reporting requirements, they build business resilience and foster trust among stakeholders.

Anthesis Business Conduct and Governance Services

Anthesis partners with clients on the regulation and the practice of business conduct and the governance of ESG. We support business leaders in: 

  • Navigating the compliance and practice challenges of embedding policy setting and business conduct-related impacts, risks, controls and opportunities.
  • Advising on policies and integrations linked to business conduct, ESG and enterprise risk and controls to improve oversight and assurance of ESG performance and reporting. The solution enables efficient, assurance-ready disclosures through proven systems that minimise risk, providing governance and auditability.
  • Turning ESRS G1 requirements into actionable governance improvements, by embedding governance into your systems and operations, to become a natural part of how your business runs.
  • Supporting best practice business conduct through top team ESG training and facilitating ethical leadership development and culture change.

Examples of Anthesis Governance Advisory Support

  • Major Swedish financial institution: We were instructed to review the institution’s anti-bribery and corruption, anti-money laundering and counter-terrorism financing management system. We assessed their policies and processes, including questionnaires, use of third-party indices, risk rating tools, desktop research and third-party data providers. Based on our findings, we issued 20 recommendations to improve their management system and develop technical capacity.
  • International baked goods company: Collaborating with the group board to enhance understanding of governance implications under national and transnational regulatory frameworks while identifying opportunities for value creation through ESG initiatives. We reported on a board survey covering ESG governance, finance, engagement and innovation and facilitated a board workshop to demystify the ESG compliance landscape and opportunities to move beyond ESG compliance to enhance sustainable performance in the sector.
  • Global law firms: We collaborate with global law firms to support investors and corporates in pre-transaction due diligence. Using open-source research and discreet intelligence, we help identify and mitigate financial crime, reputational, and ESG risks tied to counterparties and investment targets. Our work spans workplace culture assessments, fraud investigations, and more, aiding clients in navigating risks across global jurisdictions.
  • Global technology company: We supported the creation of ESG governance to oversee the development of corporate ESG policies, structures and processes. This included integrations with enterprise risk and controls to strengthen internal oversight and assurance of the implementation and reporting activities.
  • French manufacturing company:  The board of directors asked us for training on the governance-related implications of the CSRD and ESRS G1 and to discuss with them the role and responsibilities of the board in implementing the regulations for their business.

How to Get Started with ESRS G1

As regulatory landscapes evolve, 2025 will inevitably bring further updates to ESRS standards to governance frameworks and expectations, including through the ESRS and ISSB. Anthesis remains at the forefront, providing cutting-edge insights and tailored solutions, ensuring compliance and value-adding advisory support.

By partnering with Anthesis, you can navigate the complexities of ESRS standards, align with best practices, and showcase your long-term commitment to ethical governance. Effective alignment with ESRS G1 will elevate your business governance, foster trust and ensure compliance while driving sustainable growth.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Mandatory Human Rights Due Diligence https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/mandatory-human-rights-due-diligence/ Fri, 06 Dec 2024 10:18:00 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=61990

Mandatory Human Rights Due Diligence

Three things to know about the future of responsible business in the EU

people working in a factory

solange rennie

Solange Rennie

Consultant I

Human rights due diligence (HRDD) is an ongoing process of identifying, mitigating and reporting on a business’ actual and potential human rights and environmental impacts. It focuses on identifying risks to rightsholders, rather than material risks to the business itself. HRDD is a foundational element of responsible business practices, essential for safeguarding workers and communities, strengthening supply chains, and managing reputational and compliance risks. It encompasses risk identification and assessment, impact mitigation, effectiveness monitoring and measurement, communication of efforts, and provision of remedy when adverse impacts occur. The HRDD process is outlined in leading international frameworks such as the UN Guiding Principles on Business and Human Rights (UNGPs) and OECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises (OECD Guidelines).

The rise of mandatory human rights due diligence (mHRDD) is reshaping the landscape of responsible business practices, driven by emerging regulations such as the Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence Directive (CSDDD) adopted in 2024 and scheduled to begin taking effect in 2027. Approximately 6,900 European and non-European companies are in scope for the Directive, which represents a significant shift from voluntary to mandatory HRDD. mHRDD codifies the HRDD process and imposes legal obligations for companies to conduct HRDD in line with the UNGPs and OECD Guidelines with clear requirements and penalties for non-compliance.

CSDDD and the broader evolving regulatory environment mark a legislative shift towards mandated responsible business practices within the EU. Most companies who are in scope for CSDDD will need to adjust their internal processes to comply, as only 6% of companies currently have fully implemented HRDD – while 80% have not taken any steps to implement. This new environment is pushing companies to gain greater awareness of the responsible business landscape, three key points of which are explored below:

1. The Influence of the UNGPs in Shaping mHRDD

Adopted in 2011, the UNGPs are a practical framework intended to translate human rights concepts into sustainable, actionable business practices. They serve as the “backbone” of responsible business conduct on human rights and guide most government efforts to legislate on the topic. Several HRDD regulations across the world draw on the UNGPs, and from one another – meaning individual national legislations often tend to converge on key requirements and processes.

For example, The French Law on the Corporate Duty of Vigilance (2017) set a precedent by requiring businesses to have human rights and environmental vigilance plans, laying the foundation for similar laws in Germany (2023), the Netherlands (2022), and Norway (2022). Laws in the EU have also inspired regulations in other parts of the world, such as Canada’s Fighting Against Forced Labour and Child Labour in Supply Chains Act (2024).

These regulations all draw key insights from the UNGPs, such as their risk assessment criteria, emphasis on stakeholder engagement, or requirements around grievance mechanisms. None of these regulations contradict the UNGPs – meaning companies aligned with the framework will be future-proofed in responding to HRDD-related regulations, enabling them to anticipate and adapt to these trends no matter where they emerge.

2. Intersection of Human Rights and the Environment

The link between human rights and the environment is increasingly recognised by regulators, notably in the follow-up to the United Nations’ recognition of the right to a clean, healthy, and sustainable environment as a human right in 2022. This holistic approach recognises that environmental harms often also lead to adverse human rights impacts, and vice-versa. It is reflected in the regulatory space through Human Rights and Environmental Due Diligence (HREDD)-related regulations, as well as the emergence of environment-focused regulations compatible with an HRDD approach such as the EU Deforestation Regulation.

While similar to HRDD, HREDD explicitly includes environmental impacts as part of due diligence obligations. Emerging legislation such as CSDDD recognises the need to tackle and integrate human rights and environmental abuses linked to corporate supply chains. 

3. Transparency In Supply Chains

Human rights risks extend beyond the first tier of a company’s supply chain. In line with the UNGP approach, which argues companies are “directly linked” to all in their value chains, HRDD and HREDD regulations are increasingly expanding the requirement scope to include Tier 1 suppliers and beyond. The German Supply Chain Due Diligence Act and CSDDD require greater visibility and reporting across multiple tiers of the supply chain. Targeted approaches are needed to address the visibility gap between multinationals and their Tier 2+ suppliers, notably for those sourcing natural resources and commodities known for complex and fragmented supply chains.

How Anthesis Can Help

Anthesis can help businesses conduct HRDD and HREDD by identifying, assessing, mitigating, communicating, and remediating impacts in their operations and supply chains. Our approach is aligned with the UNGPs, and includes:  

  • Benchmarking, gap analyses & policy development in line with regulatory obligations and best practices;
  • Saliency assessments across the value chain to map risks and prioritise actions;
  • Human rights risk assessments for raw materials and supply chains identified as high-risk during a saliency assessment;
  • Independent investigations into alleged abuses and development of remediation plans;
  • Country- or commodity-level human rights impact assessments to identify and address salient human rights issues, including site visits to conduct visual observations and meaningful rightsholder engagement;
  • Prevention and mitigation action plans supplemented by KPIs and assignments;
  • Review and upscaling of grievance mechanisms (also referred to as complaints procedures, ethics reporting, etc.);
  • Capacity building, including training and development on ethical trade, human rights, gender equality, modern slavery and establishing effective grievance mechanisms and worker representation models for global supply chains.

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>
Fortune 500 Evolving Net Zero Commitments: Trends, Challenges, and the Growing Role of Carbon Credits  https://www.anthesisgroup.com/insights/fortune-500-evolving-net-zero-commitments-trends-challenges-and-the-growing-role-of-carbon-credits/ Mon, 02 Dec 2024 15:58:52 +0000 https://anthesisglobal.wpenginepowered.com/?p=61706

Fortune 500 Evolving Net Zero Commitments: Trends, Challenges, and the Growing Role of Carbon Credits

From Goals to Action: The Growing Role of Carbon Credits in Net Zero Plans

green buildings

The number of Fortune 500 companies with net zero commitments has increased by 6%, signaling renewed momentum after minimal growth in previous years. From 2022 to 2023, the growth rate stagnated at only 2%. This resurgence reflects the increased urgency among companies to address their climate impact and meet evolving regulatory expectations¹. 

Currently, about half of Fortune 500 companies have established net zero goals, which is a remarkable rise compared to 2020, when only 8% had made such commitments¹. This shift highlights the growing recognition of the importance of tackling climate change through comprehensive strategies that include both internal emission reductions and external offsetting measures. 

Adopting Science-Based Targets for Net Zero 

The Science-Based Target initiative (SBTi) has become a widely respected framework guiding companies on credible net zero claims. Despite its popularity, only 17% of Fortune 500 companies currently use the SBTi Net Zero Standard, slightly down from 18% last year². The SBTi’s stringent requirements pose challenges for some businesses, making compliance more difficult. 

Last year, 15% of companies committed to aligning with SBTi’s net zero targets, but only 4% have since gained approval for their targets, while 3% were removed from the list. The remaining companies are still working toward validation, which must be completed within 24 months of making a commitment. 

Regional Differences in Near-Term Targets 

Approximately 35% of Fortune 500 companies have near-term science-based targets (SBTs), a figure that has remained stable year over year. However, regional variations exist. In Europe, the percentage of companies with near-term targets dropped from 64% to 60%, while in North America, it increased from 38% to 43%³. Europe and Asia have seen new SBT commitments in 2024, with eleven companies from Europe and from Asia setting these goals³. 

The Role of Carbon Credits in Climate Action Plans 

Carbon credits are playing an increasingly prominent role in corporate climate strategies, with only 2% of companies explicitly ruling out their use. Companies that utilise carbon credits are twice as likely to have near-term SBTs and three times more likely to establish net zero targets that cover their entire value chain. 

Contrary to the criticism that carbon credits may delay internal emission reductions, research indicates that companies purchasing credits are accelerating their emission reduction efforts. Those aiming for carbon neutrality by 2030 are nearly twice as likely to have near-term SBTs compared to companies without such targets⁴. 

Carbon Neutrality Progress and Regional Insights 

As of the latest data, 8% of Fortune 500 companies have achieved carbon neutrality, while 9% plan to do so by 2030, and 17% by 2050. Altogether, 34% of companies mention carbon compensation actions such as “carbon neutral” or “100% offset” in their sustainability plans⁵. 

North American companies setting targets for 2050 rose from 30% to 32%, while European companies saw a decline in targets from 59% to 51%. This shift in Europe could be driven by regulatory scrutiny, particularly from the EU’s Green Claims Directive, which may ban carbon-neutral claims on consumer-facing products by 2026⁵. 

Challenges in Reducing Scope 3 Emissions 

Scope 3 emissions, which account for approximately 90% of most companies’ total emissions, remain the most difficult to reduce. These emissions span a company’s value chain and are often outside its direct control. To address this challenge, initiatives like the Voluntary Carbon Markets Integrity Initiative’s (VCMI) Scope 3 Flexibility Claim have emerged⁵. 

The debate around Scope 3 also extends to Beyond Value Chain Mitigation (BVCM), which encourages companies to purchase carbon credits for emissions that are beyond their direct influence. 

Anthesis is Guiding the Future of Corporate Climate Action 

Looking ahead, companies are likely to continue balancing internal emission reduction efforts with the purchase of carbon credits to meet both short- and long-term net zero targets. By purchasing high-quality carbon credits and transparently addressing their emissions, businesses can build trust with stakeholders and ensure sustained progress toward climate goals. 

However, with increased regulatory scrutiny, especially in Europe, companies must refine their climate communication and strategies to align with credible frameworks and avoid accusations of greenwashing. As the landscape of corporate climate action evolves, organisations will need to stay adaptable and ensure their approaches meet the rising standards of accountability and transparency. 

Anthesis offers a range of carbon services that integrate seamlessly into corporate climate strategies, helping businesses adopt net zero targets and utilising carbon credits to accelerate emission reductions. As more companies embrace carbon credits, Anthesis ensures that the credits sourced are of high quality and tied to impactful carbon reduction projects. Anthesis also supports the development and certification of carbon projects that meet international standards, ensuring that companies go beyond simple credit purchases by contributing to projects like reforestation and direct air capture. 

In addition to addressing internal emission reductions, Anthesis provides expert guidance on managing Scope 3 emissions, which are often the largest and most challenging aspect of corporate climate strategies. By helping companies measure, reduce, and report on these indirect emissions, Anthesis ensures alignment with rigorous standards such as the Science-Based Targets initiative (SBTi). Furthermore, Anthesis supports Beyond Value Chain Mitigation (BVCM), encouraging businesses to address emissions beyond their immediate control through strategic carbon credit purchases. 

With increasing regulatory scrutiny, especially in the EU, Anthesis helps companies ensure that their carbon credit use and sustainability claims are both credible and compliant with emerging regulations. By integrating comprehensive reporting and ensuring that climate action aligns with evolving frameworks, Anthesis minimises the risks of greenwashing, enhancing stakeholder trust and long-term sustainability. 

Anthesis also adheres to the Oxford Principles for Net Zero Aligned Carbon Offsetting, which provides a robust framework for companies using offsets. These principles emphasise the need for carbon credits to be used as a complement to deep internal reductions. They focus on the importance of prioritising emissions reductions, using high-quality carbon offsets that genuinely contribute to removing or reducing carbon from the atmosphere, and transparently reporting progress. Anthesis integrates these principles into its services, ensuring that companies not only achieve net zero goals but also contribute meaningfully to long-term climate solutions. 

For more details on how Anthesis can support your carbon reduction goals, visit Anthesis Carbon Credits and Projects or email contact@anthesisgroup.com

Footnotes 

  1. Climate Impact Partners, Research on Fortune 500 Companies’ Net Zero Trends, 2023. 
  2. Science-Based Targets Initiative (SBTi), Net Zero Standard Reports and Compliance Challenges, 2024. 
  3. Climate Action Insights, Regional Targets Analysis: North America vs. Europe, 2023. 
  4. CarbonNeutral, The Role of Carbon Credits in Accelerating Corporate Emission Reductions, 2023. 
  5. EU Green Claims Directive Analysis and Scope 3 Emission Reduction Frameworks, Beyond Value Chain Mitigation, 2024. 

We are the world’s leading purpose driven, digitally enabled, science-based activator. And always welcome inquiries and partnerships to drive positive change together.

]]>